User Guide
English
Manual Version v3.6
2
Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................ 6
Support ................................................................. 6
About This User Guide ........................................ 6
Important Notes ................................................... 7
MPC2 vs. MPC3.............................................. 7
Updates in v3.6 ............................................... 7
Setup ..................................................................... 9
Tutorial ...................................................................... 10
Starting Up ......................................................... 10
Recording Tracks with Main Mode .................. 11
Main Mode Overview .................................... 11
Recording a Drum Sequence ........................ 12
Creating and Recording a Keygroup Track ... 13
Adding and Recording with a Plugin Track .... 14
Working with Audio Tracks .............................. 15
Recording an External Instrument ................ 15
Loading Sounds with the Browser ................ 16
Working with the Linear Arranger .................... 17
Saving Your Work .............................................. 19
Editing Note Events ........................................... 20
Making Basic Sound Edits ................................ 22
Other Features Explained ................................. 24
Q-Links .......................................................... 24
Step Sequencer ............................................ 25
Drum Loops & Chop Mode ........................... 26
Pad Muting & Track Muting .......................... 28
Sampling (Recording) .................................... 30
Sample Editing .............................................. 32
Recording Automation with the XY Pad ....... 34
Creating a Song ............................................ 35
Operation .................................................................. 37
General Features ............................................... 37
Control Types ............................................... 37
Knobs ................................................................ 37
Parameter Values ............................................... 38
Drop-Down Menus / Lists ................................... 38
Selectors ............................................................ 39
Buttons .............................................................. 39
Checkboxes ....................................................... 39
Tabs................................................................... 39
Sliders ................................................................ 40
Envelopes .......................................................... 40
Tracks ........................................................... 41
About Tracks ...................................................... 41
Audio Tracks ...................................................... 43
Drum Tracks ...................................................... 44
Keygroup Tracks ................................................ 46
Plugin Tracks ..................................................... 48
MIDI Tracks ........................................................ 49
CV Tracks .......................................................... 51
Menu ............................................................. 52
Toolbar .............................................................. 53
Sync .............................................................. 53
Help ............................................................... 53
Undo History .................................................. 53
Tuner ............................................................. 54
MIDI Monitor .................................................. 54
Mode ............................................................. 54
System Resources ......................................... 55
Project ............................................................... 56
Preferences ........................................................ 57
Info ................................................................ 57
Activations ..................................................... 57
Wi-Fi .............................................................. 58
Ethernet ......................................................... 58
Bluetooth ....................................................... 58
Audio Device .................................................. 58
Audio/Export .................................................. 59
MIDI / Sync .................................................... 59
Hardware ....................................................... 60
Sequencer ..................................................... 61
Project Defaults .............................................. 62
Project Load/Save ......................................... 63
General .......................................................... 63
Splice ............................................................ 64
3
Save Window ................................................ 65
Pull-Down Menu............................................ 67
Time Counter / Locate .................................. 69
Timing Correct (TC) ....................................... 70
Metronome (Click/Metro) .............................. 72
Automation .................................................... 73
Global .................................................................73
Tracks .................................................................73
16 Level ......................................................... 75
Pad Perform .................................................. 76
Arpeggiator ................................................... 79
Erase ............................................................. 82
Effects ........................................................... 83
Overview .............................................................83
Insert Effects .......................................................86
Pads and Keygroups .......................................86
Tracks, Submixes, and Outputs ......................88
Send/Return Effects ............................................90
Pads and Keygroups .......................................92
Tracks and Submixes ......................................94
Audio Mixdown ............................................. 95
Keyboard Control .......................................... 97
Touch Strip .................................................... 99
Battery Usage ............................................. 102
Modes ............................................................... 103
Main Mode .................................................. 104
Overview ........................................................... 104
Toolbar ............................................................. 105
Shortcuts .......................................................... 105
Function Buttons ............................................... 106
Sequence Section ............................................. 107
Track Section .................................................... 112
Drum Tracks ................................................. 113
Keygroup Tracks ........................................... 115
Plugin Tracks ................................................ 116
MIDI Tracks .................................................. 117
CV Tracks ..................................................... 118
Audio Tracks ................................................. 119
Buses ........................................................... 120
Track Edit ..................................................... 121
Arrangement Section ......................................... 124
Mixer Strips ....................................................... 128
Browser ....................................................... 131
Sample Assign ..................................................134
Channel Mixer ............................................. 135
Volume ..............................................................136
Pan & Volume ...................................................136
Sends ...............................................................137
Effects ...............................................................138
I/O ....................................................................139
Pad Mixer .................................................... 140
Volume ..............................................................141
Pan & Volume ...................................................141
Sends ...............................................................142
Effects ...............................................................142
I/O ....................................................................143
Sounds Mode ............................................. 144
Favorites ...........................................................145
Setlists ..............................................................145
XYFX Mode ................................................. 146
Arrange Mode ............................................. 149
Recording Arrangements ...................................151
Editing Arrangements ........................................152
Arrangement Track Editor ..................................159
Saving and Exporting the Arrangement ..............160
Grid View .................................................... 161
Audio Tracks .....................................................163
MIDI Tracks .......................................................166
Velocity/Automation Lane ..................................172
Step Sequencer .......................................... 173
Step Automation ...............................................177
List Edit Mode ............................................. 178
Track Edit Mode ......................................... 184
Drum Tracks .....................................................184
Global ...........................................................186
Samples .......................................................188
Envelopes .....................................................196
Mods (Modulations) .......................................199
Effects ..........................................................200
LFO ..............................................................203
Utilities ..........................................................204
Mod Matrix ...................................................205
4
Keygroup Tracks ............................................... 206
Global (Advanced and Legacy) ...................... 208
Samples (Advanced and Legacy) .................. 210
Filters (Advanced) .......................................... 218
Envelopes (Advanced) ................................... 220
LFO (Advanced) ............................................ 227
Utilities/Sensitivity (Advanced) ....................... 230
KG Stack (Advanced) .................................... 232
Mod Matrix (Advanced) ................................. 234
Randomize (Advanced) ................................. 235
Envelopes (Legacy) ....................................... 236
LFO (Legacy) ................................................ 239
Mods (Legacy) .............................................. 240
Effects (Legacy)............................................. 241
Plugin Tracks .................................................... 243
MIDI Tracks ....................................................... 244
CV Tracks ......................................................... 245
Anatomy of an Envelope .................................... 246
Track Mute Mode ........................................ 247
Track Mute ........................................................ 249
Track Group ...................................................... 250
Pad Mute Mode .......................................... 251
Pad Mute .......................................................... 253
Pad Group ........................................................ 254
Track View ................................................... 255
Sample Edit Mode ...................................... 258
Settings ............................................................. 260
Trim Mode ........................................................ 261
Assigning Samples ........................................ 265
Processing Slices & Samples ........................ 266
Chop Mode ....................................................... 271
Converting or Assigning Slices ...................... 274
Processing Slices .......................................... 277
Pad Mode ......................................................... 281
Assigning Samples ........................................ 284
Processing Slices & Samples ........................ 284
Sampler ....................................................... 285
Sample ............................................................. 288
Slice .................................................................. 290
Pad Tap ............................................................ 291
Pad Hold ........................................................... 292
Auto Sampler .................................................... 293
Q-Link Edit .................................................. 295
Learning Macro Assignments ............................296
Editing Macro Assignments ...............................301
Q-Links .............................................................302
XY Pad ..............................................................305
Crossfader ........................................................306
Next Sequence Mode ................................. 307
MIDI Learn .................................................. 309
Live Control Mode ...................................... 311
Setup ................................................................311
Control Bar........................................................313
Matrix View .......................................................314
Mixer View.........................................................315
Device Control View ..........................................316
Q-Links .............................................................316
Song Mode ................................................. 317
Key Ranges Mode ...................................... 320
MIDI Control Mode ..................................... 322
Pads .................................................................323
Buttons .............................................................324
Q-Link Knobs ....................................................325
XY Pad ..............................................................326
Pad Color Mode .......................................... 327
Looper ......................................................... 329
Hardware Features ................................................ 333
MPC X / MPC X Special Edition ..................... 333
Top Panel .................................................... 333
Navigation & Data Entry Controls .......................334
Pad & Q-Link Controls .......................................334
Mode & View Controls .......................................335
Transport & Recording Controls ........................336
I/O & Level Controls ..........................................337
Front Panel.................................................. 338
Rear Panel .................................................. 339
MPC Live .......................................................... 340
Top Panel .................................................... 340
Rear Panel .................................................. 342
5
MPC Live II ....................................................... 343
Top Panel .................................................... 343
Rear Panel ................................................... 346
MPC One / MPC One+ ..................................... 347
Top Panel .................................................... 347
Navigation & Data Entry Controls ....................... 347
Pad & Q-Link Controls ....................................... 348
Mode & View Controls ....................................... 348
Transport & Recording Controls ........................ 349
Front Panel .................................................. 350
Rear Panel ................................................... 350
MPC Key 61 ...................................................... 351
Top Panel .................................................... 351
Rear Panel ................................................... 355
MPC Key 37 ...................................................... 357
Top Panel .................................................... 357
Rear Panel ................................................... 361
Appendix ................................................................. 362
Glossary ............................................................ 362
Effects & Parameters ...................................... 366
Delay/Reverb ............................................... 366
Dynamics .................................................... 374
EQ/Filter ...................................................... 378
Harmonic ..................................................... 384
Modulation .................................................. 393
Vocal ........................................................... 398
Plugins .............................................................. 400
Bassline ....................................................... 400
Electric ........................................................ 403
Hype ............................................................ 407
TubeSynth ................................................... 412
DrumSynth .................................................. 419
Mellotron ..................................................... 423
Solina .......................................................... 426
WayOutWare Odyssey ................................ 429
SATA Drive Installation ................................... 433
MIDI Machine Control (MMC) ........................ 434
Ableton Control Maps ..................................... 435
MPC X / MPC X Special Edition ................. 435
MPC Live .................................................... 438
MPC Live II.................................................. 440
Technical Specifications ................................ 442
MPC X / MPC X Special Edition ................. 442
MPC Live .................................................... 445
MPC Live II.................................................. 447
MPC One / MPC One+ ............................... 449
MPC Key 61 ................................................ 451
MPC Key 37 ................................................ 454
Trademarks & Licenses .................................. 456
Addenda .................................................................. 457
MPC Pro Pack .................................................. 457
MPC Clip Launching ................................... 457
Clip Matrix Mode ...............................................458
Navigate Mode ..................................................463
Clip Editor Mode ...............................................464
Main Mode – Arrangement & Clip Section ..........466
Arrangement .................................................466
Clips .............................................................467
Advanced CV Track Edit ............................. 472
Routing .............................................................472
Env 1–4 .............................................................473
LFO 1–4 ............................................................474
Stepper .............................................................475
Utilities ..............................................................476
Matrix ................................................................476
Q-Link Edit – Envelope Follower / LFO ...... 477
Super Warp Algorithm ................................ 478
Pro Pack Plugins ........................................ 479
AIR Visual EQ4 ..................................................479
AIR Reverb Pro .................................................480
AIR Utility ..........................................................484
AIR Fabric Select ...............................................485
Import Ableton Live Projects ...................... 498
6
Introduction
Welcome to MPC 3, the latest advancement from Akai Professional for standalone MPC hardware.
This user guide explains how to create music using the MPC 3 operating system on first generation standalone MPC
hardware, including: MPC X, MPC X Special Edition, MPC Live, MPC Live II, MPC One, MPC One+, MPC Key 61,
and MPC Key 37.
Please note this manual does not cover the following:
•
MPC Studio mk2 and MPC Touch, which are not supported on MPC 3.
•
MPC Live III, which has a separate User Guide.
•
Using MPC products with an LCD screen with the MPC software application.
•
Using your MPC 3 supported hardware as a controller for the MPC Software.
For these products, or for information on MPC 2 operating systems, refer to the previous User Guides. To view these
user guides, click the Help menu in the MPC software, select MPC Help, and select an option.
Support
For the latest information about this product (documentation, technical specifications, system requirements,
compatibility information, etc.) and product registration, visit akaipro.com.
For additional product support, visit support.akaipro.com.
About This User Guide
This manual should help you get familiar with using your MPC X, MPC X Special Edition, MPC Live, MPC Live II, MPC
One, MPC One+, MPC Key 61, or MPC Key 37 (from here on, “MPC hardware” unless otherwise noted) using the
MPC 3 standalone operating system. For consistency, the terminology throughout is based on the MPC nomenclature.
We also used specific formatting to indicate particular topics of significance:
Important/Note/Tip: Important or helpful information on a given topic.
Names of buttons, controls, parameters, settings, and other options are written in bold characters throughout the manual.
Examples: Press the Play button.
Turn Knob 4.
Tap the Mute icon.
The Velocity ranges from 0 to 127.
Set the Sample Play selector to One Shot.
Tap BPM, and then use the numeric keypad to enter a 120 as the tempo.
Some parts of this manual refer to other relevant chapters or sections, which are cited in bold, italic blue characters.
Click the text to skip immediately to that section.
Examples: Read the Important Notes section before proceeding.
See Operation > General Features > Menu > Sync
for more information.
To learn more about using send effects, see General Features > Effects > Send/Return Effects.
7
Important Notes
Read the included safety & warranty manual before using your MPC hardware.
Before getting started and connecting devices to your MPC hardware or turning the hardware on/off, make sure all
devices are switched off.
MPC2 vs. MPC3
The transition from MPC2 to MPC3 introduces significant architectural changes, most notably the unification of tracks
and programs into a single track container. This redesign aims to streamline and accelerate workflow, but also results
in MPC2 projects not being loadable into MPC3 with identical behavior. Because of this, we strongly recommend
saving a new copy of all MPC2 projects before importing to preserve editing capabilities.
Upon loading an MPC2 project, MPC3 will display a Project Import dialog. By default, the Import field is set to All
Sequences. Using this method:
•
MPC3 will attempt to import all sequences and tracks from the MPC2 project.
•
If a single track was assigned to a single program in MPC2, MPC3 will create a corresponding track of the
same type as the original program.
•
If multiple tracks were assigned to the same program in MPC2, MPC3 will create one primary track of the same
type as the program, and subsequent tracks will be converted to MIDI tracks with their Send To field pointing
to the primary track.
Alternatively, you can set the Import field to Selected Sequences Import. Using this method:
•
A list of sequences from the source MPC2 project will be displayed, and you can tick the sequences you wish
to import into MPC3.
•
The selected sequences will load into their original locations within the sequence list.
Updates in v3.6
MPC Pro Pack
MPC v3.6 provides support for the MPC Pro Pack. This is included automatically for all users of MPC Live III and can
be purchased as an upgrade for users of other MPC standalone hardware that supports MPC3.
To purchase the MPC Pro Pack, visit thempcstore.com / akaipro.com. You can unlock the Pro Pack on up to
three supported devices.
To unlock the Pro Pack, use the Activations tab of the Preferences.
The MPC Pro Pack includes:
•
MPC Clip Launch: New Clip Matrix and Clip Edit modes.
•
Advanced CV Track Edit.
•
Advanced Q-Link Edit, including Envelope Follower and LFO.
•
Super Warp algorithm
•
MPC3 Pro Pack Plugins: AIR Fabric Select, AIR Visual EQ4, AIR Reverb Pro, AIR Utility
•
Import Ableton Live Projects
See Addenda > MPC Pro Pack to learn more about these features.
8
Project Time Signature Support
You can now change the time signature of your MPC project to suit your creative needs. Changing the project time
signature updates all sequences to use the new setting. Sequences will retain their length in bars. If Clip workflow is
enabled, clips will retain their length in pulses.
Project Time signatures can be changed in Main Mode. You can also set the default time signature in the Project
Defaults section of the Preferences.
Track Edit Enhancements
MPC now includes an enhanced Track Edit mode for Drum Tracks, including:
•
A powerful Drum Articulation Engine, allowing you access to typical drum articulations and rudiments like flams,
paradiddles, and dynamic drum phrases which can be added to individual pads. You can also trigger and record
different articulations using 16 Level, and Modifiers (editable in List Edit Mode) include an Articulation parameter.
•
A 32-cell modulation matrix, for extensive routing options for complex modulation setups.
•
New modulation sources, including an upgraded dual LFO, a Note Counter, dual Ramps, and Global and Per-
Voice Drift LFOs.
•
The Layer Play Offset parameter lets you shift a framed sample window—defined by Start, End, and Loop
points—across the sample without altering their relative positions.
•
The Global tab now includes a Pad Tuning parameter, altering the tuning of all layers on that pad.
Both Drums and Keygroups have the following additional enhancements:
•
The Modulation Matrix now supports a hierarchical menu of sources and targets.
•
Layer Play – Crossfade: This new setting allows you to crossfade between sample layers using modulation
sources like Envelopes and LFOs in Drum and Keygroup tracks, enabling wave-sequencing or vector synthesis-
like effects.
•
Random Seeds: When Layer Play is set to Random, the Random Seed field displays a value between 1–999,999.
This number can be copied and reused to reproduce the same random sequence across sessions or projects.
See Operation > Modes > Track Edit Mode > Drum Tracks or Keygroup Tracks to learn more.
MIDI Improvements
You can now configure individual pads within a Drum Track to send specific MIDI notes for triggering external gear,
lighting, or video sources.
We’ve also expanded the MPC sequencer’s MIDI capabilities with full per-event channel recording and routing. This
update unlocks more flexible workflows for multi-timbral instruments and external MIDI gear.
Other Improvements
You can now input automation bounded by the length of a step in the Step Sequencer.
When using Pad Copy, pad colors are now copied.
In Main Mode, tapping and holding the Sequence field opens a new pop-up with the following settings:
Use the Name field to rename the Sequence.
Use the Auto-Select Track field to specify which track is selected when switching sequences. Select None to
keep the current track selected when changing sequences, or select a specific track from your project.
9
Setup
Here is just an example of how to use MPC X in your setup. Items not listed under Introduction > Box Contents of
your included Quickstart Guide are sold separately.
Remember to remove the protective film from your MPC hardware touchscreen!
To use your MPC hardware in Standalone Mode, just connect it to a power outlet using the included power adapter,
and power it on!
Note: We highly recommend checking akaipro.com for any available updates to the MPC software/firmware and/or
drivers. You can also connect your device to Wi-Fi and check for updates in the Preferences menu.
Computer
Turntable
Microphone
Power
SD Card
(to front-panel SD card slot)
USB
drive
Powered Monitors
Footswitch
(to front-panel FS1 input)
Headphones
(to front-panel headphone output)
10
Tutorial
For those new to MPC, this chapter should familiarize you with some of the basic features and modes. We’ll create a
short song to illustrate some of the most important features. To get the most out of this chapter, we recommend
reproducing each of the described steps in order.
For in-depth information on the various features and modes in MPC3, proceed to the Operation chapter.
For a breakdown of all the controls on your MPC hardware, proceed to the Hardware Features chapter.
You can also access video tutorials from the Akai Professional YouTube page at youtube.com/AkaiProVideo.
Starting Up
When you first power on your MPC hardware, you will be presented with a welcome screen. Tap Next to continue.
Next, a help screen will appear with a QR code that links to this User Guide. Tap Got It to continue. You can also
access this at any time from the Toolbar in the Menu.
You will then be prompted to connect your MPC hardware to the internet to check for the latest software update. We
recommend always staying up-to-date with the latest software version. Tap Let’s Go to dismiss this message. If you
no longer want to see this message, tap the Don’t show this again box before proceeding.
Your MPC will then display a list of demo projects to choose from. These projects cover a range of styles and are
included to highlight the wide array of sounds available with MPC.
To begin this tutorial, we will instead start by selecting New Project at the bottom of the screen. In MPC 3, this will
automatically load a small factory project by default. The configuration of this project varies depending on the type of
MPC device in use.
For MPCs without a keyboard (MPC X/X SE, Live/Live II, One/One+):
•
Drum Track Preset: A single drum track with samples loaded on Pad Bank A.
•
Q-Link Screen Layout: Configured to control settings and features in Main Mode.
•
Effects: AIR Reverb and AIR Delay are preloaded on Returns 1 and 2.
MPC Key 61:
•
Drum Track Preset: Same as MPCs without a keyboard.
•
Plugin Instrument Tracks: Four plugin instrument tracks are added before the drum track.
•
Effects: AIR Reverb and AIR Delay are preloaded on Returns 1 and 2.
MPC Key 37:
•
Drum Track Preset: Same as MPCs without a keyboard.
•
Plugin Instrument Tracks: A single plugin instrument track is added before the drum track.
•
Effects: AIR Reverb and AIR Delay are preloaded on Returns 1 and 2.
11
Recording Tracks with Main Mode
Main Mode Overview
Your project will begin in Main Mode, which provides visual feedback and fast access to many of MPC’s key features.
The image below shows an overview of Main Mode. You can view more information about all the features mentioned
below in the Main Mode
chapter later in this User Guide. For now, this will help familiarize you with the different parts
of this page as you progress through the tutorial.
Begin with the Track / Arrangement View. When the new project is loaded, the Track view will be selected. This
allows you to navigate between your project’s available tracks.
Tap the track header and make sure the drum track is selected (MPC Key 61 users will want to scroll to Track 5, and
MPC Key 37 users will want to scroll to Track 2). Once selected, you can hit each pad to hear the assigned sample
and view a simple waveform editor, where you can adjust sample start and end points. Double-tapping this area will
take you directly to Track Edit Mode, where you can apply more advanced editing techniques.
Next, tap the Arrangement header to show the Arrangement view. Here, you can see all the MIDI or audio events
recorded on the selected track. Double-tapping this area will open the full Grid View, where you can edit your MIDI
notes or audio events for the selected track.
Toolbar
Shortcuts
Function
Buttons
Sequence
Track /
Arrangement
Views
Mixer
Strips
12
Recording a Drum Sequence
Using these areas, and the pre-loaded drum kit track, let’s start by recording a basic drum sequence:
1.
Make sure the
SEQ REC ARM button at the bottom of the
screen is enabled, and then press the REC button on your MPC
hardware to arm the arrangement for recording.
2.
Select the Arrangement view by tapping the header.
3.
Press the Play button to start the actual recording. You will hear
the metronome count-in for one measure before the recording
starts. We recommend recording only one sound (pad) at a
time, especially if you’re not familiar with playing drums on the
pads.
4.
Play a simple hi-hat pattern. The note events you just recorded
will automatically be placed in the arrangement. The initial
measure length is two bars. After the two bars, the recording
will automatically activate Overdub; the sequence will play
again from the beginning and keeps looping, allowing you to
record further notes. Don’t stop the recording!
Tip: Try spicing up your recorded pattern by enabling Note
Repeat on your MPC hardware. Press and hold this button,
and then tap to select 1/16 and T at the bottom of the screen.
Now try adding some triplet hi-hat notes to your current
sequence as you record.
5.
Next, play a kick drum part, and then a snare drum part.
6.
When you’re done recording, press the Stop button.
If you start recording again on this sequence, keep in mind that the pads you play in your new recording will replace
existing notes played with the same pads. To prevent this, press the OVERDUB button before recording instead of the
REC button. Overdub lets you record additional note events over the existing sequence.
If you made a mistake while recording, you can simply press UNDO on your hardware to undo the last event (or events)
recorded if playback is stopped. If you are currently recording, the UNDO button will flash, and pressing it will erase
all events from that recording (i.e., since PLAY or PLAY START was pressed).
13
Creating and Recording a Keygroup Track
With a basic drum part down, you can now start adding to your sequence. Pad 5 in the default drum kit features an
808 sound. We can use this sound to create a pitched bass sound by turning it into a Keygroup track. Keygroup tracks
take a sample and allow you to play it chromatically with your MPC pads (or a MIDI keyboard).
1.
With the default drum track still selected, press Pad 5 on your
MPC hardware to select it. Then, double-tap the sample area
in the Track View of Main Mode. This will take you directly to
Track Edit
mode.
2.
Tap the keyboard+ icon at the top of the screen to instantly
turn this 808 sample into a Keygroup Track.
3.
Press Main on your MPC hardware to return to Main Mode, and
then select your new keygroup track. It will be added at the end
of your current tracks.
4.
Your MPC hardware’s pads will now be in Pad Perform mode
as well. This will allow you to play the sample melodically.
5.
Make sure the
SEQ REC ARM button at the bottom of the
screen is enabled, and then press the REC button on your MPC
hardware to arm the arrangement for recording.
6.
Press Play to begin playback and record a bass part using your
MPC pads and the 808 sound.
14
Adding and Recording with a Plugin Track
Let’s try adding another new track to the sequence. This time, we’ll use one of MPC’s built-in plugin instruments to
add a melodic line.
1.
In Main Mode, tap + New Track at the bottom-left corner of the
screen.
2.
A window will appear where you can select what type of track
you want to add. Select Plugin to add a new plugin instrument
track at the end of your current tracks.
3.
Use the Plugin field to select the desired plugin, and then use
the Preset field to select a preset.
4.
Once you are ready, make sure the
SEQ REC ARM button is
enabled, and then press the REC button to arm the
arrangement for recording.
5.
Press Play to begin playback and record a new melodic part
on your MPC pads.
15
Working with Audio Tracks
So far, the tracks we have used and added have all been MIDI-based tracks. You can also use Audio tracks in your
project to add recorded sounds in different ways. In the following sections, we will introduce recording an audio sample
from an external instrument and adding samples using the Browser.
To begin, press Main to go back to Main Mode. Tap + New Track at the bottom-left corner of the screen, and then
select Audio. A new audio track will be added to the project.
Recording an External Instrument
To record audio from an external instrument or microphone:
1.
Select the audio track in the Track View area, and then tap the
icons at the top of the Channel Strips to expand them.
2.
Tap to select the I/O tab of the track channel strip.
3.
Tap the Monitor field to select it, and then turn the data dial
on your MPC hardware until Auto is selected. With the track
armed for recording, If you start playing your instrument, you
should now hear it and see the signal coming into the track.
This will allow you to hear your input when the track is armed
for recording.
4.
Connect a line-level audio source to the 1/4” (6.35 mm)
input/inputs on your MPC hardware’s rear panel, and set the
Line/Phono selector to Line (MPC X, MPC Live, MPC Live II),
or set the Inst/Line selector to Line (MPC Key 61). Then, make
sure the Audio In field is set to the input or inputs where you’ve
connected your instrument.
5.
Press Rec to arm the arrangement for recording.
6.
If you start playing your instrument, you should now hear it and
see the signal coming into the track. As needed, turn the 3/4
Rec Gain (MPC X), Rec Vol (MPC Live, MPC Live II, MPC One,
MPC Key 37), or Gain (MPC Key 61) knob to set the input level
while playing your audio source. Make sure it does not exceed
the maximum level (the meter should not be “peaking”
constantly).
7.
Press Play or Play Start to start recording. Now play your audio
source! You should hear your existing sequence playing in the
background.
To stop recording, press Stop.
Later in this manual, you can also learn about recording using the Sampler or Looper. You can also apply these same
principles to recording audio directly into Drum Tracks.
16
Loading Sounds with the Browser
You can also browse and add previously recorded samples, either those included with MPC or your own, to an audio
track.
To add a recorded audio sample to an audio track:
1.
From Main Mode, tap the file folder icon in the Shortcuts panel
on the left side of the screen to open the Browser. You can
also do this by pressing the Menu button and then tapping
Browser.
2.
On the left side of the Browser screen, tap the Content header.
This will allow you to browse files by content. Tap Samples to
show the list of included audio samples with your MPC.
3.
Let’s search for a vocal sample to add to our loop. Tap the
Search bar and use the keyboard that appears on screen to
search for the key word “Vocal.” This will display included
samples that are marked as vocal samples.
4.
As you scroll through the list, either by swiping up or down or
using the encoder on your MPC hardware, you can preview a
sample by tapping and holding the Play icon (
►
). You can also
adjust preview setting by tapping Audition at the bottom of the
screen, and then using the window that appears to adjust the
preview volume, enable auto-audition, and more.
5.
Once you have found a sample or samples you like, tap the
Load to Pool button to add it to the project sample pool.
6.
Press Main to return to Main Mode. In the Track section of your
audio track, tap the Edit Audio button. This will open Grid
View, where you can add and edit samples in your audio track.
7.
Tap the Browse Samples button to open the Add Sample
window, and then use the Sample field to select a sample you
loaded. When the Place at start option is checked, this sample
will be added at the start of your sequence. You can uncheck
this to specify a different location, but you can also freely move
and edit the sample after adding it.
8.
Once your sample has been added, see how it sounds as part
of your sequence. You can use the Grid View editing tools to
edit the start and end points of the sample, trim it, move it,
apply fades, and even reverse it with the touch of a button. Try
experimenting with some simple edits to your sample!
17
Working with the Linear Arranger
To take your track further, you can use Arrange Mode
to record,
edit, and arrange your sequences on a DAW-style linear timeline.
Now that you’ve recorded a few tracks, open Arrange Mode by
pressing Menu and then tapping Arrange.
Let’s start by using the Arrange sequence editing tools to expand
the length of our sequence.
1.
Tap the pencil Edit button at the top of the Arrange screen to
open the Sequence Edit window.
2.
Tap the Double length button to instantly double the length of
your sequence, including all recorded events. In this example,
the sequence has been doubled from 2 bars to 4 bars. We will
repeat this process again to double the sequence from 4 bars
to 8 bars.
3.
Next, let’s try adding a new section in between these bars. Tap
the pencil Edit button again, and this time select Insert Bars.
Set the # of Bars field to 2, set the Before Bar field to 5, and
then tap Do It. This will add two blank bars between the two
four-bar phrases.
18
Next, let’s fill in these empty bars in two ways. Perhaps you want to continue the same drum beat over these two bars,
but change the melody. We can start by copying over notes from our drum track into this section. You can do this
using the Copy Events function in the Sequence Edit window, but it is also easily accomplished using the Arrangement
Track Editor.
1.
Tap your drum track to select it.
2.
At the bottom of the Arrange window, tap the up arrow (
∧
) to
expand the Arrangement Track Editor. This is a fully featured
grid editor (the same as Grid View
mode) where you can add,
remove, and edit note events.
3.
Tap the box icon to use selection mode.
4.
Tap and drag your finger over the recorded drum notes in the
two bars before your empty bars.
5.
Once selected, press and hold Shift on your MPC hardware,
and then tap Duplicate. This will instantly duplicate the
selected events on the next available beat marker. As needed,
tap Nudge at the bottom of the screen to enable note nudging,
and then turn the data dial on your MPC hardware to adjust
the position of the duplicated notes so they start on the
downbeat of the bar.
You can also record into a section of the arrangement with a new
performance.
1.
Tap the Loop button at the bottom of the screen to activate
loop.
2.
Set the Loop Start and Loop End points by tapping and
dragging the beginning and end of the loop region in the
timeline. Tapping and dragging in the middle of the loop region
moves both the Loop Start and Loop End points at the same
time. Move the loop so it covers the two new bars we created.
3.
Select the track where you want to record by tapping the track
header on the left side of the screen. If the
SEQ REC ARM
button was already enabled in Main Mode, this will
automatically enable this track for recording. You can also
double-tap the track header to bring up the Track Settings
window, and then set the Rec Arm field to On.
4.
Press REC to arm recording and then Play to begin recording.
The recording will begin at the Loop Start point, and once it
reaches the Loop End Point, will switch to Overdubbing mode.
5.
Record a new melody using the MPC pads.
19
Saving Your Work
Now would be a good time to save your project. Press Menu to show the Menu, and tap the Save at the bottom of
the screen to open the Save window.
The options displayed in this window may differ based on the type of track you have selected. For now, simply tap the
Project As button to save your project as a new file. A new save window will appear where you can choose your save
location and name your file.
To select the storage device you want to view, tap it in the
Storage column on the left.
Internal is the internal drive of your MPC hardware.
MPC Documents is a shortcut to the MPC Documents folder
on the internal drive of your MPC hardware.
If you have storage devices connected to USB ports or SD card
slot of your MPC hardware, they will appear in this column, as
well.
Double-tap a folder to enter it.
Tap New Folder to create a new folder. Use the virtual keyboard
that appears to enter a name, and then tap Do It. You will
immediately enter the new folder.
Tap the folder/
icon in the upper-left corner to move up one folder level.
Tap the File Name field at the bottom of the screen to name the file using the virtual keyboard that appears.
Tap Save to save the file.
Tap Cancel to cancel and return to the Menu. Alternatively, tap the
icon in the upper-left corner.
20
Editing Note Events
As you record, you may want to make more in-depth edits to your note events or recorded audio. In the grid, you can
see your recorded notes (or note events) as a sequence.
To enter the Grid View, press Menu, and then tap Grid View.
In the Grid View, you can do any of the following:
Tap the magnifying-glass icon in the upper-right corner to enable zoom control. Then, in the grid, spread two
fingers apart or pinch two fingers together. You can do this for each axis, horizontal or vertical.
Tap the grid-and-magnifying-glass icon in the lower-left corner to automatically set the grid to view the active
area, up to three pad banks and 32 bars.
Press Undo to undo your last action. Press Shift and Undo/Redo to redo the last action you undid.
To enter a note, tap the pencil icon at the top of the screen. Then, in the grid, tap a square.
To delete a note, tap the eraser icon at the top of the screen. Then, in the grid, tap a note.
To select a single note, tap the select box at the top of the screen. Then, in the grid, tap the note.
To select all notes for a pad, press the desired pad. (This can be enabled or disabled using the Hitting Pad
Selects All Events option in the Grid Settings, accessed by tapping the gear icon in the upper-right corner of the
screen.)
To move the selected notes, tap Nudge at the bottom of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons
to shift the notes left or right. By default, you can position notes only by quantization values defined by the Time
Correct value (learn about this feature in Operation > General Features > Timing Correct (TC)).
To move the selected notes without restricting (“snapping”) them to the quantization grid, tap Don’t Snap in
the lower-left corner of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to shift the notes. By default, each
nudge is equivalent to one tick.
To adjust the start point or end point of the selected notes (without changing their position), tap Edit Start or
Edit End
at the bottom of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons.
To transpose the selected notes up or down, tap Transpose at the bottom of the screen, and then use the data
dial or –/+ buttons.
To open the Timing Correct window, tap the clock icon next to the automation parameter.
21
To show or hide the automation lane, tap the up arrow (
∧
) button in the lower-right corner of the screen to show
the velocity lane below the grid. By default, note Velocity is selected, and each note’s velocity is represented by a
vertical bar. The higher and redder the bar is, the higher the velocity is.
To adjust the velocity of selected notes, tap Automation at the bottom of the screen, and make sure Velocity
is selected as the automation lane parameter. Then, use the data dial or –/+ buttons, or tap and drag up or down
on a selected note. The numeric value will appear on the screen.
22
Making Basic Sound Edits
In addition to editing note events themselves, you may want to edit the sound of your samples, such as by changing
the sample level and pitch, adjusting envelopes, or adding modulation and effects. These operations can be done
using Track Edit Mode.
To enter Track Edit mode, press Menu, and then tap Track Edit to enter Track Edit Mode. Alternatively, press Prog
Edit (MPC X, MPC One), or Edit (MPC Key 61, MPC Key 37).
Let’s make sure the samples are properly tuned and have good levels.
Press a pad to show its parameters on the screen.
To adjust its volume, tap and drag the Level knob up or down. Alternatively, use the data dial or –/+ buttons. To
make finer adjustments, double-tap the knob and adjust the larger version that appears. Tap anywhere else to
return to the previous screen.
To adjust its stereo panning, tap and drag the Pan knob up or down. Alternatively, use the data dial or –/+
buttons. To make finer adjustments, double-tap the knob and adjust the larger version that appears. Tap
anywhere else to return to the previous screen.
Adjust the level of each pad to suit your taste. We recommend spreading the panning of the bright sounds (e.g.,
cymbals, snare drum) a little. Additionally, you can tune the kick drum sound—tap the Samples tab so the second
square under it is lit, and then adjust the Semi and Fine knobs next to the sample name.
23
The snare drum may need some reverb to give it a more spatial sound.
Tap Effects at bottom of the screen so the first square under it is lit to view the Insert Effects tab. Press the pad with
your snare drum sound to select it.
To add an effect:
1.
Double-tap the desired slot. A list of effects will appear.
2.
Swipe up or down to move through the list.
3.
To load an effect, double-tap it. Alternatively, tap it once and then tap Select or push the data dial. Let’s try
Reverb Medium.
4.
To close the list, tap Close.
To adjust the effect’s parameters, tap the pencil icon.
To empty the effect slot, tap the trash can icon. Switch the effect on or off by tapping the On/Off button for the slot.
24
Other Features Explained
Now that you’ve learned some basic concepts, this chapter describes various advanced features. For a fuller
explanation of these features, please refer to their corresponding sections in the Operation chapter.
Q-Links
Your MPC hardware features Q-Link knob controls, which allow you to quickly manipulate various parameters on
screen or in your project.
For MPC X/X SE users, the current Q-Link control parameters are
shown on the display strips above each knob, and you can use the
Q-Link buttons to switch between the different Q-Link modes.
For all other MPC hardware, Q-Link controls are divided into four
banks, which can be cycled through using the Q-Link button. In
some modes, the current control or controls that are within Q-Link
Screen mode control are outlined by a yellow box marked with a Q.
You can also press and hold the Q-Link button to open the Q-Link
window, where you can switch between Q-Link modes and view
the current Q-Link controls. If you are new to MPC, you may wish
to enable the Q-Link Status feature, which will temporarily open a
pop-up on the right side of the screen whenever a Q-Link is
touched, displaying the current controls and values.
See the Q-Link Edit section to learn more about how to use Q-
Links.
25
Step Sequencer
You’ve already learned how to record note events on a track, but you can also quickly enter note events in the Step
Sequencer by using the pads as “step buttons,” simulating the experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum
machine.
To enter the Step Sequencer, press Menu, and then tap Step Sequencer. You can also press Step Seq (MPC X,
MPC Live II, MPC One), or Shift and Grid/Step Seq (MPC Key 61, MPC Key 37).
1.
Trying creating a new sequence. In Main Mode, tap Sequence 1 to select it, and then use the data dial or the +
button to switch to Sequence 2. This will be shown as “(unused)” until it is edited.
2.
Select the original drum track from your first sequence, then enter Step Sequencer mode using the directions
above.
3.
Tap the Bars field at the top of the screen, and then use the data dial or the –/+ buttons to select a length.
Tip: The Track Length selector allows you to maintain tracks of different lengths by selecting Track instead of
Sequence. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
4.
Tap the Bar –/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to select the bar whose steps you want to create or edit. The
bar number will appear in the Bar field in the upper-left corner.
5.
Tap the Pad –/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to select the pad whose steps want to create or edit. The pad
number will appear in the Pad field in the upper-left corner.
6.
Press Play to start your sequence. The current step is marked in green.
7.
Each pad represents a step in the bar. If the pad already has note events on the selected track, the corresponding
pads (steps) will be lit with colors corresponding to their velocities.
To enter a note at a step, press an unlit pad or tap an unlit step marker. The pad will light up with a color
corresponding to its velocity. On the screen, the step marker will light up blue and a bar will appear showing the
corresponding velocity.
To delete the note from a step, press a lit pad. The pad will become unlit.
To delete all notes from the current page view, press and hold Shift, and then tap Clear Page in the lower-right
corner.
See Operation > Modes > Step Sequencer to learn more about this feature.
26
Drum Loops & Chop Mode
Modern music producers often use drum loops to add grit and nuance to programmed beats. This section explains
how to use Sample Edit Mode to work with drum loops.
Use the Browser to locate a drum loop. If you have a pad selected in a Drum Track, you can tap Load to instantly add
it to the kit. You can also tap Load to Pool to load it to the general sample pool of your project. The loop does not
have to match the tempo of anything in the project.
To enter Sample Edit Mode, press Menu, and then tap Sample Edit. Alternatively, press Sample Edit (MPC X, MPC
One, MPC Key 61, MPC Key 37), or Shift and Mute/Sample Edit (MPC Live II).
1.
Tap the Sample field at the top of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select a loaded drum
loop. You can scroll through all loaded samples in the project. Alternatively, double-tap the Sample field, and then
tap a sample to select it.
2.
Tap the Trim/Chop tab in the lower-left corner to switch between Trim Mode and Chop Mode. Select Chop Mode,
which will let us cut the drum loop into slices.
3.
Tap Threshold, and then tap the Threshold field to the right of it. Use the data dial, –/+ buttons, or numeric
keypad (MPC X) to select a value. Alternatively, double-tap the Threshold field and use the numeric keypad on
the screen. The lower the threshold, the more slices will be created. Be sure to select a value so that every transient
peak of the drum loop has a corresponding a slice marker.
Tip: Each slice will be automatically assigned to a pad: Pad A01 plays Slice 1, Pad A02 plays Slice 2, etc. Press
each pad to play the slice with the same number.
27
Let’s use this chopped sample to create a new track in which each of these slices is an individual sample. We can also
automatically create corresponding note events to play back these slices sequentially.
1.
Press and hold Shift and then tap Convert at the bottom of the
screen to enter the Convert or Assign Slices window.
2.
Tap the Convert To field, and then use the data dial or –/+
buttons to select New Drum Track Using Slices.
3.
Make sure Create Events is checked. If it is not, tap it.
4.
Tap the Bars field, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to
select how many bars the entire sample should use in your
track.
5.
Tap Do It to proceed. Each slice will be assigned to a pad, and
each pad will have a recorded note event in the track. When
you play that track, it will play each pad (each slice) in the
original order. Press Menu and then tap Grid View to see how
the sample appears in your sequence.
6.
Press Play and listen to how the drum loop matches your song
tempo now.
You can also edit the note events of the drum loop slices—enter Main Mode to do this. A new track with the note
events playing their corresponding slices has been automatically created. Tap the TC/clock icon at the top of the
screen to use the Timing Correct window to quantize the note events so they fall on exact, even time intervals.
You can also rearrange the note events, thus creating a new playback order for the slices. You can also edit each slice
or sample in Track Edit Mode. You can add effects for slices or use the filter function to change the frequency range
of a selected slice. You can even convert your chopped sample to an audio track instead, using the Audio Track from
Samples option in the Convert menu. There are almost no limits to what you can do.
See Operation > Modes > Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode to learn more about these features.
28
Pad Muting & Track Muting
Pad Mute Mode and Track Mute Mode let you silence different pads and tracks to see what the sequence sounds like
without those samples or parts.
To enter Pad Mute Mode, press Menu, and then tap Pad Mute. Alternatively, press Shift and Track Mute/Pad Mute
(MPC X, MPC One, MPC Key 37), or Shift and Mute/Pad (MPC Key 61).
1.
Press Play to play the sequence.
2.
Tap the Track field at the top of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select your drum track.
Alternatively, double-tap the Track field, and then tap a track to select it.
3.
Mute a pad by pressing it once or tapping it on the screen. The muted pad will be lit orange. You can mute multiple
pads at the same time.
See Operation > Modes > Pad Mute Mode to learn more about pad mutes.
29
You can also mute entire tracks by using the similar Track Mute function.
To enter Track Mute Mode, press Menu, and then tap Track Mute to enter Track Mute Mode. Alternatively, press
Track Mute (MPC X, MPC One, MPC Key 37), or Mute (MPC Key 61).
1.
Press Play to play the sequence.
2.
Tap the Sequence field at the top of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired
sequence. Alternatively, double-tap the Sequence field, and then tap a sequence to select it.
3.
Each pad is assigned to a track. Mute a track by pressing the corresponding pad or tapping it on the screen. The
pad will be lit orange. You can mute multiple tracks at the same time.
Tip: To mute a track only at precise note intervals (“quantizing” your mutes, essentially), tap Time Division to set a
musical timing value. Tap the desired musical value (e.g., 1 Bar). Tap Close to close the page. Now, when you press
a pad in Track Mute Mode, the mute will occur precisely at the beginning of the following time division (in this example,
one bar). This lets you test musical combinations of patterns—the preliminary stage to building a song structure.
See Operation > Modes > Track Mute Mode to learn more about track mutes.
30
Sampling (Recording)
Earlier in this tutorial, we described recording audio from an external instrument directly into your arrangement. You
can also record from an external instrument to create samples that can be used in other ways in your project. This can
be done using the Sampler function.
To open the Sampler, press Menu, and then tap Sampler. Alternatively, press Sampler (MPC X, MPC One), press
Shift and Mix/Sampler (MPC Live II), or press Shift and Sample Edit/Sampler (MPC Key 61, MPC Key 37).
1.
Connect an audio source to the input/inputs of your MPC hardware.
2.
The Input ___ menu in the upper-left corner should be set to Input 1,2 (the inputs of your MPC hardware). If it is
not, then select Input 1,2.
3.
Turn the 3/4 Rec Gain (MPC X), Rec Vol (MPC Live, MPC Live II, MPC One, MPC Key 37), or Gain (MPC Key 61)
knob to set the input level while playing your audio source. You should now see the level in the meter. Make sure
it does not exceed the maximum level (the meter should not be “peaking” constantly).
4.
Tap and drag threshold slider to set the threshold. Alternatively, use the data dial or –/+ buttons. Set it to a fairly
low level (e.g., -50 dB).
5.
Tap Arm to record-arm the Sampler.
6.
Play your audio source. The Sampler will start recording immediately when the input level reaches the threshold
value. Alternatively, tap the round Record button to manually start recording.
7.
To stop recording, tap the round Stop button. The Keep or Discard Sample window will appear.
31
In the Keep or Discard Sample window:
Tap the Name field to name the new sample using the virtual keyboard.
Use the Track field to select the desired track. Tap to select it, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select
the track. You can also double-tap this field to open the list of tracks, and then tap to select your track.
Use the Assign To Pad field to assign the sample to a pad in your track. You can tap this field and then press the
desired pad, use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired pad number, or double-tap the Pad field, and
then tap a pad number.
Use the Root Note field to set the root note for the sample. Tap the field and then then use the data dial or –/+
buttons to select the desired note.
Tap the Save button at the bottom of the screen to save the sample.
Tap the Play button at the bottom of the screen to play the recording.
Tap the Discard button at the bottom of the screen to discard the recording and return to the previous screen.
Tap Keep at the bottom of the screen to confirm your selections.
Tap the Edit button at the bottom of the screen to edit the sample in Sample Edit Mode.
See Operation > Modes > Sampler to learn more about this feature.
32
Sample Editing
You may need to edit your newly recorded samples using Sample Edit Mode.
To enter Sample Edit Mode, press Menu, and then tap Sample Edit. Alternatively, press Sample Edit (MPC X, MPC
One, MPC Key 61, MPC Key 37), or press Shift and Mute/Sample Edit (MPC Live II).
In Sample Edit Mode:
Tap the Trim/Chop tab at the bottom of the screen to switch between Trim Mode and Chop Mode. In this example,
use Trim Mode.
To set the sample’s start point, use the first column of Q-Link knobs (when in the Screen Q-Link Edit Mode) to
adjust the start point with varying degrees of resolution. Alternatively, tap and drag the S marker in the waveform.
You can also double-tap the Start field and use the numeric keypad on the screen to enter a value (or tap the Start
field and use the numeric keypad [MPC X only]).
To set the sample’s end point, use the second column of Q-Link knobs (when in the Screen Q-Link Edit Mode)
to adjust the end point with varying degrees of resolution. Alternatively, tap and drag the E marker in the waveform.
You can also double-tap the End field and use the numeric keypad on the screen to enter a value (or tap the Start
field and use the numeric keypad [MPC X only]).
To hear your edits, press Pad 10 to play the sample from the start point to the end point.
33
Let’s apply some processing to the sample.
To open the Process Sample window, tap Process at the bottom of the screen.
1.
Use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select the desired process in the Function field. Alternatively, tap Function or
double-tap the Function field, and then tap the desired process. Let’s select Pitch Shift to change the overall
pitch of your sample. This will transpose the sample without affecting its length.
2.
To set the pitch shift amount, tap and drag the knob in the center of the window up or down. Alternatively, use
the data dial or –/+ buttons.
To make finer adjustments, double-tap the knob and adjust the larger version that appears. Tap anywhere else
to return to the previous screen.
3.
Tap Do It to confirm your selections, or tap Cancel to cancel the process.
See Operation > Modes > Sample Edit Mode to learn more.
34
Recording Automation with the XY Pad
Automating various parameters is a good way to add some motion and dynamism to your sequences.
1.
Press Menu, and then tap XYFX to enter XYFX Mode.
2.
Tap the XYFX Location field, and select Track. This will add the XY effect to the currently selected track.
3.
When you first enter this mode in a project, you will be prompted to “load” XYFX to the track. Tap Insert XYFX to
do this.
4.
Tap Setup to show the Setup panel, which controls how the XY pad behaves.
5.
Double-tap the Preset field, and tap an effect to select it. (These are just the effects available in XYFX Mode, not
all MPC effects.) Swipe up or down to view the complete list.
6.
Tap and drag any of the knobs (Attack, Release, or Wet/Dry) up or down to set their values as desired. Below
them, you can see what parameter the X axis and Y axis control.
Note: XYFX uses an envelope to control how quickly the effect crossfades between the dry signal and wet signal.
The Attack knob determines how long it takes the completely dry signal to reach the wet signal (determined by the
Wet/Dry knob) after you touch the XY pad. The Release knob determines how long it takes the wet signal
(determined by the Wet/Dry knob) to return to the completely dry signal after you touch the XY pad.
7.
Tap the automation button to cycle through the available automation modes. Make sure the button is red (the
Write (W) option).
8.
Press Play Start to start recording.
9.
As you record, move your finger over the XY pad on the screen. The changes in the sound are being recorded as
automation of both the X axis and Y axis parameters.
Tip: While touching the XY pad, tap Latch in the lower-left corner to keep the marker on the XY pad even after you
release it. The marker will remain there until you touch another part of the XY pad or until you tap Latch again.
10.
When you are done recording, press Stop.
11.
Tap the automation button to select the green Read (R) option. This ensures your track uses the automation you
just recorded when you play it back.
See Operation > Modes > XYFX Mode to learn more about using this feature.
35
Creating a Song
As your project grows, you may have multiple sequences of music that you want to piece together into a larger song
for exporting. This can be done using Song Mode.
To enter Song Mode, make sure playback is stopped, then press Menu, and then tap Song. Alternatively, press Song
(MPC X).
In Song Mode, each of the sequences you’ve created in this project are assigned to a pad. The sequence playlist is to
the left of the pads, showing the song’s structure.
As a song plays, it moves through each step of the sequence playlist. Each step contains a sequence you assigned.
Each step can be repeated, determined by the value in the Repeat column (the repeat icon; a value of 1 means the
sequence will play through only once). The Bars column on the right indicates the length of that sequence.
Each step can be set to play its sequence at an independent tempo, determined by the value in the BPM column.
Important: Each sequence has its own tempo, while the project itself may use a different global tempo. The BPM value
for each sequence may be different from the global tempo. As long as playback is set to follow the global tempo, each
sequence’s individual tempo will be ignored. By default, each project is set to use the sequence tempo. We recommend
tapping the SEQ/GBL button at the top of the screen (so the button displays GBL) and entering a global tempo to
ensure all sequences use the same tempo.
Tap Insert to insert a step at the current position.
Tap Delete to delete the currently selected step.
To set which sequence plays for a step, tap the step’s Sequence field, and then turn the data dial to select a
sequence.
To set how many times a sequence repeats, tap the step’s Repeat field (next to the sequence name), and then turn
the data dial to select a number.
36
Want to share your new song? Just export it first.
To export a song:
1.
While in Song Mode, tap Export at the bottom of the screen.
2.
In the Audio Mixdown screen that appears, do the following:
•
Make sure the Start field is set to 1, and set the End field to the last bar of your song.
•
Tap the Audio Tail field and turn the data dial to set it to 2 seconds.
•
As you’ll likely share the song online, tap the mp3 file format option in the lower-left corner.
3.
Tap Export. Choose where you want to save the song.
To name the song, tap the File Name field, and use the virtual keyboard that appears to enter a new name, and
then tap Save to start exporting.
See Operation > Modes > Song Mode to learn more about using this feature.
37
Operation
This chapter explains the complete features and functions of the MPC operating system. For a breakdown of the
hardware controls on your MPC device, see the following Hardware Features section.
Important:
•
When the left-most button at the bottom of the screen shows an upward arrow (
), it means there are
additional buttons you can use when you press and hold Shift. Press and hold Shift to show the
secondary buttons. Release Shift to return to the previous buttons.
•
Many modes shown on the screen have 1–6 buttons at the bottom. Each of these buttons select a
different tab in that mode or perform a specific function in that mode. If there are more than six tabs
available, use the < and > buttons to scroll between them.
•
As an alternative to double-tapping an item on the screen to “enter” it, you can press the data dial.
•
When a parameter is highlighted and has a red outline, this means that it is selected. You can then
change it by turning the hardware’s data dial or using the –/+ buttons. If the parameter is a number,
double-tap it to show a numeric keypad on the screen to enter a specific value.
General Features
Control Types
This section covers the types of control elements featured on the MPC touchscreen, and details how you can adjust
them using the touchscreen or your hardware controls. In descriptions throughout the remainder of this manual,
touchscreen controls are primarily referenced, but you can always use the hardware controls described below to adjust
each control type.
Knobs
To set the value for a knob, do any of the following:
•
Tap and drag the knob up or down.
•
Tap the knob to select it, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons
to adjust the value.
•
Double-tap the knob to show it in a larger screen. Alternatively,
press data dial when the knob is selected.
Tap and drag the larger version that appears, or use the data dial
or –/+ buttons to adjust the value.
If the knob is bipolar (has positive and negative values with the
center as the default position), double-tap the larger version to
reset it to the center/0 position.
Tap anywhere else to return to the previous screen.
•
Press and hold Shift while turning the data dial to adjust a value
by smaller increments.
38
Parameter Values
To set the value for a parameter, do either of the following:
•
Tap the field to select it, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons
to adjust the value.
When the value has decimal places, you can sometimes press and
hold Shift and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the
value by smaller increments.
•
Double-tap the field or hold your finger on it for a second. In the
screen that appears, type in a value using the number pad, or use
the data dial or the –/+ buttons to adjust the value. Alternatively,
tap and drag the value up or down.
You can also tap /2 to halve the value or x2 to double it.
To confirm the value and remain on this screen, tap Apply.
To confirm the value and return to the previous screen, tap Do It.
To return to the previous screen, tap the gray area in the upper-
left corner of the screen. Unsaved changes made using the
number pad will not be applied. All other changes will be saved.
Drop-Down Menus / Lists
To select an option for a drop-down menu, do any of the following:
•
Tap the field to select it, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select an option.
•
Double-tap the field. In the list that appears (examples below), tap the desired option. Alternatively, use the
data dial or the –/+ buttons to select an option.
In some windows, tap the relevant button at the bottom of the screen to confirm your selection or to cancel
without changing anything.
39
Selectors
Selectors show all available options. One of them is always selected. The
selected option is highlighted while the others are dark.
To select an option, tap it.
Buttons
Buttons usually have two states: selected and deselected (active or inactive,
respectively). Some may have more than two states.
To switch between or cycle through a button’s states, do either of the
following:
•
Tap it.
•
If it is outlined in red (and is not a mute button), use the data dial
or
–/+ buttons.
Checkboxes
Checkboxes have two states: checked and unchecked (enabled or disabled,
respectively).
To check or uncheck a checkbox, tap it.
Tabs
Some modes have buttons at the bottom of the screen that let you cycle
through several similar tabs. For example, you can toggle between Trim
and Chop modes in Sample Edit Mode, or cycle between the Samples
tabs in Track Edit Mode. With each tap, you will move to the next tab,
indicated by the squares below it.
To select a tab, tap it. Each time you tap it, it will select the next tab.
40
Sliders
To adjust the position of a slider, do any of the following:
•
Tap and drag the slider to the desired position.
•
Tap the desired position (this works only on some sliders).
•
Tap the slider to select it, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons
to adjust the position (this works only on some sliders).
•
Double-tap the slider, and then tap and drag the larger version that
appears, or use the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the value. Tap
anywhere else to return to the previous screen.
Envelopes
To set the stages of an envelope, do either of the following:
Tip: Tap the expand-rectangle icon above the envelope to show a close-up view.
•
Tap and drag a “handle” of an envelope stage in the desired direction.
•
Set the numeric value of an envelope stage by adjusting or entering it as a parameter value
(described earlier).
The Envelope tab in Track Edit Mode (Drum Tracks).
Close-up of an AD-type filter envelope. Close-up of an AHDS-type amp envelope.
41
Tracks
About Tracks
Each sequence you create within a project is made up of tracks. There are six
main types of tracks, each of which determines how the track sounds or for what
it is used. A single project can hold up to 128 tracks.
To learn about editing your tracks to your preference, see the Modes > Track Edit
Mode chapter.
An Audio track lets you record audio from an external source or by resampling another track to create a
sample. See Audio Tracks for more information.
A drum track uses one or more samples as its sound source. It contains (1) a list of samples and (2) the
settings for each sample (i.e., pad assignments, loop points, pitch tuning, effects, etc.). Drum tracks are
used mostly for creating drum parts and quickly and easily assigning samples to pads. See Drum Tracks
for more information.
A keygroup track uses one or more samples as its sound source. It contains (1) a list of samples and (2)
the settings for each sample (i.e., pitch tuning, effects, etc.). Keygroup tracks are used to play samples
chromatically with a MIDI keyboard or the MPC pads. See Keygroup Tracks for more information.
A plugin track contains an instance of a plugin through which you can send your track’s MIDI data. See
Plugin Tracks for more information.
A MIDI track lets you send your track’s MIDI data to an external MIDI device like a synth or drum machine.
See MIDI Tracks for more information.
A CV track lets you send your track’s MIDI data to an external device that uses control voltage (CV), like a
synth. See CV Tracks for more information.
42
To create a new track:
1.
Press Main to open Main Mode, or select Main from
the Menu.
2.
Tap the New Track button at the bottom of the screen.
3.
A window will appear where you can select the track
type. Tap to select a track type, which will be instantly
added to your project.
Alternatively, tap the Advanced button at the bottom
of the screen. In this window, use the Type field to
select the track type. You can also use the Number of
Tracks field to add multiple tracks of the selected type.
For Audio Tracks, you can also adjust the following
options:
Use the Input field to select which inputs the audio
track will use.
Check the Ascending box to determine if the
channel numbers of the input sources will ascend
across the new audio tracks you create. When
checked, the first new audio track will use the input
source you set above (e.g., Input 1), the second
new audio track will use the next input source (e.g.,
Input 2), etc. When unchecked, all of the new audio
tracks you create in this instance will use the same
input source. This feature is relevant only if you are
creating more than one new audio track
(determined by Number of Tracks below).
Check the Record Enable box to set the new track
to be automatically record enabled.
Use the Input Monitoring field to set the
monitoring behavior: Off, On, Auto, or Merge.
To change a track from one type to another, tap the
track type icon/track number in the Track Section of
Main Mode. A selector will appear where you can select
from the five remaining track types.
To access the Track Settings window, described for each track type below, do either of the following:
•
Tap and hold on the Track Name in the Track Section of Main Mode.
•
Double-tap the track header in the Channel Mixer or Arrange Mode.
43
Audio Tracks
Settings:
Tap the track name field to rename the track. Use the virtual keyboard that appears to enter a new name, and then
tap Do It to confirm or the gray bar at the top of the screen to cancel.
Use the Position field to change the location of the track, moving the other tracks in relation.
Use the Rec Arm field to arm (On) or disarm (Off) the track for recording.
Use the Monitor field to set the monitoring behavior of the track:
When set to Off, you will never hear any incoming audio.
When set to In, you will hear incoming audio whether or not the track is record-enabled.
When set to Auto, you will hear incoming audio while the track is record-enabled only.
When set to Merge, the track's input is always monitored, and you will hear playback of recorded events.
Use the Audio Input field to set the input source for the track.
Use the Audio Output field to set the output destination for the track.
Use the Color field to change the track color.
Tap Delete Track at the bottom of the screen to remove the track.
Tap Reset Strip at the bottom of the screen to reset all mixer settings for the track.
Tap the -/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to move to the previous or next track.
44
Drum Tracks
Settings:
Tap the track name field to rename the track. Use the virtual keyboard that appears to enter a new name, and then
tap Do It to confirm or the gray bar at the top of the screen to cancel.
Use the Position field to change the location of the track, moving the other tracks in relation.
Use the Rec Arm field to arm (On) or disarm (Off) the track for recording.
Use the MIDI Routing fields to edit the MIDI routing for the track:
MIDI Input Port: Select the MIDI port from which to receive MIDI data. When set to All Ports, the track will
receive all incoming MIDI Data from any connected port. To view and edit the available ports, go to Preferences >
MIDI / Sync.
MIDI Input Channel: Sets the MIDI Channel from which to receive MIDI data. Select Any to receive from any MIDI
channel, or select 1–16.
MIDI Send: Sets where the MIDI data is sent. You can use this to send the MIDI data from one track to another
track.
Use the MIDI Monitor field to set the monitoring behavior of the track:
Off: The track's MIDI input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard. This setting is useful
when using keyboards with Local Control active.
In: The track's MIDI input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback from
recorded events will not be heard.
Auto: The track's MIDI input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded events will
be heard.
Merge: The track's MIDI input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
Use the Color field to change the track color.
Tap Delete Track at the bottom of the screen to remove the track.
Tap Reset Strip at the bottom of the screen to reset all mixer settings for the track.
Tap the -/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to move to the previous or next track.
To load a kit into a drum track:
1.
Press Menu and tap Browser to show the Browser.
2.
Tap the Drums content icon on the left side of the screen to display the factory kits, or navigate to another file
location and use the four-squares icon above the file list to show only kit files. (See Modes > Browser to learn
more about using the Browser specifically.)
3.
Find and select a kit, and then tap Load to load it to the track.
45
To load a sample into a drum track:
1.
Press Menu and tap Browser to show the Browser. If you have an empty pad selected, you can also tap the
Browse button in the Track area to open the Browser.
2.
Find and select a sample, and then tap Load to load it to the track. Repeat this for any other samples you want to
load into the project. (See Modes > Browser to learn more about using the Browser specifically.)
3.
Tap Sample Assign to view the pads and project’s sample pool.
4.
Press or tap a pad to select it. The pad will be lit green.
5.
In the Sample Pool list, double-tap a sample or press the data dial to assign it to the pad. Alternatively, tap and
drag from the Sample Pool list directly onto a pad to assign it.
To clear the assigned sample from a selected pad, tap Clear Pad.
To assign samples to additional pads, repeat Steps 3–4.
Tip: Remember that a drum track has 128 pads total—16 pads across eight banks.
Alternatively, assign samples in a drum track in Track Edit Mode in one of these two ways:
1.
Press Menu, and then tap Track Edit to enter Track
Edit Mode.
2.
Tap the Samples tab. This lets you view the samples
assigned to all eight layers of the current pad as well as
tuning and level parameters for each layer.
3.
Tap a pad to select it (and play its assigned samples, if
any).
4.
Tap one of the Layer 1–8 fields under the sample
waveform to select a layer. Tap the Sample field, and
then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select a
sample. Alternatively, double-tap the field for a layer,
and then tap a sample to select it.
1.
Press Menu, and then tap Track Edit to enter Track
Edit Mode.
2.
Tap the Samples tab until one of the last three pages
are selected. This lets you view the samples assigned
to all eight layers of the current pad as well as other
parameters for each layer depending on the page.
3.
Tap a pad to select it (and play its assigned samples, if
any).
4.
Tap the Layer 1–4/5–8 button to toggle between
groups of layers. Tap a Sample field, and then use the
data dial or –/+ buttons to select a sample.
Alternatively, double-tap the field for a layer, and then
tap a sample to select it.
46
Keygroup Tracks
Settings:
Tap the track name field to rename the track. Use the virtual keyboard that appears to enter a new name, and then
tap Do It to confirm or the gray bar at the top of the screen to cancel.
Use the Position field to change the location of the track, moving the other tracks in relation.
Use the Rec Arm field to arm (On) or disarm (Off) the track for recording.
Use the MIDI Routing fields to edit the MIDI routing for the track:
MIDI Input Port: Select the MIDI port from which to receive MIDI data. When set to All Ports, the track will receive
all incoming MIDI Data from any connected port. To view and edit the available ports, go to Preferences > MIDI
/ Sync.
MIDI Input Channel: Sets the MIDI Channel from which to receive MIDI data. Select Any to receive from any MIDI
channel, or select 1–16.
MIDI Send: Sets where the MIDI data is sent. You can use this to send the MIDI data from one track to another
track.
Use the MIDI Monitor field to set the monitoring behavior of the track:
Off: The track's MIDI input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard. This setting is useful
when using keyboards with Local Control active.
In: The track's MIDI input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback from
recorded events will not be heard.
Auto: The track's MIDI input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded events will
be heard.
Merge: The track's MIDI input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
Use the Color field to change the track color.
Use the Transpose field to adjust the transposition amount of the track.
Tap Delete Track at the bottom of the screen to remove the track.
Tap Reset Strip at the bottom of the screen to reset all mixer settings for the track.
Tap the -/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to move to the previous or next track.
47
To assign samples in a keygroup track:
1.
Press Menu, and then tap Track Edit to enter Track Edit Mode.
2.
Tap the Samples tab. This lets you view the samples assigned to all eight layers of the current keygroup as well
as other parameters for each layer depending on the selected page.
3.
Use the Number of KG field to set the number of keygroups in the track (1–128).
4.
Use the Keygroup field to select a keygroup.
5.
Tap the Layer 1–4/5–8 button to toggle between groups of layers. Tap a Sample field, and then use the data dial
or –/+ buttons to select a sample. Tap the field for a layer, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select a
sample. Alternatively, double-tap the field for a layer, and then tap a sample to select it.
To create complex keygroup track, you can add more keygroups (up to 128). This is useful when working with multi-
samples (e.g., when programming a real piano).
Tip: Remember that a keygroup track offers up to 128 keygroups, and each keygroup can hold up to eight samples
(Layers 1–8). This is a total of 1024 samples.
48
Plugin Tracks
To learn more about the plugins included with MPC, see Appendix > Plugins.
Settings:
Tap the track name field to rename the track. Use the virtual keyboard that appears to enter a new name, and then
tap Do It to confirm or the gray bar at the top of the screen to cancel.
Use the Position field to change the location of the track, moving the other tracks in relation.
Use the Plugin field to open the Plugin window to select a plugin for the track.
Tap Type or Manufacturer to sort your plugins by type or maker.
Tap Select to select the plugin, or tap Close to cancel.
Use the Preset field to select a Preset from the loaded plugin.
Use the Rec Arm field to arm (On) or disarm (Off) the track for recording.
Use the MIDI Routing fields to edit the MIDI routing for the track:
MIDI Input Port: Select the MIDI port from which to receive MIDI data. When set to All Ports, the track will
receive all incoming MIDI Data from any connected port. To view and edit the available ports, go to
Preferences > MIDI / Sync.
MIDI Input Channel: Sets the MIDI Channel from which to receive MIDI data. Select Any to receive from any MIDI
channel, or select 1–16.
MIDI Send: Sets where the MIDI data is sent. You can use this to send the MIDI data from one track to another
track.
Use the MIDI Monitor field to set the monitoring behavior of the track:
Off: The track's MIDI input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard. This setting is
useful when using keyboards with Local Control active.
In: The track's MIDI input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback from
recorded events will not be heard.
Auto: The track's MIDI input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded events
will be heard.
Merge: The track's MIDI input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
Use the Color field to change the track color.
Use the Transpose field to adjust the transposition amount of the track.
Tap Delete Track at the bottom of the screen to remove the track.
Tap Reset Strip at the bottom of the screen to reset all mixer settings for the track.
Tap the
-/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to move to the previous or next track.
49
MIDI Tracks
Settings:
Tap the track name field to rename the track. Use the virtual keyboard that appears to enter a new name, and then
tap Do It to confirm or the gray bar at the top of the screen to cancel.
Use the Position field to change the location of the track, moving the other tracks in relation.
Use the Rec Arm field to arm (On) or disarm (Off) the track for recording.
Use the MIDI Routing fields to edit the MIDI routing for the track:
MIDI Input Port: Select the MIDI port from which to receive MIDI data. When set to All Ports, the track will
receive all incoming MIDI Data from any connected port. To view and edit the available ports, go to
Preferences > MIDI / Sync.
MIDI Input Channel: Sets the MIDI Channel from which to receive MIDI data. Select Any to receive from any MIDI
channel, or select 1–16.
MIDI Output Port: Select the MIDI port to send MIDI data to. To view and edit the available ports, go to
Preferences > MIDI / Sync.
MIDI Output Channel: Sets the MIDI Channel to send MIDI data to. Select Any to receive from any MIDI
channel, or select 1–16.
MIDI Send: Sets where the MIDI data is sent. You can use this to send the MIDI data from one track to another
track.
Use the MIDI Monitor field to set the monitoring behavior of the track:
Off: The track's MIDI input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard. This setting is
useful when using keyboards with Local Control active.
In: The track's MIDI input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback from
recorded events will not be heard.
Auto: The track's MIDI input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded events
will be heard.
Merge: The track's MIDI input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
50
To select a MIDI program change value for the track to send, check the Program Change box to enable
program changes, and then double-tap the MIDI Program Change field. Use the number pad that appears to
enter a value from 1–127, then tap Do It. The track will send this value when played. Once enabled, you can also
select a MIDI bank change value by checking the Bank Change box to enable bank changes, and then use the
MIDI Bank MSB and MIDI Bank LSB fields to set the bank change values.
Use the Color field to change the track color.
Use the Transpose field to adjust the transposition amount of the track.
Tap Delete Track at the bottom of the screen to remove the track.
Tap Reset Strip at the bottom of the screen to reset all mixer settings for the track.
Tap the -/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to move to the previous or next track.
51
CV Tracks
Settings:
Tap the track name field to rename the track. Use the virtual keyboard that appears to enter a new name, and then
tap Do It to confirm or the gray bar at the top of the screen to cancel.
Use the Position field to change the location of the track, moving the other tracks in relation.
Use the Rec Arm field to arm (On) or disarm (Off) the track for recording.
Use the Type field to select Melodic or Drum CV track operation. Melodic CV tracks behave the same as previous
MPC versions. Drum CV tracks can be used to configure any pad to output on any CV port.
When Melodic type is selected, there are five additional settings to configure for a CV track: the CV Port, the Gate
Port, the modulation wheel port (Mod Wheel Port), Velocity Port and Note Priority. Tap each field and use the
data dial or -/+ buttons to edit the setting.
When Drum type is selected, tap the Edit Map button to assign each pad to a specific CV port and data type.
Use the MIDI Routing fields to edit the MIDI routing for the track:
MIDI Input Port: Select the MIDI port from which to receive MIDI data. When set to All Ports, the track will
receive all incoming MIDI Data from any connected port. To view and edit the available ports, go to
Preferences > MIDI / Sync.
MIDI Input Channel: Sets the MIDI Channel from which to receive MIDI data. Select Any to receive from any MIDI
channel, or select 1–16.
MIDI Send: Sets where the MIDI data is sent. You can use this to send the MIDI data from one track to another
track.
Use the MIDI Monitor field to set the monitoring behavior of the track:
Off: The track's MIDI input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard. This setting is
useful when using keyboards with Local Control active.
In: The track's MIDI input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback from
recorded events will not be heard.
Auto: The track's MIDI input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded events
will be heard.
Merge: The track's MIDI input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
Use the Color
field to change the track color.
Use the Transpose field to adjust the transposition amount of the track.
Tap Delete Track at the bottom of the screen to remove the track.
Tap Reset Strip at the bottom of the screen to reset all mixer settings for the track.
Tap the -/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to move to the previous or next track.
52
Menu
The Menu displays the available modes in MPC, as well as project information, hardware information, preferences,
save and load options, and more.
To open the Menu, press Menu, or tap the icon in the upper-left corner of the screen while in Main Mode.
When viewing the Menu, do any of the following:
To enter a mode, tap it.
To return to the previous mode, tap
in the upper-left corner, or press Menu again.
To change menu pages, tap the < or > arrows.
Tap New Project to open a new project.
Tap Save to open the Save Window.
Tap Project to open the Project window.
Tap Preferences to open the Preferences menu.
To rearrange the menu layout, tap and drag a mode icon to the desired location. All other mode icons will shift
to accommodate the new positioning. The five modes on the left side are also available to access in most screens
by swiping the black touch handle to the right from the left edge of the touchscreen. Tap the three-dots icon next
to the Sync setting and then tap Reset Mode Menu to revert all layout changes.
Click a part of the screen above to skip directly to that part of this user guide.
53
Toolbar
Sync
Tap the Sync field (in the center of the top of the screen) and then turn the data dial or use the –/+
buttons to set whether your MPC hardware receives MIDI Clock information (MIDI Clock), MIDI Time
Code information (MTC), communication from Ableton Link, or none of these (Off). Alternatively,
double-tap Sync and tap the desired option to select it.
This is the same setting as the Receive menu in the Preferences > MIDI / Sync tab.
Note: Ableton Link is a technology that synchronizes beat, phase, and tempo of Ableton Live and
Ableton Link-enabled applications over a wireless or wired network. See Preferences > Wi-Fi or
Preferences > Ethernet to learn how to connect to a network.
Help
Tap the ? icon to open the Help window. Scan the QR code that appears to open this User Guide.
Tap Close or the X to close the Help window.
Undo History
Tap the clock icon at the top of the screen to open the Undo History window. In the Undo History window, you can
view a list of recent actions along with a detail about the action if applicable.
Tap Undo to undo an action.
Tap Redo to redo an action.
Alternatively, tap and drag the red line in the action list to quickly undo or redo multiple actions. Actions below the red
line in grey have been undone.
Tap Close or the X to close the Undo History window.
54
Tuner
Tap the tuning fork at the top of the screen to open the
built-in tuner. The tuner allows you to easily tune any
connected audio sources such as guitars, basses, synth
modules, and other pitched instruments.
To tune your instrument, play a note and use the indicator
to adjust your instrument to the correct pitch.
Use the Input Channel field to select the input for the
instrument you would like to tune.
Use the Frequency of A field to set the base tuning
frequency.
Tap Close, the X in the upper-right corner, or anywhere
outside the window to close the tuner screen.
MIDI Monitor
Tap the I/O icons to open MPC's MIDI monitor. You can
use this to view incoming and outgoing MIDI data from
devices connected to your MPC hardware.
Tap the In button to view incoming MIDI data.
Tap the Out button to view outgoing MIDI data.
Tap the Clear button to clear the list of MIDI data.
Tap the Close button or the X to close the MIDI
Monitor.
Mode
Tap this icon to switch MPC to Controller Mode. In the
screen that appears, select whether you want to continue
to Controller Mode or Cancel and return to your current
mode and project. It is recommended to save your project
before switching to Computer Mode since you cannot freely
switch between Standalone and Controller Modes without
also closing your current project.
55
System Resources
Tap one of these icons to show the System Resources window for MPC.
The indicators in this window show current usage statistics:
Battery: If you are using MPC Live/Live II, the first indicator shows the current battery life as a percentage. If these
are connected to power, it will also show the charging status. (See Battery Usage to learn more about MPC
Live/Live II’s internal battery.)
CPU: The CPU indicator shows the current CPU as a percentage.
RAM Usage: The Mem indicator shows your MPC hardware’s current RAM usage.
Important: If you encounter a warning that there is not enough memory to complete an action while using your
MPC hardware, do the following to make more memory available:
Make sure all audio tracks in your project are not record-armed.
Remove unused samples from your project’s sample pool that were there before the warning appeared, and
discard unused regions of samples that have been loaded within the project.
If you are still seeing the warning, do the following:
1.
Manually undo the last action you performed before seeing the warning (you may not be able to use the Undo
button for this due to how the undo history is stored in RAM).
2.
Save your project.
3.
Do one of the following, and then load your saved project again.
•
Open the Menu, and then tap New Project at the bottom of the screen.
•
Power your MPC hardware off and then on again.
•
Press Menu and then tap the gear icon to open the Preferences. In the Preferences, tap Reset at the
bottom of the screen, tap OK, and then tap Restart to reset the Preferences.
•
Enter Controller Mode and then reenter Standalone Mode.
Important: Although you can load multiple files at once, any samples you load into a project will be automatically
converted to full-quality uncompressed audio files, so they may use more storage space than they do on your
external storage device. If you are unable to load multiple files at once due to this, select fewer files and try again.
Drives: The Drives indicator shows the available storage space on any detected external storage devices or the
internal drive of your MPC hardware.
To delete samples from the project (to create more free RAM space for sampling time, audio recording, etc.), tap
Purge. In the screen that appears, tap Unused Samples to delete all unused samples from the project, tap All
Samples to delete all samples from the project (from all tracks, sequences, and audio or MIDI tracks), or tap Cancel
to return to the previous screen.
To close the System Resources window, tap OK, the X in the upper-right corner, or anywhere outside the window.
56
Project
To open the Project window, tap the Project button at the bottom of the Menu. The Project window shows an
overview of all samples and tracks in the current project.
Tap Purge to delete samples from the project (to create more free RAM space for sampling time, audio recording,
etc.). In the screen that appears, tap Unused Samples to delete all unused samples from the project, tap All
Samples to delete all samples from the project (from all kits and audio or MIDI tracks), or tap Cancel to return to
the previous screen. Alternatively, tap to select a sample and then tap Delete at the bottom of the screen.
Tap Memory and Streaming to show or hide files in memory or streaming from disk. Before doing this, you must
first enable Disk Streaming by going to Menu > Preferences > Audio/Export and checking the Enable Disk
Streaming box. Disk streaming allows audio files to be streamed from a disk drive rather than from memory.
Note: Disk streaming relies on the performance of the disk you are streaming from. For best operation, it is
recommended to use an SSD (solid-state drive) connected to your MPC’s internal SATA port (if available).
Once you have saved a project to your SSD, your files will stream from that location. For an unsaved project,
MPC uses a temporary file location from which to stream audio files. Go to Menu > Preferences > Project
Load/Save and set the Temporary File Location to your SSD for best results.
To change a sample from streaming from memory to streaming from disk, tap and hold on a sample name in
the Project list, and then select Stream From Disk in the menu that appears. A sample’s streaming or memory
state will be saved and recalled with your project.
Note: Using streamed samples with Drum and Keygroup tracks may cause performance issues when
triggering multiple samples or retriggering at high rates.
If a project is too large to be loaded into memory, your MPC hardware will load the project and display the
missing samples in the Project window with a waveform with a red minus icon. Once enough memory has
been freed up, the missing samples can then be loaded from the Project window. Tap and hold on the sample
name and then select Load To Memory from the menu that appears.
Tap a sample or select it using the data dial or -/+ buttons to preview it.
Tap Save at the bottom of the screen to save the selected sample.
Tap Rename at the bottom of the screen to rename the selected sample. Use the keyboard that appears to enter
a name and then tap Do It to confirm.
Tap Edit at the bottom of the screen to open Sample Edit mode to edit the selected sample.
Tap Audition at the bottom of the screen to open the Audition settings.
Tap Auto to enable or disable automatic audition when a sound is selected.
Tap and drag the level slider up or down to set the audition volume level.
Tap Sync to enable or disable auditioning samples at the beginning of the next bar of the sequence when
playback is active.
Tap Warp to enable or disable samples with an embedded tempo to be warped to the project tempo. Samples
with no embedded tempo or externally-embedded tempo will not be affected by this setting.
Tap the Audition icon once more to hide the window.
57
Preferences
To open the Preferences, tap the Preferences at the
bottom of the Menu.
To return to the Menu, tap the
icon in the upper-left
corner. Changes to the Preferences are saved automatically.
To restore your MPC hardware’s default settings, tap
Reset Preferences. In the screen that appears, tap OK to
continue or Cancel to return to the Preferences. In the next
window, tap Save to save your current project before
restoring the default settings; tap Cancel to return to the
Preferences; or tap Don’t Save to restore the default
settings without saving your current project.
Info
This screen shows current information about your MPC hardware: its current firmware version, which includes its
standalone operating system (MPC Firmware); its hardware Serial Number; and its current firmware for the Control
Surface.
Tap Update to update your MPC.
Select Online Update to automatically download and install the latest update (you must enable a network
connection for this to work).
Select USB Drive Update to update from a file on a connected USB drive.
Select Switch to Update Mode to connect your MPC to your computer for updating. In the screen that appears,
tap Save to save your current project before entering Update Mode; tap Cancel to return to the Preferences; or
tap Don’t Save to enter Update Mode without saving your current project.
Tap Reset Preferences to reset all MPC preferences to their default settings.
To view legal information relevant to MPC, press and hold Shift and tap Legal Info. For complete legal
information, visit akaipro.com/product-legal.
To view additional version information, press and hold Shift and tap Version Info.
Activations
The settings on this screen allow you to sign in to your inMusic Profile to activate purchased plugin licenses.
1.
First, make sure you are connected to a Wi-Fi or Ethernet network.
2.
In the Activate Plugins menu, tap the Log In button to log into your inMusic Profile. You can scan the QR code
with a mobile device or open the URL shown on the page in a browser of your choice. Enter the code shown on
your device and log into your account. If you do not already have an account, you will be prompted to create one.
3.
Once you have been logged in, you can try out plugin instruments through a free trial, or activate your purchases.
To start a trial, tap the Get Trial button next to the desired plugin.
To register a purchase, use the Enter Serial field to enter your serial number and then tap Register.
To refresh the page with your latest purchases or activations, tap Refresh.
To activate a plugin on your device, tap the Activate button next to its name. Tap Deactivate to remove the
plugin activation from your device.
To download a purchase to your device, first tap the Change button at the bottom of the touchscreen to select
a Content Download Drive. This can be the internal storage drive or a connected SATA drive, USB drive, or SD
card. Then, tap the download icon to begin downloading the plugin to your drive. The download icon will change
to show the installation progress. Once the process is complete, you can use your plugin with standalone MPC.
To log out of your account, tap Log Out.
58
Wi-Fi
The settings on this screen will determine how your MPC hardware's wireless connection works, so you can use
Ableton Link, a technology that synchronizes beat, phase, and tempo of Ableton Live and Ableton Link-enabled
applications over a wireless or wired network.
Tap the On/Off selector to activate or deactivate wireless connectivity on your MPC hardware. The available
wireless networks will appear in the panel below it.
Tap the desired wireless network to select it, then tap Connect to connect to it. If the Wi-Fi network is password-
protected, use the virtual keyboard that appears to enter the correct password to connect to it. Tap Show to
display the password as you type it.
To view the information of a selected wireless network, press and hold Shift and tap Info. The Network
Information window that appears will show the network name, IPv4/IPv6 address (including the subnet mask and
gateway), type of security, and signal strength (as a percentage).
To disconnect from a connected wireless network, select it and then tap Disconnect.
To clear the connection information (e.g., the password) from a selected wireless network, select it and then
tap Forget.
Ethernet
The settings on this screen will determine how your MPC hardware connects to a wired network using a USB-to-
Ethernet adapter or Ethernet cable (MPC One, MPC Live II, MPC Key 61 only). This allows you to maintain a tighter
network connection when using Ableton Link or the Akai Network Driver. These settings are available only for MPC X,
MPC X SE, MPC Live, MPC Live II, MPC One, MPC One+, MPC Key 61, and MPC Key 37 when used in Standalone
Mode.
To activate or deactivate Ethernet connectivity on your MPC hardware, tap the Enabled box.
To determine how your MPC hardware connects to the network, use the Address Method dropdown. Select
Automatic to have your MPC hardware set the Ethernet connection, or Manual to set it yourself.
When setting the Ethernet connection manually, tap the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS fields to
input the values.
Bluetooth
The settings on this screen will determine how your MPC hardware’s Bluetooth connection works, so you can use
Bluetooth MIDI controllers (e.g., LPD8 Wireless or LPK25 Wireless) or a Bluetooth computer keyboard with it. These
settings are available only for MPC X, MPC X SE, MPC Live, MPC Live II, MPC One+, MPC Key 61, and MPC Key 37
when used in Standalone Mode.
To activate or deactivate Bluetooth connectivity on your MPC hardware, tap the On/Off selector. The available
Bluetooth devices will appear in the panel below it under
Available Devices. The Bluetooth devices that have
already paired to your MPC hardware will appear under Paired Devices.
To select a Bluetooth device, tap it.
To pair a selected Bluetooth device (in the Available Devices section), tap Pair.
To connect to a selected Bluetooth device (in the Paired Devices section), tap Connect.
To disconnect from a connected Bluetooth device (in the Paired Devices section), tap Disconnect.
To return an available Bluetooth device to its original state, tap Remove.
Audio Device
The settings on this screen allow you to set up an external USB and Linux class-compliant audio interface for use with
your MPC hardware. Audio devices must also be set to 44.1 kHz sample rate and 128 sample buffer size.
Note: If you are unsure of your audio interface’s compatibility, check with the original equipment manufacturer for
more information.
Audio Device: This determines whether you are using the Internal sound device, or a selected class-compliant
audio interface connected to your MPC hardware.
32 Inputs/Outputs: Check this box to enable use of up to 32 simultaneous inputs and outputs.
Note: Increasing the number of simultaneous inputs and outputs will also increase CPU overhead.
59
Audio/Export
The settings on this screen determine the settings for audio, recording, and exporting.
Enable Disk Streaming: This determines whether disk streaming is enabled or disabled. MPC will require a restart
after disk streaming is enabled or disabled, which may require you to save or discard changes to the current
project. Once enabled, a sample can be set to stream from disk or memory using the Project window. By default,
Drum and Keygroup samples are loaded into memory, as this works better for on-demand, rapid triggering of
multiple, simultaneous voices.
Note: Disk streaming relies on the performance of the disk you are streaming from. For best operation, it is
recommended to use an SSD (solid-state drive) connected to your MPC hardware’s internal SATA port, if available.
Once you have saved a project to your SSD, your files will stream from that location. For an unsaved project, your
MPC hardware uses a temporary file location from which to stream audio files. Go to Preferences > Project
Load/Save and set the Temporary File Location to your SSD for best results.
Recording Bit Depth: This determines the bit depth of recorded audio.
Bounce/Extract Bit Depth: This determines the bit depth of audio bounced or extracted: 16-bit or 24-bit.
Audio Export: This determines what part of the sequence is exported when you click the Export Audio icon.
Track: When this is selected, Export Audio will export the currently shown track in the current sequence.
Main: When this is selected, Export Audio will export all tracks in that sequence that use programs routed to
main outputs.
Audio Tail Length: This determines the length of an audio tail (silence) that will be applied to the exported audio
file. When set to 0, the audio file will not have any additional audio tail.
Include Track Volume/Pan Settings: When enabled, the exported audio or MIDI file will include its volume and
pan settings. When disabled, the volume and pan settings will be set to 0 dB and center (C), respectively.
Bypass Track Effects Plugins: When enabled, the exported audio or MIDI file will include any third-party effect plugins
that are used with it, but those effects will be bypassed (deactivated). When disabled, those effects will be activated.
Default Audio Warp Algorithm: This determines the default time-stretching algorithm, which determines how a
sample is “warped” when you adjust the length of a sample without changing its pitch (e.g., the Warp function in
Audio Region Edit Mode for audio tracks or in Track Edit Mode for Drum/Keygroup tracks). Select Pro Ten or
Repitch. When using Repitch, warping an audio sample will adjust its pitch to synchronize it with the MPC tempo.
You can override the default algorithm by selecting another option in the Samples Tab or Track Edit Mode or by
changing the algorithm in Grid View.
Note: Warp algorithms can be very CPU-intensive, and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if used too
freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function.
Audio Track Auto Warp: This determines how recorded audio track regions are warped. When set to On, any
audio track region that you record will be warped automatically to match the current project tempo. You can then
adjust the project tempo while the audio track region remains in time.
Note: When you record an audio file, the current project tempo will be embedded with it. This information is stored
within the sample file when you save the project. When you warp an audio track region, the warping algorithm uses
this project tempo and the current value in the BPM field to generate the “stretch factor.”
BPM Auto Detection: This enables automatic detection of BPM from loaded samples.
BPM Detection Range: This defines the range of detectable BPM values when you use any automatic BPM
detection function in the software or when you press the Tap button to enter a new tempo.
MIDI / Sync
The settings on this screen determine how your MPC hardware uses and synchronizes with connected USB and MIDI
devices.
Input Ports: This displays all available MIDI input ports in a list. Double-tap the keyboard icon to rename a port
to a custom name. When Global is enabled, MIDI data from this port will always go to the current track. When
Control is enabled, MIDI data from this port will be sent to MIDI Learn. When Track is enabled, this MIDI port will
appear in the list of available MIDI Inputs. Click the reset arrow to reset the MDI Port settings.
Output Ports: This displays all available MIDI output ports in a list. Double-tap the keyboard icon to rename a port
to a custom name. When Sync is enabled, the MIDI output port will send MIDI sync messages according to the type
set under Sync Send, below. When Track is enabled, this MIDI port will appear in the list of available track MIDI
outputs. Click the reset arrow to reset the MDI Port settings.
Enable MIDI Ports When Discovered: When enabled, any time a MIDI device is plugged in the Track option is
automatically enabled so the ports can be selected as an available MIDI input or output.
60
MIDI Control Mode Output: This determines which MIDI port the MPC hardware is using to send MIDI messages
to external MIDI devices.
Receive: This determines whether your MPC hardware receives MIDI Clock information (MIDI Clock), MIDI Time Code
information (MIDI Time Code (MTC)), communication from Ableton Link (Ableton Link), or none of these (Off).
Important: Audio recording is disabled when receiving MIDI Clock sync. Use MIDI Time Code to record audio
while receiving MIDI sync.
Ableton Start/Stop Sync: When enabled, this allows devices connected with Ableton Link to share start/stop
commands.
Receive MMC: When enabled, your MPC hardware will be able to receive MIDI Machine Control (MMC) information.
When disabled, your MPC hardware will not receive this information. See Appendix > MIDI Machine Control
(MMC) to learn about this.
Send: This determines whether your MPC hardware sends MIDI Clock information (MIDI Clock), MIDI Time Code
information (MIDI Time Code (MTC)), or neither (Off).
Send MMC: When enabled, your MPC hardware will be able to send MIDI Machine Control (MMC) information. When
disabled, your MPC hardware will not send this information. See Appendix > MIDI Machine Control (MMC) to learn
about this.
MTC Frame Rate: This determines the frame rate used by MIDI Time Code (MTC), which is important for correct
timing, especially when working on film scoring projects. In most cases, you should select 25.
Start Time: This is the starting time that will be sent when Send MIDI is set to anything other than Off. The time
is formatted in hours:minutes:seconds:frames.
Filter ‘All Notes Off’ CC: When enabled, “All Notes Off” (“MIDI panic”) messages will be ignored. This is useful if
you are using an external MIDI device that can send these types of messages, but you want to filter them out.
When disabled, “All Notes Off” messages will be received normally.
Program Change: This determines what an incoming MIDI program change message will change: a Sequence or
Track.
Hardware
The settings on this screen determine the behavior of your MPC hardware’s pads and touchscreen.
Pad Brightness: This determines the overall brightness of your MPC hardware’s pads.
Battery Brightness Factor (MPC Live/Live II only): This determines how much the overall brightness is reduced
when operating on battery power.
Pad Threshold: This determines how much force is required to strike the pads for them to trigger.
Pad Sensitivity: This determines how the pads respond to touch. At lower values, you need to use more force to
generate a high-velocity note. At higher values, it is easier to generate high-velocity notes, even if you do not use
much force while pressing a pad.
Pad Curve: This determines how striking the pads translates into velocity values. The A
curve is essentially linear, while the B, C, and D curves are exponential (see graphic here).
Velocity & Aftertouch: View these meters when striking and pressing the pads to help
gauge the force and pressure you are applying to them. These meters are useful when
adjusting the Pad Threshold and Pad Sensitivity parameters (above).
Footswitch 1 & Footswitch 2 (MPC X/X SE only): These determine how connected
footswitches will work.
Battery Power & Wall Power Dimming: These settings determine how much time must
pass before your MPC automatically dims its touchscreen when on battery power (MPC
Live/Live II only) and wall power.
Battery Power & Wall Power Brightness: These settings determine the brightness of the screen during normal
operation while on battery power (MPC Live/Live II only) and wall power: Dimmest, Dim, Bright, or Brightest.
Power On Screen (MPC Live, MPC Live II only): This determines if/when a special screen will appear when you
power on your MPC Live/Live II. On this screen, you must tap and hold a button for a moment to begin using MPC
Live/Live II or it will automatically power off. This feature prevents it from powering on accidentally and wasting
battery life. You can set it to the following options:
Never: The screen will never appear.
When On Battery: The screen will appear only if you power on MPC Live/Live II while using battery power.
Always: The screen will always appear.
Tap Tempo: This determines how many times you must press the Tap button before the new tempo is recognized.
61
Flash Tap Tempo Light: When enabled, the Tap button’s light will flash in time with the tempo. When disabled,
the Tap button’s light will be off.
Bank Button Press: This determines how the Pad Bank buttons work.
Select A-D: Pressing a Pad Bank button once will select the corresponding bank from Pad Banks A–D.
Pressing and holding Shift while pressing a Pad Bank button will select the corresponding bank from Pad
Banks E–H.
Select/toggle bank: Pressing a Pad Bank button will alternate between the corresponding bank from Pad
Bank A–D and Pad Bank E–H. In other words, you do not need to hold Shift to select one of Pad Banks E–H.
Shift + Q-Link Press: This setting determines whether pressing Shift and the Q-Link button opens Q-Link Edit or
Cycles Backwards between the Q-Link columns.
Global Pitch Bend: Enable this option to override the pitch bend settings of all tracks, so that those with pitch bend
disabled or set to different ranges will only use the Global Range instead. When disabled, all tracks may use their
individual pitch bend settings.
Range Down / Range Up: Use these fields to determine the range of pitch bend in semitones.
VU Meter Source (MPC X/X SE only): This determines what audio signal level is shown in the level meters (on the
right side of the screen). When set to Main, the level meters show the audio signal sent out of Outputs 1/2 (the
Main L/R outputs on the rear panel). When set to Current Track, the level meters show the audio signal of the
currently selected track.
Date: This is the current date, formatted as Month / Day / Year. When saving files on MPC in Standalone Mode,
the file will include the current date in its metadata. If you use MPC in Controller Mode, this setting will be
overwritten with the current date of the host computer.
Time: This is the current time, formatted as Hour : Minute. When saving files on MPC in Standalone Mode, the
file will include the current time in its metadata. If you use MPC in Controller Mode, this setting will be overwritten
with the current time of the host computer.
Time Zone: This is the current time zone, formatted as Continent / City, which you can change here.
Sequencer
The settings on this screen determine how sequencing works in the Grid View and in the Step Sequencer.
Note Length (Playback): This determines if/how events are cropped if they exceed the length of the current track
during playback.
As Recorded: Events will play back exactly as they were recorded, even if they overlap themselves when the
sequence loops.
Truncate Length: If the length of an event exceeds the length of the sequence, it will be truncated. This
ensures that the event will not overlap itself when the sequence loops.
Track Mute State Per Sequence: When enabled, you can maintain separate track mute statuses when changing
sequences. This can allow you to create unique mute setups for each sequence, providing greater flexibility in live
performance and arrangement creation.
Solo Behavior: This determines the behavior of the Solo buttons. When set to Single, only one track can be soloed
at a time by default. However, you can still press and hold Shift to solo multiple tracks at the same time. When set
to Multi, you can solo multiple tracks at the same time by default.
Rec Arm Behavior: This determines the behavior of the Record Arm buttons. When set to Single, selecting a different
track will automatically arm that track and disarm all other tracks. This is the default mode and is the same as previous
MPC releases. You can also arm multiple tracks on Single mode by holding Shift and tapping each track’s record
button. When set to Multi, you can tap any track's record button to add it to the group of armed tracks.
Record Track Mute and Solo Events: When enabled, track mute and solo events are recorded when you are in
Track Mute Mode (timing correct settings will affect the recorded position events). When disabled, track mute and
solo events will not be recorded while in Track Mute Mode. This feature is useful if you want to use Track Mute
Mode to record track mutes or solos into your sequences as opposed to using Track Mute Mode for performance
or listening purposes only.
Record Pad Aftertouch Events: When enabled, pad aftertouch data (from the MPC hardware’s pressure-sensitive
pads) will be recorded. When disabled, pad aftertouch data will be ignored.
62
Place Events Recorded During Count-In at Start Point: When enabled, pressing a pad during the recording’s
pre-count will record that note event at the start of the recording (this is how the MPC3000 worked). When disabled,
no notes will be recorded until the pre-count is finished and recording has begun.
Note: This setting is ignored when recording with the Arpeggiator active.
Note Length (Recording): This determines if/how events are cropped if they exceed the length of the current
Sequence during recording:
Truncate To Sequence Length: If the length of an event exceeds the length of the sequence, it will be
truncated. This ensures that the event will not overlap itself when the sequence loops.
Truncate To Sequence End: If an event exceeds the length of the sequence, it will be truncated to the end of
the current sequence. In other words, the event will stop playing when the sequence ends or loops.
As Played: Events will play back exactly as they were recorded, even if they overlap themselves when the
sequence loops.
For example, if you record a note starting on the second bar of a 4-bar loop and
hold it for 5 bars, the note will end: at bar 7 (As Played), at bar 6 (To Sequence
Length), or bar 4 (To Sequence End). See image for details.
Q-Link Playhead Increment: This determines how the playhead moves when
controlled by the Q-Link knob. Select 1/16 Note to lock playhead movement to 1/16 notes, or select TC Division
to have the playhead movement tied to the current Timing Correct division. This value can be set in the Timing
Correct window in Grid View by tapping the clock icon at the bottom-left of the grid.
Q-Link Swing Control Applies TC Settings on Release: When enabled, turning the Q-Link knob assigned to
Swing and then releasing it will immediately apply that Swing setting. When disabled, you must use the Timing
Correct window to apply the Swing setting.
Display Resolution: This is the display resolution (in PPQN—pulses per quarter note) of pulse values in certain areas
of the operating system. Please note that this setting affects the display resolution, not the timing.
Project Defaults
The settings on this screen determine various default values for any new project that you create.
Default Tempo: This is the default tempo in BPM.
Default Global Tempo: When enabled, the default tempo value will be used for the global tempo. When disabled,
the default tempo will be used for sequences.
Default Mode: This determines the default mode when MPC is powered on; Main Mode or Sounds mode.
Default Q-Link Mode: This determines the default Q-Link Mode: Screen, Project 1–2, Track, Pad Scene, Pad
Parameter, Track FX Rack, MIDI, Volume, Pan, Send 1–4.
Default Sequence Bars: This determines the default number of bars of a new sequence.
Default Sequence Loop: This determines whether loop is enabled by default or not.
Default Time Signature Numerator: This determines the default number of beats per bar in the time signature.
Default Time Signature Denominator: This determines the default note value of each beat in the time signature.
Default Pad Slice: This determines how new samples will play when you load them or record them into a project.
When set to Pad, the Slice menu in Track Edit Mode will be set to Pad, which lets you set the start point, end
point, etc. for the layer. When set to All, the Slice menu in Track Edit Mode will be set to All, in which the entire
sample plays.
Default Drum Filter: This determines the default type of filter that drum tracks will use. See Appendix > Glossary
> Filter to learn about this.
Default Plugin Synth: This determines the default instrument plugin that a new plugin track will use. Use the
window that appears to select it.
Default Audio Monitor: This determines the default audio monitoring behavior: Off (default), In, Auto, or Merge.
Default MIDI Monitor: This determines the default MIDI monitoring behavior: Off, In, Auto (default), or Merge.
Use Fixed Track/Row Color: Check this box to enable all tracks to be created using a fixed color.
Default Track/Row Color: Use this option to select the default color used when the Use Fixed Track/Row Color
option is enabled.
Enable Pads User Level By Default: Check this box to enable all pads to play at the set user level by default.
Leave this box unchecked to use standard velocity response by default.
Default Pads User Level Velocity: This sets the default pad velocity that is used when the Enable Pads User
Level By Default setting is on. You can also set the user level velocity by pressing and holding the Full Level
button on your MPC hardware.
Bar 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
As played
To Sequence Length
To Sequence End
63
Project Load/Save
The settings on this screen determine if (and how) projects are automatically saved. If you are using MPC hardware as
a controller, you can also define files to load automatically.
New Project Behavior: This determines what is loaded when a New Project is selected: and Empty Project, the
default Factory Project, or the User Auto Load Project file.
User Auto Load File: Use this field to select a project (.xpj) or program (.xpm) to load automatically anytime you
open the MPC software or your standalone MPC hardware.
Note: If the New Project Dialog setting under Project Defaults is set to Demo or Demo/Template/Recent, selecting
Empty Project will load the Auto Load project if one is selected. If no Auto Load project is selected, choosing
Empty project will load an empty project. If you have an Auto Load project selected and would still like to create
an empty project, press and hold Shift and then tap Empty project. If the Project Defaults is set to Off, the Auto
Load project will be loaded on startup.
New Project Dialog: This determines what options you see when you start a new project. When set to Off, a new
project will be empty with no preconfigured settings except for the project defaults shown here. When set to Demo,
you can choose to load a demo project (from several different genres) as a starting point or an empty project. When
set to Recent, you can select from recently loaded projects. When set to Demo/Template/Recent, you can
choose to load a demo project, a project template file, or a recently loaded project. You must have a project in the
Template File field of the Project Load/Save tab to select a template in this window.
Template File: Use this field to select a project template that will load automatically when you select User
Template in the New Project Dialog window. (If you select the Save as Template box when saving a file, it will
be shown in this field.) For the User Template option to be available, New Project Dialog (in the Project Defaults
tab) must be set to Demo or Demo/Template/Recent.
Temporary File Location: Use this field to select a location on your device or connected external media as a
record path for temporary files.
Auto Save Enabled: When enabled, your project will automatically save after each Timeout interval. When
disabled, your project will not be automatically saved; you may save only manually.
Auto Save Timeout: Use this field to select how often your project will automatically save.
General
The settings on this screen determine how other features work in the hardware and operating system.
Vintage Mode: This determines the type of emulation applied to the audio output. You can apply the particular
sonic qualities of, for example, the MPC3000 or MPC60, or of course no emulation (None).
Audition Auto Play: This determines how long a sample will sound when auto-previewing it.
Audition Outputs: This determines which pair of outputs will play any auditioned sounds (Out 1,2–7,8 in Standalone
Mode, Out 1,2–31,32 in Controller Mode; as available). These sounds include: samples, tracks, and projects in the
Browser; sample playback,
Cue Preview, and Slice Preview in Sample Edit Mode; and sample playback in the Keep
or Discard Sample window in the Sampler.
Cue Preview: This determines if/how audio is played as you move the cue playhead. As you move the cue
playhead through a sample waveform, you can set it to play the small part of the sample before the cue playhead
(Before), play the small part of the sample after the cue playhead (After), or not play at all (Off). You can also set
this in Sample Edit Mode (see Modes > Sample Edit Mode > Settings).
Slice Preview: This determines if/how audio is played as you move a slice marker. As you move the slice marker
through a sample waveform, you can set it to play the small part of the sample before the slice marker (Before),
play the small part of the sample after the slice marker (After), or not play at all (Off). You can also set this in
Sample Edit Mode (see Modes > Sample Edit Mode > Settings).
Show Mode Shortcut Panel: When enabled, you can access the mode shortcut panel by swiping to the right on
the grey bar on the left-edge of the screen. You can use the Mode Menu layout editing to put your five most-used
modes in this shortcut panel for easy access. This is disabled by default.
BPM Detection Range: This defines the range of detectable BPM values when you use any automatic BPM
detection function in the software or when you press the Tap button to enter a new tempo.
Show Q-Link Status When Touched: When enabled, touching the Q-Link knobs opens a pop-up showing the
current Q-Link assignments and values.
Automation Lane Follows Q-Links: When enabled, touching a Q-Link will automatically show the current
automation status in the Grid View automation lane.
Collect Usage Statistics: This determines whether or not your usage statistics will be sent occasionally to us,
enabling us to improve the MPC experience.
64
Splice
The settings on this screen control integration with the Splice platform.
To access Splice from this page:
1.
First, make sure your MPC hardware is connected to a Wi-Fi network. See Preferences > Wi-Fi to learn how to
connect to a wireless network. You will also need access to a web browser.
2.
Tap the Get Login Code button. (If you are not connected to a network, you will be prompted to do so before the
Get Login Code button appears.)
3.
Follow the on-screen instructions to link your MPC to your Splice account via a web browser. It may take your
MPC a few moments to successfully link.
4.
A message will appear on screen when the link has been successfully established. Tap OK to continue and return
to the Splice Preferences page.
5.
Once the process is complete and your MPC has been paired to your Splice account, tap the Sync Files button
to download samples from your Splice account via Wi-Fi to a drive of your choice.
By default, files will be stored on the Internal drive. You can change the selected drive by tapping the Change
button under Sync Files To Drive.
To browse samples imported from Splice:
1.
Open the Browser.
2.
Under the Content tab, tap the Splice shortcut icon to view samples downloaded from your Splice account.
If nothing appears, make sure that you have connected your Splice account and synced your files by following the
directions above.
3.
The right-side of the browser will display your Splice samples organized into a series of top-level folders, allowing
you to easily browse your sample library by BPM, Instrument, Key, Pack or Tag. The All Your Samples folder will
show a list of all samples you have downloaded.
Note: The original sample files are stored in the By Pack folder on your drive. Other folders such as By Instrument
contain internal links to help sort the samples by various tags. If the By Pack folder on your drive is deleted, the files in
the remaining folders will become unusable. To fully remove all files, the entire Splice directory should be deleted.
IMPORTANT: Drives formatted using the FAT32 system do not support these internal links. For these drives, and on
the internal storage drives of some earlier MPCs, samples will only be sorted in the By Pack folder. We recommend
using an exFAT file system on external drives used with MPC, as it is the most robust one supported by both Windows
and macOS.
To view the number of samples available to download from your account, tap the Check For Update button.
To log out of a Splice account, tap the Log Out button.
65
Save Window
The Save Window lets you save your project, tracks, and samples in a variety of ways.
To open the Save window, press Menu to open the Menu and then tap Save at the top of the screen.
On MPC Key 37, you can also press the Save button.
To save a project, tap Project or Project As. If a project has not been saved before, both options will open the
Save window, described below. If a project has been saved before, tapping Project will automatically overwrite
the most recently saved version.
Tap New Project to open a new project.
Tap Track to save the current track.
Tap Track FX Rack to save the current track inserts.
Tap Drum Program when a Drum track is selected to save the current drum kit.
Tap Plugin Program when a Program track is selected to save the current plugin program.
Tap Keygroup when a Keygroup track is selected to save the current keygroup.
Tap MIDI Program when a MIDI track is selected to save the current MIDI program.
Tap CV Program when a MIDI track is selected to save the current CV program.
Tap Sample when an audio sample is selected to save it.
Tap Track as Audio to save the currently selected track as audio.
Check the Include Track Volume/Pan Settings box to include these settings in the export.
Check the Bypass Track Effects Plugins box to not include track effects plugins in the export.
Use the Audio Tail field to set the amount, in seconds, of extra time added to the end of the resulting audio
files.
Use the Bit Depth field to set the bit depth to 8, 16 or 24.
Use the Sample Rate field to set the sample rate to 44.1, 48, 88.2 or 96 kHz. In most cases, we recommend
selecting 44.1 kHz.
Tap Track as MIDI/Pattern when a MIDI track is selected to save it as a MIDI pattern file.
Use the Export MIDI As
field to set the export the track as MIDI files or MPC Pattern files.
Tap All Tracks to save all current tracks in the project.
Use the same settings for Track as Audio or Track as MIDI/Pattern depending on how you would like to
save the tracks.
66
Tap Audio Mixdown to save the project as an audio mixdown.
Use the Start Bar and End Bar fields under Audio Length to set the time range that you want to mix down.
You can add a number of seconds to the end of the mixdown to capture any ringing notes or effects (such as
a reverb tail) by adjusting the Audio Tail field.
Use the fields under Render Source and Render Options to set the parameters for the audio mixdown. Check
the Separate Tracks box to render each track of the arrangement as stems.
Use the fields at the bottom of the screen to configure the audio mixdown settings. You can set the File
Format, Bit Depth, and Sample Rate.
Tap Ableton Live Set to save the project as an Ableton Live set.
Use the Export MIDI As settings to choose how MIDI tracks are exported, either as Audio files or MIDI files.
When using Plugin, Drum or Keygroup tracks, you can render sequences as Audio to preserve the sound of
the instruments, or render sequences as MIDI data.
Check the Include Track Volume/Pan Settings box to include these settings in the export. When disabled,
the volume and pan settings will be set to 0 dB and center (C), respectively.
Check the Bypass Track Effects Plugins box to deactivate any third-party effect plugins used with the track
for the export. When disabled, those effects will be activated.
Use the Audio Tail field to set the amount, in seconds, of extra time added to the end of the resulting audio
files.
Use the Bit Depth field to set the bit depth to 8, 16 or 24.
Use the Sample Rate field to set the sample rate to 44.1, 48, 88.2 or 96 kHz.
Tap Drum Pads as Stems when a drum track is selected to render an audio stem for each pad with events in the
drum track. This allows you to export your stems to a DAW for greater flexibility in mixing and post-production.
Use the Audio Tail field to set the amount, in seconds, of extra time added to the end of the resulting audio
stem files.
Use the fields at the bottom of the screen to configure the audio mixdown settings. You can set the File
Format, Bit Depth, and Sample Rate.
After selecting the save type, use the following to select a save location:
Tap a device from the Storage column on the left side to select
it.
Internal is the internal drive of your MPC hardware.
MPC Documents is a shortcut to the MPC Documents
folder on the internal drive of your MPC hardware.
If you have storage devices connected to USB ports or SD
card slot of your MPC hardware, they will appear in this
column, as well.
Double-tap a folder to enter it. You can also tap one of the five
folder buttons in the upper-right to jump immediately to pre-
assigned file paths set in the Browser.
Tap New Folder to create a new folder. Use the virtual keyboard that appears to enter a name, and then tap Do
It. You will immediately enter the new folder.
Tap the folder/
icon in the upper-left corner to move up one folder level.
Tap the File Name field at the bottom of the screen to name the file.
Tap Save to save the file.
Check the Save as Template checkbox before tapping Save to save the file as a project template file. This file
will be shown in the Template File field in the Preferences’ Project Load/Save tab.
Tap Cancel to cancel and return to the Menu. Alternatively, tap the
icon in the upper-left corner.
67
Pull-Down Menu
The pull-down can be accessed from any MPC3 mode, giving you quick and easy access to a variety of commonly
used tools and information.
To open the pull-down menu, tap and drag from the middle-top of the screen.
Use the > and < buttons to cycle between the two pull-down menu pages.
To close the menu, simply swipe it back upwards to the top of the screen.
The pull-down menu contains the following controls on the first page:
The Project Name is shown at the top-left corner of the menu.
The time counter shows the current playhead position. Tap here to open the Locate window, which allows you
to adjust the playhead position and quickly jump to specific points in your project.
The BPM field displays the tempo of the sequence. Tap here to open the Tempo window to adjust the BPM.
The Mem indicator shows your MPC hardware’s current RAM usage, and the CPU indicator shows your MPC
hardware’s current CPU usage. Tap here to open the System Resources window.
The In and Out boxes indicate your MPC hardware is receiving or sending (respectively) MIDI messages from or
to your computer. Tap here to open the MIDI Monitor and view the latest incoming or outgoing MIDI messages.
The Wi-Fi and Bluetooth icons display the current network and Bluetooth connection status. Tap each icon to
open their respective setup pages in the Preferences.
The chip icon/computer icon shows whether you are in Standalone or Controller Modes. Tap here to switch
modes.
The TC icon enables or disables global timing correct. Tap and hold this icon to open the Timing Correct (TC)
window, which contains various settings to help quantize the note events in your sequence.
The Loop button enables or disables sequence looping.
The Automation button indicates the global Automation state. Tap to cycle between Read and Write. Press and
hold Shift and tap here to turn global automation Off.
The Metronome button enables or disables the metronome. Tap and hold this icon to open the Metronome
(Click/Metro)
settings window.
The Ableton Link button displays the current Ableton Link status. Tap to turn Ableton Link on or off.
The Retro Rec button enables retrospective recording. Your MPC hardware will capture MIDI events in the
background, so you can recall a performance when record was not enabled. Select your desired track, and then
tap this button to capture the recently played notes.
The Tuner button opens the built-in Tuner, which allows you to easily tune any connected audio source.
68
On the second page of the pull-down menu are controls for creating macro controls. This allows you to set up controls
for parameters that might not be shown in a particular mode, or set up controls with multiple parameters across
different modes for expressive performances.
See Operation > Modes > Q-Link Edit for more information on creating macro assignments.
Tap the Current Control field to select the type of control you want to create an assignment for.
Tap the Learn button to activate MIDI learning. Once activated, the Q-Link Bank LED on your MPC hardware will blink.
Navigate to the mode that displays the parameter you would like to learn, and then adjust that parameter. The screen
will show a message, "Learned [parameter] to [macro control]." To lock in the assignment, tap the Learn button again.
To learn multiple parameters to a macro, simply navigate to more parameters while Learn is engaged (see
Modes > Q-Link Edit > Learning Macro Assignments for more information on learning macros).
To learn another parameter to a macro that replaces the previous parameter, tap the down arrow next to the
yellow Learn button, and then uncheck the Add box. Repeat the steps above to replace the previously learned
parameter with a new one.
To learn a new parameter while also setting it to a range of values, tap the down arrow next to the yellow
Learn button, and then check the Range box. While Learn is engaged, adjust the parameter to the low and high
points of the value range that you want to control. When the assignment is locked in, the macro will control the
parameter in the set value range.
To use a single macro to, for example, mute/unmute multiple tracks at the same time, tap the down arrow
next to the yellow Learn button, and then check the Toggle box. Repeat the steps above to learn a parameter,
which will toggle on/off when the control is touched or moved.
To use a macro to send the max value of a parameter, tap the down arrow next to the yellow Learn button,
and then check the Trigger box. Repeat the steps above to learn a parameter, which will send its maximum value
when the control is touched or moved.
Tap the Momentary button to turn momentary behavior on or off.
When on, moving the knob will adjust its parameter, but the parameter will immediately return to its original position
(when you turned Momentary on) when you release the knob.
When off, moving the knob will adjust its parameter, and the parameter will remain at its new setting when you
release the knob.
Tap the arrow next to the Momentary to adjust additional settings for when the macro control is released:
To revert the macro parameter(s) to its minimum value on release, check the
Go to Minimum box.
To revert to the last value state before the macro was changed on release, check to Go to Previous box.
69
Time Counter / Locate
Many MPC modes feature a time counter in the toolbar. This displays the current playhead position in
Bars:Beats:Ticks. Double-tapping the time counter opens the Locate window, where you can adjust the playhead
position, manage loop and record settings, and quickly jump to specific points in your project.
The Locate popup is divided into two sections:
The Time tab is used to adjust the position of the playhead in the arrangement, as well as adjust Loop and Record
settings.
Use the Bars:Beats:Ticks fields to move the playhead in the arrangement. You can also tap the Step and
Bars arrow buttons to move the playhead by the specified amount.
Tap the Loop button to enable loop in the arrangement. Use the Loop Start and Loop End fields to set the
length of the loop. Alternatively, you can set the loop length according to the Locator markers in the timeline.
When Set Loop Range By Locator is set to On, the loop range will automatically adjust to the length between
the selected Locator and the next Locator. The current loop region is always displayed in the timeline of the
arrangement whether it is activated or not.
Use the Auto Record field to enable automatic recording when the loop starts. When enabled, recording will
begin immediately when the arrangement loops.
The Locators tab is used to edit the six Locator markers which can be applied to the timeline.
Tap Set to add a locator.
To rename a locator, tap the keyboard icon, and then use the keyboard to enter a new name.
Use the Bars:Beats:Ticks fields to adjust the position of the locator.
To edit the color of the locator, tap the eyedropper icon, and then select a color from the list.
Tap the X icon to delete the locator.
To close the Locate window, tap Close, the X in the upper-right corner, or anywhere outside the window to
return to the arrangement.
70
Timing Correct (TC)
The Timing Correct window contains various settings to help quantize the events in your project. You can quantize
note events on MIDI tracks or track regions on audio tracks (though you cannot apply all types of quantization to audio
tracks).
To open the Timing Correct settings:
In Main Mode or List Edit Mode: Tap the TC field at the top of the screen.
In Arrange Mode, the Step Sequencer, or Track Mute Mode: Tap TC at the bottom of the screen.
In Grid View: Tap the clock icon in the bottom-left corner of the screen.
In Track View: Press and hold Shift and tap TC at the bottom of the screen.
Press the TC / On/Off button (MPC Live II/One/Key 61/Key 37 only).
To enable or disable global timing correct, tap the Global Timing Correct button so it is on. Alternatively, press
and hold Shift and press the track 6 Track Assign button.
Tap Do It to apply the settings you selected, or tap Close to cancel and return to the previous screen.
Use the Type selector to set how timing corrections are applied.
•
Start: The entire note event or audio track region will be nudged forward or backward so the start point aligns
with the closest time division marker in the grid. You can apply this to MIDI tracks or audio tracks.
•
End: The end points of note events will be extended or shortened to align with the closest time division marker
in the grid. The start points will remain untouched. You can apply this to MIDI tracks only.
•
Length: The end points of note events will be extended or shortened so that each event’s length is a multiple
of the time division, regardless of where it is in the grid. The start points will remain untouched. You can apply
this to MIDI tracks only.
•
Legato: The end points of note events will be extended or shortened to create a long, unbroken phrase from the
first note event’s start point to the last note event’s end point. Each note event will sustain until another note
event starts. If multiple note events start at the same time (and are not the last note events), their lengths will
become identical. Selecting Legato disables all other options in this window. You can apply this to MIDI tracks
only.
Without legato applied. With legato applied.
71
Use the Time Division selector to set the quantization value. Events will “snap” to these time divisions on the grid. The
T indicates a triplet-based value.
Use the Swing field to set the amount of swing from 50% to 75%. Swing lets you “shuffle” your beats—from subtle to
extreme.
Use the Shift Timing field to shift all events by clock ticks.
Use the Window field to set how many events around a quantize value will be quantized. Any events outside this range
will not be quantized; events inside will.
Use the Strength field to set how strictly events will be quantized (i.e., shifted toward the quantize value). Lower values
move events a little bit towards the closest quantize value, resulting in a less mechanical feel than a strict quantization
(a higher value).
Use the Events selector to set the target range for the time
correction. You can apply the time correction to All note events or to
just the Selected ones.
To select note events to which to apply time correction, either use
the various tools in Event View or Region View or press the pad with
the desired events (while Hitting Pad Selects All Events is set to
On). You must do this before opening the Timing Correct window.
When Range is selected, you can define the locations (From and To)
as well as the pads or keys that will be quantized.
72
Metronome (Click/Metro)
The Click/Metro window contains all settings regarding the metronome (click track).
To enable or disable the metronome, press and hold Shift and press the Play Start button. You can also tap the
Metronome icon in the Pull-Down Menu.
To open the metronome settings, tap the Metro icon at the top of the screen in Main Mode. You can also tap and
hold the Metronome icon in the Pull-Down Menu.
Use the Count-In field to set if/when the metronome counts before recording.
•
Off disables the metronome pre-count.
•
Record enables the pre-count during recording only.
•
Record + Play enables pre-count in both Record and Playback Modes.
Use the Enable field to set if/when the metronome is enabled.
•
Off disables the metronome.
•
Play enables the metronome sound during playback only.
•
Record enables the metronome sound during recording only.
•
Record + Play enables the metronome to happen in both Record and Playback Modes.
Use the Rate field to select the metronome click’s time division: Auto, 1/4, 1/4T, 1/8, 1/8T, 1/16, 1/16T, 1/32 or 1/32T.
T indicates a triplet-based time division. When set to Auto, the Metronome will automatically adjust to the current time
signature’s denominator value.
Use the Sound field to select the sound that you want to hear for the metronome: Sidestick 1, Sidestick 2, Clap,
Metroclick, Shake, Tambourine, or MPC Click.
Use the Volume knob to set the volume of your metronome click.
Tap the On/Off button to enable or disable the metronome.
Use the Output field to set which pair of outputs will play the metronome click: Out 1,2, Out 3,4 or an individual Out
1–4.
73
Automation
You can set the global automation setting, or individual tracks' automation settings, to be “written,” “read,” or disabled
entirely by using the automation buttons described below.
Global
Global automation buttons change the automation state for all tracks in the project. These buttons can be found in the
toolbar of modes like Main Mode and Arrange Mode, and in the project Pull-Down Menu.
When you tap this button to change its state, it will change the automation state for all tracks in the project.
Tap the global automation button to cycle through its two states. Alternatively, press Read/Write
(MPC X, MPC Key 61) or Automation (MPC Key 37).
When set to Read (R), automation data will be read but not recorded. (Think of this as a protective
feature to prevent accidental changes to your automation while recording.)
When set to Write (W), automation can be recorded and will overwrite any existing automation.
(Make sure not to touch the XY pad accidentally while you are recording.)
Press and hold Shift and tap the global automation button to disable global automation. When off,
automation data will be ignored. Tap the global automation button again to enable global automation.
Alternatively, press and hold Shift and press Read/Write (MPC X, MPC Key 61) or Automation (MPC
Key 37).
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the effect and
its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
Tracks
In addition to global automation, you can set automation for individual tracks by using the track automation buttons.
These are found in channel strips, such as those in Main Mode or in Channel Mixer Mode.
Note: Remember that tapping the global automation button will change the automation state for all tracks in the project;
if they were originally different, all of them will then match the global automation state.
Tap the track automation button to cycle through its two states.
When set to Read (R), the track will read automation data but will not record any additional
automation over it. (Think of this as a protective feature to prevent accidental changes to your
automation while recording.)
When set to Write (W), the track can record automation. (If you have any Q-Link knobs assigned to
automatable parameters, make sure not to touch any accidentally while you are recording.)
Press and hold Shift and tap the track automation button to disable track automation. When off, the
track will ignore automation data. If you have already recorded or entered automation, tapping this will
switch between Read (R) and Write (W) only, but you can override this and turn it off by pressing and
holding Shift while pressing or tapping the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the effect and
its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
74
To record automation to a track:
1.
Make sure the Global or Track automation state is set to Write (W).
2.
Press the Play button to start recording. Record automation using the Q-Links, XY Pad, or by adjusting the
onscreen controls.
Note: If you are recording MIDI CC automation, make sure the
SEQ REC ARM button at the bottom of Main
Mode is enabled, and then press the OVERDUB button on your MPC hardware to arm recording before playing.
3.
When you are finished, press Stop to stop recording. Make sure to set the automation state back to Read (R) to
listen back to your recorded automation.
You can also manually add and edit automation in Grid View, List Edit Mode, and the Step Sequencer. See these
sections to learn more about how automation functions in each mode.
To quickly clear automation from a track:
1.
Tap the Sequence Edit pencil icon in Main Mode, and then select Erase from the Sequence Edit window.
Alternatively, press the Erase button on your MPC hardware.
2.
Select Automation as the Erase type.
3.
Select the desired automation parameter(s) that you want to erase, and set the desired time frame.
4.
Tap Do It to clear the automation from the track in the current sequence.
Alternatively, you can delete individual automation events using Grid View, List Edit Mode, and the Step Sequencer.
75
16 Level
Press the 16 Level button on your MPC hardware to activate or deactivate 16 Level.
When first activated, the selected pad (Pad A01 by default) will be temporarily copied to all 16 pads. The pads will now
output the same note number as the initial pad, but a selectable parameter will be fixed at values that increase as the pad
numbers increase (e.g., Pad 1 is the minimum, Pad 16 is the maximum), regardless of how hard you press them.
In the 16 Levels screen that appears, use the Type selector to choose the parameter: Velocity, Tune, Filter, Layer,
Slice, Articulation, Attack, Decay, Probability, or Ratchet.
To select a pad, do any of the following (while the 16 Levels window is open):
•
Press and hold 16 Level, and then press the desired pad.
•
Tap the 16 Levels checkbox to uncheck it (temporarily disabling the feature), press the desired pad, and then
tap the 16 Levels checkbox again to check it.
•
Tap the Pad field, and use the data dial or –/+ buttons.
•
Double-tap the Pad field, and tap the desired pad in the list that appears.
If Type is set to Tune, use the Original Pad field to select which you pad you want to use the original pitch of the
sample/samples. Alternatively, hold Shift and press the desired pad.
If Type is set to Layer, pads with multiple samples will play back each layer according to the Velocity Start and
Velocity End settings for each layer.
If Type is set to Slice, pads with multiple slices will play back each slice in order, starting with Pad 1.
If Type is set to Articulation, Pad 1 will play the original sample unchanged, and Pads 2–16 will play the first 15
articulations in the Articulation list. See Track Edit Mode > Drum Tracks > Effects to learn more about articulations.
If Type is set to Probability, the 16 pads will represent the probability that the note will play, from lowest to highest.
If Type is set to Ratchet, the 16 pads will represent increasing ratchet subdivision values.
76
Pad Perform
The Pad Perform window lets you assign musical scales/modes, chords, or progressions to the pads for more creative
performance.
To open the Pad Perform window, do any of the following while using a keygroup track, MIDI track, plugin track, or
CV track:
•
Tap Pad Perform icon in the Track section of Main Mode.
•
Press Pad Perform (MPC X).
•
Hold Shift and press 16 Level (MPC Live, MPC Live II, MPC One, MPC Key 61, and MPC Key 37).
Although you can enter Pad Perform Mode while using a drum track, it does not work.
The touchscreen will show the current pad bank’s mapping of notes or chords.
Use the type selector in the top-left to determine what will be mapped over the pads:
Chromatic: Each pad is assigned a note, ascending by one semitone with each pad. Pads with notes in the key
determined by the Scale will be lit, while pads with notes between the scale degrees will be unlit.
Notes: Each pad is assigned a note, ascending by one scale degree with each pad.
Chords: Each pad is assigned a chord, the root note ascending by one scale degree with each pad. All available
chords will play in the key determined by the Scale.
Chromatic Chords: Each pad is assigned a chord, the root note ascending by one scale degree with each pad.
You can play any chord type regardless of the key determined by the Scale. Essentially, this is like the Chords
setting but with more options to play chords out of the set key.
Progressions: Each pad is assigned a chord in a chord progression. You can play the pads in (or out of) order to
construct songs quickly. The available chords are determined by the Chord field. User progressions can be created
in the MPC software and transferred to your MPC hardware by creating a folder named Progressions on the root
level an external storage device and copying your progression files (.progression) there. By default, progressions
are saved here:
Windows: C:\Program Files\Akai Pro\MPC\Progressions and/or C:\ProgramData\Akai\MPC\Progressions
macOS: ~/Library/Application Support/Akai/MPC/Progressions
Your MPC hardware will scan the Progressions folder you created and add them to the list of available
progressions.
Custom: Each pad is assigned a custom note. Tap the Edit Note Map button to begin editing. Tap a pad or use
the Pad field to select a pad, and then use the MIDI Note field to set the desired note. When you are finished
editing, tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window. You can also choose from three Custom presets:
Chromatic C1, Chromatic C2, or Classic MPC.
77
Chromatic Notes in Pad Perform Mode. Notes in Pad Perform Mode.
Chords in Pad Perform Mode. Chromatic Chords in Pad Perform Mode.
Progressions in Pad Perform Mode. Custom Map in Pad Perform Mode
Use the Scale & Octave fields to determine the root note and the scale type.
Root Note (pitch and register): This is the starting point of the scale. The available notes are all chromatic notes
across the range of the pads. The pad that’s assigned the root note will be lit differently (and highlighted on the
screen) to indicate where the scale starts in each octave.
Scale Type: This is the scale or mode based on the root note (this is disabled when Type is set to Progressions).
The available scales are:
Major Blues (minor) Major Bebop Lydian
Natural Minor Flamenco Whole Tone Mixolydian
Harmonic Minor Gypsy Chromatic Aeolian
Pentatonic Major Hungarian Gypsy Dorian Locrian
Pentatonic Minor Persian Phrygian
78
Use the Chord fields to determine what chord type will play when pressing a pad. The chord will use those scale degrees
based off the pad’s root note. You can use this only when the Type is set to Chords or Chromatic Chords.
When set to Chords, the available chords are:
1-3-5 (major/minor) 1-3-5-7 (major7/minor7)
1-4-5 (sus4) 1-3-5-7b (dominant)
1-2-5 (sus2)
When set to Chromatic Chords, the available chords are:
Major Major7 Augmented
Minor Minor7 Diminished
Sus2 Major9
Sus4 Minor9
Use the Banks field to determine how the notes are mapped across the pad banks.
Continuous: Pad 01 of one bank is always one scale degree higher than Pad 16 of the previous bank.
Start on Root: Pad 01 will always be the root note of the scale in every pad bank.
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the screen to quickly select different Types and Chords:
Tap Notes to automatically set the Type to Notes.
Tap Chords to automatically set the Type to Chords.
Tap Progressions to automatically set the Type to Progressions.
Tap Octave –/+ to shift the pad assignments down or up by an octave.
Press Shift+1-3-5 to automatically set the Type to Chords and set the Chord to 1-3-5 (major/minor).
Press Shift+1-4-5 to automatically set the Type to Chords and set the Chord to 1-4-5 (sus4).
Press Shift+1-3-5-7
to automatically set the Type to Chords and set the Chord to 1-3-5-7 (major7/minor7).
Press Shift+1-3-5-7b to automatically set the Type to Chords and set the Chord to 1-3-5-7b (dominant).
Press Shift+Note –/+ to shift the pad assignments down or up by a semitone, essentially raising or lowering the
Root Note field by a half-step.
79
Arpeggiator
Your MPC hardware includes a full-featured arpeggiator and phrase player for melodic track types, as well as traditional
note repeat functionality.
To open the Arpeggiator settings:
1.
Set the current track type to Plugin, Keygroup, MIDI, or CV.
2.
Open the Arpeggiator window by doing either of the following:
•
Press and hold the Note Repeat button, then tap Arp at the bottom-right of the screen.
•
Alternatively, press the Arpeggiator F-Key (MPC X).
Tap Enable so it is checked to activate the Arpeggiator. Tap again to Disable the Arpeggiator.
Tap Latch so it is checked to latch the Arpeggiator. Tap again to Disable Latch.
The Setup section of the Arpeggiator window sets what kind of
arpeggiator will be used and its functions:
Use the Action field to set the type: Arp, Note Repeat,
Rhythm, and Pattern. See below for more details about these
types and their additional parameters.
Use the Time Division selector to set the note value of each
arpeggiator step from 1/1–1/64 beats, including T (triplet)
variations. This parameter is not available when Action is set to
Pattern.
Note: This setting is tied to the project's Time Division setting,
and will not function if Time Division has been set to Off.
Use the Note Length slider to set the length of the played note
in each step, from 1–100%.
Use the Velocity field to set the velocity of the arpeggiator
notes. Choose As played, From first note, Accented, Full,
3/4, Half or 1/4.
Use the Swing field to set the amount of swing in the
arpeggiator from 50% to 75%. Swing lets you "shuffle" your
beats—from subtle to extreme.
80
The Arp mode section of the Arpeggiator window is available when
the Action is set to Arp. When this action is selected, hold down a
chord and the arpeggiator will play a pattern based on the notes
held.
Use the Arp Pattern field to set how the arpeggiator triggers the
held notes.
Use the Octaves field to set how many octaves of the held notes
the arpeggiator will cycle through.
Use the Variation field to apply rhythmic variation to the set
pattern.
The Rhythm section of the Arpeggiator window is available when
Action is set to Rhythm. When this arpeggiator action is selected,
hold down a chord and the arpeggiator will play the held notes in a
rhythmic pattern.
Use the Rhythm Pattern field to choose the pattern played
when notes are held.
The Pattern section of the Arpeggiator window is available when the
Action is set to Pattern. When this arpeggiator action is selected,
hold down a single note to trigger a melodic phrase. As you change
what note is held, the melodic phrase will be transposed.
Use the Pattern field to choose the pattern.
The Settings section of the Arpeggiator window offers additional
options to control the arpeggiator.
If you have a sustain pedal connected, you can enable Sustain
Pedal Latches to use it to control latching.
Use the Latch Mode setting to set the action of the sustain
pedal, either Reset or Add.
The Probability section of the Arpeggiator window lets you add
further variation to your arpeggiator by adjusting the probability of
how notes are played.
Use the Accent (%) field to set the percent probability that a
note in the arpeggio is accented.
Use the Normal (%) field to set the percent probability that a
note in the arpeggio is normally articulated.
The Arpeggiator modifiers section of the Arpeggiator window
enables additional controls to modify the arpeggiator.
Tap the Channel Pressure box so it is checked to enable
Channel Pressure messages from external MIDI controllers to
modify the arpeggiator.
Tap the Expression box so it is checked to enable Expression
messages (MIDI CC #11) from external MIDI controllers to
modify the arpeggiator.
Tap the Aftertouch box so it is checked to enable Aftertouch
messages from the pads or external MIDI controllers to modify
the arpeggiator.
Tap the Mod Wheel box so it is checked to enable Modulation
messages (MIDI CC #1) from external MIDI controllers to modify
the arpeggiator.
81
Use the Arpeggiator modifier settings field to select what arpeggiator
settings are modified by the selected controls, and by how much.
Tap the Modify Time Division box so it is checked to enable
modification of the arpeggiator time division. Use the Max
Amount to set by how much the time division can be changed,
from 1–4. For example, if the Time Division is set to 1/8 and the
Max Amount is set to 2, adjusting the selected modifier control
will increase the Time Division to 1/8T and 1/16, which are the
next two higher time divisions.
Tap the Modify Octaves box so it is checked to enable
modification of the arpeggio octave range. Use the Extra
Octaves field to select how many additional octaves (on top of
what the current Octaves setting is) can be added with the
modifier control, from 1–4. For example, if the current Octaves
setting is 1 and the Extra Octaves is set to 2, adjusting the
selected modifier control will increase the total octaves up to 3.
Tap the Modify Note Length box so it is checked to enable
modification of the arpeggio note length. Use the Max Amount
(%) field to select by how much percentage the note length is
increased, from 1–100%. For example, if the current Note
Length setting is 50% and the Max Amount (%) is set to 20%,
adjusting the selected modifier control will increase the note
length up to 60%.
Tap the Modify Swing box so it is checked to enable
modification of the arpeggio swing amount. Use the Max
Amount (%) field to select by how much percentage the swing
amount is increased, from 1–50%. For example, if the current
Note Length setting is 50% and the Max Amount (%) is set to
20%, adjusting the selected modifier control will increase the
swing amount up to 60%.
Tap the Modify Variation box so it is checked to enable
modification of the arpeggio Variation setting. Use the Max
Amount field to select by how the variation setting can be
changed, from 1–4. For example, if the current Variation setting
is Variation 1 and the Max Amount is set to 2, adjusting the
selected modifier control will increase the Variation setting up to
Variation 3.
Tap the Modify Probability box so it is checked to enable
modification of the arpeggio probability amount. Use the Max
Amount (%) field to select by how much percentage the
probability amount is increased, from 1–100%. For example, if
the current Probability setting is 50% and the Max Amount (%)
is set to 20%, adjusting the selected modifier control will
increase the probability amount up to 60%.
82
Erase
The Erase function erases all or part of a track in a specific sequence.
To open the Erase window, press the Erase button. Alternatively, while in Main Mode, tap the pencil icon on the
right edge of the Sequence Section, and then tap Erase in the screen that appears.
Use the Sequence field to select the sequence you want to erase.
Use the Track field to select the track you want to erase within the sequence.
Use the Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set the time range of the sequence you want to erase. The left fields set the start
of the time range, and the right fields set the end of the time range.
To select what types of events you erase, select one of the Erase options:
All erases all pad events from the designated time range and reset all its settings.
Automation erases only automation from the designated time range. Use the Parameter field to select what type
of automation is erased.
Note erases only specific pad events from the designated time range. In the diagram of the eight pad banks that
appears, press each pad in each bank to select or deselect its notes.
Except Note erases everything except specific note events from the designated time range. In the diagram of the
eight pad banks that appears, press each pad in each bank to select or deselect its notes.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice.
To cancel and return to the previous screen, tap the X, Cancel, or anywhere outside the window.
83
Effects
You can apply various effects to the pads, keygroups, tracks, main outputs and submixes, using insert and
send/return effects. This chapter can help you get a good overall understanding of how the effects work.
See Appendix > Effects & Parameters for a list of all available effects (with a brief description of each) and their
editable parameters.
Overview
Insert Effects can be added to specific Pads and Keygroups, or to entire Tracks, Submixes, and Outputs. Each
location can have up to four insert effects applied to them.
Apply insert effects to specific pads or keygroups if you want to apply a particular effect to a single sound in a
Drum Track (like a vocal sample), or a particular part of a keygroup (like the section that is providing the melody).
Apply insert effects to an entire track if you want all the track’s sounds to have the effect applied in the same way.
For even further flexibility, apply insert effects to a submix and you can then route pads, keygroups, or tracks to
that submix, which is then routed to a main output.
You can also apply insert effects directs to an output, which is particularly useful when working with mastering
effects like a limiter.
Additionally, Send/Return Effects allow both Pads and Keygroups and entire Tracks and Submixes to be sent to
(up to) four return channels, each of which can have up to four insert effects of their own. Their audio will be routed
through the insert effects on those returns, and the processed audio will be sent to a main output.
When you create an audio mixdown of a sequence or song, you can choose whether or not main insert effects are
included or send/return effects are included, depending on what you are mixing down:
If you are creating an audio mixdown of a pair of main outputs, you can choose whether or not main insert effects
will be included in the mixdown.
If you are creating an audio mixdown of separate tracks, you can choose whether or not send/return effects will
be included in the mixdown.
See Audio Mixdown to learn about these options.
There are three other modes that manage effects differently:
•
The Sampler can use up to four insert effects, which are applied to the audio as you record it. This means
that the effects cannot be “removed” from the sound later.
•
Similarly, the Looper can use up to four insert effects, which are applied to the audio as you record it. This
means that the effects cannot be “removed” from the sound later.
•
In XYFX Mode, the effects act like a single insert effect on that track. In fact, XYFX is the name of the insert
effect you have to load to the track before you can use this mode.
Finally, there is a special effect type called TouchFX, which is specially designed for use the touch strip controller on
hardware such as MPC Key 61 and 37, but can be used on any MPC hardware and controlled using the onscreen
touch slider or an external MIDI device. See the following Touch Strip chapter to learn more.
84
To view, load, edit, or clear effects, tap the Inserts button. This usually appears in a channel strip (next
to a level slider and pan knob).
To view and edit an effect, tap the effect name below the Inserts button.
When viewing loaded effects, you will see this window:
To select an effect, use the field for each insert slot. A window
(described below) will appear.
Tap the arrows next to the insert slot rearrange the insert
effects. The selected effect will move up or down, and other
loaded effects will be moved accordingly.
Tap the pencil icon next to the insert slot to edit the parameters
of a loaded effect.
Tap the trash can icon to clear the insert slot.
Tap the On/Off button to enable or disable an effect slot.
Tap the All On/All Off button in the upper-right corner to disable
all four effect slots at the same time. Tap it again to reactivate
the previously active effects.
Tap the Akai folder icon to load a factory FX rack. Select the
desired FX rack from the options and all associated effects will
be added to the insert slots.
Tap the middle folder icon to load a user FX rack.
Tap the Save disk icon to save an FX rack.
When selecting an effect, you will see this window:
Swipe up or down to move through the list. Alternatively, use the
data dial or –/+ buttons.
Tap Type or Manufacturer in the lower-left corner to sort or
unsort the effects by type or manufacturer.
Double-tap an effect name to load it, or tap Select.
Tap Close or anywhere outside the list to cancel.
85
When you edit an effect, you will see this window:
Tap and drag a control to adjust a parameter. Alternatively, use
the data dial or –/+ buttons. To make finer adjustments,
double-tap the control and adjust the larger version of it that
appears.
Tip: Turn the Q-Link knobs to quickly adjust the corresponding
four parameters.
Tap the tabs at the bottom of the screen to select another page
of parameters, if available.
Use the Preset dropdown menu at the top of the screen to
select an effect preset.
Tap the trash can icon to remove the effect from the insert slot.
Tap the folder icon at the top of the screen to load a saved
preset.
Tap the disk icon at the top of the screen to save a preset.
Tap the Insert -/+ buttons at the top of the screen to edit
parameters for another insert effect on the same pad, track,
etc.
Tap the On/Off button in the upper-right corner to enable or
disable the effect.
Tap the
icon at the top of the screen to close the effect
window and return to the previous page.
86
Insert Effects
Pads and Keygroups
You can load up to four insert effects to each pad or keygroup. You can do this in Main Mode, Pad Mixer, or Track Edit
Mode.
Tip: When using pad insert effects, they will be applied to the selected pad or specific keygroup only. This means that
you could apply unique combinations of effects to each pad within a kit, or load insert effects to multiple keygroups
with overlapping note ranges and the effects will overlap in that range as well. If you want to apply the same effect to
all pads and keygroups at the same time, do this with a track insert effect (see Insert Effects > Tracks, Submixes,
and Outputs).
To load a pad or keygroup insert effect in Main Mode:
1.
Use the Track field to select the track that uses the desired pad or keygroup.
2.
If the channel strip is not already shown, tap the icons at the top of the channel strips to expand them.
3.
For pad effects, tap the single-pad / four-squares icons in the bottom-right corner of the Track/Arrangement
Section to switch from showing the track channel strip to the pad channel strip.
For keygroup effects, tap the single-pad / keyboard icons in the bottom-right corner of the Track/Arrangement
Section to switch from showing the track mixer strip to the keygroup mixer strip.
4.
Press a pad to select it or its corresponding keygroup.
5.
Tap the FX header to show the insert effects controls in the channel strip.
6.
Tap an empty insert slot, indicated by a +, to add an insert effect. You can also tap the expand window icon to
open the Inserts window, where you can load, change, and enable or disable the effects.
87
To load a pad or keygroup insert effect in the Pad Mixer:
1.
Tap the Effects tab at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Press the desired pad to select it or the corresponding keygroup, or tap it on the screen. Swipe your finger to the
left to scroll through the banks of pads or keygroups.
3.
Tap an insert slot to open the effects window and use it to load or edit effects, or tap the Inserts box to open the
Inserts window.
To load a pad or keygroup insert effect in Track Edit Mode:
1.
While using the desired track, press the desired pad to select it or the corresponding keygroup.
2.
Tap the Effects tab in the lower-right corner, and use it to load or edit effects.
Note: This tab is only available for Keygroups when using the Legacy Track Edit view.
88
Tracks, Submixes, and Outputs
You can load up to four insert effects to each track (Drum, Keygroup, Plugin, or Audio type), Submix 1–8, or the Outputs
(a stereo pair of channels: Outputs 1/2 or Outputs 3/4). You can do this in Main Mode, the Channel Mixer, or XYFX
Mode.
Note: In XYFX Mode, the effects act like a single insert effect on that track. In fact, XYFX is the name of the insert
effect that is loaded when use this mode.
To load a track insert effect in Main Mode:
1.
Use the Track field to select the desired track.
2.
If the channel strip is not already shown, tap the icons at the top of the channel strips to expand them.
3.
If needed, tap the single-pad / four-squares icons in the bottom-right corner of the Track/Arrangement Section
so the track channel strip is selected.
4.
Tap the FX header to show the insert effects controls in the mixer strip.
5.
Tap an empty insert slot, indicated by a +, to add an insert effect. You can also tap the expand window icon to
open the Inserts window, where you can load, change, and enable or disable the effects.
To load a submix or output insert effect in Main Mode:
1.
Use the Track field to select the desired track, submix, or output.
2.
The Track/Arrangement section will automatically display the four insert effects slots.
Alternatively, you can use the channel strips by expanding them. When a Submix channel is selected, it will
automatically be shown alongside the Main Output in the channel strips. When a Main Output is selected, it will
automatically be shown by itself in the channel strip.
3.
Tap an empty insert slot, indicated by a +, to add an insert effect. You can also tap the expand window icon to
open the Inserts window, where you can load, change, and enable or disable the effects.
89
To load a track, submix, or output insert effect in the Channel Mixer:
1.
Tap the Effects tab at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Tap to select the desired track. Swipe left to display the Submix tracks and Outputs to select one.
3.
Tap an insert slot to open the effects window and use it to load or edit effects. You can also tap the Inserts button
to open the Inserts window, where you can load, change, and enable or disable the effects.
To load XYFX for a track, submix, or output in XYFX Mode:
1.
If you have not yet used XYFX Mode for this track, tap Insert XYFX on the screen to load it and show the XY pad.
Note: If you already have four insert effects loaded, you will need to clear one of the insert effect slots before doing
this.
If you have already used XYFX Mode for the selected track, the XY pad will appear.
2.
Tap XYFX Location in the upper-left corner, and select a Track, Submix, or Output.
3.
If the Setup panel is not shown, tap Setup in the lower-right corner to show it.
4.
Use the Preset field to load an effect. Use the controls below the Preset field to edit the effect.
90
Send/Return Effects
Send/return effects work in the following way:
1.
A pad, keygroup, track, or submix sends its audio to a return at a designated send level.
2.
That audio is processed by the effects on the return. Each return can have up to four insert effects loaded and
activated.
3.
The processed audio is sent to a pair of main outputs (stereo) or a single main output (mono).
You can load send/return effects and set return levels in Main Mode and the Channel Mixer, described below. The
rest of this section describes the different ways to set the desired send levels for pads or tracks.
To load a send/return effect to a return in Main Mode:
1.
Tap the Track header and use the data dial or +/- buttons to change tracks until you reach the Return 1–4 buses.
Alternatively, use the Track -/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Use the Inserts boxes to add or view inserts effects. Tap the + icon in an empty slot to add a new effect. Tap an
insert slot with a loaded effect to view the effect’s controls.
You can also add send/return effects using the Mixer Strips in Main Mode.
To load a send/return effect to a return in the Channel Mixer:
1.
In the Channel Mixer, swipe left to show the Returns (between the Submixes and Main Outputs).
2.
Tap the Effects tab at the bottom of the screen.
3.
Tap an insert slot to open the effects window and use it to load or edit effects. You can also tap the Inserts button
to open the Inserts window, where you can load, change, and enable or disable the effects.
91
To set the return level:
1.
In the Channel Mixer, swipe left to show the Returns (between the Submixes and Main Outputs).
2.
Tap the Volume or Pan & Volume tab in the lower-left corner.
3.
In the screen, tap the track that corresponds to the desired return.
4.
Use the level slider in the channel strip to adjust the level of the currently selected return. To make finer
adjustments, double-tap the level slider on the screen and adjust the larger version of the slider that appears.
92
Pads and Keygroups
You can set the send levels for individual pads in Main Mode, Track Edit Mode, or the Pad Mixer.
To set the send levels for a pad or keygroup in Main Mode:
1.
Use the Track field to select the track that uses the desired pad or keygroup.
2.
If the channel strip is not already shown, tap the icons at the top of the channel strips to expand them.
3.
For pad effects, tap the single-pad / four-squares icons in the bottom-right corner of the Track/Arrangement
Section to switch from showing the track channel strip to the pad channel strip.
For keygroup effects, tap the single-pad / keyboard icons in the bottom-right corner of the Track/Arrangement
Section to switch from showing the track mixer strip to the keygroup mixer strip.
4.
Press a pad to select it or its corresponding keygroup.
5.
Tap the SEND header to show the insert effects controls in the channel strip.
6.
Use the Send knobs to set the send level for each return. To make finer adjustments, double-tap the knob on
the screen and adjust the larger version of the knob that appears.
To set the send levels for a pad or keygroup in Track Edit Mode:
1.
While editing the desired track in Track Edit Mode, press the desired pad to select it or the corresponding
keygroup.
2.
Tap the Effects tab in the lower-right corner.
Note: This tab is only available for Keygroups when using the Legacy Track Edit view.
3.
Use the Send knobs to set the send level for each return. To make finer adjustments, double-tap the knob on
the screen and adjust the larger version of the knob that appears.
93
To set the send levels for a pad or keygroup in the Pad Mixer:
1.
Tap the Sends tab at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Press a pad to select it or the corresponding keygroup, or tap it on the screen.
3.
Use the Send knobs to set the send level for each return. To make finer adjustments, double-tap the knob on
the screen and adjust the larger version of the knob that appears.
94
Tracks and Submixes
You can set the send levels for Drum, Keygroup, Plugin, or Audio type tracks, plus Submix 1–8, in Main Mode and the
Channel Mixer.
To set the send levels for a track or submix in Main Mode:
1.
Use the Track field to select the desired track or submix.
2.
If the channel strip is not already shown, tap the icons at the top of the channel strips to expand them.
3.
If needed, tap the single-pad / four-squares icons in the bottom-right corner of the Track/Arrangement Section
so the track channel strip is selected.
4.
Tap the SEND header to show the insert effects controls in the mixer strip.
5.
Use the Send knobs to set the send level for each return. To make finer adjustments, double-tap the knob on
the screen and adjust the larger version of the knob that appears.
To set the send levels for a track or submix in the Channel Mixer:
1.
Tap the Sends tab at the bottom of the screen.
2.
In the screen, tap the send knob in the desired track.
3.
Use the Send knobs to set the send level for each return. To make finer adjustments, double-tap the knob on
the screen and adjust the larger version of the knob that appears.
95
Audio Mixdown
The Audio Mixdown screen lets you render and export either the current sequence or song as an audio file.
To open the Audio Mixdown screen, press Menu to open the Menu, then tap Save at the bottom of the screen
to open the Save window and select Audio Mixdown. On MPC Key 37, you can also press the Save button to
open the Save window.
To open the Audio Mixdown screen in Song Mode, tap Export at the bottom edge of the screen.
Audio Length
Use the Start Bar and End Bar fields to define where the resulting audio file will start and end, respectively.
Use the Audio Tail field to add extra seconds to the end of the resulting audio file. This is useful if you are using effects
or samples whose sounds exceed the defined audio length (e.g., long reverb or delay, one-shot samples with long
decays, etc.). We recommend using an audio tail of at least a couple of seconds.
Render Source
Check Stereo Output and use the adjacent field to select a pair of outputs (Out 1,2–31,32 and Submix 1–8, availability
depends on your MPC hardware type). The mixdown will be taken from these outputs.
Check Separate Tracks to create a mixdown of each track used in the sequence or song.
Important: Each pad or keygroup must have their output routed to Track to be included in the mixdown. This is the
typical (and default) setting. See Modes > Pad Mixer > I/O to learn about this.
Render Options
If your Render Source is set to Stereo Output, check Main Inserts to include main insert effects in the mixdown.
If your Render Source is set to Separate Tracks, check Export Submixes to export the submix channel signals as
separate files, and Export Returns to export the return channel signals as separate files.
If your Render Source is set to Stereo Output, tap Save as Project Preview to save the sequence or song as a
project preview file (which you can play for reference in the Browser). If you check this box, Stereo Output will
automatically be checked, as well.
96
File Formats
Tap WAV, AIFF, MP3, FLAC, or OGG to select the file
format of the mixdown.
For WAV and AIFF files, use the Bit Depth field to select a
bit depth of 8, 16, or 24 bits, or 32 bits, floating point (32
F). For FLAC files, you can select a bit depth of 16 or 24
bits. For MP3 and OGG files, you can select a Bitrate of
128, 160, 192, or 320 kbps.
Use the Sample Rate field to select a sample rate of 44.1
kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz. In most cases, we
recommend selecting 44.1 kHz.
Tap Export to enter the Save screen where you can select a name and location to save your audio mixdown.
Tap Cancel or the
icon in the upper-left corner to return to the previous screen.
97
Keyboard Control
The keyboard control screen allows you to edit the functions of the keybed on MPC Key 61 and MPC Key 37.
To access Keyboard Control, press the Keyboard Control button on your MPC Key 61 or MPC Key 37. You can
then edit the following parameters.
Keyboard Input
Transpose: This determines the amount of transposition to the keyboard, up to 36 semitones up or down.
MIDI Channel: This determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the keyboard input will use to receive messages.
Aftertouch (Channel Pressure): This determines whether aftertouch is enabled (As Played) or not (Disable).
Note On Velocity: This determines the incoming velocity of note on messages. For velocity that is responsive
to your playing, select As played. Alternatively, you can set a fixed velocity for all note on messages, at 12%,
18%, 25%, 31%, 37%, 43%, Half, 56%, 62%, 68%, 75%, 81%, 87%, 93% or Full velocity.
Scale Filter
Filter Input: This determines how specific notes are filtered. Select As Played to apply no filtering, Snap to
Scale to shift non-scale notes played to the nearest scale degree, or Filter to Scale to disable non-scale notes
from playing entirely.
Root Note: This determines the root note of the set scale.
Scale: This determines the type of scale used for note filtering. The available scales are:
Chromatic Pentatonic Minor Aeolian Hungarian Gypsy
Major Dorian Locrian Persian
Natural Minor Phrygian Blues Major Bebop
Harmonic Minor Lydian Flamenco Whole Tone
Pentatonic Major Mixolydian Gypsy
Internal Keyboard Routing
Keyboard Route: This determines where MIDI data from the keyboard is sent. Select from the following
options:
Local Off: Keyboard MIDI data is only sent to the MIDI out. This may be useful if working with external
sound modules.
Global: Keyboard MIDI data will always go to the current track.
Tracks: The Keyboard will appear as a port in the list of available track MIDI Inputs.
Global and Tracks: Keyboard MIDI data will go to the current track and be available as a track MIDI input.
External Keyboard Routing
MIDI Output Port: This determines the MIDI port where the keyboard will output MIDI externally.
Keyboard sends MIDI here: Check this box to send all MIDI from the keyboard to the selected MIDI Output
port.
MIDI Channel: This determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the keyboard will use to send messages externally.
Minimum Note / Maximum Note: This determines the range of notes that will output MIDI externally.
98
Keyboard Settings
Velocity Response: This determines how playing the keys translates into velocity values. Select preset Light
1–3, Linear, or Heavy 1–3 responses, or select Custom to create your own response using the following
settings:
Velocity Curve: Use this slider to adjust the velocity curve, from -50 to 0 to +50. At negative values, it
takes more force to hit higher velocity values; at positive values, it takes less force.
Gain: Use this slider to apply additional gain to the velocity curve, from -20 to 0 to +20. Increasing the gain
will make it easier to hit high velocity values, and decreasing it will make it harder.
Black Key Sensitivity: Use this slider to set the sensitivity of the keyboard’s black keys, from -20 to 0 to
+20.
White Key Sensitivity: Use this slider to set the sensitivity of the keyboard’s white keys, from -20 to 0 to
+20.
Pedal Settings
Pedal: This determines the pedal input port from MPC Key 61/MPC Key 37. Select Sustain, FS2, or
Expression.
Type: This determines the pedal type, either Switch (on/off) or Variable (such as an expression pedal).
Polarity: This determines the polarity of the pedal input. Select Auto, Positive, or Negative. If you are having
issues with your pedal, check the settings on your hardware or try adjusting this field for the correct behavior.
CC Assign: This is the MIDI CC assignment the pedal will send. Select Disable, Default (varies depending on
the port used), or CC 000–126.
Pitch Bend / Mod Wheel
Pitch Bend: Use this field to select the MIDI function for the keyboard pitch wheel. Select Disable, Default –
Pitch Bend, or CC 000–126.
Mod Wheel: Use this field to select the MIDI function for the keyboard modulation wheel. Select Disable,
Default – CC 001: Modulation, or CC 000–126.
Global Pitch Bend Settings
Global Pitch Bend: Check this box to override the pitch bend settings of all programs, so that those with pitch
bend disabled or set to different ranges will only use the Global Range instead. When unchecked, all programs
may use their individual pitch bend settings.
Range Up/Range Down: Use these sliders to set the range of the pitch bend in semitones.
99
Touch Strip
To use the touch strip with MPC Key 61 or MPC Key 37:
1.
Press the Touch Strip button to cycle through the available Touch Strip modes, or press and hold Touch Strip to
quickly select a mode from the touchscreen:
•
Q-Link
•
Pad Level
•
Track Level
•
Touch FX
•
Notes
•
Pitch Bend
•
Mod Wheel
•
Sustain
•
Expression
•
Crossfader
•
Off
You can also press Touch FX to instantly select TouchFX mode for the Touch Strip.
You can also set the default Touch Strip mode in the Hardware menu of the Preferences.
2.
Press your finger on the touch strip and move it up and down as an expressive control for the selected parameter.
3.
Press and hold Shift and press the Touch Strip or Touch FX buttons to configure settings for each mode, if
available. See below to learn more.
Q-Link
Select this mode to use the touch strip as a Q-Link control.
To configure the Q-Link settings, press and hold Shift and press the Touch Strip button to open the Touch Strip Q-
Link window in the software.
Q-Link: Use this field to select which Q-Link is controlled by the touch strip (1–16). You can also press one of the
16 pads to select that Q-Link while the Touch Strip Q-Link window is open in the software.
Pad Level
Select this mode to use the touch strip to control the current Pad Level.
Track Level
Select this mode to use the touch strip to control the current Track Level.
TouchFX
TouchFX is specially designed for use the touch strip controller on hardware such as MPC Key 61 and 37, but can be
used on any MPC hardware and controlled using the onscreen touch slider or an external MIDI device. The effect you
control acts like an insert effect on the selected output.
To load the Touch FX plugin, you can simply press and hold the Touch FX button on MPC Key 61 or 37. A window
will appear with the included Touch FX presets. Tap a preset to select it, and it will automatically be added as an insert
to the current track.
Alternatively, you can load Touch FX as you would any other insert effect when using other MPC hardware:
1.
Tap an empty slot in the Inserts section of any channel strip.
2.
Double-tap an empty insert slot in the Effects window to open the list of plugin effects
3.
Tap the + or – button to expand the Harmonic category.
4.
Select the TouchFX plugin.
5.
Tap the pencil icon to open the plugin window, where you can adjust the plugin settings and use the virtual touch
strip to control the effect. You can also use the MIDI Learn function to assign the touch strip to an external MIDI
device.
100
To configure the Touch FX settings from an MPC Key:
1.
Press and hold Shift and press the Touch FX button to open the Touch FX Setup window in the software.
2.
Use the Touch FX Destination field to select where the Touch FX should be applied. You can select the current
Track, a Return, a Submix, or an Output. Click the Insert Touch FX button to add Touch FX to the selected
destination.
3.
Once Touch FX has been inserted, you can press and hold Shift and press the Touch Strip button again to reopen
the Touch FX Setup window in the software to configure additional settings:
Touch FX Preset: Use this field to select the desired effect for the touch strip. You can also use the data dial
or -/+ buttons to cycle through the presets as shown on the display once Touch FX has been inserted to a
destination. The specific parameters for each effect can be set by clicking the Touch FX Setup button at the
bottom of the window.
Latch: Check this box to keep the current position on the touch strip even after you release it. The position
will remain in place until you touch another part of the XY pad or until you uncheck Latch.
Touch > Wet/Dry: Check this box to use the touch strip to control the Wet/Dry amount in addition to the
Assigned Parameter as set by clicking the Touch FX Setup button at the bottom of the window.
Wet/Dry: Use this slider to set the blend the original signal (dry) and the effect signal (wet).
Attack: Use this slider to set the length of the attack phase of the envelope, which is triggered when you make
contact with the touch strip. In other words, this determines how long it takes the effect to fully respond to
your touch.
Release: Use this slider to set length of the release phase of the envelope, which is triggered when you release
the touch strip. In other words, this determines how long it takes the effect to fully deactivate after you release
your finger from the touch strip.
Touch FX Setup: Tap this button at the bottom of the window in the software to open the effect plugin setup
window to change the parameters for the selected preset.
In this window, you can also use the Assigned Parameter field to select a preset parameter to be controlled
by the touch strip. This can be separate from or in addition to controlling the Wet/Dry amount, depending on
the Touch > Wet/Dry setting.
To close the Touch FX Setup window, press and hold Shift and press the Touch Strip button again.
Use the controls on the left side of the Touch FX plugin window to
adjust the settings for MPC Key’s Touch Strip control. For other
hardware, you can control the Touch Strip by assigning it to a MIDI
control or by using the virtual touch strip on the touchscreen.
Touch Strip: This strip represents the MPC Key’s touch strip
control, and can also be controlled manually by clicking and
dragging from the software, tapping and dragging from a
hardware touchscreen, or by assigning it a MIDI control. Use
this to control the selected Touch FX.
Touch Enable: Tap this box to enable touch control for the
currently selected Touch FX.
Assigned Parameter: Use this field to select a preset parameter to be controlled by the touch strip. This can be
separate from or in addition to controlling the Wet/Dry amount, depending on the Touch > Wet/Dry setting.
Touch Value: Use this slider to control the value of the Assigned Parameter controlled by the touch strip.
Wet Amount: Use this slider to set the blend the original signal (dry) and the effect signal (wet).
Touch Value / Wet/Dry Lock:
Tap the lock icon to use the touch strip to control the Wet/Dry amount in addition
to the touch value of the Assigned Parameter.
Touch Attack: Use this slider to set the length of the attack phase of the envelope, which is triggered when you
move the touch strip control.
Touch Release: Use this slider to set length of the release phase of the envelope, which is triggered when you
release the touch strip control.
Use the controls on the right side of the Touch FX plugin window to select a Touch FX type and adjust its settings. You
can also select from the included presets at the top of the window.
See Appendix > Effects & Parameters > Harmonic > TouchFX for a full list of TouchFX preset settings.
101
Notes
Select this mode to use the touch strip as a control for playing notes in the selected track.
To configure the Note settings, press and hold Shift and press the Touch Strip button to open the Touch Strip Notes
Config window in the software.
Root Note: Use this field to set the desired root note of the scale.
Scale: Use this field to set the type of scale.
Octave: Use this field to set the starting octave of the root note.
Velocity: Use this field to set the velocity of the notes played with the touch strip.
Number of Notes: Use this field to set the number of notes covered by the length of the touch strip.
Pitch Bend
Select this mode to use the touch strip as you would a pitch wheel on a typical keyboard to control pitch bend.
To configure the Pitch Bend settings, press and hold Shift and press the Touch Strip button to open the Pitch Bend
Settings window in the software.
Relative Mode: When checked, the center pitch is set wherever you first place your finger along the touch strip.
When unchecked, the touch strip is fixed with the center being the unchanged noted.
Bend Up Range: Use this field to set the range of the pitch bend up in semitones.
Bend Down Range: Use this field to set the range of the pitch bend down in semitones.
Note: Pitch Bend ranges are only applied to MPC instruments and not to third-party plugins.
Global Pitch Bend: Check this box to override the pitch bend settings of all tracks, so that those with pitch bend
disabled or set to different ranges will only use the Global Range instead. When unchecked, all tracks may use
their individual pitch bend settings.
Mod Wheel
Select this mode to use the touch strip as you would a mod wheel on a typical keyboard to control the MIDI CC1
modulation control.
Sustain
Select this mode to use the touch strip as you would a sustain pedal on a typical keyboard to enable or disable note
sustain. When enabled, notes will continue sounding until sustain is disabled.
Expression
Select this mode to use the touch strip as you would an external expression pedal to control the MIDI CC11 expression
control.
Crossfader
Select this mode to use the touch strip as a virtual crossfader. The center point of the touch strip is the center point of
the crossfader. Move down to the A side or up to the B side. You can assign parameters to the Crossfader using
Q-Link Edit > Crossfader.
102
Battery Usage
Important: Only MPC Live and MPC Live II may use battery power. MPC X, MPC One, MPC Key 61, and MPC Key 37
must be connected to a power outlet.
Although you can power MPC Live/Live II from a power outlet (using the included power adapter), you can use its internal
battery, which typically has four hours of life, depending on CPU and how you’re using MPC Live/Live II.
While powering MPC Live/Live II from its internal battery, the battery icon in upper-right
corner of the touchscreen will show its current battery life. (The icon beside it indicates
whether MPC Live/Live II is in Standalone Mode or Controller Mode.)
To view MPC Live’s system resources (battery life, CPU,
and RAM usage), tap the battery icon in upper-right corner
of the touchscreen. The System Resources window will
appear, showing percentages to indicate the current battery
life, CPU, RAM usage (Mem), and storage device space
usage.
See System Resources to learn more about the information
shown in this window.
To charge MPC Live/Live II’s internal battery, connect its
power input to a power outlet using the included power
adapter. The charging indicator light (behind the vent on the
rear panel for MPC Live/Live II) will turn on while charging.
When the battery is fully charged or when it is disconnected
from a power outlet, then this light will turn off.
103
Modes
The MPC hardware has a Menu page that lets you select any one of several modes. This chapter describes the various
features and functions of each one.
Click a button below to skip directly to that chapter.
You can also edit the Menu layout by tapping and dragging the menu icons to your preferred location. This is useful
for putting your most-used modes in the left-most column so that they are easily accessed in any mode by swiping to
the right from the left edge of the touchscreen.
To reset the Menu layout, tap the three-dots icon next to the Sync setting, and then tap Reset Mode Menu.
104
Main Mode
The enhanced Main Mode gives you an overview of the most-used functions in MPC, improving workflow
efficiency and streamlining access to crucial visual feedback and editing functions.
To enter Main Mode, do one of the following:
•
Press Main.
•
Press Menu, and then tap Main.
Overview
Click or tap on part of the image below to jump directly to that section.
Toolbar
Shortcuts
Function
Buttons
Sequence
Track /
Arrangement
Views
Mixer
Strips
105
Toolbar
The top of the screen shows the project name and timing information.
The Project field shows the name of the current project.
The time counter shows the current playhead position, in bars:beats:ticks. This is shown in most of the modes.
Double-tap to open the Locate window, where you can adjust the playhead position, manage loop and record settings,
and quickly jump to specific points in your project.
The TC icon opens the Timing Correct (TC) window, which contains various settings to help quantize the note events
in your sequence.
Press and hold Shift and tap the TC icon to enable or disable global timing correct.
The Metro/metronome icon opens the Metronome (Click/Metro) menu, which contains all settings regarding the
metronome (click track).
Press and hold Shift and tap the Metro/metronome icon to enable or disable the metronome.
The automation button indicates the global Automation state. This is shown in several modes.
The In and Out boxes indicate your MPC hardware is receiving or sending (respectively) MIDI messages from or to
your computer. Tap here to open the MIDI Monitor and view the latest incoming or outgoing MIDI messages.
Shortcuts
The five Mode Icons on the left side of the screen provide shortcuts to some of the most-used modes. By
default, these are Browser Mode, Channel Mixer Mode, Pad Mixer Mode, Sounds Mode, and XY
Mode.
You can change what mode icons appear here by going to the Menu and tapping and dragging the mode
icons to rearrange them. Mode icons dragged into the left-most column will appear in the shortcuts on the
Main menu and when sliding out the tab on the left side of the screen in other modes.
106
Function Buttons
The buttons at the bottom of the screen perform different functions depending on the current mode. In Main Mode,
these functions are as follows:
New Track: Tap this button to add a new track to the project.
Rec Arm: Tap this button to arm Sequence recording.
Track –/+: Tap one of these buttons to switch to the previous or next track, respectively.
Mute: Tap this button to mute the current track.
Solo: Tap this button to solo the current track.
107
Sequence Section
The Sequence section shows the current sequence and its information.
Use Sequence field to select a sequence.
Tap and hold the Sequence name to open the Sequence Settings window.
Use the Name field to edit the Sequence name.
Use the Auto-Select Track field to specify which track is selected when switching sequences. Select None to
keep the current track selected when changing sequences, or select a specific track from your project.
Use the BPM field to adjust the tempo of the sequence.
To set whether the sequence follows its own tempo (Sequence) or a global
tempo (Global), tap the Sequence/Global button under the BPM field.
Alternatively, press and hold Shift and Tap.
Tap the Time Signature fields to adjust the time signature of the
project. The numerator (top number) indicates the number of beats
per bar (1–16). The denominator (bottom number) indicates the note
value of each beat (4, 8, 16, 32). Time signature changes apply to
all sequences within the project.
Tap Do It to apply the Time Signature change.
Tap Cancel, the X, or anywhere outside the window to close it.
Use the Bars field to adjust the length of the sequence in bars.
The Loop button shows whether the sequence (or a part of it) will loop or not.
To enable or disable looping, tap the button.
To set the start point and end point of loop, tap the Start or End field (respectively) and then use the data dial
or the –/
+ buttons, or double-tap the field and use the numeric keyboard that appears.
Note: The Last Bar value of the Delete Bars and Copy Bars processes depends on the total length of the sequence.
Use the Transpose field to set the transposition (in semitones) of the entire sequence.
108
To edit the sequence, tap the pencil icon on the right edge of the section. The Sequence Edit window will open.
You can use any of these functions as described below, though there are fewer options for audio tracks than for MIDI
tracks.
The Erase function erases all or part of a track in a specific sequence.
Use the Sequence field to select the sequence you want to erase.
Use the Track field to select the track you want to erase within
the sequence.
Use the Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set the time range of the
sequence you want to erase. The left fields set the start of the
time range, and the right fields set the end of the time range.
To select what types of events you erase, select one of the
Erase options:
All erases all pad events from the designated time range and
reset all of its settings.
Automation erases only automation from the designated
time range.
Note erases only specific pad events from the designated
time range. In the diagram of the eight pad banks that
appears, press each pad in each bank to select or deselect
its notes. This option is available only for MIDI tracks, not
audio tracks.
Except Note erases everything except note events from the
designated time range. This option is available only for MIDI
tracks, not audio tracks.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel, the X, or anywhere outside the window to return to the previous screen.
109
The Clear All function erases all events from the sequence and resets
all of its settings.
Tap Clear All to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel to return to the previous screen.
The Clear Events function only erases all events from the sequence.
Tap Clear Events to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel to return to the previous screen.
The Trim function immediately crops the sequence to the length of the
Bars value.
The Transpose function transposes a range of events on a track in a
sequence. The events within that range will shift accordingly in the Grid
View. This option is available for MIDI tracks only.
Use the Sequence field to select the sequence you want to
transpose.
Use the Track field to select the track you want to transpose within
the sequence.
Use the two sets of Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set the time range
of the sequence you want to transpose. The left fields set the start
of the time range, and the right fields set the end of the time range.
For drum tracks, use the two Pad fields to select the “source” pad (whose events you want to move) and
“destination” pad (where the events will be placed). Tap each field and then press the desired pad.
For keygroup tracks, plugin tracks, and MIDI tracks, set the range and amount of transposition:
Range: Use the two Note fields to set the range of notes of the events you want to transpose. Note events
within this range will be transposed, while note events outside of this range will remain unchanged.
Transpose: Use this field to set how many semitones up or down you want to transpose the note events.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel, the X, or anywhere outside the window to return to the previous screen.
The Delete Bars function removes a range of bars from a sequence.
Use the Sequence field to select the sequence whose bars you want to delete.
Use the First
Bar and Last Bar fields to set the range of bars you want to delete.
The bar in each field and all bars in between them will be deleted.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel, the X, or anywhere outside the window to return to the previous screen.
110
The Insert Bars function adds empty bars to a sequence at a specified point.
Use the Sequence field to select the desired sequence.
Use the # of Bars field to set how many bars you will insert.
Use the Before Bar field to set where you will insert the bars. The bars will be
inserted before this one.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel, the X, or anywhere outside the window to return to the previous screen.
The Half Length function will immediately halve the length of the sequence (without deleting any note events).
The Double Length function will immediately double the sequence and copy all events from the first half to the second
half.
The Copy Sequence function copies the contents of one sequence to another.
Use the Copy Contents of Sequence field to select the “source” sequence. This is
the sequence whose events you want to copy.
Use the Over Contents of Sequence field to select the “destination” sequence.
This is the sequence where the source sequence will be copied.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel, the X, or anywhere outside the window to return to the previous screen.
The Copy Bars function copies a range of bars from a sequence and adds them
to another at a specified point.
Use the From Sequence field to select the “source” sequence. This is the
sequence whose bars you want to copy.
Use the First Bar and Last Bar fields to set the range of bars to copy in the
source sequence.
Use the To Sequence field to select the “destination” sequence. This is the
sequence where the source sequence bars will be copied.
Use the After Bar field to set where you want to add the copied bars. The
copied bars will be inserted after this one.
Use the Copies field to set how many instances of the copied bars you want to add.
Tap Replace to overwrite the destination sequence.
Tap Merge to add the events to the destination sequence without erasing anything.
Tap Cancel, the
X, or anywhere outside the window to return to the previous screen.
111
The Copy Events function copies a range of events or selected audio
track regions from a sequence and adds them to another at a specified
point.
Use the From Sequence field to select the “source” sequence.
This is the sequence whose content you want to copy.
Use the From Track field to select the “source” track. This is the
track whose content you want to copy.
The Pads or Notes field will specify the pads or notes from which
to copy events. By default, this will be set to All to copy all events
in the current track. To select specific pads or notes, press the
corresponding pads on your MPC hardware.
Use the Selection field to set what notes are copied from the
chosen time range. Copy All Events will copy and paste all events
in the track. Copy Only Selected Events will copy and paste only
the events that are currently selected. This field is available for
MIDI tracks only.
Use the Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set the time range of the
events or the audio track you want to copy. The left fields set the
start of the time range, and the right fields set the end of the time
range.
Use the To Sequence field to select the “destination” sequence.
This is the sequence where the content of the source sequence
will be copied.
Use the To Track field to select the “destination” track. This is the track where the content of the source track will
be copied.
Use the Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set where you want to add the copied events or audio track. The events or
audio track will be added after this point.
Use the Copies field to set how many instances of the copied events or audio track you want to add.
Tap Replace to overwrite the destination sequence.
Tap Merge to add the events to the destination sequence without erasing anything.
Tap Cancel, the X, or anywhere outside the window to return to the previous screen.
112
Track Section
The Track section displays essential details for the current track type and facilitates track-specific editing operations.
Example Track section while using a Drum track. Example Track section while using an Audio track.
The track field shows the track number and its name.
To edit the name of the track, tap and hold on the track name to open the Track Settings window, and then use
the Name field.
To change tracks, use the Track -/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen. Alternatively, tap the Track header and use
the data dial or +/- buttons.
You can also press and hold Main and a window will appear showing all tracks in your project in a four-by-four
layout, mirroring your MPC pads. Tap a track in the window to select, or press the respective pad on your hardware.
From this window, you can also tap Tracks, Submixes, Returns, and Outputs to display the selected track types
in the window, and then select one in the same way.
To change track type, tap the track type icon next to the track number, and then select the track type from the menu
that appears.
113
Drum Tracks
To select a pad, simply tap the pad on your MPC hardware.
When a sample is loaded to the selected pad:
The waveform displays the sample loaded to the selected pad on the selected layer.
In the waveform preview, pinch in or out to adjust the zoom level. You can also adjust the start (S) marker (if Loop
Lock is on), loop marker (if Loop Lock is off), and end (E) marker by tapping and dragging.
Double-tap the waveform preview to open the Samples tab of Track Edit mode.
To change layers, use the Layer field at the bottom of the track section.
If no sample is loaded to the selected pad:
Tap Browse to open the Browser to search for and select a sample to load.
Tap Record to open the Sampler to record and load a new sample. Alternatively, you can record a sample directly
to the pad from Main Mode:
1.
Press the Rec button on your MPC hardware to arm recording.
2.
Tap an empty pad to arm it for recording. Recording will follow the settings established in the Sampler
mode regarding active inputs and threshold. When you are finished recording, tap the pad again. You can
also press and hold a pad, and recording will continue as long as the pad is held.
114
Use the Monitor field to set how your track will be monitored. Double-tap this field to open the menu, or tap to select the
field and then use the data encoder or +/- buttons to cycle through its four states:
When set to Off, the track's MIDI input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard. This
setting is useful when using keyboards with Local Control active.
When set to In, the track's MIDI input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback
from recorded events will not be heard.
When set to Auto, the track's MIDI input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded
events will be heard.
When set to Merge, the track's MIDI input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
Use the Length field to set how long the track is in beats. When the SEQ button is on, the track length will follow the
Sequence length. When this button is off, use the Bars:Beats:Ticks values to set the exact track length.
Tip: This feature lets you maintain tracks of different lengths. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence
repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
Use the Velocity field to set how loudly or quietly a track plays relative to its recorded levels. When set to 50%, the
track will be played with half the velocity it was originally played. When set to 200%, the track will play twice as loud.
The maximum velocity level is still 127, though. This setting will also affect pads or other MIDI-related input for that
specific track.
Use the Layer field to select which of the eight available sample layers are shown. The layer number is shown here,
and the dots in the waveform preview indicate the layer shown.
Tap the pencil icon to open the Track Edit window. See Track Edit to learn more.
Tap the Duplicate Track icon to immediately create an identical track on a new track.
Tap the pad / four pads icons to swap the Mixer Channel Strip between showing Track and Pad settings. See Mixer
Strips to learn more.
115
Keygroup Tracks
The waveform displays the sample loaded to the selected pad on the selected layer.
In the waveform preview, you can adjust the start (S) marker (if Loop Lock is on), loop marker (if Loop Lock is
off), and end (E) marker by tapping and dragging.
Double-tap the waveform preview to open the Samples tab of Track Edit mode.
Use the Monitor field to set how your track will be monitored. Double-tap this field to open the menu, or tap to select the
field and then use the data encoder or +/- buttons to cycle through its four states:
When set to Off, the track's MIDI input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard. This
setting is useful when using keyboards with Local Control active.
When set to In, the track's MIDI input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback
from recorded events will not be heard.
When set to Auto, the track's MIDI input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded
events will be heard.
When set to Merge, the track's MIDI input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
Use the Length field to set how long the track is in beats. When the SEQ button is on, the track length will follow the
Sequence length. When this button is off, use the Bars:Beats:Ticks values to set the exact track length.
Tip: This feature lets you maintain tracks of different lengths. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence
repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
Use the Velocity field to set how loudly or quietly a track plays relative to its recorded levels. When set to 50%, the
track will be played with half the velocity it was originally played. When set to 200%, the track will play twice as loud.
The maximum velocity level is still 127, though. This setting will also affect pads or other MIDI-related input for that
specific track.
Use the Transpose field to set the transposition (in semitones) of the entire track.
Tap the pencil icon to open the Track Edit window. See Track Edit to learn more.
Tap the Duplicate Track icon to immediately create an identical track on a new track.
Tap the pad perform icon to open the Pad Perform window, where you can adjust what notes or chords are played
by the pads on your MPC hardware.
Tap the pad / keyboard icon to swap the Mixer Channel Strip between showing Track and Keygroup settings.
116
Plugin Tracks
Use the Plugin field to select the plugin the track is using. In the screen that appears, you can tap the Type or
Manufacturer button at the bottom of the screen to enable or disable sorting of your plugins by type or maker.
Use the Preset field to select a preset (if any) within the plugin the track is using.
Tap the plugin preview icon to open Track Edit Mode and view the plugin interface.
Use the MIDI Ch field to select the MIDI channel over which the track sends its MIDI data.
Use the Monitor field to set how your track will be monitored. Double-tap this field to open the menu, or tap to select the
field and then use the data encoder or +/- buttons to cycle through its four states:
When set to Off, the track's MIDI input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard. This
setting is useful when using keyboards with Local Control active.
When set to In, the track's MIDI input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback
from recorded events will not be heard.
When set to Auto, the track's MIDI input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded
events will be heard.
When set to Merge, the track's MIDI input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
Use the Length field to set how long the track is in beats. When the SEQ button is on, the track length will follow the
Sequence length. When this button is off, use the Bars:Beats:Ticks values to set the exact track length.
Tip: This feature lets you maintain tracks of different lengths. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence
repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
Use the Velocity field to set how loudly or quietly a track plays relative to its recorded levels. When set to 50%, the
track will be played with half the velocity it was originally played. When set to 200%, the track will play twice as loud.
The maximum velocity level is still 127, though. This setting will also affect pads or other MIDI-related input for that
specific track.
Tap the pencil icon to open the Track Edit window. See Track Edit to learn more.
Use the Transpose field to set the transposition (in semitones) of the entire track.
Tap the Duplicate Track icon to immediately create an identical track on a new track.
Tap the Pad Perform icon to open the Pad Perform window, where you can adjust what notes or chords are played
by the pads on your MPC hardware.
117
MIDI Tracks
Use the MIDI Input Port field to select the port over which the track receives its MIDI data.
Use the MIDI Output Port field to select the port over the track sends its MIDI data.
Use the MIDI Output Ch field to select the MIDI channel over which the track sends its MIDI data.
Use the Program Ch field to select the program change message the track sends out.
Use the Bank LSB and Bank MSB fields to select the messages for Least Significant Byte and Most Significant Byte
(respectively) that the track sends out.
Use the Monitor field to set how your MIDI track will be monitored. Double-tap this field to open the menu, or tap to
select the field and then use the data encoder or +/- buttons to cycle through its four states:
When set to Off, the track's MIDI input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard. This
setting is useful when using keyboards with Local Control active.
When set to In, the track's MIDI input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback
from recorded events will not be heard.
When set to Auto, the track's MIDI input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded
events will be heard.
When set to Merge, the track's MIDI input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
Use the Length field to set how long the track is in beats. When the SEQ button is on, the track length will follow the
Sequence length. When this button is off, use the Bars:Beats:Ticks values to set the exact track length.
Tip: This feature lets you maintain tracks of different lengths. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence
repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
Use the Velocity field to set how loudly or quietly a track plays relative to its recorded levels. When set to 50%, the
track will be played with half the velocity it was originally played. When set to 200%, the track will play twice as loud.
The maximum velocity level is still 127, though. This setting will also affect pads or other MIDI-related input for that
specific track.
Use the Transpose field to set the transposition (in semitones) of the entire track.
Tap the pencil icon to open the Track Edit window. See Track Edit to learn more.
Tap the Duplicate Track icon to immediately create an identical track on a new track.
Tap the Pad Perform icon to open the Pad Perform window, where you can adjust what notes or chords are played
by the pads on your MPC hardware.
118
CV Tracks
Use the Melodic / Drum buttons to set the CV operation type.
When set to Melodic type, you can adjust the Note Priority (Note/Last), the CV Port, the Gate Port, the modulation
wheel port (Mod Wheel Port), and Velocity Port.
When set to Drum type, you can configure any Pad to output on any CV Port, as well setting the Data Type.
Use the Monitor field to set how your track will be monitored. Double-tap this field to open the menu, or tap to select the
field and then use the data encoder or +/- buttons to cycle through its four states:
When set to Off, the track's input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard. This setting is
useful when using keyboards with Local Control active.
When set to In, the track's input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback
from recorded events will not be heard.
When set to Auto, the track's input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded events
will be heard.
When set to Merge, the track's input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
Use the Length field to set how long the track is in beats. When the SEQ button is on, the track length will follow the
Sequence length. When this button is off, use the Bars:Beats:Ticks values to set the exact track length.
Tip: This feature lets you maintain tracks of different lengths. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence
repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
Use the Velocity field to set how loudly or quietly a track plays relative to its recorded levels. When set to 50%, the
track will be played with half the velocity it was originally played. When set to 200%, the track will play twice as loud.
The maximum velocity level is still 127, though. This setting will also affect pads or other MIDI-related input for that
specific track.
Use the Transpose field to set the transposition (in semitones) of the entire track.
Tap the pencil icon to open the Track Edit window. See Track Edit to learn more.
Tap the Duplicate Track icon to immediately create an identical track on a new track.
When the CV track type is set to Melodic, tap the Pad Perform icon to open the Pad Perform window, where you
can adjust what notes or chords are played by the pads on your MPC hardware.
119
Audio Tracks
Tap and drag the Loop marker to adjust the loop length. Dragging from either end will extend or shorten the loop.
Dragging from the middle of the loop marker will move the entire loop.
Double-tap the audio sample timeline to open Grid View for the audio track, where you can edit the audio regions.
Use the Monitor field to set how your audio track will be monitored. Double-tap this field to open the menu, or highlight
this field and then use the data dial or +/- buttons to choose from the following:
When set to Off, you will never hear any incoming audio.
When set to In, you will hear incoming audio whether or not the track is record-enabled.
When set to Auto, you will hear incoming audio while the track is record-enabled only.
When set to Merge, the track's input is always monitored, and you will hear playback of audio.
Use the Length field to set how long the track is in beats. When the SEQ button is on, the track length will follow the
Sequence length. When this button is off, use the Bars:Beats:Ticks values to set the exact track length.
Tip: This feature lets you maintain tracks of different lengths. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence
repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
Use the Input field to select which inputs the audio track will use.
Use the Edit Audio button to open the audio Grid View for the audio track, where you can edit the audio regions.
Tap the pencil icon to open the Track Edit window. See Track Edit to learn more.
Tap the Duplicate Track icon to immediately create an identical track on a new track.
Tap the Tuner icon to open the built-in Tuner, which allows you to easily tune any connected audio source.
120
Buses
In addition to the previous track types, you can also view and edit bus tracks including Submixes, Returns, and
Outputs in this section.
Use the Inserts boxes to add or view inserts effects. Tap the + icon in an empty slot to add a new effect. Tap an insert
slot with a loaded effect to view the effect’s controls.
Use the Output field to set the output routing for the bus. This is not available when viewing the Outputs.
Use the Length field to set how long the track is in beats. When the SEQ button is on, the track length will follow the
Sequence length. When this button is off, use the Bars:Beats:Ticks values to set the exact track length.
Tip: This is useful when creating automation on your bus track.
Tap the Inserts button to open a window where you can load, change, and enable or disable the effects.
Tap the Load FX Rack to load a factory or user-saved FX rack to the track.
121
Track Edit
To edit the track, tap the pencil icon on the right edge of the section. The Track Edit window will open.
To return to Main Mode, tap Cancel or the left arrow (
) in the upper-left corner of the screen. Alternatively,
press Main.
The available functions in the Track Edit depend on the type of track selected. The following functions are available for
all tracks:
The Copy Track function copies the contents of one track to another.
Use the Copy Contents of Track field to select the “source” track. This is the
track whose events you want to copy.
Use the Over Contents of Track field to select the “destination” track. This is
the track where the source track will be copied.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice, or tap Cancel to cancel and return to Main
Mode.
The Duplicate Track function immediately creates an identical track on a new track.
The Duplicate Track with Events function immediately creates an identical track, including all existing events on
that track, on a new track.
The Delete Track function instantly removes the track and all of its contents.
122
Additionally, when a Drum track is selected, the following options are
available.
The Merge Pads function allows you to merge samples and settings
from two drum tracks together.
Use the From Track field to select the track from which the pads
will be copied.
Use the Into Track field to select the track to which the copied
pads will be merged.
Check the Start on next bank field to merge the samples and
settings at the start of the next unused bank.
Tap Do It to merge the pads, or tap Cancel to close the window
and return to the previous screen.
The Merge Tracks function lets you combine the contents of one drum
track into another.
Use the From Track field to select the track whose contents will be
copied.
Use the Into Track field to select the track to which the copied
track will be merged.
Check the Include program and pad parameters field to merge
the track settings into the new track.
Tap Do It to merge the tracks, or tap Cancel to close the window
and return to the previous screen.
The Copy Pads function allows you to copy one or more pads from one
drum track to another.
Use the Copy Type menu to select whether you want to copy an
individual Pad, a Bank of pads, or a Range of pads. Use the fields
that appear to select the Pad, From Bank or Start/End Pads that
will be copied.
Use the From Track field to select the track from which the pads
are copied.
Use the To Track field to select the track to which the copied pads
are added.
Use the Pad, To Bank or Start Pad fields to set the starting point
where the copied pads are added.
Tap
Apply to copy the pads and keep this window open.
Tap Do It to copy the pads and close the window, or tap Close to
close the window without making any changes.
123
The Explode Track function immediately breaks down a Drum track containing samples and events into multiple
new tracks, making it easier to mute individual drum elements using Track Mute Mode. Each new track will keep
the pad and track insert effects of the original source track. Where pads with events are assigned to a mute group,
those pads are copied to a single track.
The Edit Pad Note Map function lets you assign specific MIDI notes to
your MPC hardware pads.
Use the Pad field to select a pad, or press the pad on your
hardware.
Use the MIDI Note field to set the desired MIDI note value for the
pad.
Use the Presets buttons to assign a preset layout to the pads:
Chromatic C1 (an ascending chromatic scale, beginning with C1),
Chromatic C-2 (an ascending chromatic scale, beginning with C-
2), or Classic MPC (the default MIDI note map of classic MPCs).
When a Keygroup track is selected, you can also access the Merge tracks
function.
The Merge Tracks function lets you combine the contents of one
keygroup track into another.
Use the From Track field to select the track whose contents will be
copied.
Use the Into Track field to select the track to which the copied
track will be merged.
Check the Include program and pad parameters field to merge
the track settings into the new track.
Check the Increment layers by 1 to append the From Track’s
keygroup sample layer(s) to the next available layer in the Into
Track.
Tap Do It to merge the tracks, or tap Cancel to close the window
and return to the previous screen.
124
Arrangement Section
The Arrangement section displays recorded events on the linear timeline and provides easy access to its editing
functions.
Tap the play icon to begin playback of the linear arrangement.
Use the Auto Record buttons to determine how punch in auto recording is enabled:
Off: Auto Record at Punch In is turned off.
In: Auto Record at Punch In is enabled. Once playback reaches the Punch In point, recording will begin
automatically.
Loop Start: Once playback reaches the Loop Start point, recording will begin automatically.
Use the Punch In and Out field to set the start and end points for Punch In Auto Recording.
Double-tap on the linear timeline to open Grid View displaying the current track.
125
Tap the pencil icon to open the Arrangement Edit options for the
arrangement.
The following function is available for all track types:
The Clear function erases all events from the sequence for the current
track.
Tap Clear to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel to return to the previous screen.
The following functions are available for all track types except Audio:
The Half-Speed function immediately doubles the lengths of all note events in the arrangement as well as the
distance between them. In other words, all notes are spread further apart so the arrangement sounds like it is
playing at half of the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
The Double-Speed function immediately halves the lengths of all note events in the arrangement as well as the
distance between them. In other words, all notes are pressed closer together so that the arrangement sounds like
it is playing at twice the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
The Pitch Quantize function forces the pitches of MIDI note events into a
specific scale.
Use the Root Note field to select the desired root note of the scale.
Use the Scale field to select a type of scale.
To determine which note events will be quantized, tap the Only
apply to selected events checkbox.
When on, only the currently selected note events will be
quantized.
When off, all pitches in the current track will be quantized.
Use the Start Note and End Note fields to set lowest-possible and
highest-possible pitches where the quantized note events will be
placed (respectively). If a note event is originally outside of this
range, it will be forced to the nearest pitch (within the scale) inside
the range.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice, or tap the X, Cancel, or anywhere
outside the window to cancel and return to the previous screen.
126
The Humanize function applies randomization to the timing, length,
and/or velocity of note events.
Tap the Humanize Time checkbox to select whether or not
humanization will be applied to the timing of note events.
Use the Amount (Pulses) slider to select the maximum number of
pulses by which the timing of an event will be adjusted.
Use the Eagerness slider to set how dramatically the humanization
effect is applied to the timing. Negative values correspond to
playing “ahead of the beat” while positive values correspond to
playing “behind the beat.”
Tap the Humanize Note Length checkbox to set whether or not
humanization will be applied to the duration of note events.
Use the Length (%) slider to set how dramatically the humanization
effect is applied to note lengths.
Tap the Humanize Velocity checkbox to set whether or not
humanization will be applied to the velocities of note events.
Use the Strength (%) slider to set how dramatically the humanization
effect is applied to note velocities.
Tap the Only Apply to Selected Events checkbox to determine
which notes will use these humanization values:
When on, just the currently selected notes will be humanized.
When off, all notes in the arrangement will be humanized.
Tap Apply to apply humanization and keep this window open.
Tap Do It to apply humanization and close the window.
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window to close the
window without making any changes.
The Random Events function creates random melodic or drum
patterns in the current arrangement.
Use the Event Type field to select Drum Events or Melodic Events
to select the type of events you want to create.
Use the Replace field to select how the events will be created
relative to the existing events on the track:
Replace All Events: Select this option to replace all events in
the arrangement with the randomly generated ones.
Replace Events in Note Range: Select this option to replace
all events in the designated note range in the arrangement with
the randomly generated ones. Use the Bank or Start Pad and
End Pad menus to set the note range for drum events or the
Start Note
and End Note menus to set the note range for
melodic events.
Add to Existing Events: Select this option to add the randomly
generated events to the arrangement without replacing or
overwriting the existing ones.
Use the Pattern Size (Bars) field to set how many bars the events
will use. The highest possible value is the number of bars in the
current arrangement.
Use the Note Length field to select the duration of the events. (This
feature is nonfunctional if Legato is enabled while generating
melodic events.)
Tap Apply to generate the events and keep this window open.
Tap Do It to generate the events and close the window.
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window to close the
window without generating any events.
127
The Split Events process divides note events into an equal number of
parts.
Use the Into slider to select the number of parts the event(s) will be
split into.
Tap the Only selected events checkbox to apply the process only
to currently selected events. When unchecked, all events will be
split.
The Convert to Progression function creates a custom Progression
from a melodic MIDI track that you can use to perform with Progressions
Note mode.
Use the Progression fields to set the parameters of the new
Progression:
Use the Name field to set the progression name.
Use the Root Note field to set the root note.
Use the Scale Type field to set the scale type.
Use the Chord fields to set the parameters for the chords in the Progression:
Use the Chord field to select a chord from the progression to edit.
Use the Name field to rename the selected chord.
Use the Type field to set the type of chord: Root, Normal or Below Root.
Tap the Play button to play the selected chord.
Tap Do It to convert the progression and close the window.
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window to close the window and return to the previous screen.
The following functions are available for Drum, Keygroup, and Plugin tracks:
The Bounce to Sample function renders the current track in the arrangement as an audio sample and places it in
the project’s sample pool. By default, it will be named Bounce and appended with the track name.
Use the Audio Tail field to set the amount, in seconds, of extra time added to the end of the resulting audio
files.
The Bounce to Audio Track function renders the current track in the arrangement and adds it as a new audio track
in the project. The Main Mode will automatically switch to the Audio track. By default, it will be named Bounce and
appended with the track name. This function does not work for MIDI tracks or CV tracks.
Use the Audio Tail field to set the amount, in
seconds, of extra time added to the end of the resulting audio
files.
The following functions are available for Audio tracks only:
The Flatten and Flatten Elastique functions flatten the audio track when transport playback is stopped, rendering
all the edits and regions within the arrangement to a single new audio file. The Elastique Pro algorithm can be used
for time-stretching or pitch-shifting, providing higher-quality results with less artifacts than MPC's standard
algorithm.
128
Mixer Strips
On the left edge of the screen, next to the five mode icons, are the XL Channel Strips, which allow you to effortlessly
manage all your mixing tasks with access to important settings for the current pad, track, and main output.
To show or hide the mixer channel strips, tap the icons at the top of the condensed strips.
On the left side is the track or pad channel strip. When viewing a Drum track, you can tap
the single-pad / four-squares icons in the bottom-right corner of the Track/Arrangement
Section to cycle between track or pad mixer strips. When viewing a Keygroup track, tap
the single-pad / keyboard icons in the same location to toggle between track or keygroup
mixer strips.
The right side will dynamically adjust to display relevant information based on your actions. For example, selecting a
send option in the left channel strip will prompt the right channel strip to show the corresponding return channel. When
a track is shown on the left side, this will show the main output, and when a pad is shown on the left side, this will
show the corresponding track. This allows for seamless access to audio routing options and streamlined navigation.
129
Both mixer channel strip types feature four views:
LVL: This view contains common mixer parameters.
The Level meter displays track volume and incoming MIDI. Use the white
line to adjust the track level.
Use the pan slider to adjust the track panning.
Tap the Mute button to mute the track.
Tap the Solo button to solo the track, muting all other tracks. (Not shown
for Main Output)
Tap the Automation button to toggle between the three automation states:
Read (R), Write (W), and Off. (Not shown for Pad.)
Tap the Record button to arm the sequence for recording. (Not shown for
Pad or Main Output)
When viewing a Pad channel strip, the first field shows the current pad number.
Press a pad or tap the field to select a different pad.
Tip: This is useful for mixing your pads without having to enter the Pad Mixer.
FX: This view displays insert effects.
Tap the FX Racks icon to load an FX rack.
Tap the expand window icon to open the Inserts window, where you can
load, change, and enable or disable the effects. Here, you can also easily
rearrange insert effects using the arrow buttons to shift their order.
Tap an empty insert slot (indicated by a +) to open the plugin browser
window.
If an effect is loaded, tap the insert slot to open the plugin effect interface.
SEND: This view displays Sends 1–4. (Not shown for Main Output)
Use the Send knobs to adjust the send level. When a Send knob is adjusted,
the associated Return track will be shown in the adjacent mixer strip.
130
I/O: This view displays routing options. (Not shown for Main Output)
Tap the Monitor button to change the monitor behavior for the track. When
the track is being monitored, the meter on the left side will show the
incoming audio level or MIDI velocity.
Use the MIDI Input and Channel fields to configure the MIDI input settings.
(Not available for Audio tracks.)
Use the Send To field to send the track's MIDI output to another track. (Not
available for Audio tracks.)
Use the MIDI Output and Channel fields to configure the MIDI output
settings. (Not available for Audio tracks.)
Use the Audio In field to configure the input source of the external audio
signal, which you can set to a pair of inputs (Input 1,2) or a single input
(Input 1, Input 2). (Audio tracks only.)
Use the Audio Out field to configure where the track or pad is routed, which
you can set to a submix (Sub 1–8), a pair of outputs (Out 1,2–Out 3,4), or a
single output (Out 1–4). (Audio, Drum, and Plugin tracks only.)
Note: When set to a mono channel, the left and right channels are summed
post-pan knob. If the pan knob is set to the center position, the left and
right channels will be summed and padded. If the pan knob is set to the
maximum left or right positions, only the respective channel will be sent to
the output.
When viewing a Pad Channel strip, the following options are also available:
Use the MIDI Out Enabled field to determine when a MIDI note is sent to
the MIDI Output. This can be used for triggering external gear, lighting, or
video systems. Select Never (no MIDI note is sent), Always (MIDI note is
sent every time the pad is triggered), or When Empty (MIDI note is only sent
if the pad has no internal sample).
Use the MIDI Out Note to select the specific MIDI note to send for the
selected pad.
Use the MIDI Out Channel to select the MIDI Channel where the output is
sent.
131
Browser
The Browser lets you navigate your MPC hardware’s internal and external hard disks to load samples,
sequences, songs, etc. Using filter buttons and user-definable folders, you can easily adapt it to your
preferred workflow. You can also audition (preview) your samples before loading them.
Important: You can install an additional SATA drive in your MPC X, MPC Live, MPC Live II, MPC Key 61, or MPC Key
37 hardware, allowing for even more storage space. See Appendix > SATA Drive Installation to learn more about
this.
Important: MPC hardware supports read and write capability for exFAT, FAT32, NTFS, and EXT4 file systems as well
as read-only capability for HFS+ file systems. We recommend using an exFAT file system as it is the most robust one
supported by both Windows and macOS.
To show the Browser, do any of the following:
•
Press Menu and then tap Browser.
•
Press Browse (MPC X, MPC One), Shift and Menu/Browse (MPC Live, MPC Live II, MPC Key 61), or Load
(MPC Key 37).
To view the project’s sample pool and pads, tap Sample Assign in the lower-left corner. See the Sample Assign
section to learn about this.
In the Browser, you can do any of the following:
Tap Places on the left side of the screen to browse your files by location.
Internal is the internal drive of your MPC hardware.
MPC Documents is a shortcut to the MPC Documents folder on the internal drive of your MPC hardware.
If you have storage devices connected to USB ports or SD card slot of your MPC hardware, they will appear
in this column, as well.
Tap Content to browse your files by content, and then select the type of file: Drums, Instruments, Samples,
Demos, or My Files (see below to learn about these content buttons).
Tap Expansions to browse your Expansions.
Tap the folder/
icon in the upper-left corner to move up one folder level.
To move through a list, do any of the following:
•
Swipe up or down
•
Turn the data dial
•
Use the –/+ buttons
Tap one of the file list headers to sort the list: Name, Size, Date Modified or Date Created. Tap the header again
to change the sorting direction. These can be added or removed using the Browser Options window.
132
To select a file or folder, tap it.
To enter a folder, double-tap it or tap Open in the lower-right corner. You can also tap one of the folder buttons
(1–5) in the upper-right corner to jump immediately to those pre-assigned file paths (see below to learn how to
assign these file paths).
To load a selected file, double-tap it or tap Load. If the file is a sample, it will be loaded to the project’s sample
pool. If the file is a project, it will be loaded in its entirety (you will be asked if you want to close your current project).
To load all files in a folder, select the folder (so it is highlighted in the list), press and hold Shift, and then tap
Load All in the lower-right corner.
Important: Although you can load multiple files at once, any samples you load into a project will be automatically
converted to full-quality uncompressed audio files, so they may use more storage space than they do on your
external storage device. If you are unable to load multiple files at once due to this, select fewer files and try again.
Press and hold Shift and then tap Delete File at the bottom of the screen to delete a selected file or folder.
Tap and hold Play (
) at the bottom of the screen to preview a selected sound.
To adjust audition settings, tap the Audition speaker icon at the bottom of the screen. In the screen that
appears:
Tap Auto to enable or disable automatic audition when a sound is selected.
Tap and drag the level slider up or down to set the audition volume level.
Tap Sync to enable or disable auditioning samples at the beginning of the next bar of the sequence when
playback is active.
Tap Warp to enable or disable samples with an embedded tempo to be warped to the project tempo. Samples
with no embedded tempo or externally-embedded tempo will not be affected by this setting.
Tap the Audition icon once more to hide the window.
To show the information for the current storage device, press and hold Shift and then tap Drive Info at the bottom
of the screen. The drive’s information will appear in a new window. Tap OK to return to the previous screen.
To format a storage device to use an exFAT file system, select it in the Browser, press and hold Shift and then
tap Format Drive at the bottom of the screen. In the window that appears, tap OK and then Format in the next
window to format the device, or tap Cancel to return to the previous screen without formatting. This formatting
process will set the device to use the exFAT file system, remove any partitions from the drive, and erase all of its
content. (Devices that are uninitialized or do not have a file system will not be recognized by the MPC hardware
and consequently cannot be formatted.)
To get the most efficient use of the Browser, set the file
paths to your favorite drive locations first. There are five
folder buttons labeled 1–5 in the upper-right corner. You
can set these to be shortcuts to five locations on your MPC
hardware’s internal drive and/or any connected storage
devices, giving you quick access to your files.
To assign the current location to a folder button, press and hold Shift, and then tap one of the folder buttons (1–
5). Now, when you tap that folder button again, the Browser will show that folder’s content immediately.
Use the six filter buttons to show only specific types of files
in the list below. Folders will still be shown in the list.
Tap the P/page icon to show project files only.
Tap the bars icon to show pattern files only.
Tap the
four-squares icon to show kit files only.
Tap the plug icon to show plugin preset files only.
Tap the waveform icon to show sample files only.
Tap the three-pages icon to show all file types.
133
Tap the gear icon to open the Browser Options window:
Check the Show file size box to display file size in the
file list.
Check the Show modified date box to show the last
date the file was modified in the file list.
Check the Show created date to show the date the file
was created in the file list.
Check the Search includes subfolders box to enable
recursive searching. When enabled, all files, including
those in subfolders, will be appear in the search.
Check the Hide Project and Track data folders box
to disable project and track folders from appearing in
the file list.
Check the Clear unused samples on load box to
remove samples that are not in use when loading a
sample, track, or program over an existing one.
Use the five Content buttons to show specific locations in
the internal drive of your MPC hardware and filter them
automatically by file type:
Drums: Tap this button to enter the Expansions/The
Vault 2 folder on the internal drive, viewing program
files only.
Instruments: Tap this button to enter the Expansions/
Instruments folder on the internal drive, viewing
program files only.
Samples: Tap this button to enter the Expansions/The
Vault 2 folder on the internal drive, viewing sample files
only.
Demos: Tap this button to enter the Demos folder on
the internal drive, viewing project files only.
My Files: Tap this button to enter the MPC Documents
folder, viewing all files.
Splice: Tap this button to view samples synced from a
paired Splice account. See Operation > Menu >
Preferences > Splice for more information.
134
Sample Assign
When the Sample Assign tab is selected, you can do any of the following:
Double-tap the Track field at the top of the screen to select a track in the project. In the list that appears, tap the
desired track. Alternatively, tap the Track field and then use the data dial or the –/+ buttons to select a location.
To move through the sample pool, swipe up or down, turn the data dial, or use the –/+ buttons.
Tap and hold Play (
) at the bottom of the screen to preview a selected sound.
Tap Audition at the bottom of the screen to enable or disable the audition function and set its volume level. In the
screen that appears, tap Auto to enable or disable it, and tap and drag the level slider up or down to set the
volume level. Tap Audition once more to hide the window.
To assign a sample to a pad, press it or tap it on the screen so it lights green. Then, in the Sample Pool list,
double-tap the desired sample. Alternatively, use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select a sample, and press the
data dial, or press the center cursor or Enter (MPC X), to assign it. You can also tap and drag from the sample
name to the desired pad. Hold Shift while tapping and dragging to move the sample to a specific layer on the pad,
indicated by the red bar.
To clear a sample from a pad, press it or tap it on the screen so it lights green. Then, tap Clear Pad at the bottom
of the screen.
Tap and hold on a sample name in the Sample Pool to display the following additional options:
Tap Delete Sample to remove the sample from the Sample Pool.
If a sample is loaded to memory, tap Stream From Disk to remove it from memory and stream it from a disk
drive. Disk streaming samples will be marked with a green waveform icon.
If a sample is streaming from disk, tap Load To Memory to disable streaming the sample from a disk drive
and return it to memory. Samples loaded to memory will be marked with a grey waveform icon.
Note: Disk streaming relies on the performance of the disk you are streaming from. For best operation, it is
recommended to use an SSD (solid-state drive) connected to your MPC’s internal SATA port (if available).
Once you have saved a project to your SSD, your files will stream from that location. For an unsaved project,
MPC uses a temporary file location from which to stream audio files. Go to Menu > Preferences > Project
Load/Save and set the Temporary File Location to your SSD for best results.
To return to the main Browser window, tap Sample Assign again.
135
Channel Mixer
In the Channel Mixer, you can set levels, stereo panning, and other settings for your tracks, submixes,
returns and main outputs.
To open the Channel Mixer, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then tap Channel Mixer.
•
Press Mixer.
The Channel Mixer works like an audio mixer with various settings for each track, with up to 8 tracks shown on the
display at once. The name of the track is displayed at the top of each one.
Tap a track header to select it.
Drag your finger left or right on the display to view more tracks.
Quickly swipe your finger to the left on the display to view the Submixes, Returns, and Outputs.
Tap the Settings icon in the lower-right corner of the screen to open the Mixer configuration to edit the following
settings:
Use the Solo Button field to set the behavior of the solo buttons. They can be used to either Solo Tracks or Cue
Tracks.
Use the Crossfader field to set the Profile of the crossfader, either Linear, Exponential or Logarithmic.
Use the MIDI Track Input Metering fields to adjust how MIDI inputs are displayed in the Channel Mixer.
The Meter field determines when the MIDI Input meter is active: Always, When Record Armed, When Record
Armed or Monitoring, or Never.
The Meter field determines what MIDI data is shown with the meters: User Input or User Input and Playback.
Use the Audio Track Input Metering field to determine when the Audio Track meter is active: Always, When
Record Armed, When Record Armed or Monitoring, or Never.
Double-tap the track headers to open the Track Settings window.
136
Volume
The Volume tab gives you an overview of the volume level of your tracks.
Tap and drag a level slider to adjust the volume level.
The level sliders and meters in each pad show a visual representation of the level. Double-tap a track on the screen
to open a large version of the level slider and meter.
Pan & Volume
The Pan & Volume tab gives you a number of mixing options for your tracks.
Use the M and S buttons to mute and solo the track. When Cue Tracks is enabled, the S button will become a
Headphones button.
Use the automation button to set the Automation status of the track.
Use the record button to arm the track for recording.
The pan sliders in each track show a visual representation of the pan. Tap and drag the pan slider to adjust the
panning of the currently selected track, return or main output. Double-tap a pan slider on the screen to open a
large version of the slider.
Tap and drag a level slider to adjust the volume level of the currently selected track, return or main output. Double-
tap a level slider on the screen to open a large version of the slider.
137
Sends
The Sends tab gives you an overview of the Sends 1–4 level of your tracks.
Use the M and S buttons to mute and solo the track. When Cue Tracks is enabled, the S button will become a
Headphones button.
Use the automation button to set the Automation status of the track.
Use the record button to arm the track for recording.
Use the send knobs to adjust the send level of tracks.
Important: When using send channels, make sure you have already loaded at least one effect to it using the return
mixer. Swipe left to view the Return channels and then select the Effects tab, described below.
138
Effects
The Effects tab lets you view and edit insert effects for your tracks.
Use the M and S buttons to mute and solo the track. When Cue Tracks is enabled, the S button will become a
Headphones button.
Use the automation button to set the Automation status of the track.
Use the record button to arm the track for recording.
Tap the Inserts button to open the Inserts window.
Use the four insert fields to add insert effects to the track. Empty insert slots will show a + icon. Inserts with a
loaded effect will show the name of the effect.
To learn how to use insert effects, please see General Features > Effects > Insert Effects.
Swipe left while viewing the Effects tab to view the Return and Output Insert effects slots.
139
I/O
The I/O tab lets you view and edit audio and MIDI routing for your tracks.
Use the M and S buttons to mute and solo the track. When Cue Tracks is enabled, the S button will become a
Headphones button.
Use the automation button to set the Automation status of the track.
Use the record button to arm the track for recording.
Tap the Monitor button to set the monitoring behavior.
For Audio tracks:
Off: The track's audio input is not monitored.
In: The track's audio input is monitored whether the track is record-enabled or not.
Auto: The track's audio input is monitored while the track is record-enabled only.
For MIDI tracks:
Off: The track's MIDI input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard. This setting
is useful when using keyboards with Local Control active.
In: The track's MIDI input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback
from recorded events will not be heard.
Auto: The track's MIDI input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded events
will be heard.
Merge: The track's MIDI input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
Use the Input fields to select the input routing for the track.
For Audio tracks:
Use the Audio In field to configure the input source of the external audio signal, which you can set to a
pair of inputs (Input 1,2) or a single input (Input 1, Input 2).
For MIDI tracks:
Use the MIDI Input and Channel fields to configure the MIDI input settings.
Use the Send To field to send the track's MIDI output to another track.
Use the Output field to set the output routing for the track.
For Audio tracks:
Use the Audio Out field to configure where the track is routed, which you can set to a submix (Sub 1–8),
a pair of outputs (Out 1,2–Out 3,4), or a single output (Out 1–4).
For MIDI tracks:
Use the MIDI Output and Channel fields to configure the MIDI output settings.
140
Pad Mixer
In the Pad Mixer, you can set levels, stereo panning, and other settings for individual pads. This mode is
only available for Drum and Keygroup tracks.
To open the Pad Mixer, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then tap Pad Mixer.
•
Press and hold Shift and press Mixer.
Just like the Channel Mixer, the Pad Mixer works like an audio mixer with various settings for each pad, with up to 8
pads shown on the display at once. The name of the pad is displayed at the top of each one.
To select a pad, tap it on your MPC hardware, or tap the channel strip header.
To view more pads, drag your finger left and right on the display.
Tap the Settings icon in the lower-right corner of the screen to open the Pad Mixer configuration to edit the following
settings:
Check the Filter by events box to show only pads with events.
Check the Filter by samples box to show only pads with samples assigned.
Check the Write automation when recording box to set automation to always write when recording.
141
Volume
The Volume tab gives you an overview of the volume level of your pads.
Tap and drag the level slider to adjust the volume level of the currently selected pad.
The level sliders and meters in each pad show a visual representation of the level. Double-tap a track on the screen
to open a large version of the level slider and meter.
Pan & Volume
Use the M and S buttons to mute and solo the pad.
The pan sliders in each track show a visual representation of the pan. Tap and drag the pan slider to adjust the
panning of the currently selected pad.
Tap and drag the level slider to adjust the volume of the currently selected pad.
142
Sends
Use the M and S buttons to mute and solo the pad.
Use the send knobs to adjust the send level of the pads.
Important: When using send channels, make sure you have already loaded at least one effect to it using the return
mixer.
Effects
Use the M and S buttons to mute and solo the pad.
Tap the Inserts button to open the Inserts window.
Use the four insert fields to add insert effects to the pad. Empty insert slots will show a + icon. Inserts with a
loaded effect will show the name of the effect.
To learn how to use insert effects, please see General Features > Effects > Insert Effects.
143
I/O
Use the M and S buttons to mute and solo the pad.
Use the MIDI Out Enabled field to determine when a MIDI note is sent to the MIDI Output. This can be used for
triggering external gear, lighting, or video systems. Select Never (no MIDI note is sent), Always (MIDI note is sent
every time the pad is triggered), or When Empty (MIDI note is only sent if the pad has no internal sample).
Use the MIDI Out Note to select the specific MIDI note to send for the selected pad.
Use the MIDI Out Channel to select the MIDI Channel where the output is sent.
Use the Audio Out field to set the output routing for the pad. Select Track to output the pad to the track, or send
it directly to one of the outputs.
144
Sounds Mode
Sounds Mode allows you to easily browse plugin instruments, save favorite presets, and build setlists to
quickly recall projects for live performances.
To enter Sounds Mode, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then tap Sounds.
•
Press the Sounds button (MPC Key 61, MPC Key 37).
When viewing either the Sounds or Favorites menu, you can swap to the other menu by tapping the
first tab at the bottom of the touchscreen.
Tap the gear icon at the top of the screen to open the Sounds
menu settings.
Use the Default View field to set Sounds mode to open viewing
Instruments or the Current Preset by default.
Check the Loading instrument opens editor box to enable
opening Track Edit Mode when loading an instrument.
Use the Audition fields to determine how samples are
auditioned.
Tap Sync to enable or disable auditioning samples at the
beginning of the next bar of the sequence when playback
is active.
Tap Warp to enable or disable samples with an embedded
tempo to be warped to the project tempo. Samples with no
embedded tempo or externally-embedded tempo will not
be affected by this setting.
Tap and drag the level slider up or down to set the audition
volume level.
Tap Locate Preset at the top of the touchscreen to open the preset list for the currently selected plugin instrument.
Tap Edit Instrument at the bottom of the touchscreen to open Track Edit Mode to adjust the instrument parameters.
Tap Track -/+ at the bottom of the touchscreen to switch to another track.
145
Tap the
Instruments button to select another track type to
search for using the Sounds interface. You can search for Drum,
Plugin, Keygroup, MIDI, CV, and Audio track types in any factory
expansions or user expansions on any attached drives. When
browsing an expansion or user folder, tap a cell to load the selected
program.
When searching for non-Plugin tracks, you can also tap and hold
on an empty space to set a preferred folder location for your saved
tracks.
When viewing Drum and Keygroup track samples, tap the
headphones icon to enable auditioning. Once enabled, tap and
hold on a cell’s play icon to audition the selected sound.
Favorites
When viewing the Sounds menu, tap the Sounds tab at the bottom of the screen to switch to the Favorites screen,
where you can save, load, and organize your most-used presets. On MPC Key 61 and MPC Key 37, you can also press
and hold Shift and press the Sounds button.
To save a preset as a favorite:
1.
Select the desired plugin and preset using the Sounds menu.
2.
Open the Favorites menu by tapping the bottom-left tab in the
Sounds menu.
3.
Press and hold on an empty Favorites slot to save the preset in
the selected slot.
To edit an existing Favorite slot, tap and hold on a filled Favorite
slot. In the menu that appears:
•
Tap Clear to clear the slot.
•
Tap Overwrite to replace the favorite with the currently selected
preset.
Setlists
Use the Setlists tab to create a list of projects to easily recall, such as for a live performance.
To create a Setlist:
1.
Open the Setlist tab from the Sounds page.
2.
Tap and hold on an empty Setlist slot, and then tap Choose
Project.
3.
In the file browser that appears, locate the project you would
like to add and then tap Select to load it.
To edit an existing Setlist slot, tap and hold on a filled slot. In the
menu that appears:
•
Tap Choose Project to select a different project for the same
slot.
•
Tap Clear to empty the selected slot.
•
Tap Copy to copy the project to another slot. Then, tap and
hold on an empty slot and tap Paste.
146
XYFX Mode
XYFX Mode turns the touchscreen into an XY pad where each axis represents the range of an effect
parameter. As you move your finger on the XY pad, the current position will determine the current value of
the two parameters. You can use this mode to create interesting effect automation on your tracks.
The effect you control in XYFX Mode acts like an insert effect on that track. In fact, XYFX is the name of
the insert effect you have to load to the track before you can use this mode. Learn more about this in
General Features > Effects.
To enter XYFX Mode, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then tap XYFX.
•
Press XYFX (MPC X), Shift and Next Seq/XYFX (MPC Live II, MPC One), or Shift and Edit/XYFX (MPC Key
61, MPC Key 37).
When you first enter this mode in a project, you may be prompted to load XYFX to the track. Tap Insert XYFX to do
this.
Note: If you already have four insert effects loaded, you will need to clear one of the insert effect slots before doing this.
Use the XYFX Location field to select the signal to which the effects will be applied: the current track (Track) or a
main output (a stereo pair of channels: Output 1/2 or Output 3/4).
147
Touch or move your finger on the gridded part of the screen. A marker will follow your finger to indicate the current
position. The X axis is the horizontal axis, increasing in value as you move right. The Y axis is the vertical axis, increasing
in value as you move up. Each axis is labeled with its assigned parameter.
When an effect has a beat division parameter, the current division will be highlighted as an entire column.
Effects are differently colored for easy visual distinction: beat-synchronized effects are blue, while manually controlled
effects are green.
XY Mode with a beat-synchronized effect.
While touching the XY pad, tap Latch in the lower-left corner to keep the marker on the XY pad even after you release
it. The marker will remain there until you touch another part of the XY pad or until you tap Latch again.
Use the Setup button to show or hide the Setup panel, which controls how the XY pad behaves.
Use the Preset field to select the effect you want to use in XYFX Mode.
148
XY Mode with a manually controlled effect.
Use the Attack knob to set the length of the attack phase of the envelope, which is triggered when you touch the XY
pad. In other words, this determines how long it takes the effect to fully respond to your touch.
Use the Release knob to set the length of the release phase of the envelope, which is triggered when you release the
XY pad. In other words, this determines how long it takes the effect to fully deactivate after you stop touching the XY
pad.
Use the Wet/Dry knob to set the blend the original signal (dry) and the effect signal (wet).
The X Axis and Y Axis fields show which parameters are controlled by each axis. This varies depending on the effect
you are using.
149
Arrange Mode
Arrange Mode is a fully-featured linear sequencer where you can record a performance or live input (MIDI
or audio) into a linear timeline to create an arrangement of a song. You can use the powerful Arrange Edit
commands to edit and arrange your song and then mix it down to a stereo audio file, or stem it as separate
tracks.
To enter Arrange Mode, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu and then tap Arrange.
The event editor's Arrange, Grid, and List views are displayed as tabs in the top left of the screen to make it easy to
jump between them.
The toolbar at the top of Arrange Mode lets you switch between the different edit modes as well as showing project
and timing information.
Use the Arrange, Grid, and List icons to switch between the different modes.
Tap the automation icon to toggle between Read and Write. To disable or enable global automation entirely,
press and hold Shift and tap this icon.
Use the BPM field to adjust the tempo of the project.
Use the Bars field to set the length of the arrangement.
The time counter at the top of the screen indicates the current playhead position. Double-tap this field to open the
Locate Window.
Tap the pencil Edit icon to open the Sequence Edit window (see Editing Arrangements).
Tap the gear icon to open the Grid Settings.
150
The project's tracks are displayed in Arrange Mode on a linear timeline.
Tap a track to select it.
You can also press and hold Main and a window will appear showing all tracks in your project in a four-by-four
layout, mirroring your MPC pads. Tap a track in the window to select, or press the respective pad on your hardware.
From this window, you can also tap Tracks, Submixes, Returns, and Outputs to display the selected track types
in the window.
Each track header will show Record Arm, Mute, Solo, and Track Automation states. Note that this requires the
vertical zoom to be adjusted so there is enough space to show all components. Use the pinch and expand gestures
to change the zoom level of the arrangement.
Tap TC at the bottom of the screen to open the Timing Correct (TC) window. Alternatively, tap the timing correct
value shown above the track headers.
Tap Buses to view Submix, Return, and Output bus tracks. You can then record, edit, and view automation data on
these tracks in your Arrangement the same way you can with other tracks.
Tap the MIDI Rec Erase button to enable or disable MIDI record erasing in Arrange Mode. When enabled, the new
recording will replace existing MIDI data in the arrangement. When disabled, recording MIDI will overdub on existing
MIDI data in the track arrangement.
Tap Loop to enable or disable loop. The loop region is always displayed, regardless of whether Loop is on or off.
The Arrangement timeline also features six user-controllable Locate markers. Press and hold Shift to show the six
Locator buttons at the bottom of the screen.
To add a locator at the playhead position, tap one of the six Locator buttons. You can also use the Locate
window to edit these markers.
151
Recording Arrangements
To record into the arrangement timeline:
1.
In Main Mode, tap the Rec Arm function button to arm the selected track for recording. Alternatively, double-tap
the track header in Arrange Mode and then set the Rec Arm field to On.
2.
Press the Rec button on your hardware to arm it for recording.
3.
Next, enter Arrange mode by pressing Menu and tapping Arrange. You can also view the arrangement directly
from Main Mode by opening the Arrangement header.
4.
Press Play on your hardware to begin recording. As you record, Arrange Mode will draw regions containing audio
or MIDI data into the track lanes.
To replace a section of the arrangement with a new performance:
1.
Tap the Loop button at the bottom of the screen to activate loop.
2.
Set the Loop Start and Loop End points by tapping and dragging the beginning and end of the loop region in the
timeline. Tapping and dragging in the middle of the loop region moves both the Loop Start and Loop End points
at the same time.
3.
Enable arrangement recording by following the directions above.
4.
Press Play to begin recording. The recording will begin at the Loop Start point, and once it reaches the Loop End
Point, will switch to Overdubbing mode.
You can also use the Auto Record and Punch In/Punch Out functions of the Arrangement Section of Main Mode
to easily replace part of a recording.
To play the arrangement:
•
Press Play Start to begin playback of the arrangement from 1:1:00, or if Loop is activated, from the Loop Start.
•
Press Play to begin playback from the current playhead position.
To move the playhead position, tap the Playhead Position field in the toolbar to select it, and then use the data dial
or -/+ buttons to adjust the value. Alternatively, you can set the playhead position by tapping in the lower-half of the
timeline.
152
Editing Arrangements
You can edit your linear arrangement using MPC's powerful Sequence Edit commands.
To edit an arrangement, tap the pencil icon in the Arrange Mode toolbar to open the Sequence Edit window,
and then select one of the following tools.
The Erase function erases all or part of the sequence.
Use the Track field to select the track you want to erase within the
sequence.
Use the Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set the time range of the sequence
you want to erase. The left fields set the start of the time range, and the
right fields set the end of the time range.
To select what types of events you erase, select one of the Erase
options:
All erases all pad events from the designated time range and reset
all of its settings.
Automation erases only automation from the designated time
range. Use the Parameter field to select what type of automation
is erased.
Note erases notes from the selected pads in the designated time
range. Use your MPC hardware pads to select or deselect pads.
Except Note erases all notes except those selected in the
designated time range. Use your MPC hardware pads to select or
deselect pads to be exempted from deletion.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice, or tap the X, Cancel, or anywhere
outside the window to cancel and return to the previous screen.
The Clear All function erases all events from the sequence and resets all of its settings.
Tap Clear All to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel to return to the previous screen.
The Clear Events function only erases all events from the sequence.
Tap Clear Events to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel to return to the previous screen.
153
The Trim function immediately crops the arrangement to the Bars
value in the main Arrangement Mode window.
The Transpose function transposes a range of events on a track in an
arrangement. The events within that range will shift accordingly in the Grid
View. This option is available for MIDI tracks only.
Use the Track field to select the track you want to transpose within the
arrangement.
Use the two sets of Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set the time range of
the arrangement you want to transpose. The left fields set the start of
the time range, and the right fields set the end of the time range.
For drum tracks, use the two Pad fields to select the “source” pad
(whose events you want to move) and “destination” pad (where the
events will be placed). Tap each field and then press the desired pad.
For keygroup tracks, plugin tracks, and MIDI tracks, set the range
and amount of transposition:
Range: Use the two Note fields to set the range of notes of the
events you want to transpose. Note events within this range will be
transposed, while note events outside of this range will remain
unchanged.
Transpose: Use this field to set how many semitones up or down
you want to transpose the note events.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice, or tap the X, Cancel, or anywhere
outside the window to cancel and return to the previous screen.
The Delete Bars function removes a range of bars from the arrangement.
Use the First Bar and Last Bar fields to set the range of bars to delete
from the arrangement.
To confirm your choice, tap Do It.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice, or tap the X, Cancel, or anywhere
outside the window to cancel and return to the previous screen.
The Insert Bars function adds a number of bars to the arrangement.
Use the # of bars field to set how many bars to add.
Use the Before Bar field to set where the bars are added. The bars will
be inserted before this bar.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice, or tap the X, Cancel, or anywhere
outside the window to cancel and return to the previous screen.
The Half Length function immediately halves the length of the arrangement.
The Double Length function immediately doubles the length of the
arrangement.
154
The Copy Sequence function copies the contents of one sequence to
another.
Use the Copy Contents of Sequence field to select the “source”
sequence. This is the sequence whose events you want to copy.
Use the Over Contents of Sequence field to select the “destination”
sequence. This is the sequence where the source sequence will be
copied.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel to cancel and return to Arrange Mode.
The Copy Bars function copies a range of bars from the arrangement and
adds them at a specified point.
Use the First Bar and Last Bar fields to set the range of bars to copy
from the arrangement.
Use the After Bar field. The copied bars will be inserted after this one
to set where you want to add the copied bars.
Use the Copies field to set how many instances of the copied bars you
want to add.
Tap Replace to overwrite the arrangement at the destination.
Tap Merge to add the events to the destination without erasing anything.
Tap Cancel to cancel and return to Arrange Mode.
The Copy Events function copies a range of events from a track in the
arrangement and adds them to another at a specified point.
Use the From Track field to select the “source” track. This is the track
whose content you want to copy.
Use the field below the From Track field to set what content is copied.
Copy All Events will copy and paste all events in the track. Copy Only
Selected Events will copy and paste only the events that are currently
selected.
Use the Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set the time range of the events
or the audio track you want to copy. The left fields set the start of the
time range, and the right fields set the end of the time range.
Use the To Track field to select the “destination” track. This is the track
where the content of the source track will be copied.
Use the Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set where you want to add the
copied events or audio track. The events or audio track will be added
after this point.
Use the Copies
field to set how many instances of the copied events
or audio track you want to add.
Tap Replace to overwrite the arrangement at the destination.
Tap Merge to add the events to the arrangement at the destination
without erasing anything.
Tap Cancel to cancel and return to Arrange Mode.
155
In Arrange Mode, you can tap and hold on the header for a MIDI track (on the left side of the screen) to open a drop-
down menu of track edit options for MIDI tracks.
The Clear function erases all events from the track.
Tap Clear to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel to return to the previous screen.
The Delete Track function instantly removes the track and all of its contents.
The Duplicate Track function immediately duplicates the selected track to a new track.
The Copy Events function copies a range of events from a MIDI track in the
arrangement and adds them to another at a specified point.
Use the From Track field to select the “source” track. This is the track
whose content you want to copy.
Use the field below the From Track field to set what content is copied.
Copy All Events will copy and paste all events in the track. Copy Only
Selected Events will copy and paste only the events that are currently
selected.
Use the Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set the time range of the events
or the audio track you want to copy. The left fields set the start of the
time range, and the right fields set the end of the time range.
Use the To Track field to select the “destination” track. This is the track
where the content of the source track will be copied.
Use the Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set where you want to add the
copied events or audio track. The events or audio track will be added
after this point.
Use the Copies field to set how many instances of the copied events
or audio track you want to add.
Tap Replace to overwrite the arrangement at the destination.
Tap Merge to add the events to the arrangement at the destination
without erasing anything.
Tap Cancel to cancel and return to Arrange Mode.
156
The Double-Speed Events function immediately halves the lengths of all note events on the track in the arrangement
as well as the distance between them. In other words, the track’s notes are pressed closer together so the track
sounds like it is playing at twice the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
The Half-Speed Events function immediately doubles the lengths of all note events on the track in the arrangement
as well as the distance between them. In other words, the track’s notes are spread further apart so the track sounds
like it is playing at half of the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
The Pitch Quantize function forces the pitches of note events into a specific
scale.
Use the Root Note field to select the desired root note of the scale.
Use the Scale field to select a type of scale.
To determine which note events will be quantized, tap the Only
apply to selected events checkbox.
When on, only the currently selected note events will be quantized.
When off, all pitches in the current track will be quantized.
Use the Start Note and End Note fields to set lowest-possible and
highest-possible pitches where the quantized note events will be placed
(respectively). If a note event is originally outside of this range, it will be
forced to the nearest pitch (within the scale) inside the range.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice, or tap the X, Cancel, or anywhere
outside the window to cancel and return to the previous screen.
The Bounce to Sample function immediately renders the track as an audio sample and places it in the project’s
sample pool. By default, it will be named Bounce - and appended with the track name. This function does not work
for MIDI or CV tracks.
The Bounce to Audio Track function immediately renders the track as an audio track in the project. By default, it will
be named Audio and appended with a number (e.g., Audio 002). This function does not work for MIDI or CV tracks.
157
You can also tap and hold on the header for an audio track (on the left side of the screen) to open a drop-down menu
of track edit options for audio tracks.
The Clear function erases all events from the track and resets all of its settings.
To confirm your choice, tap Clear.
To return to the previous screen, tap Cancel.
The Delete Track function instantly removes the track and all of its contents.
The Duplicate Track function immediately duplicates the selected track to a new track.
The Copy Events function copies selected audio track regions from the
track and adds them to another at a specified point.
Use the From Track field to select the “source” track. This is the track
whose content you want to copy.
Use the field below the From Track field to set what content is copied.
Copy All Events will copy and paste all events in the track. Copy Only
Selected Events will copy and paste only the events that are currently
selected.
Use the Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set the time range of the events
or the audio track you want to copy. The left fields set the start of the
time range, and the right fields set the end of the time range.
Use the To Track field to select the “destination” track. This is the track
where the content of the source track will be copied.
Use the Bar, Beat, and Tick fields to set where you want to add the
copied events or audio track. The events or audio track will be added
after this point.
Use the Copies field to set how many instances of the copied events
or audio track you want to add.
Tap Replace to overwrite the arrangement at the destination.
Tap Merge to add the events to the arrangement at the destination
without erasing anything.
Tap Cancel to cancel and return to Arrange Mode.
158
The Reset Channel Strip function immediately:
•
clears all Insert effect slots;
•
turns Mute, Solo, automation, and Monitor off;
•
resets the pan knob to the center;
•
resets the level slider to 0.00 dB; and
•
turns the Record Arm button off.
The Bounce to Sample function immediately renders the track as an audio sample and places it in the project’s
sample pool. By default, it will be named Bounce - and appended with the track name.
The Flatten Track function renders all edits and regions within the current track's arrangement to a new audio file.
The Flatten Track Elastique function also renders all edits and regions within the current track's arrangement to a
new audio file, but renders any time-stretching or pitch-shifting using the Elastique Pro algorithm, providing higher-
quality results with less artifacts than MPC's standard algorithm.
159
Arrangement Track Editor
When in Arrange Mode, events from the currently selected track can be edited using the bottom panel track editor.
To open the track editor, do either of the following:
•
Tap the arrow up icon at the bottom of the screen.
•
Double-tap inside a track lane in the main arrangement view.
Once opened, you can also adjust the height of the track editor by tapping and dragging the arrow icon or anywhere
in the editor toolbar.
For drum tracks, you can tap and hold on a pad header in the track editor to open a drop-down menu where you can
quickly Mute, Solo, or change the Color of the pad.
To close the track editor, tap the down arrow icon.
At the top of the Track Editor are two tabs, Grid and Auto. Use the
Grid tab to edit MIDI events or audio regions. Use the Auto tab to
edit automation for the track. The editing workflow in the
arrangement track editor is the same as in the Grid View.
Press and hold Shift to view additional editing options for the Track
Editor.
Tap Select All to select all events.
Tap Cut to cut the selected events.
Tap Copy to copy the selected events.
Tap Paste to paste the selected events at the playhead
location.
Tap Delete to delete the selected events.
Tap Duplicate to duplicate the selected events. The events will
be added after the last selected event.
160
Saving and Exporting the Arrangement
To save and export your arrangement, press the Menu button, and then tap Save. In the Save window, select Audio
Mixdown to mixdown or stem your arrangement into individual files.
Use the Start Bar and End Bar fields under Audio Length to set the time range that you want to mixdown. You
can add a number of seconds to the end of the mixdown to capture any ringing notes or effects (such as a reverb
tail) by adjusting the Audio Tail field.
Use the fields under Render Source and Render Options to set the parameters for the audio mixdown. Check
the Separate Tracks box to render each track of the arrangement as stems.
To configure the audio mixdown file settings, use the fields at the bottom of the screen to set the File Format,
Bit Depth, and Sample Rate.
You can also export the arrangement as an ALS file to use with Ableton Live.
To export the arrangement for Ableton, press the Menu button and then tap Save. In the Save window, select
Ableton Live Set to bring up the Ableton Live Set Export popup.
Use the Export MIDI As settings to choose how MIDI tracks are exported, either as Audio files or MIDI files.
When using Plugin, Drum, or Keygroup tracks, you can render the arrangement as Audio to preserve the sound
of the instruments, or render the arrangement as MIDI data.
Check the Include Track Volume/Pan Settings box to include these settings in the export. When disabled,
the volume and pan settings will be set to 0 dB and center (C), respectively.
Check the Bypass Track Effects Plugins box to deactivate any third-party effect plugins used with the track
for the export. When disabled, those effects will be activated.
Use the Audio Tail field to set the amount, in seconds, of extra time added to the end of the resulting audio
files.
Use the Bit Depth field to set the bit depth to 8, 16 or 24.
Use the Sample Rate field to set the sample rate to 44.1, 48, 88.2 or 96 kHz
. In most cases, we recommend
selecting 44.1 kHz.
161
Grid View
The Grid View lets you view and edit the note events or audio regions of each track in a project and their
velocities. This mode has three different appearances: one for audio tracks, one for drum tracks and one
for keygroup tracks, MIDI tracks, and plugin tracks.
To enter Grid View, do any of the following:
•
Press Menu and then tap Grid. You can also tap Grid at the top of the screen in Arrange Mode
or List Mode.
For audio tracks, the waveform of the audio sample is shown.
For drum tracks, the left column shows you all available pads in a
vertical view with their corresponding events in the grid to the right.
For keygroup, plugin, MIDI and CV tracks, the left column shows a
vertical “piano roll” keyboard with the corresponding events in the
grid to the right.
162
In all views, the time counter at the top of the screen indicates the current playhead position.
Tap the gear icon to open the Grid Settings window to configure the
following Grid Editor settings:
Use the Snap Mode selector to set how events “snap” to the grid.
Absolute: Events will “snap” to the nearest time division on
the grid (as determined by the TC field or Timing Correct
window). This is the typical and traditional method of using the
snap/ quantization feature.
Relative: Events will “snap” to the nearest time division on the
grid (as determined by the TC field or Timing Correct window)
plus the original time position of the event (e.g., an event that
is originally three ticks past a time division on the grid will snap
only to positions that are three ticks past every time division).
Use the Hitting Pad Selects All Events selector to turn the feature on or off. When On, pressing a pad will
automatically select all note events for that pad on that track. When set to Off, pressing a pad will simply play its
sound without selecting any note events.
This setting is not available when using audio tracks.
Use the Auto-Scroll selector to set how the screen behaves relative to the audio playhead.
Follow: The list will scroll along in the background while keeping the audio playhead centered.
Page: The list will move to the “next page” to follow the audio playhead.
Off: The list will not move at all.
Use the Q-Link Playhead Increment selector to set how much the playhead moves by when using the Q-Link
controls. Select 1/16 Note to lock playhead movement to 1/16 notes, or select TC Division to have the playhead
movement tied to the current Timing Correct division. This value can be set in the Timing Correct window in Grid
View by tapping the clock icon at the bottom-left of the grid.
These functions also apply to Arrange Mode.
163
Audio Tracks
When viewing audio samples in Grid View, these seven tool icons at the top of the screen enable you to use different
functions in the sample.
Tap one to select its mode:
Marquee: Marquee Mode:
To select a sample region, tap the upper third of it.
To move a sample region (or multiple selected sample regions), tap and drag the upper third of it left or
right.
To split the sample at two specific points (creating a sample region on either side and between them), tap
and drag across the middle third of it to create a translucent white box, and then tap the upper third of that
box.
To shorten or lengthen a sample region (or multiple selected sample regions), tap and drag the lower
third of it left or right.
Arrow: Selection Mode:
To select a sample region, tap it.
To move a sample region (or multiple selected sample regions), tap and drag the upper third of it left or
right.
To shorten or lengthen a sample region (or multiple selected sample regions), tap and drag the lower
third of it left or right.
Pencil: Draw Mode:
To draw automation, open the velocity/automation lane and tap and drag.
Eraser: Erase Mode:
To erase a sample region (or multiple selected sample regions), tap it.
Scissors: Split Mode:
To split the sample at a specific point (creating a sample region on either side), tap that point in the
sample.
To select a sample region, tap its left-most edge.
Mute: Mute Mode:
To mute or unmute a sample region (or multiple selected sample regions), tap it.
Magnifying Glass: Navigation Mode:
To move to another part of the sample, tap and drag it.
To zoom in or out, spread or pinch your fingers (respectively) on the grid. You can do this vertically,
horizontally, or both at the same time.
164
Tap the pencil Edit icon to open the Grid Edit menu for audio regions:
Use Clear to clear audio from the track.
Use Double Length with Events to double the length of the track, including doubling the audio samples.
Use Flatten or Flatten Elastique to flatten the audio track when transport playback is stopped, rendering all the
edits and regions within the arrangement to a single new audio file. The Elastique Pro algorithm can be used for
time-stretching or pitch-shifting, providing higher-quality results with less artifacts than MPC's standard algorithm.
Use Bounce to Sample or Bounce to Audio Track to export the audio regions to a new sample added to the
project sample pool or a new audio track in the project.
Use the Audio Tail field to set the amount, in seconds, of extra time added to the end of the resulting audio files.
Regardless of which tool is selected, you can do any of the following to edit the selected audio regions.
To select an audio region, tap the arrow icon to enter Selection Mode and tap an audio region. When an audio
region is selected, all region parameters will be available to edit.
Press Undo on your MPC to undo your last action.
Press Shift and Undo on your MPC to redo the last action you undid.
To move the selected audio region, tap Nudge at the bottom of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+
buttons to shift the audio region left or right. Alternatively, if the arrow tool or marquee tool are selected, tap and
drag the upper third of the selected audio region left or right. By default, you can move an audio region only by
quantization values defined by the Timing Correct (TC) value.
To move the selected audio region without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid, tap Don’t Snap
in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to shift the audio region. In this
case, each nudge is equivalent to four ticks.
To adjust the start point or end point of the selected audio region (without changing its position), tap Edit Start
at the bottom of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons.
Tap Split at the bottom of the screen to split the audio region at the current playhead position (creating an audio
region on either side).
To copy, cut, or paste the selected audio region, press and
hold Shift, and then tap Copy
or Cut. Turn the data dial to move
the highlighted audio region, and then press the data dial to
paste it at its current location. Alternatively, press and hold Shift,
and then tap Paste (respectively).
Tap Duplicate at the bottom of the screen to duplicate the
selected audio region. The duplicate audio region will appear
immediately after the original one.
Use the Fade In or Fade Out fields to create a fade-in or fade out for the selected audio region, respectively. The
fades will be shown as a sloped line at the start or end of the audio region.
Use the Level field to set the level of the selected audio region. The waveform amplitude will change accordingly.
Tap Reverse to reverse the selected sample region.
Tap Mute to mute the selected sample region.
165
To lengthen or shorten the selected audio region without changing its pitch, tap Warp, which will enable the
Semi, Fine, and BPM fields next to it.
Use the BPM field to change the tempo manually, which will change the length of the audio region accordingly.
To have MPC analyze the tempo of the region, tap the Detect BPM button. In the Edit BPM window that appears,
you can do any of the following:
•
Use the BPM field to enter a tempo manually. This is the same as the BPM field on the previous page.
•
Tap Detect to detect the tempo automatically.
•
Tap Tap Tempo at the bottom of the screen at the desired rate to use it as the tempo.
•
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window to close it.
Use the Semi and Fine fields if you want to change the pitch (this is useful for matching the durations of two
samples with different pitches).
Use the Algorithm field to set the Warp algorithm for the sample. By default, this will be set to whatever is selected
as the Default Audio Warp Algorithm under Menu > Preferences > Audio/Export. Adjusting the setting here will
override the default selection. Select Pro Ten or Repitch. When using Repitch, warping an audio sample will adjust
its pitch to synchronize it with the MPC tempo.
Tip: You can configure audio track recording to ensure the resulting audio region is warped automatically. You can
then adjust the project tempo while audio region remains in time. See Menu > Preferences > General to learn about
this.
Note: When you record an audio file, the current project tempo will be embedded with it. This information is stored
within the sample file when you save the project. When you warp an audio region, the warping algorithm uses this
project tempo and the current value in the BPM field to generate the “stretch factor.”
Note: Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if used too freely.
Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function. You can reduce the CPU resources required by
doing any/all of the following:
•
Minimize the amount of pitch adjustment (e.g., the Semi and Fine fields).
•
Avoid warping very small audio regions.
•
Warp as few tracks or audio regions as possible (i.e., reduce the number of total number of voices [of the
polyphonic limit] that use the warp algorithm at a given time), especially instances where the warped regions
start at the same time.
•
If you have warped samples used in a drum kit, consider using the Flatten Pad function to consolidate the
affected pad’s layers into one audio sample. After you flatten the pad, its sample/samples no longer need to
be warped.
To open the Timing Correct (TC) window, press and hold Shift, and then tap TC at the bottom of the screen.
Alternatively, tap the clock icon next to the automation lane.
To clear all automation from the track, press and hold Shift, and then tap Clear Auto.
To solo the track, press and hold Shift, and then tap Solo at the bottom of the screen.
166
MIDI Tracks
When viewing MIDI tracks in Grid View, use these four tool icons at the top of the screen to use different functions in
the grid.
Tap one to select its mode:
Pencil: Draw Mode:
To enter a note in an empty grid square, tap the grid square.
To select a note, tap it.
To move a note, tap and drag it to another grid square.
To erase a note, double-tap it.
To edit velocity or draw automation, tap and drag in the velocity/automation lane.
Eraser: Erase Mode:
To erase a note, tap it. You can also tap and drag to erase multiple notes in the same row.
Select Box: Select Mode:
Note: Notes will remain selected if you switch to another mode. The selection will change, however, if you
press a pad while Hitting Pad Selects All Events is set to On.
To select a note, tap it.
To select multiple notes, tap and drag across the grid to create a box around them.
To move a note, tap and drag it to another grid square.
To move multiple notes, select them as described above, and tap and drag them.
To erase multiple notes, select them as described above, and then select the eraser tool and tap any of
the selected notes.
Magnifying Glass: Navigation Mode:
To move to another part of the grid, tap and drag it.
To zoom in or out, spread or pinch your fingers (respectively) on the grid. You can do this vertically,
horizontally, or both at the same time.
167
Regardless of which tool is selected, you can do any of the following to move, lengthen, shorten, or transpose any
selected note/notes.
Tap the grid-and-magnifying-glass icon in the lower-left corner to automatically set the grid to view the active
area, up to three pad banks and 32 bars.
Press Undo on your MPC to undo your last action.
Press Shift and Undo on your MPC to redo the last action you undid.
Press the desired pad to select all notes for a pad.
To move the selected notes, tap Nudge at the bottom of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons
to shift the notes left or right. By default, you can position notes only by quantization values defined by the Time
Correct value.
To move the selected notes without restricting (“snapping”) them to the quantization grid, tap Don’t Snap in
the lower-left corner of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to shift the notes. In this case, each
nudge is equivalent to four ticks.
To adjust the start point or end point of the selected notes (without changing their position), tap Edit Start or
Edit End at the bottom of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons.
To transpose the selected notes up or down, tap Transpose at the bottom of the screen, and then use the data
dial or –/+ buttons.
To adjust an automation parameter for the selected notes, tap Automation at the bottom of the screen, and
then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the selected automation parameters.
To select all notes in the grid instantly, press and hold Shift and then tap Select All at the bottom of the screen.
To copy, cut, or paste the selected notes, press and hold Shift, and then tap Copy or Cut. Once the notes have
been copied or cut, press and hold Shift
, and then tap Paste to add them to the current playhead position.
To delete the selected notes, press and hold Shift and then tap Delete at the bottom of the screen.
To duplicate the selected notes instantly, press and hold Shift and then tap Duplicate at the bottom of the
screen. The duplicate notes will appear immediately after the original ones.
To open the Timing Correct (TC) window, press and hold Shift and then tap TC at the bottom of the screen.
Alternatively, tap the clock icon next to the automation lane.
168
Tap the pencil Edit icon next to the time counter to open the event editing window. You can use any of these functions
as described below.
To return to Grid View, tap Cancel or tap at the top of the screen.
The Clear Events function erases all events from the track.
Tap Clear to confirm your choice, or tap Cancel to return to the previous screen.
The Double Length with Events function immediately doubles the length of the arrangement and duplicates the
events.
The Half-Speed Events function immediately doubles the lengths of all note events in the sequence as well as the
distance between them. In other words, all notes are spread further apart so the sequence sounds like it is playing at
half of the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
The Double-Speed Events function immediately halves the lengths of all note events in the sequence as well as the
distance between them. In other words, all notes are pressed closer together so the sequence sounds like it is playing
at twice the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
The Pitch Quantize function forces the pitches of note events into a specific
scale.
Use the Root Note field to select the desired root note of the scale.
Use the Scale field to select a type of scale.
To determine which note events will be quantized, tap the Only apply
to selected events checkbox.
When on, only the currently selected note events will be quantized.
When off, all pitches in the current sequence will be quantized.
Use the Start Note and End Note fields to set lowest-possible and
highest-possible pitches where the quantized note events will be placed
(respectively). If a note event is originally outside of this range, it will be
forced to the nearest pitch (within the scale) inside the range.
Tap Do It to continue and quantize the note events, or tap Close, the
X, or anywhere outside the window to cancel.
169
The Humanize function applies randomization to the timing, length, and/or
velocity of note events.
Tap the Humanize Time checkbox to select whether or not humanization
will be applied to the timing of note events.
Use the Amount (Pulses) slider to select the maximum number of
pulses by which the timing of an event will be adjusted.
Use the Eagerness slider to set how dramatically the humanization
effect is applied to the timing. Negative values correspond to playing
“ahead of the beat” while positive values correspond to playing “behind
the beat.”
Tap the Humanize Note Length checkbox to set whether or not
humanization will be applied to the duration of note events.
Use the Length (%) slider to set how dramatically the humanization
effect is applied to note lengths.
Tap the Humanize Velocity checkbox to set whether or not
humanization will be applied to the velocities of note events.
Use the Strength (%) slider to set how dramatically the humanization effect
is applied to note velocities.
Tap the Only Apply to Selected Events checkbox to determine which
notes will use these humanization values:
When on, just the currently selected notes will be humanized.
When off, all notes in the sequence will be humanized.
Tap Apply to apply humanization and keep this window open.
Tap Do It to apply humanization and close the window.
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window to close the window
without making any changes.
The Generate Random Events function creates random melodic or drum
patterns in the current sequence.
Use the Event Type field to select Drum Events or Melodic Events to
select the type of events you want to create.
Use the Replace field to select how the events will be created relative
to the existing events on the track:
Replace All Events: Select this option to replace all events in the
sequence with the randomly generated ones.
Replace Events in Note Range: Select this option to replace all
events in the designated note range in the sequence with the
randomly generated ones. Use the Bank or Start Pad and End Pad
menus to set the note range for drum events or the Start Note and
End Note menus to set the note range for melodic events.
Add to Existing Events: Select this option to add the randomly
generated events to the sequence without replacing or overwriting
the existing ones.
Use the Pattern Size (Bars) field to set how many bars the events will
use. The highest possible value is the number of bars in the current
sequence.
Use the Note Length field to select the duration of the events. (This
feature is nonfunctional if Legato is enabled while generating melodic
events.)
Tap Apply to generate the events and keep this window open.
Tap Do It to generate the events and close the window.
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window to close the window
without generating any events.
170
If Event Type is set to Drum Events:
Use the Bank field to select the pad bank that will be used to
generate the events, or select Range to use the Start Pad and End
Pad menus to define a specific pad range instead.
Use the Start Pad or End Pad fields to define a specific pad range
over which the events will be generated. You can use these fields
only if the Bank menu is set to Range.
Use the Density (%) slider to set how closely together the events
will be placed in the sequence.
Use the Rhythm Variation slider to set how widely or narrowly the
rhythmic patterns of the generated notes vary.
If Event Type is set to Melodic Events:
Use the Start Note or End Note fields to define a specific note
range over which the events will be generated.
Tap the Legato checkbox to enable or disable legato.
When on, the generated notes will be extended or shortened to
create a long, unbroken phrase from the first note event’s start
point to the last note event’s end point. Each note event will
sustain until another note event starts. If multiple note events
start at the same time (and are not the last note events), their
lengths will become identical.
When off, the generated notes will use the duration set by the
Note Length menu.
Use the Polyphony field to select to set the maximum number of
note events that can be sounding simultaneously in the track (1–8).
Tap the Constrain Notes to Scale checkbox to determine whether
or not the notes will use a scale.
When on, the notes will be within the scale determined by the
Scale menu.
When off, the notes will be chromatic.
Use the Density (%) slider to set how closely together the events
will be placed in the sequence.
Use the
Root Note field to set the root note of the scale that the
notes will use.
Use the Scale field to select the scale or mode that the generated
notes will use.
The Split Note Events process divides note events into an equal number
of parts.
Use the Into field to set the number of parts note events will be split
into.
Tap the Only selected events checkbox to set the process to only
affect selected notes. When unchecked, all note events in the sequence
will be split.
171
The Convert to Progression function creates a custom Progression from
a melodic MIDI track that you can use to perform with Progressions Note
mode.
To set the parameters of the new Progression, use the Progression
fields:
Use the Name field to set the progression name.
Use the Root Note field to set the root note.
Use the Scale Type field to set the scale type.
To set the parameters for the chords in the Progression, use the
Chord fields:
Use the Chord field to select a chord from the progression to edit.
Use the Name field to rename the selected chord.
Use the Type field to select to set the type of chord: Root, Normal
or Below Root.
Tap the Play button to play the selected chord.
Tap Do It to convert the progression and close the window, or tap the
X, Close or anywhere outside the window to close the window and
return to the previous screen.
172
Velocity/Automation Lane
Grid View also contains a velocity/automation lane where you can easily adjust note velocities and automation
parameters.
The velocity/automation lane in the Grid Editor.
To show or hide the velocity/automation lane:
1.
Tap the up arrow (
∧
) button in the lower-right corner to show the velocity/automation lane.
2.
Tap the down arrow (
∨
) to hide the velocity/automation lane.
When editing velocity, each note’s velocity is represented by a vertical bar. The higher and redder the bar is, the higher
the velocity is. Yellow bars indicate a lower velocity. Bars with a gray line at the top indicate a currently selected note.
To adjust the velocity of the selected notes, tap Velocity at the bottom of the screen, and then use the data dial or
–/+ buttons.
To add automation to a track:
1.
Select a MIDI Track or Audio Track, and then press Menu and tap Grid View to open Grid View.
2.
Tap the up arrow on the parameter bar to expand the velocity/automation lane.
3.
By default, Velocity is shown in this lane for MIDI tracks and TRK: Volume is shown for Audio tracks. Double-tap
this field to open the Parameter drop-down menu.
4.
In the menu that appears, tap Add New to add an automation parameter. You can choose from a variety of
parameters depending on the type of track, insert effects added and other options.
To edit automation, do any of the following in Grid View:
•
Use the pencil tool to draw your automation in the automation lane.
•
Use the eraser tool to erase automation points. If you erase all automation points, the parameter will be removed.
•
Tap the trash can icon to delete all automation for the selected parameter at once.
When editing Probability automation, the blue bars represent the probability that the note will play. When editing
Ratchet automation, the blue bars represent the ratchet subdivisions for the selected notes, shown as dotted lines on
the original note.
173
Step Sequencer
The Step Sequencer lets you create or edit sequences by using the pads as “step buttons,” simulating the
experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum machine. This is available for MIDI tracks only, not
audio tracks.
You can also create and edit automation using the Step Sequencer.
To enter the Step Sequencer, press Menu, and then tap Step Sequencer.
The top of the screen shows the track name and information as well as project and timing information.
The Track field shows the name of the current track.
Tap the Track Length field to set how long the track is in beats. When the SEQ button is on, the track length will follow
the Sequence length. When this button is off, use the Bars:Beats:Ticks values to set the exact track length.
Tip: This feature lets you maintain tracks of different lengths. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence
repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
Use the BPM field to adjust the tempo of the project.
To set whether the sequence follows its own tempo (Seq) or a global tempo (Gbl), tap the Seq/Gbl button next to
the BPM field. Alternatively, press and hold Shift and then press Tap.
The time counter at the top of the screen indicates the current playhead position.
174
Click the gear icon to open the Step Sequencer configuration window:
Use the Velocity field to set the default step velocity. This applies to notes added using the hardware pads or by
tapping the step buttons on the screen.
Use the Step Size field to set the value that determines how many steps each bar of the sequence will have. The
T indicates a triplet-based value. This will also adjust the current Timing Correct (TC) value, which can be accessed
by tapping TC at the bottom of the Step Sequencer screen.
Use the Auto-Scroll selector to set how the screen behaves relative to the audio playhead:
Off: The grid will not move at all.
Page: The grid will move to the “next page” to follow the audio playhead.
Use the Automation field to determine whether Step Automation is Unlocked from the grid or Locked to Step
Length. When set to the latter, changes to automation will only affect the current step. See the following section
for more about sequencing automation.
The TC icon opens the Timing Correct (TC) window, which contains various settings to help quantize the note events
in your sequence.
Use the Bar –/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to select the bar of the sequence whose steps you want to enter
or delete. The current bar number is shown in the upper-left corner.
Use the Pad –/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to select the pad whose steps you want to enter or delete. The
current pad number is shown in the upper-left corner.
Hold Shift and use the Track -/+ buttons to select a track to sequence on.
Hold Shift and tap the Clear button to clear all steps in the current sequence.
Hold Shift and tap the Clear Page button to clear all steps in the current page view.
175
To enter or delete steps in a sequence:
1.
Use the Pad –/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to select the pad whose steps you want to enter or delete.
The current pad number is shown in the upper-left corner. You can also hold Shift and tap a pad to select it.
Alternatively, use the Pad Select feature: Tap and hold Pad Sel, press the desired pad, and then release Pad Sel.
You can also use Pad Select as a “latching” feature: tap Pad Sel so it is activated, press the desired pad, and then
tap Pad Sel once more so it is deactivated.
2.
Use the Bar –/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen to select the bar of the sequence whose steps you want to
enter or delete. The current bar number is shown in the upper-left corner.
3.
Press the pads of your MPC hardware, or tap a button at the bottom of the sequencer. Each pad corresponds to
a step in the bar and will light with a color corresponding to its velocity.
Keep in mind that for time divisions larger than 16, the bar’s steps will be represented by multiple pad banks. In
this case, use Pad Bank Buttons to view all the steps within a bar.
For time divisions larger than 16, the bar’s steps will be represented by multiple pad banks. In
this case, use the left and right arrows (< and >) by the step numbers (1–16, 17–32, etc.) to change
which steps are shown in the sequencer.
Alternatively, use the Pad Bank Buttons.
To adjust the velocities of the steps, do any of the following:
•
Tap anywhere on the velocity bar of a step. The top of the velocity bar will jump to that point.
•
Use the slider on the right edge of the screen to increase or decrease the velocities of all steps.
•
Turn the Q-Link knob that corresponds to that step (the Q-Link knobs must be in the Screen edit mode).
Setting a value of 0 (Off) will delete the step.
Use the Nudge < and Nudge > arrows to shift the entire pattern left or right (respectively) by one step. This is useful
for experimenting with different rhythmic permutations.
Use the slider on the right edge of the screen to increase or decrease the velocities of all steps.
Use the Flip Steps button to switch which steps have notes entered and which do not have notes. Steps
that previously had no notes will now have notes at full velocity (127). Steps that previously had notes
will now be empty.
176
Tap Presets to show or hide the preset velocity controls. These controls let you manipulate and
transform the velocities of the current bar in the sequence.
The first button will apply ascending or descending velocities to the steps. Each time you tap it, it will
cycle through these options:
•
The velocities will ascend to a single peak at the end of the bar.
•
The velocities will ascend to two peaks—one after each half of the bar.
•
The velocities will ascend to four peaks—one after each quarter of the bar.
•
The velocities will descend from a single peak at the start of the bar.
•
The velocities will descend from two peaks—one after each half of the bar.
•
The velocities will descend from four peaks—one at the start each quarter of the bar.
The second button will set the velocities of the steps to be at the maximum value (127) or minimum values
(1), depending on their position in the bar. Each time you tap it, it will cycle through these options:
•
The velocities of the first half of the bar will be set to 1. The velocities of the second half will be
set to 127.
•
The velocities of the first and third quarters of the bar will be set to 1. The velocities of the
second and fourth quarters will be set to 127.
•
The velocities of the first, third, fifth, and seventh eighths of the bar will be set to 1. The velocities
of the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth eighths will be set to 127.
•
The velocities of the first half of the bar will be set to 127. The velocities of the second half will
be set to 1.
•
The velocities of the first and third quarters of the bar will be set to 127. The velocities of the
second and fourth quarters will be set to 1.
•
The velocities of the first, third, fifth, and seventh eighths of the bar will be set to 127. The
velocities of the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth eighths will be set to 1.
The third button will apply ascending or descending velocities to the steps. Each time you tap it, it will
cycle through these options:
•
Across the entire bar, the velocities will ascend to a peak and then descend from it.
•
In each half of the bar, the velocities will ascend to a peak and then descend from it.
•
In each quarter of the bar, the velocities will ascend to a peak and then descend from it.
•
Across the entire bar, the velocities will descend from a peak into a valley and then ascend back
up to the peak.
•
In each half of the bar, the velocities will descend from a peak into a valley and then ascend back
up to the peak.
•
In each quarter of the bar, the velocities will descend from a peak into a valley and then ascend
back up to the peak.
The fourth button will swap the first half and second half of the bar. In other words, the first half of the
bar will become a mirrored image of the second half, and vice versa.
The fifth button will invert the velocities of all steps with entered notes. The sum of the old and new
velocities will equal 127. The exception is a velocity of 127 or 1 as a step with a note cannot have a
velocity of 0.
Examples:
Steps with velocities of 40 will now have velocities of 87, and vice versa.
Steps with velocities of 75 will now have velocities of 52, and vice versa.
Steps with velocities of 127 will now have velocities of 1, and vice versa.
177
Step Automation
You can also create and edit automation using the Step
Sequencer.
To add a step automation parameter:
1.
By default, the Parameter field of the Step Sequencer
displays Velocity for MIDI tracks and TRK: Volume for
audio tracks. Double-tap this field to open the drop-
down menu.
2.
In the menu that appears, tap Add New to add an
automation parameter. You can choose from a variety
of parameters depending on the type of track, insert
effects added and other options.
To edit step automation, do any of the following:
•
Tap and drag your finger in the step area to freely draw step values.
•
Press and hold the Q-Link button, and then tap Screen to set the Q-Link knobs to Screen Mode. While viewing
the step sequencer, you can use the Q-Link knobs for tactile control of each step's automation value, emulating
traditional knob-based step sequencers. While it is being adjusted, the current automation value will be shown
next to the Parameter field, as well as in the display strip above the knobs (MPC X only).
•
Press and hold Shift and tap Clear to clear all automation for the selected parameter in the selected sequence.
•
Press and hold Shift and tap Clear Page to clear all automation for the selected parameter in the current page
view of the selected sequence.
•
Use the Nudge < and > buttons to shift the current automation parameter to the left or right at the current Timing
Correct value.
•
Use the slider on the right side to increase or decrease the parameter values for all automation steps in the visible
time range.
•
Tap Presets and use the buttons to apply the presets to the step automation.
Note: When editing step automation, if a step is not activated, a darkened step bar will indicate the current parameter
value at that step, based on the last active step.
178
List Edit Mode
List Edit Mode has some of the features of Grid View—as well as some additional ones—but with a different
interface/workflow.
To enter List Edit Mode, press Menu and then tap List Edit. You can also tap List at the top of the
screen in Arrange Mode or Grid View Mode.
When viewing main Events screen, tap the Tempo tab at the bottom of the screen to switch to the Tempo screen,
where you can add and adjust tempo change events.
The Time Counter at the top of the screen indicates the current playhead position.
The TC icon opens the Timing Correct (TC) window, which contains various settings to help quantize the note events
in your sequence.
Press and hold Shift and tap the TC icon to enable or disable global timing correct.
The View menu lets you select what type of events are shown in the list.
All: Select this option to show all event types.
Notes: Select this option to show only notes.
Aftertouch: Select this option to show only aftertouch messages.
MIDI Automation: Select this option to show only MIDI automation events.
Track Automation: Select this option to show only track automation events.
Pitch Bend: Select this option to show only pitch bend events.
Control Change: Select this option to show only MIDI CC messages.
Program Change: Select this option to show only MIDI program change messages.
Ch Pressure: Select this option to show only channel pressure messages.
Mute: Select this option to show only mute events for tracks and pads.
MPCe: Select this option to show only MPCe events such as Pad X/Y position.
The automation button indicates the global Automation state.
179
Tap the modifier icon to open the Note Modifier Settings window,
where you can adjust the modifier playback mode for the following
modifier types:
Filter (Cutoff, Resonance, Filter Envelope Amount)
Envelope (Attack, Decay, Release)
Sample (Sample Layer, Sample Slice)
Tuning (Coarse Tuning, Fine Tuning)
Mix (Pan, Level)
When the modifier type is set to Absolute, a note with an active
modifier for that type will use the modified value specified by the
note event directly, ignoring any values set in Track Edit, Sample
Edit, or Pad Mixer which would affect the modifier value, and ignore
pad automation that would affect the modified value.
When the modifier type is set to Relative, a note with an active modifier for that type will use the modified value as an
offset (or scale, in the case of Level) of the existing state, taking into account any values set in Track Edit, Sample Edit,
or Pad Mixer which would affect the modifier value, as well as be affected by pad automation that affects the modified
value. Relative modifier may be set beyond the limit of the underlying value. For example, a pad with an Envelope
Attack value of 10 could have a -100 modifier, in which case the note would be played back with an Attack value of 0.
Modifier playback mode settings will save with your project. Tap the Make Default button to make the current
configuration the default modifier playback mode setting for all new projects. This can be reset using the Reset
Preferences function in the Preferences menu.
Note: Legacy MPC projects are loaded with Sample and Envelope set to Absolute, and all other groups set to
Relative. Envelope modifiers for legacy projects will also not ignore automation even despite being set to Absolute.
This is to ensure the sound of old projects is retained. Interacting with the modifier playback Envelope setting in any
way will remove this behavior, and from that point the Envelope modifiers will ignore automation as normal.
Tap the gear icon to open the List View settings window, where you
can configure the following settings:
Use the Hitting Pad Selects All Events selector to turn the
feature on or off. When On, pressing a pad will automatically
select all note events for that pad in the selected sequence on
that track. When set to Off, pressing a pad will simply play its
sound without selecting any note events.
Use the Auto-Advance on Step Record selector to turn the
feature on or off. When set to On, pressing a pad when the
track is record-armed will move the audio playhead forward by
a length determined by the current Time Division setting in the
Timing Correct (TC) window. When set to Off, pressing a pad
when the track is record-armed will not change the audio
playhead position.
Use the Mod Type Selection field to set whether changing the Mod Type changes only the Selected event or All
events of the selected type.
Use the Auto-Scroll selector to set how the screen behaves relative to the audio playhead.
Follow: The list will scroll along in the background while keeping the audio playhead centered.
Page: The list will move to the “next page” to follow the audio playhead.
Off: The list will not move at all.
These functions also apply to Grid View and Sample Edit Mode.
180
The contents of the sequence will be shown as a list of events, with the following parameters:
#: This is the number of the note event.
Time: This is the position of the note event in bars, beats, and ticks. If multiple note events occur at the same time,
additional note events will be listed immediately below, but their Time values will be grayed out.
The Event Type icon indicates the type of event (e.g., Note, Aftertouch, Track Automation, etc.). See the list of
icons below showing the different types of events.
Pad/Note: This is the pad and/or corresponding MIDI note number. For drum tracks, you will see the pad number.
For keygroup tracks, plugin tracks, and midi tracks, you will see the note.
Length: This is the length of the note event in ticks.
CH: This is the MIDI Channel of the event.
Velocity: This is the velocity of the note event with its corresponding color.
Mod Type: This is the type of modifier used on the note event via automation.
Value: This is the value of the modifier automation.
Prob: This is the probability percentage of the event.
Rat: This is the ratchet value of the event.
The red arrow (
) on the left side of the list represents the audio playhead’s current position. If your sequence is
playing, the arrow will move accordingly.
181
The following icons indicate the corresponding types of events:
Note
MIDI Automation (Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo)
MIDI CC Automation (0–127)
MIDI Parameter Automation (Aftertouch, Pitchbend, Channel Pressure, or Program Change)
Mixer Automation (Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo, or Send 1–4)
Mixer Parameter Automation (options vary based on the type of track)
Track Insert Effect Automation (options vary based on the effect)
Pad/Keygroup Mixer Automation (Level, Pan, Pad Mute, Pad Solo, or Send 1–4)
Pad/Keygroup Parameter Automation (options vary based on the type of track)
Pad/Keygroup Insert Effect Automation (options vary based on the effect)
Sequence Tempo Automation
182
Tap an event to select it. Press and hold Shift to select multiple events.
To insert a note event, press Rec so the button is lit, and then press a pad. A note event will be created at the current
location using the pad you pressed. You can keep pressing additional pads, which will continue to insert each press
as a single note event in the order you pressed them (similar to a step sequencer). Press Stop to exit this function.
Note: Depending on the Auto-Advance on Step Record setting, the current time position will either advance each time
you press a pad or remain in place. See the earlier description of Auto-Advance on Step Record to learn about this.
Alternatively, press the Insert button at the bottom of the screen to
open the Insert Event window:
Use the Bar:Beat:Tick fields to set the location where you want
to add an event.
Use the Type field to set what kind of event you would like to
add: Note, Pad Automation, Mixer Automation or MIDI
Automation. When the Tempo tab is selected, this field is
locked to Sequence Automation.
Use the Pad and/or Parameter fields to set the additional values
or settings based on the type of event. When the Tempo tab is
selected, this field is locked to Parameter > Sequence Tempo.
Tap Do It to add the event.
Tap Cancel, the X or anywhere outside the window to close the
Insert Event window and return to List Mode.
To edit the Pad/Note, Length, Velocity, Tempo, or numeric Value of an event, tap the value to select it, and then
use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the value. Alternatively, double-tap it and use the numeric keypad that
appears to enter a value (for Length, Velocity, or numeric Value only).
To edit the Length of an event according to your Timing Correct settings, tap the value to select it, and then press
and hold Shift and use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the value.
To shift the Pad/Note of an event by pad bank, tap the value to select it, and then press and hold Shift and use the
data dial or –/
+ buttons to change the pad bank.
To turn a Solo/Mute event on or off, tap the desired setting on the On/Off switch. Alternatively, tap the On/Off switch
to select it, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the value.
To move an event, tap it to select it, tap Nudge at the bottom of the screen, and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons
to shift the event up or down. Repeat this for other events, or tap Nudge again to turn the feature off.
183
To move an event according to your Timing Correct settings, tap the Time value to select it, and then press and
hold Shift and use the data dial or –/+ buttons to change the value.
To play an event, tap it to select it, and then tap Play (
) at the bottom of the screen. This works with note events
only.
To delete an event, tap it to select it, and then tap Delete at the bottom of the screen.
184
Track Edit Mode
Track Edit Mode (formerly Program Edit Mode) contains all parameters for editing your Tracks.
To enter Track Edit Mode, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then tap Track Edit.
•
Press Prog Edit (MPC X, MPC One) or Edit (MPC Key 61, MPC Key 37).
For drum tracks, this mode includes the parameters of all eight layers as well as all synthesis parameters and insert
effect settings. See the Drum Tracks section to learn more.
For keygroup tracks, this mode contains slightly more parameters than drum tracks. See the Keygroup Tracks
section to learn more.
For plugin tracks, skip to Plugin Tracks to learn more.
For MIDI tracks and CV tracks, skip to MIDI Tracks and CV Tracks to learn more.
Double-tap the Track field at the top of the touchscreen to open the Track Settings window. To learn more about
these settings, and for more general information on the differences between the types of tracks, please see General
Features > Tracks.
Drum Tracks
When using drum tracks, Track Edit Mode lets you edit the parameters for each pad.
To select a pad, press it. Its parameters will appear on the screen immediately.
To view a specific tab of parameters, tap the tabs at the bottom of the screen. Tap the > or < arrows to scroll to
view other available tabs. Some tabs such as Samples or Effects have multiple pages, which can be cycled by
tapping the tab multiple times.
Tap the Edit All Layers button to enable or disable editing control of all sample layers at the same time. When this is
enabled, edits made to sample parameters such as Start/End points or Semi/Fine tuning on any one layer are
automatically applied uniformly to all eight layers at once (even if some layers are empty).
185
Tap the Stems icon to open the Create Stems
Function in the Process Sample window. You can
use this process to isolate different parts of the
sample and separate them into new stem samples.
Click the icons to select or deselect from the following
elements to create stems of:
•
Vocals: Isolate vocal elements of the track into a
stem.
•
Bass: Isolate bass elements of the track into a
stem.
•
Drums: Isolate percussive elements of the track
into a stem.
•
Other: Isolate other musical textures, such as keys
or guitars, into a stem.
Use the Track dropdown menu to select the track where the stems will be added.
The Assign to Pad function determines where the stem separated samples are added. When checked, you can
select a pad in the chosen Track using the dropdown menu, and the stems will be added to the first four layers of
that pad. When unchecked, the stems will be added to the general project sample pool in the Project Info Browser.
Tap the Use trimmed sample box to trim the source sample between the Start and End points before applying
the stem separation process.
Note: To purchase MPC Stems, visit akaipro.com/stems, and then activate your purchase in the Menu >
Preferences > Activate Plugins menu.
Tap the keyboard+ icon at the top of the screen to quickly create a keygroup from the selected sample. The
new keygroup will be created on a new track and automatically be selected.
Tap the down-arrow icon at the top of the screen
(next to the Track field) to open the Flatten Pad
window, which renders all samples on a pad as an
audio sample and places it on the first layer of that
pad.
The resulting sample is the audio signal produced by that
pad at full velocity (127) after the pad channel strip, which
means that it includes any assigned pad insert effects and
the results of warping the sample.
This function is useful if you need to reduce how CPU-
intensive a pad or track is by essentially “embedding” the
warping and effects in the sample itself. By default, it will use
the name of the first sample. This function works for drum
tracks only.
To select the pad, press it or use the Pad menu.
Use the Audio Tail field to set the length of the audio tail. This will add extra seconds to the end of the resulting audio
file. This is useful if you are using effects or samples whose sounds exceed the defined audio length (e.g., long reverb
or delay, one-shot samples with long decays, etc.). We recommend using an audio tail of at least a couple of seconds.
Tap the Edit Name field and use the virtual keyboard that appears to name the new sample.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel to cancel and return to the previous screen.
186
Tap the location icon at the top of the screen (on the right side) to open the Edit Zones window, which is a
feature for drum tracks. This window displays an overview of any selected pads. Use the Mode selector to set
how the selected pads will be edited:
•
Current: Only the currently selected pad can be edited.
•
Multiple: All selected pads can be edited simultaneously.
•
All: All pads can be edited simultaneously.
To close the window, tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window.
Global
In the Global tab, you can set the playback mode and tuning for the overall Track.
Global Semi lets you transpose the track up to 36 semitones up or down.
Global Fine provides fine-tuning of the track up to 99 cents up or down.
Global Poly (Polyphony) sets the playback mode for the track’s pads. In Mono Mode, only one pad will sound at a
time. If a pad is played while another (or the same one) is still playing its sample/samples, the new pad will immediately
mute all other currently playing pads in that track. In Poly Mode, several pads can be triggered at the same time (limited
only by the total number of voices available).
187
Level controls the overall volume level of the loaded sample/samples.
Pan controls the overall panning of the loaded sample/samples in the stereo field.
Pad Tuning controls the overall tuning of the loaded sample/samples.
Use the Velocity Scaling field to apply scaling to the incoming velocity. For example, if the scaling is set to 50 and the
incoming note velocity is 120, the note velocity would be 60 instead.
Use the Layer Play selector to determine how multiple samples assigned to the same pad are played:
•
Cycle (Cyc): Each time the pad is played, it will play the next layer’s sample. In other words, the samples will
cycle through the layers as follows: 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4… etc.
•
Velocity (Vel): The pad will switch between layers depending on how hard you press a pad.
•
Random (Ran): Each time the pad is played, it will play one of its layer’s samples at random. When selected,
the Random Seed field displays a value between 1–999,999. You can copy and reuse this value to reproduce
the same random sequence.
•
Crossfade: Crossfade between sample layers using modulation sources like envelopes and LFOs in the Mod
Matrix, allowing for wave sequencing or vector synthesis-like effects.
Use the Sample Play selector to determine how much of the sample is played.
•
One Shot: The entire sample will play from start to end. Use this when you want to play short sounds.
•
Note Off: The entire sample will play from start to end after the pad has been pressed and released.
•
Note On: The sample will play only as long as the pad is held. This is better for longer samples so you can
control a sound’s duration by pressing and holding its corresponding pad.
Use the Pad Polyphony field to determine how the pad’s sound behaves when multiple hits are registered. When set
to Mono, only one pad will sound at a time. If a pad is played while another (or the same one) is still playing its
sample/samples, the new pad will immediately mute all other currently playing pads in that track. When set to Poly,
several pads can be triggered at the same time (limited only by the total number of voices available). You can also
select a specific number of pads (2–32) so that you can trigger up to this many pads at the same time (unless they
exceed the total number of voices available).
Use the Mute Group field to assign the selected pad to one of the 32 available groups. When pads assigned to the
same mute group receive MIDI notes, the last pad played will silence all other pads in that mute group. A mute group
affects pads within that track only; mute groups do not affect pads in other tracks.
Tip: This feature is useful for programming realistic hi-hats, so only the open or closed hat is heard.
The Simultaneous Play section lets you set up to four pads that can be triggered by pressing one pad only. This
function is useful for triggering a stack of sounds (e.g., layered kick drums). Use each Pad field to select the desired
pad.
The Mute Targets tab lets you select up to four pads (in the same track) for the currently selected pad. When the
currently selected pad is played, it will immediately silence its mute targets. Use each Pad field to select the desired
mute target.
Tips:
This feature is useful for programming realistic hi-hats, especially if only the open or closed hat should be heard.
This feature is similar to the mute group feature, available for both drum tracks and keygroup tracks.
188
Samples
Each pad can trigger up to eight samples, which are assigned in eight individual layers. Each layer has identical,
independently assignable parameters.
Tap Samples to cycle through its four available tabs.
You can access the Settings window, which lets you
configure certain settings in the Samples tab, from any of the
four tabs by tapping the gear icon.
Use the Link Slices selector to set how the start point
and end point of a slice in a larger sample is set. You
can create these slices in Sample Edit Mode > Chop
Mode.
When on, changing the start point of a slice will also
change the end point of the previous slice. Similarly,
changing the end point of a slice will also change the
start point of the next slice. Disable Link Slices if you
are trying to create slices that use non-contiguous
parts of the sample. This is the same as the Link Slices
button in Sample Edit Mode.
Use the Loop Lock selector to “link” or “unlink” the loop point from the start point. When on, the loop point is the
same as the start point. When off, the loop point is independent from the start point and indicated by a separate
loop marker. This is the same as the Loop Lock button in Sample Edit Mode.
Use the Zero Snap selector to enable or disable the Zero Snap feature, which forces start points, end points, and
loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can help to avoid clicks and glitches when
playing a sample. This is the same as the 0 Snap button in Sample Edit Mode.
To close the Settings window, tap Close, the X in the upper-right corner, or anywhere outside the window.
189
The first Samples tab contains the sample waveform for each layer and controls for its pitch, timing, and playback.
The upper half of the screen shows the waveform of the sample on the currently selected layer. The lower half shows
the editing controls.
The waveform display shows the “active” section of the sample waveform. Swipe left or right on the waveform to move
through it.
Above the waveform is the timeline, shown in bars, beats, and ticks.
Use the bottom-most Q-Link knob in the fourth bank to zoom in or out of the sample waveform.
Tap each layer number (Layer 1–8) under the waveform to select it. When selected, its sample waveform will be shown
in the upper half of the screen and its settings will be shown in the lower half.
Use the Sample field to select the sample file for that layer. Remember that the sample has to be loaded into the project’s
sample pool beforehand. For information on how to load samples into a project, please see the Browser chapter.
Important: The parameters in the Samples tabs work in conjunction with Chop Mode (in Sample Edit Mode). Here’s
how it works:
When working in Sample Edit Mode and using Chop Mode to divide a sample into slices for your pads, you can convert
a slice using Non-Destructive Slice or Pad Parameters.
A Non-Destructive Slice will let its pad to refer to that slice when you press it; the original sample remains intact, and
each slice marker is like a “bookmark” for a pad. In Track Edit Mode, you’ll see that the pad/layer to which it’s assigned
has its Slice drop-down menu set to the corresponding slice number in the original sample. Playing that pad will
cause it to refer to that slice marker like a “bookmark” instead of creating an entirely new sample of that slice. This
means that you no longer have to clutter your project with a new sample for every slice (though you can still use this
earlier method, if you prefer).
A slice converted using Pad Parameters is very similar to a non-destructive slice described above. The difference is
that in Track Edit Mode, the pads/layers they’re assigned to have their Slice drop-down menus set to Pad (instead of
the slice number), and the start and end points will correspond to the slice markers in the original sample.
Tap the trash can icon next to the sample field to remove the file from the layer.
190
The green/S marker and red/E marker are the start point and end point (respectively). These two points define the
region of the sample that will be played.
To move the start point or end point, do any of the following:
•
Tap and drag the S or E marker left or right.
•
Use the Start or End fields shown below the waveform.
•
When the Q-Links are set to screen mode, you can use them to adjust the start and end points in fine and
coarse adjustments. For MPC hardware with four Q-Links, the first bank adjusts the start point, and the second
bank adjusts the end point.
Note: When Loop Lock is on, the loop position (as determined by the Loop field, if enabled) is the same as the
sample’s start point. When off, the loop position is independent from the start point.
Use the Loop field to determine the position where the sample’s playback will repeat when Pad Loop is activated.
Note: When Loop Lock is on, the loop position is the same as the sample’s start point. When off, the loop position is
independent from the start point.
Use the Tail Length and Tail Start fields to add adding extra audio tail to any chopped sample. This is useful for things
like making an abrupt end to a sample sound more natural or adding experimental looping effects to a sample. The
Tail Length parameter enables the sample tail and set its total length, and the Tail Start parameter sets the starting
point within the tail for looping.
Use the Repeats field to set a sample to play a specified number of times. First make sure Pad Loop is set to On,
then use this field to set the number of times you want to have the sample loop between the Sample Loop and End
points. For example, a value of 4 would repeat the selected area of the sample 4 times.
Note: The behavior difference between Repeats set to 0 and 1 is only evident when a Pad’s Sample Play parameter is
set to Note On. Then, when hold a note, a Repeat value of 0 will create infinite repeats, and a value of 1 will play a
sample one time through.
191
Use the Slice field to select what part/parts of the sample will play:
•
All: The entire sample will play.
•
Pad: The sample will play from the Pad Start position to the Pad End position, described earlier. This also lets
you activate Pad Loop (if the Sample Play field in the LFO Modulation tab is set to Note On).
•
Slice 1, 2, 3, etc.: If you have sliced the sample in Chop Mode, you can select which slice will play when you
trigger the pad.
When Slice is selected, you can tap the Slice Motion icon to trigger a
different sample slice each time a pad is played.
Use the Motion setting to select Increment, which increments the slice
number with each new note event, or Random, which plays your slices
in a random order.
Use the Slice field to set the starting slice.
Use the Cycles field to select how many of the slices are played.
Tap the pad repeatedly, or turn Note Repeat on and hold the pad, to hear
the slices of your chopped loop play.
Use the Play Offset field to shift a sample window between the Start, End, and Loop points across the sample without
altering their relative positions. For example, if you set these points to frame the first 1/16th note of a one-bar sample,
you can use the Play Offset to shift that window to different 1/16th note positions within the sample. You must retrigger
the sample to hear offset changes.
Use the Reverse button to select in which direction the sample will play. When on, the sample will play in reverse.
When off, the sample will play in the normal forward direction.
Use the Pad Loop button to cycle through the available Pad Loop modes.
Important: For Pad Loop to work, you must (1) set the Sample Play field (in the Global tab) to Note
On instead of One Shot and (2) set the Slice field (in the first Samples tab) to Pad instead of All or a
slice number.
•
Off: The sample will not loop.
•
Forward: You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to repeat from the Loop Position to
the end of the sample. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
•
Reverse: You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to play in reverse, repeating from the
end of the sample to the Loop Position. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
•
Alternating: You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to play from the Loop Position to
the end of the sample and then play in reverse until it reaches the Loop Position again. This will
repeat as long as you are holding the pad down. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
192
Tap BPM Sync to enable or disable BPM Sync.
When BPM Sync and Warp are both enabled, the sample’s BPM will be “locked” to the tempo of the project.
When BPM Sync is disabled but Warp is enabled, the sample will be independent of the tempo of your project—use the
Stretch field to lengthen or shorten a sample.
Tap Warp to enable or disable warping of the sample.
When enabled, lengthening or shortening the sample (based on the BPM) will not change its pitch.
When disabled, lengthening or shortening the sample will also change its pitch and vice versa.
Note: The Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if used too freely.
Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function. You can reduce the CPU resources required by doing
any/all of the following:
•
Avoid using extreme Stretch values.
•
Minimize the amount of pitch adjustment (e.g., the Semi and Fine parameters) of warped audio.
•
Avoid warping very small sample regions.
•
Warp as few samples or sample regions as possible (i.e., reduce the number of total number of voices of the
polyphonic limit that use the Warp algorithm at a given time), especially instances where the warped regions start
at the same time.
•
Avoid rapidly triggering samples that are warped.
•
If you have warped samples used in a drum kit, consider using the Flatten Pad function to consolidate the affected
pad’s layers into one audio sample (see here to learn about this). After you flatten the pad, its sample/samples no
longer need to be warped.
Semi lets you transpose the selected layer up to 36 semitones up or down. This will affect the length of the sample (if
Warp is off). This is the same as the Semi knob on the second Samples tab. The analyzed Key of the sample is
displayed next to the Semi field and will adjust based on this value.
Fine provides fine-tuning of each layer by cents. This will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is off). This is the
same as the Fine knob on the second Samples tab.
Use the Stretch field to set the “stretch factor,” which affects how the sample is warped (if Warp is on).
Use the BPM field to enter a tempo, which affects how the sample is warped (if Warp is on).
Use the Algorithm field to select the audio warp algorithm for the sample: Default, Pro Ten, or Repitch. The Default
algorithm can be set in the Preferences > Audio/Export menu.
Note: Changing the Algorithm setting here will override the Preferences setting.
193
The second Samples tab (Tune/Mix) contains controls for its pitch, volume level and panning.
Tap the Layer 1–4/Layer 5–8 button to toggle between visible layers.
Use the Sample field to select the sample file for that layer. Tap the trash can icon next to the sample field to remove
the file from the layer.
Semi lets you transpose the selected layer up to 36 semitones up or down. This will affect the length of the sample (if
Warp is off). This is the same as the Semi field on the first Samples tab.
Fine provides fine-tuning of each layer by cents. This will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is off). This is the
same as the Fine field on the first Samples tab.
Level lets you adjust each layer’s volume, letting you control the “balance” of the samples assigned to the pad.
Pan adjusts the stereo placement of the respective layer.
194
The third Samples tab (Velocity) contains the control for its offset and velocity range.
Tap the Layer 1–4/Layer 5–8 button to toggle between visible layers.
Use the Sample field to select the sample file for that layer. Tap the trash can icon next to the sample field to remove
the file from the layer.
Use the Offset slider to determine a time offset for the sample’s playback.
•
Positive values (right of center): When the pad is played, playback will start immediately but at a later point in the
sample specified by the offset value.
•
Negative values (left of center): When the pad is played, playback will be delayed by the amount specified by the
offset value.
Use the Vel Start and Vel End knobs to define the velocity range of each layer.
A range from 0 to 127 lets the layer respond to the entire velocity range which is input from the respective pad while,
for example, a range from 100 to 127 lets the layer respond only to higher velocity levels. By assigning several samples
of one instrument, you can create a realistic-sounding “multi-sample” by adjusting the velocity ranges of each layer
accordingly.
For example, you may have three samples of a drum hit with low force, medium force, and high force. You can set
each sample to a layer and set the Velocity ranges so only low velocities trigger the low-force sample, only mid-range
velocities trigger the medium-force sample, and only high velocities trigger the high-force sample.
195
The fourth Samples tab (Random) contains the controls for adding randomization to sample parameters such as
pitch, level and panning.
Tap the Layer 1–4/Layer 5–8 button to toggle between visible layers.
Use the Sample field to select the sample file for that layer. Tap the trash can icon next to the sample field to remove
the file from the layer.
Use the Pitch knobs to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s pitch.
Use the Level knobs to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s volume.
Use the Pan knobs to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s stereo placement.
Use the Offset sliders to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s time offset.
The All Layers section will apply randomization to all sample layers for the following envelope parameters: Attack,
Decay, Cutoff and Resonance. Use the Depth slider to control the amount of envelope randomization applied overall.
196
Envelopes
Tap Envelopes to cycle through its three available tabs.
The first Envelope tab contains the amplitude modulation envelope.
Pad Level controls the overall volume level of the loaded sample/samples.
Pad Pan controls the overall panning of the loaded sample/samples in the stereo field.
The Amp Envelope controls affect level changes over time. Use the fields or tap and drag the “handles” of the envelope
to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust the envelope’s influence on the filter frequency with the
Env knob. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about the envelope parameters.
The Velocity Modulation controls determine how much the velocity affects the volume level of the amplitude envelope
(Amp), the attack of the amplitude envelope (Amp Attack), and/or the panning of the sound (Pan).
When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation amount
also gets stronger depending on the setting of the corresponding slider.
197
The second Envelope tab contains the filter modulation envelope.
Use the Type field to select a filter for the selected pad. See Appendix > Glossary > Filter for an explanation of the
available filter types.
Use the Cutoff knob to set the cutoff frequency for low-pass and high-pass filter types or the center frequency for
band-pass and band-stop filter types.
Use the Reso knob to set the resonance/emphasis of the frequencies around the cutoff point.
Tip: Use values lower than 80 to give more brilliance to the sound. At values higher than 80, the sound will result in a
strong audible boost around the cutoff frequency.
The Filter Envelope controls affect the filter frequency. Use the fields or tap and drag the “handles” of the envelope
to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust the envelope’s influence on the filter frequency with
the Depth knob. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about the envelope parameters.
Use the Depth slider to determine the amount of influence the filter envelope has on the cutoff frequency. Higher
settings will increase the modulation of the filter by the envelope; lower settings will result in only subtle changes of
the filter Cutoff over time.
Tip: To give a sound a more distinctive attack, increase the Depth setting and set low Atk and Decay values as
well as a medium-low Sust value of the Filter Envelope. This will start a sound with the filter opened and close it
shortly afterward, giving it a bright start followed by a darker sustain. String sounds, on the other hand, can sound
much more “alive” with low Depth settings and a high Atk value, resulting in a slight fade-in of the higher frequencies.
The Velocity Modulation controls determine how much the velocity affects the cutoff frequency of the filter envelope
(Cutoff), the attack phase of the filter envelope (Attack), and/or depth of influence the filter envelope has on the cutoff
frequency (Depth).
When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation amount
also gets stronger depending on the setting of the corresponding slider.
198
The third Envelope tab contains the pitch modulation envelope.
Global Semi lets you transpose the pad up to 36 semitones up or down. This will affect the length of the sample (if
Warp is off). This is the same as the Semi field on the Global tab.
Global Fine provides fine-tuning of each layer by cents. This will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is off). This is
the same as the Fine field on the Global tab.
The Pitch Envelope controls affect the pad’s pitch. Use the fields or tap and drag the “handles” of the envelope to
shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust the envelope’s influence on the pitch with the Depth
slider. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about the envelope parameters.
The Velocity Modulation control determines how much the velocity affects the pitch envelope (Pitch).
When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation amount
also gets stronger depending on the setting of the Pitch slider.
199
Mods (Modulations)
Use the Velocity Sensitivity sliders to set how much velocity is required to modulate certain other parameters:
•
Sample Start sets how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the sample start point.
•
Filter Cutoff uses the velocity of a pad to modulate the cutoff frequency directly.
•
Filter Env Attack sets how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the Attack phase for the
Filter envelope.
•
Filter Env Depth enables velocity information to control the amount of the filter envelope’s effect on the cutoff
frequency.
•
Pitch uses the velocity of a pad to modulate the sample pitch.
•
Amp uses the velocity of a pad to change the sample level. Lower this value to reduce the effect of velocity on
the amplitude.
•
Amp Attack sets how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the Attack phase for the Amp
envelope.
•
Pan uses the velocity of a pad to control the stereo panning.
Use the LFO Destinations sliders to determine how much the LFO affects the pitch of the sound (Pitch), the cutoff
frequency of the filter (Filter), the volume level of the sound (Amp) and panning of the sound (Pan).
200
Effects
Tap Effects to cycle through its two available tabs.
Inserts
In the first Effects tab, you can select up to four insert effects for each pad. To learn how to use insert effects, please see
General Features > Effects > Insert Effects.
To add an effect:
1.
Double-tap the desired Inserts slot. A list of effects will appear.
2.
Swipe up or down to move through the list.
You can tap the Type and Manufacturer buttons to sort your effects by those categories.
3.
To load an effect, double-tap it, or tap Select.
To close the list, tap Close.
Tap the Akai folder icon to load a factory FX rack. You can choose from a number of preset combinations of insert
effects by applications like Drums and Percussion, Voice, LoFi, Mastering, and more.
Tap second folder icon to load a saved FX rack.
Tap the disk icon to save an FX rack.
Tap the All On/Off button in the upper-right corner to enable or disable all four insert effects.
Tap the arrows next to the insert slot to rearrange an insert effect. Adjacent effects will be moved up or down in
relation.
Tap the pencil icon to adjust the effect’s parameters. Use the controls to set the value of each parameter. These
values affect only this instance of the effect; insert effects are not global.
Tap the trash can icon to remove an effect from its slot.
Tap the On/Off button for the slot to enable or disable the effect.
201
Tap the trash can icon to remove the effect from its slot.
Tap the folder icon next to the preset name at the top of the display to open the file browser and load an effect preset.
Tap the disk icon next to the insert selector at the top of the display to save a new effect preset.
Tap the -/+ buttons to rearrange the insert effect. Adjacent effects will be moved up or down in relation.
Tap the On/Off button to enable or disable the effect.
Sends
The audio of the pad will be routed to send effects (if you have any loaded) at their designated send levels. The return
channels will then send the audio to an assigned main output at the designated return levels.
Use the Send knobs to set the volume level of the signal the pad will route to each send effect.
Important: To learn about send effects, please see General Features > Effects > Send/Return Effects.
202
The second Effects tab contains controls for Articulations and Drum FX.
The Articulations section lets you apply variable drum articulations and rudiments like flams, paradiddles, and other
dynamic phrases.
Tap the MPCe button to enable MPCe articulation control. This allows you to assign up to four different
articulations to the four corners of a pad for dynamic articulation switching. When enabled, tap the 1–4 buttons
below to select each pad quadrant. MPCe values can be input as automation for a pad.
Tap the dropdown menu to select the type of articulation applied to the pad or pad quadrant. Articulations are
grouped into eight categories: Default Articulations, Standard Rudiments, Dotted Rudiments, Triplet
Rudiments, Rolls, Pitched Rolls, Metric Rudiments, and Note Repeats.
Use the Speed knob to adjust the length of the articulation (25–400%). You can also use the Speed Scale /2, x1,
and x2 buttons to quickly modify the set articulation speed.
Use the Dynamics knob to apply velocity modulation to the articulation (0–200%).
Use the Stereo knob to adjust the stereo spread of the articulation (0–100%).
The Drum FX section lets you add and control up to eight additional, simplified effects per pad in a Drum track.
Use the Type dropdown menu to select the effect in each slot:
•
Ring Mod
•
Bit Crush
•
Decimator
•
Tube Drive
•
Soft Clipper
•
Hard Clipper
•
Low Pass
•
High Pass
•
Rectifier
•
Bass Enhancer (Tight)
•
Bass Enhancer (Medium)
•
Bass Enhancer (Wide)
•
Wave Folder
•
Gain
Use each knob to adjust the selected effect parameter.
203
LFO
Tap LFO to cycle between the LFO 1 and LFO 2 controls. You can also tap the LFO 1 and LFO 2 headers to toggle
between them.
A low-frequency oscillator (LFO) generates a periodic waveform with an adjustable frequency and shape which can be
used for modulation purposes.
Use the Wave field to select the LFO waveform type:
•
Sine: Best suited for smooth modulations.
•
Tri (Triangle): Best suited for smooth modulations.
•
S&H: Samples a random value and holds it until the next value is generated.
•
Saw: Can generate interesting filter or volume changes.
•
SawD (Saw Down): Can generate interesting filter or volume changes.
•
Sqr (Square): Interesting results with hard-panning modulations.
•
Noise: Generates random values and glides.
Use the Reset field to determine whether the LFO retriggers on each note played (On) or not (Off).
Use the Fade In knob to set the length of time for the LFO to reach full level once triggered.
Use Fade In [Sync] to synchronize the fade in with the tempo. You can select one of several time divisions (a . indicates
a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off, and the fade in length
is determined by the Fade In knob.
Use the Delay knob to set the length of time between when the note is triggered and when the LFO is triggered.
Use Delay [Sync] to synchronize the delay time with the tempo. You can select one of several time divisions (a .
indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off, and the delay
length is determined by the Fade In knob.
Use the Rate knob to determine the LFO frequency. At lower values, it might take some time for the LFO to complete
a cycle, while higher values will come closer to audible range.
Use Rate [Sync] to synchronize the LFO’s rate with the tempo. You can select one of several time divisions (a .
indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off, and the
frequency is determined by the Rate knob.
Use the Level knob to set the overall amount of modulation applied by the LFO. At lower values, the modulation is
more subtle, and at higher values it is more extreme.
204
Tap the Destinations
button in the LFO window to display the Destinations sliders. Use these sliders to determine
how much the LFO affects the pitch of the sound (Pitch), the cutoff frequency of the filter (Filter), the volume level of
the sound (Amp) and panning of the sound (Pan).
Utilities
Use the Ramp Time 1/2 fields to adjust the ramp length. These can be used to apply additional modulation shaping
to other parameters via the Mod Matrix.
Use the Note Counter 1/2 Size fields to set stepped modulation values. These can be used as part of the Mod Matrix
to change parameter values based on the number of voices selected (2–64).
The Voice section allows you to add additional free running LFOs which can be used for subtle modulations in the
Mod Matrix. Use the Global Drift knob to set the amount of drift applied to the entire drum track, or use the Voice
Drift knob to set the amount of drift applied to the selected pad.
205
Mod Matrix
Tap the Mod Matrix tab to cycle through its eight available tabs. Alternatively, tap the numbered headers below the
toolbar to select that tab.
The 32 available modulation points can be configured to add a wide variety of sound shaping tools.
Use the Source field to select the modulation source.
Use the first Amt (Amount) field to set how much modulation is applied by the source.
Use the Target field to select the output target for modulation.
Use the Direction field to set whether the modulation direction is bipolar or unipolar.
Use the Min and Max fields to set the minimum and maximum modulation levels of the selected target.
Use the Via Source field to add a secondary modulation shaper using another source.
Use the second Amt (Amount) field to set how much modulation is applied by the secondary source.
Use the Shaper field to apply an additional modifier that affects the modulation relationship between the source and
target.
Use the third Amt (Amount) field to set how much modulation is applied by the shaper.
206
Keygroup Tracks
When using keygroup tracks, Track Edit Mode lets you edit the parameters for each keygroup.
Tap the Legacy button to enable or disable the Legacy Keygroup editing functions. When this button is enabled,
keygroup editing functions the same as it has in previous MPC release. When this button is disabled, the new Advanced
keygroup synthesis engine is enabled. Legacy mode is disabled by default. The following sections are labeled as being
available in Advanced Mode, Legacy mode, or both Advanced and Legacy modes.
Press a pad or key to select its keygroup. Its parameters will appear on the screen immediately. Alternatively, use the
Keygroup field at the top of the screen.
Tap the tabs at the bottom of the screen to view its specific parameters, such as Global or Samples. For tabs with
multiple pages, tap the buttons multiple times to cycle through the available parameters.
Tap the Keygroup field to select a keygroup to edit. You can also select All to edit all keygroups simultaneously.
Number of KG (keygroups) lets you create up to 128 keygroups within a keygroup track. This is useful when working
with multi-samples. For example, if you want to create a realistic piano, you can use different keygroups (e.g., 88 for a
grand piano) with every keygroup containing its own sampled note (with up to four possible velocity layers).
Tap the Edit All Layers button to enable or disable editing control of all sample layers at the same time. When this is
enabled, edits made to sample parameters such as Start/End points or Semi/Fine tuning on any one layer are
automatically applied uniformly to all eight layers at once (even if some layers are empty).
207
Tap the Stems icon to open the Create Stems Function in the
Process Sample window. You can use this process to isolate
different parts of the sample and separate them into new
stem samples.
Click the icons to select or deselect from the following elements
to create stems of:
•
Vocals: Isolate vocal elements of the track into a stem.
•
Bass: Isolate bass elements of the track into a stem.
•
Drums: Isolate percussive elements of the track into a stem.
•
Other: Isolate other musical textures, such as keys or
guitars, into a stem.
Use the Track dropdown menu to select the track where the stems will be added.
The Assign to Pad function determines where the stem separated samples are added. When checked, you can
select a pad in the chosen Track using the dropdown menu, and the stems will be added to the first four layers of
that pad. When unchecked, the stems will be added to the general project sample pool in the Project Info Browser.
Tap the Use trimmed sample box to trim the source sample between the Start and End points before applying
the stem separation process.
Note: To purchase MPC Stems, visit akaipro.com/stems, and then activate your purchase in the Menu >
Preferences > Activate Plugins menu.
Tap the piano-keys icon to edit the note range of the current
keygroup. This will open the Set Keygroup Note Range window.
This lets you restrict the key range used for a sample’s playback.
Only notes with a key number higher or equal (Low Key) or lower
and equal (High Key) to the selected value will trigger a sound.
Tips:
Alternatively, you can set the current keygroup’s note range by using
the Lo and Hi fields under Note Range in the Global tab.
Set the Lo parameter to A0 and the Hi parameter to C8 to emulate
the range of a standard 88-key piano.
208
Global (Advanced and Legacy)
In the Global tab, you can set the playback mode and tuning for the overall track. This tab has the same features and
functions in both Legacy and Advanced editing.
Global Semi lets you tune the track up to 36 semitones up or down.
Global Fine provides fine-tuning of the track up to 99 cents up or down.
Transpose shifts the pitch of the MIDI notes sent to the track up to 36 semitones up or down.
Poly (polyphony) sets the playback mode for the track’s keygroups. In Mono Mode, only one keygroup will sound at
a time. If a keygroup is played while another (or the same one) is still playing its sample/samples, the new keygroup
will immediately mute all other currently playing keygroups in that track. In Poly Mode, several keygroups can be
triggered at the same time (limited only by the total number of voices available).
The Key Group Semi field lets you transpose the sample 36 semitones up or down, while Fine provides fine-tuning of
each layer up to 99 cents up or down.
Tip: The Edit Layers section has some parameters similar to those in this section (Level, Pan, Semi, Fine, Note
Range). Remember that Key Group parameters control the overall settings for the sample, while Edit Layer
parameters control the settings for each layer (up to 4).
Key Group Level controls the overall volume level of the loaded sample/samples.
Key Group Pan controls the overall panning of the loaded sample/samples in the stereo field.
The Lo Key and Hi Key fields let you restrict the key range used for a sample’s playback. Only notes with a key number
higher or equal (Lo) or lower and equal (Hi) to the selected value will trigger a sound. The settings for Lo and Hi are
also shown in the virtual keyboard in the Edit Layers section. Alternatively, tap the piano-keys icon to open the Set
Keygroup Note Range window.
Tip: Set the Lo parameter to A0 and the Hi parameter to C8 to emulate the range of a standard 88-key piano.
209
Use the KG Polyphony (keygroup polyphony) field to determine how the keygroup will play. When set to Mono, only
one pad will sound at a time. If a pad is played while another (or the same one) is still playing its sample/samples, the
new pad will immediately mute all other currently playing pads in that track. When set to Poly, several pads can be
triggered at the same time, limited only by the total number of voices available. You can also select a specific number
of pads (2–32) so that you can play up to this many pads at the same time (unless they exceed the total number of
voices available).
Use the Mute Group field to assign the selected keygroup to one of the 32 available mute groups. When keygroups
assigned to the same mute group receive MIDI notes, the last keygroup played will silence all other keygroups in that
mute group. A mute group affects keygroups within that track only; mute groups do not affect keygroups in other tracks.
Key Track allows you to switch a sample’s automatic transposition on or off. If this is off, you will always hear the
same pitch of the sample, no matter which note is triggered by pads or a connected MIDI keyboard.
Layer Play determines how multiple samples assigned to the same pad are played:
•
Cycle (Cyc): Each time the pad is played, it will play the next layer’s sample. In other words, the samples will
cycle through the layers as follows: 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4… etc.
•
Velocity (Vel): The pad will switch between layers depending on how hard you press a pad.
•
Random (Ran): Each time the pad is played, it will play one of its layer’s samples at random. When selected,
the Random Seed field displays a value between 1–999,999. You can copy and reuse this value to reproduce
the same random sequence.
•
Crossfade: Crossfade between sample layers using modulation sources like envelopes and LFOs in the Mod
Matrix, allowing for wave sequencing or vector synthesis-like effects.
Sample Play determines how much of the sample is played:
•
One Shot: The entire sample will play from start to end. Use this when you want to play short sounds.
•
Note Off: The entire sample will play from start to end after the pad has been pressed and released.
•
Note On: The sample will play only as long as the pad is held. This is better for longer samples so you can
control a sound’s duration by pressing and holding its corresponding pad.
210
Samples (Advanced and Legacy)
Each keygroup can trigger up to four samples, which are assigned in four individual layers. Each layer has identical,
independently assignable parameters.
Tap Samples to cycle through its available tabs. The first three tabs have identical features and functions in both
Legacy and Advanced editing. Legacy features a fourth tab (Random), which is a separate tab in Advanced mode
(see Randomize (Advanced)).
You can access the Settings window, which lets you configure certain settings in the Samples tab, from any of the
three tabs by tapping the gear icon.
Use the Link Slices selector to set how the start point and end point of a slice in a larger sample is set. You can
create these slices in Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode.
When on, changing the start point of a slice will also change the end point of the previous slice. Similarly, changing
the end point of a slice will also change the start point of the next slice. Disable Link Slices if you are trying to
create slices that use non-contiguous parts of the sample. This is the same as the Link Slices button in Sample
Edit Mode.
Use the Loop Lock selector to “link” or “unlink” the loop point from the start point. When on, the loop point is the
same as the start point. When off, the loop point is independent from the start point and indicated by a separate
loop marker. This is the same as the Loop Lock button in Sample Edit Mode.
Use the Zero Snap selector to enable or disable the Zero Snap feature, which forces start points, end points, and
loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can help to avoid clicks and glitches when
playing a sample. This is the same as the 0 Snap button in Sample Edit Mode.
Tap Close, the X in the upper-right corner, or anywhere outside the window to close the Settings window.
211
The first Samples tab contains the sample waveform for each layer and controls for its pitch, timing, and playback.
The upper half of the screen shows the waveform of the sample on the currently selected layer. The lower half shows
the editing controls.
The waveform display shows the “active” section of the sample waveform. Swipe left or right on the waveform to move
through it.
Above the waveform is the timeline, shown in bars, beats, and ticks.
Tap each layer number (Layer 1–8) under the waveform to select it. When selected, its sample waveform will be shown
in the upper half of the screen and its settings will be shown in the lower half.
Use the Sample field to select the sample file for that layer. Remember that the sample has to be loaded into the
project’s sample pool beforehand. For information on how to load samples into a project, please see the Browser
chapter.
Important: The parameters in the Samples tabs work in conjunction with Chop Mode (in Sample Edit Mode). Here’s
how it works:
When working in Sample Edit Mode and using Chop Mode to divide a sample into slices for your pads (keygroups),
you can convert a slice using Non-Destructive Slice or Pad Parameters.
A Non-Destructive Slice will let its keygroup to refer to that slice when you press a pad in that keygroup; the original
sample remains intact, and each slice marker is like a “bookmark” for a keygroup. In Track Edit Mode, you’ll see that
the layer to which it’s assigned has its Slice drop-down menu set to the corresponding slice number in the original
sample. Playing that keygroup will cause it to refer to that slice marker like a “bookmark” instead of creating an entirely
new sample of that slice. This means that you no longer have to clutter your project with a new sample for every slice
(though you can still use this earlier method, if you prefer).
A slice converted using Pad Parameters is very similar to a non-destructive slice described above. The difference is
that in Track Edit Mode, the layers they’re assigned to have their Slice drop-down menus set to Pad (instead of the
slice number), and the start and end points will correspond to the slice markers in the original sample.
Tap the trash can icon next to the sample field to remove the file from the layer.
212
The green/S marker and red/E marker are the start point and end point (respectively). These two points define the
region of the sample that will be played.
To move the start point or end point, do any of the following:
•
Tap and drag the S or E marker left or right.
•
Use the Start or End fields shown below the waveform.
•
When the Q-Links are set to screen mode, you can use them to adjust the start and end points in fine and
coarse adjustments. For MPC hardware with four Q-Links, the first bank adjusts the start point, and the second
bank adjusts the end point.
Note: When Loop Lock is on, the loop position (as determined by the Loop field, if enabled) is the same as the
sample’s start point. When off, the loop position is independent from the start point.
Use the Loop field to determine the position where the sample’s playback will repeat when Pad Loop is activated.
Note: When Loop Lock is on, the loop position is the same as the sample’s start point. When off, the loop position is
independent from the start point.
Use the Tail Length and Tail Start fields to add extra audio tail to any chopped sample. This is useful for things like
making an abrupt end to a sample sound more natural or adding experimental looping effects to a sample. The Tail
Length parameter enables the sample tail and set its total length, and the Tail Start parameter sets the starting point
within the tail for looping.
Use the Repeats field to set a sample to play a specified number of times. First make sure Pad Loop is set to On,
then use this field to set the number of times you want to have the sample loop between the Sample Loop and End
points. For example, a value of 4 would repeat the selected area of the sample 4 times.
Note: The behavior difference between Repeats set to 0 and 1 is only evident when a Pad’s Sample Play parameter is
set to Note On. Then, when hold a note, a Repeat value of 0 will create infinite repeats, and a value of 1 will play a
sample one time through.
213
Use the Slice field to select what part/parts of the sample will play:
•
All: The entire sample will play.
•
Pad: The sample will play from the Pad Start position to the Pad End position, described earlier. This also
lets you activate Pad Loop (if the Sample Play field in the Global tab is set to Note On).
•
Slice 1, 2, 3, etc.: If you have sliced the sample in Chop Mode, you can select which slice will play when you
trigger the pad.
When Slice is selected, you can tap the Slice Motion icon to trigger a
different sample slice each time a pad is played.
Use the Motion setting to select Increment, which increments the slice
number with each new note event, or Random, which plays your slices
in a random order.
Use the Slice field to set the starting slice.
Use the Cycles field to select how many of the slices are played.
Tap the pad repeatedly, or turn Note Repeat on and hold the pad, to hear
the slices of your chopped loop play.
Use the Play Offset field to shift a sample window between the Start, End, and Loop points across the sample without
altering their relative positions. For example, if you set these points to frame the first 1/16th note of a one-bar sample,
you can use the Play Offset to shift that window to different 1/16th note positions within the sample. You must retrigger
the sample to hear offset changes.
Use the Reverse button to select in which direction the sample will play. When on, the sample will play in reverse.
When off, the sample will play in the normal forward direction.
214
Use the Pad Loop button to cycle through the available Pad Loop modes.
Important: For Pad Loop to work, you must (1) set the Sample Play field (in the Global tab) to Note On instead of
One Shot and (2) set the Slice field (in the first Samples tab) to Pad instead of All or a slice number.
•
Off: The sample will not loop.
•
Forward: You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to repeat from the Loop Position
to the end of the sample. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
•
Reverse: You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to play in reverse, repeating from
the end of the sample to the Loop Position. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
•
Alternating: You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to play from the Loop Position
to the end of the sample and then play in reverse until it reaches the Loop Position again. This
will repeat as long as you are holding the pad down. Release the pad to stop the repeating
playback.
Semi lets you transpose the selected layer up to 36 semitones up or down. This is the same as the Semi knob on the
second Samples tab.
Fine provides fine-tuning of each layer by cents. This is the same as the Fine knob on the second Samples tab.
215
The second Samples tab (Tune/Mix) contains controls for its pitch, volume level, and panning.
Tap the Layer 1–4/Layer 5–8 button to toggle between visible layers.
Use the Sample field to select the sample file for that layer. Tap the trash can icon next to the sample field to remove
the file from the layer.
Semi lets you transpose the selected layer up to 36 semitones up or down. This will affect the length of the sample (if
Warp is off). This is the same as the Semi field on the first Samples tab.
Fine provides fine-tuning of each layer by cents. This will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is off). This is the
same as the Fine field on the first Samples tab.
Level lets you adjust each layer’s volume, letting you control the “balance” of the samples assigned to the pad.
Pan lets you adjust the stereo placement of the respective layer.
216
The third Samples tab (Velocity) contains the control for its offset, velocity range, and root note.
Tap the Layer 1–4/Layer 5–8 button to toggle between visible layers.
Use the Sample field to select the sample file for that layer. Tap the trash can icon next to the sample field to remove
the file from the layer.
Use the Offset slider to determine a time offset for the sample’s playback.
•
Positive values (right of center): When the pad is played, playback will start immediately but at a later point in
the sample specified by the offset value.
•
Negative values (left of center): When the pad is played, playback will be delayed by the amount specified by
the offset value.
Use the Vel Start and Vel End knobs to define the velocity range of each layer.
A range from 0 to 127 lets the layer respond to the entire velocity range which is input from the respective pad while,
for example, a range from 100 to 127 lets the layer respond only to higher velocity levels. By assigning several samples
of one instrument, you can create a realistic-sounding “multi-sample” by adjusting the velocity ranges of each layer
accordingly.
For example, you may have three samples of a piano key with low force, medium force, and high force. You can set
each sample to a layer and set the Velocity ranges so only low velocities trigger the low-force sample, only mid-range
velocities trigger the medium-force sample, and only high velocities trigger the high-force sample.
Use the Root Note menu to set the starting note of each loaded sample. Smp denotes the sample’s default pitch.
217
The fourth Samples tab (Random) contains the controls for adding randomization to sample parameters such as
pitch, level and panning.
Note: This tab is only available in Legacy mode. In Advanced mode, use the separate Randomize (Advanced) tab.
Tap the Layer 1–4/Layer 5–8 button to toggle between visible layers.
Use the Sample field to select the sample file for that layer. Tap the trash can icon next to the sample field to remove
the file from the layer.
Use the Pitch knobs to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s pitch.
Use the Level knobs to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s volume.
Use the Pan knobs to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s stereo placement.
Use the Offset knobs to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s time offset.
The All Layers section will apply randomization to all sample layers for the following envelope parameters: Attack,
Decay, Cutoff and Resonance. Use the Depth slider to control the amount of envelope randomization applied overall.
218
Filters (Advanced)
The Filters tab features two filters which can be run in either parallel or series configuration, with a blend control for
mixing between them.
Use the Filter 1/2 Type fields to select each filter for the selected keygroup. See Appendix > Glossary > Filter for an
explanation of the available filter types.
Use the Cutoff knob to set the cutoff frequency for low-pass and high-pass filter types or the center frequency for
band-pass and band-stop filter types.
Use the Resonance knob to set the resonance/emphasis of the frequencies around the cutoff point.
Tip: Use values lower than 80 to give more brilliance to the sound. At values higher than 80, the sound will result in a
strong audible boost around the cutoff frequency.
Use the Output knob to set the output level of the filter.
Use the Env knob to set the amount of effect the Filter Envelope has on the Cutoff frequency.
Use the Keytrack knob to adjust how the filter cutoff is tied to the pitch being played. At higher levels, the amount of
cutoff reduction is more noticeable as the pitch is raised.
Tap the Filt Env icon to open the Filter Envelope. This is the same Filter Envelope that can be adjusted in the Envelopes
(Advanced) section. Adjusting in either view will automatically update the other view. Tap the minimize icon to close
the expanded filter window.
Use the Blend knob to adjust the mix between the two filters.
Use the Parallel/Serial button to toggle whether the filters run side-by-side (Parallel) or one into the other (Serial).
219
Tap the Velocity
button to access the Velocity
Sensitivity control for each filter. These modulation
controls determine how much the velocity affects the cutoff
frequency of the filter envelope (Cutoff), and depth of
influence the filter envelope has on the cutoff frequency
(Depth).
220
Envelopes (Advanced)
Tap the Advanced Envelopes tab to cycle through its four available tabs. Alternatively, tap the filter headers below the
toolbar to select that tab: Amp, Filter, Pitch, and Aux.
The first Advanced Envelope tab contains the amplitude modulation envelope.
Use the Looped field to enable or disable looping of the envelope. When set to On, the envelope will restart once it
has reached its end. The length of the envelope is determined by the Tempo Sync value, or the total envelope length,
as set by the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release knobs. When set to Off, the envelope triggers on
each note-on only.
Use the Tempo Sync field to synchronize the envelope loop with the tempo. You can select one of several time
divisions (a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off,
and the loop length is determined by the total length of the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release settings.
Use the Time Scaling field to apply an additional time adjustment to the loop length. At 100%, the total loop length is
unchanged. The loop length is shorted when set to below 100%, and lengthened when set to above 100%.
Use the Global field to determine whether the envelope is applied to only the current voice (Off) or to the entire
keygroup (On).
The Amp Envelope controls affect level changes over time. Use the Delay, Attack,
Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release
fields or tap and drag the “handles” of the envelope to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust
the envelope’s influence on the filter frequency with the Env knob. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to
learn about the envelope parameters.
221
Keygroup Level controls the overall volume level of the loaded sample/samples.
Keygroup Pan controls the overall panning of the loaded sample/samples in the stereo field.
Tap the Keygroup
button to access the Velocity To controls. These modulation controls determine how
much the velocity affects the attack of the amplitude envelope (Amp Attack), the volume level of the
amplitude envelope (Amp), and/or the panning of the sound (Pan).
When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation
amount also gets stronger depending on the setting of the corresponding slider.
Tap the X to exit the Velocity To controls.
222
The second Advanced Envelope tab contains the filter modulation envelope.
Use the Looped field to enable or disable looping of the envelope. When set to On, the envelope will restart once it
has reached its end. The length of the envelope is determined by the Tempo Sync value, or the total envelope length,
as set by the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release knobs. When set to Off, the envelope triggers on
each note-on only.
Use the Tempo Sync field to synchronize the envelope loop with the tempo. You can select one of several time
divisions (a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off,
and the loop length is determined by the total length of the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release settings.
Use the Time Scaling field to apply an additional time adjustment to the loop length. At 100%, the total loop length is
unchanged. The loop length is shorted when set to below 100%, and lengthened when set to above 100%.
Use the Global field to determine whether the envelope is applied to only the current voice (Off) or to the entire
keygroup (On).
The Filter Envelope controls affect the filter frequency. Use the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release
fields or tap and drag the “handles” of the envelope to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust
the envelope’s influence on the filter frequency with the Depth knob. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section
to learn about the envelope parameters.
Use the Env knobs to determine the amount of influence the filter envelope has on the cutoff frequency. Higher settings
will increase the modulation of the filter by the envelope; lower settings will result in only subtle changes of the filter
Cutoff over time.
Tip: To give a sound a more distinctive attack, increase the Env setting and set low Atk and Decay values as well
as a medium-low Sust value of the Filter Envelope. This will start a sound with the filter opened and close it shortly
afterward, giving it a bright start followed by a darker sustain. String sounds, on the other hand, can sound much more
“alive” with low Depth settings and a high Atk value, resulting in a slight fade-in of the higher frequencies.
223
Use the Type field to select up to two filter types for the selected keygroup. These are the same filters as set in the
Filters (Advanced) tab. See Appendix > Glossary > Filter for an explanation of the available filter types.
Use the Cutoff knob to set the cutoff frequency for low-pass and high-pass filter types or the center frequency for
band-pass and band-stop filter types.
Tap the Filter
button to access the Velocity To controls. These modulation controls determine how much
the velocity affects the attack phase of the filter envelope (Attack), the cutoff frequency of the filter envelope
(Filter 1/2 Cut), and/or depth of influence the filter envelope has on the cutoff frequency (Filter 1/2 Env).
When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation
amount also gets stronger depending on the setting of the corresponding slider.
Tap the X to exit the Velocity To controls.
224
The third Advanced Envelope tab contains the pitch modulation envelope.
Use the Looped field to enable or disable looping of the envelope. When set to On, the envelope will restart once it
has reached its end. The length of the envelope is determined by the Tempo Sync value, or the total envelope length,
as set by the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release knobs. When set to Off, the envelope triggers on
each note-on only.
Use the Tempo Sync field to synchronize the envelope loop with the tempo. You can select one of several time
divisions (a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off,
and the loop length is determined by the total length of the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release settings.
Use the Time Scaling field to apply an additional time adjustment to the loop length. At 100%, the total loop length is
unchanged. The loop length is shorted when set to below 100%, and lengthened when set to above 100%.
Use the Global field to determine whether the envelope is applied to only the current voice (Off) or to the entire
keygroup (On).
The Pitch Envelope controls affect the keygroups’s pitch change over time. Use the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay,
Sustain, and Release fields or tap and drag the “handles” of the envelope to shape the envelope or time-variant
modulation output.
Adjust the envelope’s influence on the pitch with the Env Depth
knob. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section
to learn about the envelope parameters.
225
Global Semi lets you transpose the keygroup up to 36 semitones up or down. This will affect the length of the sample
(if Warp is off). This is the same as the Semi field on the Global tab.
Global Fine provides fine-tuning of each layer by cents. This will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is off). This is
the same as the Fine field on the Global tab.
Tap the Filter
button to access the Velocity To controls. This modulation control determines how much
the velocity affects the pitch envelope (Pitch).
When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation
amount also gets stronger depending on the setting of the Pitch slider.
Tap the X to exit the Velocity To controls.
226
The fourth Advanced Envelope tab contains the aux modulation envelope. This can be used as part of the Modulation
matrix to apply an envelope to other parameters.
Use the Looped field to enable or disable looping of the envelope. When set to On, the envelope will restart once it
has reached its end. The length of the envelope is determined by the Tempo Sync value, or the total envelope length,
as set by the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release knobs. When set to Off, the envelope triggers on
each note-on only.
Use the Tempo Sync field to synchronize the envelope loop with the tempo. You can select one of several time
divisions (a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off,
and the loop length is determined by the total length of the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release settings.
Use the Time Scaling field to apply an additional time adjustment to the loop length. At 100%, the total loop length is
unchanged. The loop length is shorted when set to below 100%, and lengthened when set to above 100%.
Use the Global field to determine whether the envelope is applied to only the current voice (Off) or to the entire
keygroup (On).
The Aux Envelope controls adjust the shape of the envelope, which can be used to apply envelope shaping to other
parameters in the Modulation Matrix. Use the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release
fields or tap and
drag the “handles” of the envelope to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output.
227
LFO (Advanced)
Tap the Advanced LFO tab to cycle through its four available tabs. Alternatively, tap the filter headers below the toolbar
to select that tab: LFO 1, LFO 2, Global LFO 1, and Global LFO 2.
A low-frequency oscillator (LFO) generates a periodic waveform with an adjustable frequency and shape which can be
used for modulation purposes. There are two per-voice LFOs and two global LFOs for extensive modulation options.
The first and second Advanced LFO tabs contain the per-voice LFOs.
Use the Wave field to select the LFO waveform type:
•
Sine: Best suited for smooth modulations.
•
Tri (Triangle): Best suited for smooth modulations.
•
S&H: Samples a random value and holds it until the next value is generated.
•
Saw: Can generate interesting filter or volume changes.
•
SawD (Saw Down): Can generate interesting filter or volume changes.
•
Sqr (Square): Interesting results with hard-panning modulations.
•
Noise: Generates random values and glides.
Use the Fade In field to set the length of time for the LFO to reach full level once triggered.
Use the Fade In [Sync] to synchronize the fade in with the tempo. You can select one of several time divisions (a
. indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off, and the fade
in length is determined by the Fade In knob.
Use the Reset field to determine whether the LFO retriggers on each note played (On) or not (Off).
228
Use the Delay knob to set the length of time between when the note is triggered and when the LFO is triggered.
Use the Delay [Sync] to synchronize the delay time with the tempo. You can select one of several time divisions (a
. indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off, and the delay
length is determined by the Fade In knob.
Use the Rate knob to determine the LFO frequency. At lower values, it might take some time for the LFO to complete
a cycle, while higher values will come closer to audible range.
Use the Rate [Sync] knob to set if the LFO’s rate when synchronized with the tempo. You can select one of several
time divisions (a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is
off, and the frequency is determined by the rate knob.
Use the Level knob to set the overall amount of modulation applied by the LFO. At lower values, the modulation is
more subtle, and at higher values it is more extreme.
Use the Wheel to LFO knob to adjust how much control mod wheel data (MIDI CC1) has over the LFO. When set to
0, the mod wheel has no effect on the LFO level. When set to 100, the LFO is fully controlled by the mod wheel.
Tap the Destinations
button to access the destination controls. These sliders to determine how much the LFO
affects the pitch of the sound (To Pitch), the cutoff frequency of the filter (To Filter 1/2), the volume level of the sound
(To Amp) and panning of the sound (To Pan).
229
The third and fourth Advanced LFO tabs contain the Global LFOs.
Use the Wave field to select the LFO waveform type:
•
Sine: Best suited for smooth modulations.
•
Tri (Triangle): Best suited for smooth modulations.
•
S&H: Samples a random value and holds it until the next value is generated.
•
Saw: Can generate interesting filter or volume changes.
•
SawD (Saw Down): Can generate interesting filter or volume changes.
•
Sqr (Square): Interesting results with hard-panning modulations.
•
Noise: Generates random values and glides.
Use the Rate knob to determine the LFO frequency. At lower values, it might take some time for the LFO to complete
a cycle, while higher values will come closer to audible range.
Use the Rate [Sync] knob to set if the LFO’s rate when synchronized with the tempo. You can select one of several
time divisions (a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is
off, and the frequency is determined by the rate knob.
Use the Level knob to set the overall amount of modulation applied by the LFO. At lower values, the modulation is
more subtle, and at higher values it is more extreme.
230
Utilities/Sensitivity (Advanced)
Tap the Advanced Utilities/Sensitivity tab to cycle through the two tabs.
The Utilities tab contains additional modulation parameters, as well as portamento and pitch bend controls.
Use the Ramp Time 1/2 fields to adjust the ramp length. These can be used to apply additional modulation shaping
to other parameters via the Mod Matrix.
Use the Note Counter 1/2 Size fields to set stepped modulation values. These can be used as part of the Mod Matrix
to change parameter values based on the number of voices selected (2–64).
Use the Global Drift knob to set the amount of pitch drift applied to the entire keygroup.
Use the Voice Drift knob to set the amount of pitch drift applied to the selected keygroup voice.
Use the Timbre Shift knob to adjust the amount of tonal character shaping applied to the keygroup.
Use the Portamento parameters to adjust the settings for pitch gliding.
The Time knob sets the length of the glide between notes.
Tap the Legato button to enable or disable pitch gliding for all triggered notes or just legato notes.
Tap the Mono Retrig button to allow the portamento to retrigger on every key press when using mono polyphony.
Tap the Quantize button to synchronize the portamento time with the project tempo.
Use the Pitch Bend fields to set the number of semitones shifted up or down when pitch bend is applied.
231
The Sensitivity tab contains settings for velocity sensitivity and external controller modulation.
Use the Velocity To sliders to set how much velocity is required to modulate certain other parameters:
•
Filter 1/2 Cutoff uses the velocity of a pad to modulate the cutoff frequency directly.
•
Amp Attack sets how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the Attack phase for the Amp
envelope.
•
Filter 1/2 Env Depth enables velocity information to control the amount of the filter envelope’s effect on the
cutoff frequency.
•
Filter Env Attack sets how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the Attack phase for the
Filter envelope.
•
Amp enables velocity information to control the overall amplitude (level) of the sample.
•
Pan enables velocity information to control the stereo panning of the sample.
•
Pitch enables velocity information to control the pitch of the sample.
The Controller Mod section determines the influence of additional play controllers on various sound parameters.
Important: To use these parameters, make sure that a connected MIDI device can send pitch bend messages as well
as aftertouch and modulation wheel data.
Aftertouch To Cut 1/2 determines how much a connected MIDI keyboard’s aftertouch data affects the filter cutoff.
Pressure To Filter determines how much a connected MIDI device’s channel pressure data affects the filter
envelope.
232
KG Stack (Advanced)
Tap the Advanced KG Stack tab to cycle through its three available tabs. You must first enable a Keygroup Stack
effect to show the selected controls: Unison or Harmonizer. Only one stack effect may be used at a time.
The first Advanced KG Stack tab contains the Unison controls.
Use the Voices knob to adjust the number of unison voices.
Use the Detune knob to adjust the amount of fine-tuning applied to the unison voices in cents.
Use the Stereo Spread knob to adjust the width of the unison voices in the left-right stereo field.
Use the type selector to select the type of unison voice stacking applied (Classic, Linear, Parabolic, or Random).
233
The second and third Advanced KG Stack tab contains the Harmonizer controls.
Tap the Note number to enable each harmonizer voice.
Use the Shift field to set the amount of pitch shifting applied to the voice in semitones.
Use the Detune knob to adjust the amount of detuning to the voice in cents.
Use the Volume knob to set the level of the voice.
Use the Pan knob to set the stereo panning of the voice.
Use the Vel Scale knob to adjust the ratio of the harmonized voice velocity with the incoming note velocity.
Use the Delay knob to add an additional time delay between the note start and the harmonized voice start.
Use the Sync knob to set the Delay time when synchronized with the tempo. You can select one of several time
divisions (a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off,
and the delay time is determined by the Delay knob.
Use the Mix slider to set the overall wet/dry mix between the original note and the harmonized voices.
234
Mod Matrix (Advanced)
Tap the Advanced Mod Matrix tab to cycle through its eight available tabs. Alternatively, tap the numbered headers
below the toolbar to select that tab.
The 32 available modulation points can be configured to add a wide variety of sound shaping tools.
Use the Source field to select the modulation source.
Use the first Amt (Amount) field to set how much modulation is applied by the source.
Use the Target field to select the output target for modulation.
Use the Direction field to set whether the modulation direction is bipolar or unipolar.
Use the Min and Max fields to set the minimum and maximum modulation levels of the selected target.
Use the Via Source field to add a secondary modulation shaper using another source.
Use the second Amt (Amount) field to set how much modulation is applied by the secondary source.
Use the Shaper field to apply an additional modifier that affects the modulation relationship between the source and
target.
Use the third Amt (Amount) field to set how much modulation is applied by the shaper.
235
Randomize (Advanced)
Tap the Advanced Randomize tab to cycle through its two available tabs. On these tabs you can apply randomization
to the eight keygroup layers, as well as to all layers globally. The first tab controls layer 1–4, and the second tab controls
layers 5–8.
The All Layers section will apply randomization to all sample layers for the following envelope parameters: Attack,
Decay, Cutoff 1/2, and Resonance 1/2.
Use the Pitch knobs to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s pitch.
Use the Level knobs to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s volume.
Use the Pan knobs to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s stereo placement.
Use the Offset knobs to adjust the amount of randomization applied to each sample layer’s time offset.
Use the Total Amount slider to control the depth of envelope randomization applied overall.
236
Envelopes (Legacy)
Tap Envelopes to cycle through its three available tabs.
The first Envelope tab contains the amplitude modulation envelope.
Keygroup Level controls the overall volume level of the loaded sample/samples.
Keygroup Pan controls the overall panning of the loaded sample/samples in the stereo field.
The Amp Envelope controls affect level changes over time. Use the fields or tap and drag the “handles” of the envelope
to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust the envelope’s influence on the filter frequency with the
Env knob. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about the envelope parameters.
The Velocity Modulation controls determine how much the velocity affects the volume level of the amplitude envelope
(Amp), the attack of the amplitude envelope (Amp Attack), and/or the panning of the sound (Pan).
When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation amount
also gets stronger depending on the setting of the corresponding slider.
237
The second Envelope tab contains the filter modulation envelope.
Use the Type field to select a filter for the selected pad. See Appendix > Glossary > Filter for an explanation of the
available filter types.
Use the Cutoff knob to set the cutoff frequency for low-pass and high-pass filter types or the center frequency for
band-pass and band-stop filter types.
Use the Reso knob to set the resonance/emphasis of the frequencies around the cutoff point.
Tip: Use values lower than 80 to give more brilliance to the sound. At values higher than 80, the sound will result in a
strong audible boost around the cutoff frequency.
The Filter Envelope controls affect the filter frequency. Use the fields or tap and drag the “handles” of the envelope
to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust the envelope’s influence on the filter frequency with
the Depth knob. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about the envelope parameters.
Use the Depth slider to determine the amount of influence the filter envelope has on the cutoff frequency. Higher
settings will increase the modulation of the filter by the envelope; lower settings will result in only subtle changes of
the filter Cutoff over time.
Tip: To give a sound a more distinctive attack, increase the Depth setting and set low Atk and Decay values as
well as a medium-low Sust value of the Filter Envelope. This will start a sound with the filter opened and close it
shortly afterward, giving it a bright start followed by a darker sustain. String sounds, on the other hand, can sound
much more “alive” with low Depth settings and a high Atk value, resulting in a slight fade-in of the higher frequencies.
The Velocity Modulation controls determine how much the velocity affects the cutoff frequency of the filter envelope
(Cutoff), the attack phase of the filter envelope (Attack), and/or depth of influence the filter envelope has on the cutoff
frequency (Depth).
When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation amount
also gets stronger depending on the setting of the corresponding slider.
238
The third Envelope tab contains the pitch modulation envelope.
Global Semi lets you transpose the keygroup up to 36 semitones up or down. This will affect the length of the sample
(if Warp is off). This is the same as the Semi field on the Global tab.
Global Fine provides fine-tuning of each layer by cents. This will affect the length of the sample (if Warp is off). This is
the same as the Fine field on the Global tab.
The Pitch Envelope controls affect the keygroups’s pitch change over time. Use the fields or tap and drag the
“handles” of the envelope to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust the envelope’s influence
on the pitch with the Depth slider. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about the envelope
parameters.
The Velocity Modulation control determines how much the velocity affects the pitch envelope (Pitch).
When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation amount
also gets stronger depending on the setting of the Pitch slider.
239
LFO (Legacy)
A low-frequency oscillator (LFO) generates a periodic waveform with an adjustable frequency and shape which can be
used for modulation purposes.
Use the Waveform field to select the LFO waveform type:
•
Sine: Best suited for smooth modulations.
•
Tri (Triangle): Best suited for smooth modulations.
•
S&H: Samples a random value and holds it until the next value is generated.
•
Saw: Can generate interesting filter or volume changes.
•
SawD (Saw Down): Can generate interesting filter or volume changes.
•
Sqr (Square): Interesting results with hard-panning modulations.
•
Noise: Generates random values and glides.
Use the Rate field to determine the LFO frequency. At lower values, it might take some time for the LFO to complete
a cycle, while higher values will come closer to audible range.
Use the Sync field to set if the LFO’s rate is synchronized with the tempo. You can select one of several time divisions
(a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is off.
Use the Destinations sliders to determine how much the LFO affects the pitch of the sound (Pitch), the cutoff
frequency of the filter (Filter), the volume level of the sound (Amp) and panning of the sound (Pan).
240
Mods (Legacy)
Use the Portamento fields to adjust the settings for pitch gliding.
The Time slider sets the length of the glide between notes.
Tap the Quantize button to synchronize the portamento time with the project tempo.
Tap the Legato button to enable or disable pitch gliding for all triggered notes or just legato notes.
Use the Velocity Sensitivity sliders to set how much velocity is required to modulate certain other parameters:
•
Pitch enables velocity information to control the pitch of the sample.
•
Amp Attack sets how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the Attack phase for the Amp
envelope.
•
Amp enables velocity information to control the overall amplitude (level) of the sample.
•
Pan enables velocity information to control the stereo panning of the sample.
•
KB>FLT sets how much the note value will be added to the filter cutoff. This allows samples to sound brighter
as they are played higher on the keyboard.
•
Filter Env Attack sets how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the Attack phase for the
Filter envelope.
•
Filter Env Depth enables velocity information to control the amount of the filter envelope’s effect on the cutoff
frequency.
•
Filter Cutoff uses the velocity of a pad to modulate the cutoff frequency directly.
The Controller Mod section determines the influence of additional play controllers on various sound parameters.
Important: To use these parameters, make sure that a connected MIDI device can send pitch bend messages as well
as aftertouch and modulation wheel data.
Pitch Bend sets the range (in semitones) of a connected MIDI keyboard’s pitch-bend wheel.
Wheel>LFO determines how much a connected MIDI keyboard’s modulation wheel affects the LFO intensity.
Aft>Filt (Aftertouch
Filter Cutoff) determines how much a connected MIDI keyboard’s aftertouch data affects the
filter cutoff.
Chp>Filt (Channel Pressure
Filter Cutoff) determines how much a connected MIDI keyboard’s channel pressure
data affects the filter cutoff.
241
Effects (Legacy)
Inserts
You can select up to four insert effects for each keygroup. To learn how to use insert effects, please see General
Features > Effects > Insert Effects.
Important: When using keygroup insert effects, they will be applied to that keygroup only. Keep this in mind if you
load insert effects to multiple keygroups with overlapping note ranges—the effects will overlap in that range as well.
To add an effect:
1.
Double-tap the desired Inserts slot. A list of effects will appear.
2.
Swipe up or down to move through the list.
You can tap the Type and Manufacturer buttons to sort your effects by those categories.
3.
To load an effect, double-tap it, or tap Select.
To close the list, tap Close.
Tap the Akai folder icon to load a factory FX rack. You can choose from a number of preset combinations of insert
effects by applications like Drums and Percussion, Voice, LoFi, Mastering, and more.
Tap second folder icon to load a saved FX rack.
Tap the disk icon to save an FX rack.
Tap the All On/Off button in the upper-right corner to enable or disable all four insert effects.
Tap the arrows next to the insert slot to move the selected effect up or down to rearrange an insert effect.
Tap the pencil icon to adjust the effect’s parameters. Use the controls to set the value of each parameter. These
values affect only this instance of the effect; insert effects are not global.
Tap the trash can icon to remove an effect from its slot.
Tap the On/Off button for the slot to enable or disable the effect.
242
Tap the trash can icon to remove the effect from its slot.
Tap the folder icon next to the preset name at the top of the display to open the file browser and load an effect preset.
Tap the disk icon next to the insert selector at the top of the display to save a new effect preset.
Tap the -/+ buttons to rearrange the insert effect. Adjacent effects will be moved up or down in relation.
Tap the On/Off button to enable or disable the effect.
Sends
The audio of the track will be routed to send effects (if you have any loaded) at their designated send levels. The return
channels will then send the audio to an assigned main output at the designated return levels.
Use the Send knobs to set the volume level of the signal the track will route to each send effect.
You can select up to four send effects for each keygroup, but remember that they will be applied to that keygroup
only. Keep this in mind if you load insert effects to multiple keygroups with overlapping note ranges—the effects will
overlap in that range as well.
Important: To use a send effect, you have to load an effect into the corresponding send effect slot in the mixer. See
General Features > Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more how to do this.
243
Plugin Tracks
For plugin tracks, you will see an overview of all available plugin parameters with a slider for each, or a visual
representation of the plugin interface.
Use the sliders to set the value of each parameter, or use the plugin interface.
Use the tabs at the bottom of the screen to access the available parameters.
To load a plugin preset, tap the folder icon next to the preset name at the top of the display to open the file browser.
To save a new plugin preset, tap the disk icon next to the insert selector at the top of the display.
244
MIDI Tracks
For MIDI tracks, you will see an overview of all available MIDI CCs with a slider for each.
Use the sliders to set the value of each parameter.
Use the six tabs at the bottom of the screen to access the available parameters.
Tap the Edit button in the top-right of the page to edit the MIDI track assignments and naming.
To assign a parameter, tap the dropdown menu and use the data dial or +/- buttons to scroll through the available
MIDI assignments. You can also double-tap the menu to view a list of assignments.
To rename a parameter, tap the pencil icon next to the dropdown menu, and then use the keyboard that appears to
enter a new name. Once renamed, you can save the track and use it with other projects to retain your custom naming.
245
CV Tracks
For CV tracks, you will see an overview of all available CV outputs with a slider for each.
Use the sliders to set the value of each parameter.
246
Anatomy of an Envelope
An envelope creates a variable control signal. It can be used, for instance, to modulate the filter settings of a sound
over a given period of time.
For drum tracks, use the AD/AHDS selector to select an AD or AHDS envelope. When Sample Play is set to Note-
On, it will use an ADSR envelope.
Keygroup tracks always use AHDS envelopes. When Sample Play is set to Note-On, it will use an ADSR envelope.
With AHDS envelopes, the following happens when you trigger a
sample:
1.
Within the period of time you have defined with the attack (Atk), the
sample volume rises to its maximum value.
2.
The sample’s maximum volume will be maintained during the Hold
phase.
3.
During the Decay phase, the sample’s volume will gradually drop
to the sustain level.
4.
The sample’s volume will stay at the sustain level (Sust) until the
pad is released.
Use the A Shape and D Shape fields to adjust the curve of the Attack
and Decay phases, respectively.
With AD envelopes, the following happens when you trigger a sample:
1.
Within the period of time you have defined with the attack (Atk), the
sample volume rises to its maximum value.
2.
The sample’s maximum volume will be maintained until its Decay
phase, when the sample’s volume will gradually drop to zero over
the set duration. Tap the Type drop-down menu to select how the
decay functions:
•
Decay From Start: The volume will start decreasing
immediately after reaching its maximum level.
•
Decay From End: The maximum volume will be maintained
for a hold phase until it reaches the decay phase.
Use the A Shape and D Shape fields to adjust the curve of the Attack
and Decay phases, respectively.
With ADSR envelopes, the following happens when you trigger a
sample:
1.
Within the period of time defined by Attack, the sample volume
rises to its maximum value.
2.
During the Decay phase, the sample’s volume will gradually drop
to the Sustain level.
3.
The sample’s volume will stay at the Sustain level until the note is
released.
4.
The sample’s volume will drop to “zero” over the duration set by
Release.
Use the A Shape, D Shape and R Shape fields to adjust the curve of
the Attack, Decay and Release phases, respectively.
247
Track Mute Mode
Track Mute Mode lets you easily mute tracks within a sequence or set track groups, enabling you to mute
multiple tracks at once.
To enter Track Mute Mode, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then tap Track Mute.
•
Press Track Mute (MPC X, MPC One, MPC Key 37), or press Mute (MPC Key 61).
There are two tabs you can view in this mode: Track Mute or Track Group. Tap each button in the lower-left corner
to select it.
Use the Sequence field at the top of the screen to select a sequence.
The Event/Audio toggle allows you to separately mute track events or mute audio on tracks that contain both MIDI
and audio paths, including Drum, Plugin, and Keygroup tracks. MIDI and CV tracks will apply Event Mute regardless
of the selection, and Audio tracks will apply Audio Mute regardless of the selection.
The Time Counter in the upper-right corner the current playhead position.
The automation button indicates the global Automation state.
Timing Correct (TC) lets you quantize track mutes. This is useful when you want your mutes to line up with a specific
time division. For example, with Time Division set to 1 Bar, your mutes will always align with the beginning of the
measure immediately after you press the pad.
Tap Time Division at the bottom of the screen, and select a value from 1/16 to 2 Bars (T indicates a triplet-based
time division).
Tap TC at the bottom of the screen to enable or disable the Time Correct feature.
Tap Pads: Mute/Solo to cycle between track muting and soloing.
When using Track Soloing, tap the Clear Solos button to unsolo tracks that have been soloed.
248
Tap the gear icon to open the Track Mute Settings window.
Check the Track Mute State Per Sequence box to maintain separate track mute statuses when changing
sequences. This can allow you to create unique mute setups for each sequence, providing greater flexibility in live
performance and arrangement creation.
Check the Track Mute Events Write Automation box to capture track muting and soloing when recording
automation. Make sure the global automation button is set to W (write) before recording to capture track
automation.
Check the Track Mute and Solo Events are Undoable to allow track mute and solo status to be undone and
appear in the Undo History.
Check the Use Track Colors box to apply each track’s color to the respective pads on the Track Mute page and
on your hardware.
Use the Solo Behavior function to select whether only a Single track can be soloed at a time, or multiple tracks
can be soloed together (Multi).
249
Track Mute
This is useful if you want to hear a sequence without a particular track (e.g., muting your keyboard track to focus on
the bass) or if you want to isolate specific sounds or combinations of sounds that are separated by track.
Tip: This function is similar to, but more convenient than, muting tracks one at a time in the Track View.
To mute tracks in this mode:
1.
If the Track Mute tab in the lower-left corner is not already selected, tap it.
2.
Select the desired pad bank. Use the Pad Bank buttons or tap a pad bank shown on the left side of the screen.
3.
Select Event mute or Audio mute using the toggle in the toolbar.
4.
To mute or unmute a track, press the corresponding pad or tap it on the screen.
Pads for muted tracks are lit orange. Pads for unmuted tracks are lit according to the track color (or yellow if the
Use Track Colors option is disabled in the Settings).
Event mutes are indicated by a MIDI plug icon, and can be applied to Drum, Plugin, Keygroup, MIDI, and CV
tracks. Event mutes will silence new MIDI events but allow any currently playing events to ring out naturally.
Audio mutes are indicated by a waveform icon, and can be applied to Drum, Plugin, Keygroup, and Audio tracks.
Pads for unused tracks do not show any information.
To assign tracks to track groups within this tab, turn each of the Q-Link knobs (when the Screen Control Q-Link
button is selected) to assign each of the pads to a track group. The number of each pad’s track group is shown in its
upper-right corner.
250
Track Group
The track group feature extends the concept of track mutes: you can mute or unmute multiple tracks (in a single
sequence) by pressing one pad that you have assigned to a track group. This is useful if you want to hear a track
without a particular group of sounds or if you want to isolate specific sounds in various combinations. You can create
up to 16 different track groups.
To assign tracks to track groups:
1.
If the Track Group tab in the lower-left corner is not already selected, tap it.
2.
Select the desired pad bank by using the Pad Bank buttons.
3.
To select a track to add to a mute group, press the corresponding pad or tap it on the screen. The pad for the
selected track is lit green. If there are other pads for tracks in the same mute group, they will flash yellow.
4.
To add the track to a mute group, tap the number of the desired mute group.
To remove the track from the mute group, tap Off.
Alternatively, turn each of the Q-Link knobs (when the Screen Control Q-Link button is selected) to assign each of
the pads to a track group. The number of each pad’s track group is shown in its upper-right corner.
251
Pad Mute Mode
Pad Mute Mode lets you easily mute and solo pads within a track or set mute groups for each pad within
a track.
To enter Pad Mute Mode, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then tap Pad Mute.
•
Press Shift and Track Mute/Pad Mute (MPC X, MPC One, MPC Key 37), or Shift and Mute/Pad
(MPC Key 61).
There are two tabs you can view in this mode: Pad Mute or Pad Group. Tap each button in the lower-left corner to
select it. See the following Pad Mute and Pad Group sections to learn about each.
Use the Track field at the top of the screen to select a track. Pad Mute Mode is only compatible with Drum Tracks.
The Time Counter in the upper-right corner the current playhead position.
The automation button indicates the global Automation state.
Timing Correct (TC) lets you quantize pad mutes. This is useful when you want your mutes to line up with a specific
time division. For example, with Time Division set to 1 Bar, your mutes will always align with the beginning of the measure
immediately after you press the pad.
Tap Time Division at the bottom of the screen, and select a value from 1/16 to 2 Bars (T indicates a triplet-based
time division).
Tap TC at the bottom of the screen to enable or disable the Time Correct feature.
Tap Pads: Mute/Solo to cycle between pad muting and soloing.
When using Track Soloing, tap the Clear Solos button to unsolo pads that have been soloed.
252
Tap the gear icon to open the Pad Mute Settings window.
Check the pad Mute and Solo Events Write Automation box to capture pad muting and soloing when recording
automation. Make sure the global automation button is set to W (write) before recording to capture pad
automation.
Check the Pad Mute and Solo Events are Undoable to allow pad mute and solo status to be undone and appear
in the Undo History.
Check the Use Pad Colors box to apply each pad’s color to the respective pads on the Pad Mute page and on
your hardware.
253
Pad Mute
You can mute or unmute individual sounds (on a single track) in real time by pressing the pads. This is useful if you
want to hear a track without a particular sound or if you want to isolate specific sounds or combinations of sounds.
Tip: This function is similar to muting pads one at a time in the grid—but more convenient.
To mute pads in this mode:
1.
If the Pad Mute tab in the lower-left corner is not already selected, tap it.
2.
Select the desired pad bank. Use the Pad Bank Buttons or tap a pad bank shown on the left side of the screen.
3.
To mute or unmute a pad’s sound, press it or tap it on the screen. Muted pads are lit orange. Unmuted pads
tracks are lit according to the pad color (or yellow if the Use Pad Colors option is disabled in the Settings).
Unused pads do not show any sample names.
To assign pads to pad groups within this tab, turn each of the Q-Link knobs (when the Screen Control Q-Link
button is selected) to assign each of the pads to a pad group. The number of each pad’s group is shown in its upper-
right corner.
254
Pad Group
The pad group feature extends the concept of pad mutes: you can mute or unmute multiple pads (on a single track)
by pressing one pad that you have assigned to a mute group. This is useful if you want to hear a track without a
particular group of sounds or if you want to isolate specific sounds in various combinations. You can create up to 16
different pad groups.
To use pad groups:
1.
If the Pad Group tab in the lower-left corner is not already selected, tap it.
2.
Use the Pad Bank buttons to select the desired pad bank.
3.
To select a pad to add to a mute group, press it or tap it on the screen. The selected pad is lit green. If there are
other pads in the same mute group, they will flash yellow.
4.
To add the pad to the mute group, tap the number of the desired mute group on the left side of the screen. To
remove it from the mute group, tap Off.
Alternatively, turn each of the Q-Link knobs (when the Screen Control Q-Link button is selected) to assign each of
the pads to a pad group. The number of each pad’s group is shown in its upper-right corner.
255
Track View
Track View gives you an overview of the tracks of each sequence. Use this mode to edit tracks and
sequences simultaneously.
To enter the Track View, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then tap Track View.
•
Press Shift and Main/Track (MPC X, MPC Live, MPC Key 61, MPC Key 37).
Each horizontal strip represents a track in the current sequence.
To move through the list of tracks, swipe up or down. You can also use the Track field at the top of the screen.
The top of the screen shows the track name and timing information.
Use the Track field to select the track in focus.
The Time Counter at the top of the screen indicates the current playhead position.
256
The bottom of the Track View screen contains the following functions:
Tap the New Track button to add a new track.
Tap the Rec Arm button to arm the sequence for recording.
Tap the Track – or Track + buttons to select the previous or next track (respectively). Alternatively, tap the track
in the main part of the screen.
Tap Mute to mute the current track.
Tap Solo to solo the current track, muting all other tracks.
Press and hold Shift to access the following additional functions:
Tap Duplicate Track to immediately create an identical track on a new track.
Tap TC to open the Timing Correct (TC) settings.
Tap Click to open the Metronome (Click/Metro) settings.
Tap Track Settings to open the Track Settings window for the current track.
Use the Input field to set the track’s MIDI or Audio input/inputs. For MIDI Inputs, you can also select the channel that
the track will use.
Use the Output field to set the track’s MIDI or Audio output/outputs. For MIDI Inputs, you can also select the channel
that the track will use.
Use the Key Range fields to set the incoming range of notes that will be sent to the track (not available for Audio
tracks). You can tap the low and high key fields and then use the data dial or +/- buttons, or tap the Learn button and
use a connect MIDI device to set the key range. The set range will be shown in the keys diagram.
Use the Arm button to record-enable the track. When you begin recording, the MIDI input will be recorded to this track.
You can select multiple tracks by pressing and holding Shift while tapping the Arm button to each track.
Use the Monitor button to set how your track will be monitored. Tapping it will cycle through its four states:
When set to Off, the track's input is not monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
When set to
In, the track's input is always monitored regardless of the track's Record Arm state, and playback
from recorded events will not be heard.
When set to Auto, the track’s input is monitored when the track is record armed, and playback of recorded events
will be heard.
When set to Merge, the track's input is always monitored, and playback of recorded events will be heard.
Use the level slider to change the level of the track. The level meter above the slider shows the track’s current level.
257
Use the pan knob to change the stereo panning of the track (not available for CV tracks).
Use the Solo and Mute buttons to solo or mute the track (respectively).
Alternatively, tap Mute or Solo (respectively) at the bottom of the screen to mute the currently selected track.
Tap the MIDI Filter button to open the Track MIDI Perform Settings window, where you can set parameters for
incoming MIDI data.
•
Note Range: This determines the Note Min and Note Max range that passes MIDI. Notes outside this range will
not be heard in the track. You can also adjust this directly from Track View by using the Keyrange fields. Tap
Learn and press the desired note for the Min and Max values.
•
Velocity Range: This determines the Velocity Min and Velocity Max that passes MIDI. Velocities outside this
range will not be heard in the track.
•
MIDI CC Filter: Check these boxes to allow the listed MIDI Control Change messages to pass through the track.
When unchecked, the MIDI CC message type will be ignored by the track. You can filter the following MIDI CC
messages:
CC1 Modulation
CC2 Breath
CC3 Undefined
CC4 Foot
CC5 Portamento
CC7 Volume
CC10 Pan
CC11 Expression
CC64 Sustain On/Off
CC65 Pmento (Portamento) On/Off
CC66 Sost (Sostenuto) On/Off
CC67 Soft Ped (Soft Pedal) On/Off
CC68 Legato Switch
CC128 Pitchbend
CC130 Program Change
CC129 Channel Pressure
CC131 Aftertouch
258
Sample Edit Mode
Sample Edit Mode lets you edit samples using various functions.
To enter Sample Edit Mode, do any of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then tap Sample Edit.
•
Press Sample Edit (MPC X, MPC One, MPC Key 61, MPC Key 37) or Shift and Mute/Sample Edit
(MPC Live II).
To select a sample to edit, use the Sample field at the top of the screen.
To edit the name of the sample, tap the keyboard icon next to the name at the top of the screen, and use the virtual
keyboard that appears.
To delete the sample, tap the trash-can icon next to the name at the top of the screen. In the screen that appears,
you will see the tracks that use this sample within your project. Tap Delete Sample to continue, or tap Cancel to return
to the previous screen.
Tap the Stems icon to open the Create Stems Function in the Process Sample window. Learn more
about this in Processing Slices & Samples.
Note: To purchase MPC Stems, visit akaipro.com/stems, and then activate your purchase in the Menu >
Preferences > Activate Plugins menu.
259
The upper half of the screen shows the waveform. The lower half shows the editing controls.
The waveform display shows the “active” section of the sample waveform. Swipe left or right on the waveform to move
through it.
Above the waveform is the timeline, shown in Samples, Time (in seconds and milliseconds), or Beats. You can select
the measurement units you want to show in the Settings.
To zoom in or out, do any of the following:
•
When the magnifying-glass icon (in the upper-right corner) is selected, spread or pinch your fingers
(respectively) on the waveform.
•
Tap the Zoom + or Zoom – buttons (respectively) at the bottom of the screen.
•
Turn Q-Link Knob 4 (Zoom on MPC X) or the fourth Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Live/Live II/One/
Key 61/Key 37).
To scroll through the waveform, do either of the following:
•
When the magnifying-glass icon (in the upper-right corner) is selected, swipe the waveform left or right.
•
Turn Q-Link Knob 8 (Scroll on MPC X) or the third Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Live/Live II/One/ Key
61/Key 37).
The green marker and red marker are the start point and end point (respectively). These two points define the region
of the sample that will be played.
To move the start point or end point of the selected region, do any of the following:
•
Tap and drag its marker left or right.
•
Use the Start or End fields shown below the waveform.
•
Use the first column of Q-Link knobs (Start X1__) to adjust the start point or the second column of Q-Link
knobs (End X1__) to adjust the end point. The top-most Q-Link knobs (13 and 14) provide coarse adjustment.
The bottom-most Q-Link knobs (1 and 2) provide fine adjustment.
Tip: A recorded sample may have some silence at the beginning or end, which makes it difficult to time it correctly in
a musical context. Fix this by adjusting the start point. You can also adjust end point to remove any extra silence or
unwanted audio at the end. In addition to making your workflow easier, having a “tight,” well-edited sample can
enhance your production or performance.
You can use Sample Edit Mode in three different ways: Trim Mode, Chop Mode, or Pad Mode. The options for each
mode are slightly different. Please refer to the following Trim Mode, Chop Mode, and Pad Mode parts of this chapter
to learn how each works. Before using these modes, though, you may want to configure your settings—see the
following Settings chapter to do this.
260
Settings
Tap the gear icon to open the Settings window, where you can configure certain Sample Edit Mode settings.
Use the Cue Play Mode selector to set how the cue playhead will play audio.
One Shot: Tapping Play Cue will play the entire sample from the cue playhead.
Toggle: Tapping Play Cue once will start playback from cue playhead. Tapping it once more will stop playback.
Use the Cue Preview selector to set if any audio plays as you move the cue playhead. As you move the cue playhead
through the sample waveform, you can set it to play the small part of the sample before the cue playhead (Before),
play the small part of the sample after the cue playhead (After), or not play at all (Off). You can also set this in your
overall Preferences (see General Features > Menu > Preferences > General).
Use the Slice Preview selector to set if any audio plays as you move a slice marker. As you move the slice marker
through the sample waveform, you can set it to play the small part of the sample before the slice marker (Before), play
the small part of the sample after the slice marker (After), or not play at all (Off). You can also set this in your overall
Preferences (see General Features > Menu > Preferences > General).
Use the Auto-Scroll selector to set how the screen behaves relative to the audio playhead.
Follow: Depending on the zoom setting, the waveform will scroll along in the background, keeping the audio
playhead centered.
Page: The waveform display will move to the “next page” to follow the audio playhead.
Off: The waveform display will not move at all.
These functions also apply to the sample waveform in the Grid View.
Use the Timeline Units selector to set the measurement units shown above the sample waveform. You can select one
of the following options:
Time: hours:minutes:seconds:frames
Samples: number of samples
Beats: bars:beats:ticks
261
Trim Mode
We recommend using Trim Mode to crop the start and/or ends from a sample.
To enter Trim Mode, tap the Trim/Chop button in the lower-left corner so it says Trim. There are two pages of
parameters in Trim Mode, which can be accessed by tapping the > or < arrows on the sides of the page.
Use the Start and End fields to set the position of the start point and end point of the sample (respectively).
Alternatively, tap and drag the start (S) or end (E) marker left or right, or use the first column of Q-Link knobs (Start
X1__) to adjust the start point or the second column of Q-Link knobs (End X1__) to adjust the end point.
Trim Mode includes a loop function. When on, the region of the sample between the loop point and end point will
repeat. This is useful when trying to find an ideal spot to begin the sample. The loop cannot be earlier than the start
point.
To adjust the loop point, do any of the following:
•
Use the Loop field.
•
Tap and drag the start (S) marker (if Loop Lock is on) or the loop marker (if Loop Lock is off).
•
Use the first column of Q-Link knobs (Start X1__; if Loop Lock is on) or the third column of Q-Link knobs
(Loop X1__; if Loop Lock is off). The top-most Q-Link knobs (13 and 15) provide coarse adjustment. The
bottom-most Q-Link knobs (1 and 3) provide fine adjustment.
Tap the Loop Lock button to turn Loop Lock on or off. When on, the loop point is the same as the start point. When
off, the loop point is independent from the start point and indicated by a separate loop marker.
Tap the Loop button to turn the loop function on or off and cycle between the four modes:
Off: The sample will not loop.
Forward: When the loop reaches its end point, it will start playing again from the loop point.
Reverse: When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in reverse. When it reaches the loop point again, it will
return to the end point and continue playing in reverse.
Alternating: When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in reverse. When it reaches the loop point again, it
will start playing forward again from the loop point.
To switch between Forward and off, press and hold Shift, and then tap Loop at the bottom of the screen.
Use the X-Fade field to apply real-time crossfade looping to sample playback. To apply a crossfade, make sure the
Loop starting point is greater than zero. Then, you can set the Length of the crossfade and the Type, either Equal
Power or Linear.
262
Use your MPC hardware pads to play certain parts of the selected sample:
Play Loop
Play to Loop
Start
Play from
Loop Start
Play Loop
Continuous
13 14 15 16
Play All
Play Sample
(One Shot)
Play Sample
(Note On)
No function
09 10 11 12
Play from
Start
(Note On)
Play to
Start
(Note On)
Play to
End
(Note On)
Play from
End
(Note On)
05 06 07 08
Play from
Start
(One Shot)
Play to
Start
(One Shot)
Play to
End
(One Shot)
Play from
End
(One Shot)
01 02 03 04
Play Sample (One Shot) (Pad 10) plays the sample once from the start point to the end point. Press the pad once
to play it.
Play Sample (Note On) (Pad 11) plays the sample once from the start point to the end point. Press and hold the
pad to play it, and release the pad to stop playing it. Alternatively, select the headphones icon in the upper-right
corner, and then tap and hold your finger on the waveform.
Play Loop Continuous (Pad 16) plays the sample repeatedly using the mode set by the Loop button (Forward,
Reverse, or Alternating; if the Loop button is off, the sample will loop forward repeatedly).
Play Loop (Pad 13) plays the sample repeatedly using the mode set by the Loop button (Forward, Reverse, or
Alternating; if the Loop button is off, the sample will loop forward repeatedly). Press and hold the pad to play it,
and release the pad to stop playing it.
Play to Loop Start (Pad 14) plays the part of the sample just before the loop point. Press and hold the pad to play
it, and release the pad to stop playing it.
Play from Loop Start (Pad 15) plays the sample from the loop point to the end of the sample regardless of the
end point. Press and hold the pad to play it, and release the pad to stop playing it.
Play All (Pad 9) plays the entire sample.
Pads 1–4 have the same respective functions as Pads 5–8, but Pads 1–4 play the sample part as “One Shots”
(pressing the pad once will play the entire part) while Pads 5–8 play the sample part as “Note Ons” (pressing the pad
and holding it will play the part; releasing it will stop playback):
Play from Start (Pad 1, Pad 5) plays the sample from the start point to the end point.
Play to Start (Pad 2, Pad 6
) plays the part of the sample just before the start point to the start point.
Play to End (Pad 3, Pad 7) plays the part of the sample just before the end point to the end point.
Play from End (Pad 4, Pad 8) plays the part of the sample from the end point to the end of the sample.
263
To select a slice to edit, do either of the following (after you have created slices in Chop Mode):
•
Use the Slice field.
•
Turn Q-Link Knob 16 (Select Slice on MPC X) or the fourth Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Live/
Live II/One/Key 61/Key 37).
When Link Slices is enabled (after you have created slices in Chop Mode), changing the start point of a slice will also
change the end point of the previous slice. Similarly, changing the end point of a slice will also change the start point
of the next slice. Disable Link Slices if you are trying to create slices that use non-contiguous parts of the sample.
To enable or disable this feature, tap the Link Slices button.
Important: Link Slices must be disabled to make slices non-sequential, noncontiguous, or overlapping.
Use either of the Tune fields to transpose the sample up or down from its original pitch.
Use either of the Root Note fields to set the root note of the sample. This defines which note will play the sample at
its original pitch when in a keygroup track.
Use either of the BPM fields to manually set the BPM of the sample. On the second Trim Mode page, use the X2 and
/2 buttons to double of halve the current tempo.
Use the Key fields to enter a sample key manually. One field selects the key root note, and the other field selects
whether the key is Major, Minor, or off (--).
Tap Detect Key to detect the key automatically.
0 Snap forces start points, end points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can help
to avoid clicks and glitches when playing a sample.
To enable or disable 0 Snap, press and hold Shift, and then tap 0 Snap at the bottom of the screen.
Tip: You can use Trim Mode for a specific slice of the sample, previously created and selected in Chop Mode. This
allows for a more detailed view of a single slice than in Chop Mode and gives you more options for auditioning the
slice. You can easily switch between Trim Mode and Chop Mode while doing this.
To use both Trim Mode and Chop Mode to edit a sample slice:
1.
Tap Trim/Chop at the bottom of the screen so it says Chop.
2.
Set all fields as desired to create your sample slices.
3.
Select the desired slice using the Slice field.
4.
Tap Trim/Chop at the bottom of the screen so it says Trim. The region you are now editing is indicated by the normal
start point and end point markers rather than slice markers.
5.
Tap Trim/Chop at any time to return to Chop Mode.
264
Tap From BPM to open the Edit Tuning window, which
lets you tune a sample to the project.
Use the Beats field to match the number of beats in the
sample.
Tap Match to tune the sample to the project. The Tune
field will adjust automatically and close the window.
The sample is now tuned to the project.
Tap To Project to tune the sample to the project and
adjust the project tempo. This is the same as tapping
Match, but it also changes the project's tempo to the
BPM shown in the Tempo field on the right.
Tap Close to close the window.
Use the BPM field to enter a tempo manually.
Tap Detect to detect the tempo automatically. In the Edit
BPM window that appears, you can do any of the following:
•
Use the BPM field to enter a tempo manually.
•
Tap Detect to detect the tempo automatically.
•
Tap Tap Tempo at the bottom of the screen at the
desired rate to use it as the tempo.
•
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window
to close it.
265
Assigning Samples
You can assign your new sample directly to a pad from Trim Mode.
To assign a sample, tap Assign at the bottom of the screen to open the Assign Sample window.
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the sample on the first layer of the pad.
Tap Do It to assign the sample using the selected process.
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window to cancel the operation.
If you set the Assign To field to Assign slice to a pad, the pad will
simply refer to the slice in this sample instead of creating a new
sample. This is useful for reducing clutter in your project.
Use the Pad field to select the desired pad. Alternatively, press the
desired pad.
Use the Slice Type field to select how the pad’s layer settings
will be set when the slice is assigned to it (see Track Edit Mode
to learn more about the parameters mentioned below):
•
Non-Destructive Slice: The pad’s Slice setting will be
set to the slice number.
•
Pad Parameters: The pad’s Slice setting will be set to
Pad. The Pad Start and Pad End will be set to the
slice’s start point and end point values, and the Loop
Position will be set to the slice’s start point but with Pad
Loop deactivated.
Use the Track field to specify the track to which you want to
add the slice.
If you set the Assign To field to New Sample to Pad, this will create
a new sample in your project. (The original sample will remain as it
is.)
Use the Pad field to select the desired pad. Alternatively, press the
desired pad.
Check the Crop Sample box to delete the unused parts from
the sample when it’s created and assigned. This feature is
destructive, though the project will still contain your original
sample.
Leave this box unchecked to keep the unused parts of the sample
when it is created and assigned. This way, you will still be able to
edit the entire sample further even though you are using only part
of it at the moment.
Use the Track field to specify the track to which you want to
add the slice.
266
Processing Slices & Samples
Tap the Process button to open the Process window, where you can select an editing option for the sample.
Use the Function field to select an editing process. Double-tap it or tap Function at the bottom of the screen to open
the Function window, which displays an overview of all available editing processes.
You can use any of these functions as described below.
Tap Cancel to return to Sample Edit Mode.
Tap the top of the screen to return to the Process window.
Note: All Slice processes will affect only the part of the sample between the start point and the end point. The Sample
processes (Bit Reduce and Stereo -> Mono) will affect the entire sample regardless of its start point or end point.
The Discard process deletes the regions before the start point and
after the end point.
The Delete process deletes the region between the start point and
end point and closes the gap between them.
267
The Silence process replaces the region between the start point and
end point with silence.
The Extract process deletes the regions before the start point and
after the end point and saves it as a new sample in your current
project.
Use the Edit Name field (and the virtual keyboard that appears)
to name the new sample.
Tip: This is useful if you recorded a drum loop and wanted to remove
just a snare drum hit, a kick drum hit, etc. to use separately in the
project.
The Normalize process increases a sample’s level to the highest
level possible without distortion. This is essentially a kind of digital
gain optimization, so you do not have to worry about excessive level
settings when working with samples with a wide range of
amplitudes.
The Reverse process reverses the region between the start point
and end point.
268
The Fade In process sets a fade-in between the start point and end
point. The following types are available:
•
Linear fades the audio in with a linear curve—a straight line
between the start and end.
•
Square Root fades the audio in with a square root curve—
a half-parabola that is similar to the logarithmic curve but
steeper.
•
Square fades the audio in with a curve opposite to the
square root curve. This is similar to the exponential curve
but steeper.
•
Log fades the audio in with a logarithmic curve—quickly
rising at the start and flattening out towards the end.
•
Exp fades the audio in with an exponential curve—slowly
rising in the beginning and growing steeper towards the
end.
•
Sine fades the audio in with a sine curve—like a sine wave,
it slowly rises, gets steeper in the middle, and flattens out at
the end.
Linear Square Root Square Log Exp Sine
The Fade Out process sets a fade-out between the start point and
end point. These are the same as the Fade In curves, but fade the
audio out instead of in.
Linear Square Root Square Log Exp Sine
269
The Pitch Shift process changes the pitch of the sample without
changing its length. This lets you set the sample’s pitch to your
project without affecting the sample’s tempo or duration. You can
adjust it up to 12 semitones, up or down. Keep in mind that the audio
quality may decrease at more extreme settings.
The Time Stretch process lengthens or shortens the sample without
changing its pitch. This is useful for matching the durations of two
samples with different pitches. You can enter the original tempo of
the sample and the desired tempo after processing.
Use the Beat field to set the desired value number of beats.
Use the New Tempo field to set the new tempo. The Ratio field
will then automatically show the time stretch factor.
Alternatively, to adjust the ratio instead, use the Ratio field to
set the desired ratio. The New Tempo field will then change
automatically based on the new time stretch factor.
The Gain Change process raises or lowers the volume of the
sample. You can adjust it up to 18 dB, higher or lower. This function
is different than Normalize because it will allow volumes beyond
clipping level. This may be a desired effect, but remember to watch
your output level!
The Copy process saves a copy of the sample.
Use the Edit Name field (and the virtual keyboard that appears)
to name the new sample. Otherwise, the process will add a
consecutive number after the sample name.
270
The Bit Reduce process lowers the bit resolution of a sample,
effectively reducing its degree of faithful reproduction. You can
reduce it down to 1 bit. (The sound is similar to the Resampler effect,
but Bit Reduce will permanently alter the sample.)
Tip: Use this on drum loops to get a dirty, “old-school” sizzle but
with a digital “edge.”
Note: This process affects the entire sample regardless of its start
point or end point.
The Stereo -> Mono process converts a stereo sample to a new
mono sample and saves it as a new sample.
Use the Edit Name field (and the virtual keyboard that appears)
to name the new sample. Otherwise, the process will add a
consecutive number after the sample name.
The following options are available:
•
Left will convert the left channel only.
•
Right will convert the right channel only.
•
Sum will combine the left and right audio channels to a
single mono channel.
Note: This process affects the entire sample regardless of its start
point or end point.
The Stems process isolates different parts of the sample and
separates them into new stem samples.
Click the icons to select or deselect from the following elements
to create stems of:
•
Vocals: Isolate vocal elements of the track into a stem.
•
Bass: Isolate bass elements of the track into a stem.
•
Drums: Isolate percussive elements of the track into a stem.
•
Other: Isolate other musical textures, such as keys or
guitars, into a stem.
Use the Track dropdown menu to select the track where the
stems will be added.
The Assign to Pad function determines where the stem
separated samples are added. When checked, you can select a
pad in the chosen Track using the dropdown menu, and the
stems will be added to the first four layers of that pad. When
unchecked, the stems will be added to the general project
sample pool in the Project Info Browser.
Tap the Use trimmed sample box to trim the source sample
between the Start and End points before applying the stem
separation process.
Tip: Uncheck this box if you want to retain slices with the
stemmed results, otherwise, they will be bypassed.
Note: To purchase MPC Stems, visit akaipro.com/stems, and
then activate your purchase in the Menu > Preferences >
Activate Plugins menu.
271
Chop Mode
Whereas Trim Mode crops only the start and/or end off of a sample, Chop Mode divides the sample into multiple
regions called slices. We recommend using Chop Mode when working with a long sample with different sounds
throughout (e.g., a drum loop or a long melodic or harmonic passage).
To enter Chop Mode, tap the Trim/Chop button in the lower-left corner so it says Chop.
Use the Start and End fields to set the position of the start point and end point (respectively) of the currently selected
slice. Alternatively, tap and drag the start (S) or end (E) marker left or right, or use the first column of Q-Link knobs
(Start X1__) to adjust the start point or the second column of Q-Link knobs (End X1__) to adjust the end point.
Use the selector in the lower-left corner of the screen to choose how you want to use Chop Mode:
Manual
This method lets you insert slices at locations you select.
Threshold
This method uses an adjustable detection algorithm that derives the number of slices created from the volume
levels present in the sample.
Use the Threshold field to set the threshold level. Alternatively, turn Q-Link Knob 11 (Threshold on MPC X)
or the second Q-Link knob in the third column (MPC Live/Live II/One/Key 61/Key 37). The higher the selected
value, the more slices will be created.
Use the Min Time field to set the minimum length of a slice in milliseconds.
Regions
This method divides a sample into several slices of equal length.
Use the Regions field to set how many regions the sample will be divided into. Alternatively, turn Q-Link Knob
11 (Num Regions on MPC X) or the second Q-Link knob in the third column (MPC Live/Live II/One/Key
61/Key 37/Touch). The higher the selected value, the more slices will be created.
BPM
This method divides a sample into several slices based on the tempo (beats per minute).
Use the Bars field to set how many bars are in the sample. Alternatively, turn Q-Link Knob 11 (Bars on MPC X)
or the second Q-Link knob in the third column (MPC Live/Live II/One/Key 61/Key 37).
Use the Beats field to set how many beats are in each bar. Alternatively, turn Q-Link Knob 7 (Beats on MPC X)
or the third Q-Link knob in the third column (MPC Live/Live II/One/Key 61/Key 37).
Use the Time Div field to set a note division. Alternatively, turn Q-Link Knob 3 (Time Div on MPC X) or the
fourth Q-Link knob in the third column (MPC Live/Live II/One/Key 61/Key 37). The slice markers will be placed
according to this setting. You can select 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or 1/32. (In most cases, you should set this parameter
to 1/16.)
272
To play a slice, do either of the following:
•
Press the pad that corresponds to the slice. If your sample has more than 16 slices, use the additional pad banks.
•
When the headphones icon (in the upper-right corner) is selected, tap a slice in the waveform.
When the One Shot feature is enabled, you can press a pad once to play the entire slice. When this is disabled,
pressing the pad and holding it will play the slice; releasing it will stop playback.
To enable or disable One Shot, press and hold Shift, and then tap One Shot.
To select a slice to edit, do any of the following:
•
Use the Slice field.
•
Turn Q-Link Knob 16 (Select Slice on MPC X) or the first Q-Link knob in the fourth column (MPC Live/Live
II/One/Key 61/Key 37).
•
When the headphones icon (in the upper-right corner) is selected, tap a slice in the waveform.
To add a slice at the current playhead position, tap Slice+ at the bottom of the screen. You can do this at any point
during sample playback.
To insert a slice marker during sample playback, press an unlit pad (usually Pad 1) to start playback of the sample,
and then press an unlit pad during playback to place a slice marker at each location of the playhead. (If you press a
lit pad, playback will restart from that pad’s corresponding slice marker.) The number of the pad that is lit green is the
number of the most-recently inserted slice marker. The numbers of the pads that are lit yellow are the numbers of the
slice markers that are already inserted.
To split or combine slices, tap the glue-and-scissors
icon. In the Split/Combine Region screen that appears,
tap one of the following buttons:
•
Split: This splits the currently selected region into
two equal slices.
•
Combine: This combines the currently selected
region with the one before it.
•
Back: This closes the window.
273
When Link Slices is enabled, changing the start point of a slice will also change the end point of the previous slice.
Similarly, changing the end point of a slice will also change the start point of the next slice. Disable Link Slices if you
are trying to create slices that use non-contiguous parts of the sample.
To enable or disable this feature, tap the Link Slices button.
Important: Link Slices must be disabled to make slices non-sequential, noncontiguous, or overlapping.
To remove all slices from a sample, press and hold Shift and tap Clear All.
The cue playhead is useful when manually inserting slice markers. You can set its position and behavior to suit your
workflow.
Use the Cue field to adjust the position of the cue playhead. Alternatively, tap and drag the translucent marker with
the triangle (
).
To play the sample from the cue playhead, tap Play Cue at the bottom of the screen.
To create a slice marker at the cue playhead position, tap Slice+ at the bottom of the screen.
To set how the cue playhead behaves, use the Settings window (described earlier).
0 Snap forces start points and end points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can help to avoid
clicks and glitches when playing a sample.
To enable or disable 0 Snap, press and hold Shift, and then tap 0 Snap at the bottom of the screen.
274
Converting or Assigning Slices
You can assign your new sample directly to a pad from Chop Mode. You can also convert it into a new track or patched
phrase.
To convert or assign a sample, press and hold Shift, and then tap Convert at the bottom of the screen to open the
Convert or Assign Slices window.
To convert the sample using the selected process, tap Do It.
To cancel the operation, tap Close.
If you set the Convert To field to New drum track using slices, this
will create a new track and assign the sample’s slices to its pads. The
pads will simply refer to the slices in this sample instead of creating
new samples. This is useful for reducing clutter in your project. The
new track will be named after the sample and appended with ch.
Use the Slice Type field to select how each pad’s layer settings
will be set when the slices are assigned to them (see Track Edit
Mode to learn more about the parameters mentioned below):
•
Non-Destructive Slice: Each pad’s Slice setting will be set
to the slice number.
•
Pad Parameters: Each pad’s Slice setting will be set to
Pad. The Pad Start and Pad End parameters will be set to
the slice’s start point and end point values, and the Loop
Pos parameter will be set to the slice’s start point but with
Pad Loop deactivated.
Check the Create Events box to automatically create a new
sequence in which each pad plays its corresponding slice in
ascending sequence by pad number.
If Create Events is checked, use the Bars field to set how many
bars the slices’ events will occupy.
275
If you set the Convert To field to Create New Samples, this will
create a new sample from each slice and assign them to pads in a
new track.
The new track will be named after the sample and appended with ch.
The new samples will be appended with SI-# (where # is a
consecutive number).
Check the Crop Samples box to delete the unused parts from
the sample when they are created and assigned. This feature is
destructive, though the project will still contain your original
sample.
Leave this box unchecked to keep the unused parts of the
samples when they’re created and assigned. This way, you will
still be able to edit the entire samples further even though you
are using only part of them at the moment.
By default, this option already will create a new track. You can
uncheck the Create new track box to convert each slice into
a sample that is placed in the project’s sample pool but not
assigned to a track or pad.
If Create new track is checked, check the Create events box
to automatically create a new track in which each pad plays its
corresponding slice in ascending sequence by pad number.
If Create Events is checked, use the Bars field to set how
many bars the slices’ events will occupy.
If you set the Convert To field to Audio Track from Samples, this
will create a new audio track with the converted samples. The new
track will be named after the sample.
By default, this option already will create a new track. You can
uncheck the Create new track box to select an existing Audio
track in the project where the samples will be added.
Check the Warp Events box to warp the converted samples to
the project tempo.
Use the Bars field to set how many bars the slices’ events will
occupy.
276
If you set the Convert To field to Assign Slice to Pad, the pad will
simply refer to the slice in this sample instead of creating a new
sample. This is useful for reducing clutter in your project.
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the
sample on the first layer of the pad.
Use the Pad field to select the desired pad. Alternatively, press the
desired pad.
Use the Slice Type field to select how the pad’s layer settings
will be set when the slice is assigned to it (see Track Edit Mode
to learn more about the parameters mentioned below):
•
Non-Destructive Slice: The pad’s Slice setting will be set
to the slice number.
•
Pad Parameters: The pad’s Slice setting will be set to Pad.
The Pad Start and Pad End will be set to the slice’s start
point and end point values, and the Loop Position will be
set to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
Use the Track field to specify the track to which you want to
add the slice.
If you set the Convert To field to New Sample to Pad, this will
create a new sample in your project. (The original sample will remain
as it is.)
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the
sample on the first layer of the pad.
Use the Pad field to select the desired pad. Alternatively, press the
desired pad.
Check the Crop Sample box to delete the unused parts from
the sample when it’s created and assigned. This feature is
destructive, though the project will still contain your original
sample.
Leave this box unchecked to keep the unused parts of the sample
when it is created and assigned. This way, you will still be able to
edit the entire sample further even though you are using only part
of it at the moment.
Use the Track field to specify the track to which you want to
add the slice.
277
If you set the Convert To field to Patched phrase, this will create a
new sample that will play based on the tempo of your project, and
places it in the current project. The patched phrase will have the
same name as the original sample but appended with pp and will
use a different icon when viewing your project information.
Use the Bars field to set how many bars long the patched
phrase is meant to be.
Processing Slices
Press and hold Shift, and then tap the Process button to open the Process window, where you can select an editing
option for the currently selected slice. (This has fewer options than Trim Mode. Unavailable ones are darkened.)
Use the Function field to select an editing process. Double-tap it or tap Function at the bottom of the screen to open
the Function window, which displays an overview of all available editing processes.
Important: Chop Mode is non-destructive: You can choose the slice/edit behavior without destroying your original
sample, giving you more control over sample playback; you can save your sliced sample and but also reuse all of the
slice data in another project. See the Track Edit Mode chapter to learn more about setting a pad to play the entire
sample, a specific slice of a sample, or a specific region of the sample (independent of its slice markers).
You can use any of these functions as described below.
To return to Sample Edit Mode, tap Cancel.
To return to the Process window, tap the top of the screen.
Note: All processes here will affect only the currently selected slice.
278
The Silence process replaces the region between the start point and
end point with silence.
The Extract process deletes the regions before the start point and
after the end point and saves it as a new sample (with a name you
enter) in your current project.
Tip: This is useful if you recorded a drum loop and wanted to remove
just a snare drum hit, a kick drum hit, etc. to use separately in the
project.
The Normalize process increases a sample’s level to the highest
level possible without distortion. This is essentially a kind of digital
gain optimization, so you do not have to worry about excessive level
settings when working with samples with a wide range of
amplitudes.
The Reverse process reverses the region between the start point
and end point.
279
The Fade In process sets a fade-in between the start point and end
point. The following types are available:
•
Linear fades the audio in with a linear curve—a straight line
between the start and end.
•
Square Root fades the audio in with a square root curve—
a half-parabola that is similar to the logarithmic curve but
steeper.
•
Square fades the audio in with a curve opposite to the
square root curve. This is similar to the exponential curve
but steeper.
•
Log fades the audio in with a logarithmic curve—quickly
rising at the start and flattening out towards the end.
•
Exp fades the audio in with an exponential curve—slowly
rising in the beginning and growing steeper towards the
end.
•
Sine fades the audio in with a sine curve—like a sine wave,
it slowly rises, gets steeper in the middle, and flattens out at
the end.
Linear Square Root Square Log Exp Sine
The Fade Out process sets a fade-out between the start point and
end point. These are the same as the Fade In curves, but fade the
audio out instead of in.
Linear Square Root Square Log Exp Sine
280
The Pitch Shift process changes the pitch of the sample without
changing its length. This lets you set the sample’s pitch to your
project without affecting the sample’s tempo or duration. You can
adjust it up to 12 semitones, up or down. Keep in mind that the audio
quality may decrease at more extreme settings.
The Gain Change process raises or lowers the volume of the
sample. You can adjust it up to 18 dB, higher or lower. This function
is different than Normalize because it will allow volumes beyond
clipping level. This may be a desired effect, but remember to watch
your output level!
The Stems process to isolates different parts of the sample and
separate them into new stem samples.
Click the icons to select or deselect from the following elements
to create stems of:
•
Vocals: Isolate vocal elements of the track into a stem.
•
Bass: Isolate bass elements of the track into a stem.
•
Drums: Isolate percussive elements of the track into a stem.
•
Other: Isolate other musical textures, such as keys or
guitars, into a stem.
Use the Track dropdown menu to select the track where the
stems will be added.
The Assign to Pad function determines where the stem
separated samples are added. When checked, you can select a
pad in the chosen Track using the dropdown menu, and the
stems will be added to the first four layers of that pad. When
unchecked, the stems will be added to the general project
sample pool in the Project Info Browser.
Tap the Use trimmed sample box to trim the source sample
between the Start and End points before applying the stem
separation process.
Tip: Uncheck this box if you want to retain slices with the
stemmed results, otherwise, they will be bypassed.
Note: To purchase MPC Stems, visit akaipro.com/stems, and
then activate your purchase in the Menu > Preferences >
Activate Plugins menu.
281
Pad Mode
Pad Mode lets you edit a sample in the context of the track in which you’ll use it. You can adjust the pad parameters
as though you were in Track Edit Mode, auditioning and hearing how it will sound in the track’s audio path.
To enter Pad Mode, tap the Pad button at the bottom of the screen. The pads will show their assigned samples in
the current Track.
Use the Start and End fields to set the position of the start point and end point of the sample (respectively).
Alternatively, tap and drag the start (S) or end (E) marker left or right, or use the first column of Q-Link knobs (Start
X1__) to adjust the start point or the second column of Q-Link knobs (End X1__) to adjust the end point.
Pad Mode includes a loop function. When on, the region of the sample between the loop point and end point will repeat.
This is useful when trying to find an ideal spot to begin the sample. The loop cannot be earlier than the start point.
To adjust the loop point, do any of the following:
•
Use the Loop field.
•
Tap and drag the start (S) marker (if Loop Lock is on) or the loop marker (if Loop Lock is off).
•
Use the first column of Q-Link knobs (Start X1__; if Loop Lock is on) or the third column of Q-Link knobs
(Loop X1__; if Loop Lock is off). The top-most Q-Link knobs (13 and 15) provide coarse adjustment. The
bottom-most Q-Link knobs (1 and 3) provide fine adjustment.
To turn Loop Lock on or off, tap the Loop Lock button. When on, the loop point is the same as the start point. When
off, the loop point is independent from the start point.
To turn the loop function on or off, tap the Loop button to cycle between the four modes:
Off: The sample will not loop.
Forward: When the loop reaches its end point, it will start playing again from the loop point.
Reverse: When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in reverse. When it reaches the loop point again, it will
return to the end point and continue playing in reverse.
Alternating: When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in reverse. When it reaches the loop point again, it
will start playing forward again from the loop point.
To switch between Forward and off, press and hold Shift, and then tap Loop at the bottom of the screen.
Tap each pad to hear its sample/samples. The sample on its first layer will automatically appear in the waveform
display for editing.
282
Use the Tune field to transpose the sample up or down from its original pitch.
Tap From BPM to open the Edit Tuning window, which lets you tune a sample to the current sequence.
Use the Number of Beats field to match the number of beats in the sequence.
To tune the sample to the project, tap Match. The Tune field will adjust automatically and close the window.
The sample is now tuned to the sequence.
To tune the sample to the project and adjust the project tempo, tap To Project. This is the same as tapping
Match but it also changes the project's tempo to the BPM shown in the Tempo field on the right.
To close the window, tap Close.
Use the Root Note field to set the root note of the sample. This defines which note will play the sample at its original
pitch when in a keygroup track.
Use the Slice field to display either the sample as it has been edited (Pad) or the entire sample (All).
If the Slice field is set to All, you can display the sample as it has been edited but keep the start point and end point.
To do this, press and hold Shift, and then tap To Pad at the bottom of the screen. The Slice field will change to Pad,
but the start point and end point will remain in their current locations.
283
The Link Slices button does not have a function in Pad Mode.
0 Snap forces start points, end points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can help
to avoid clicks and glitches when playing a sample.
To enable or disable 0 Snap, press and hold Shift, and then tap 0 Snap at the bottom of the screen.
To enable or disable the loop function, press and hold Shift, and then tap Loop at the bottom of the screen. This
switches the loop function between Forward and off. The loop function is described earlier.
284
Assigning Samples
You can assign your new sample directly to a pad from Pad Mode.
To assign a sample, tap Assign at the bottom of the screen to open the Assign Sample window.
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the sample on the first layer of the pad.
The Pad Mode Assign functions are identical to Trim Mode. See Trim Mode > Assigning Samples to learn more.
Processing Slices & Samples
Tap the Process button to open the Process window, where you can select an editing option for the sample.
Use the Function field to select an editing process. Double-tap it or tap Function at the bottom of the screen to open
the Function window, which displays an overview of all available editing processes.
You can use any of these functions as described below.
To return to Sample Edit Mode, tap Cancel.
To return to the Process window, tap the top of the screen.
Note: All Slice processes will affect only the part of the sample between the start point and the end point. The Sample
processes (Bit Reduce and Stereo -> Mono) will affect the entire sample regardless of its start point or end point.
The Pad Mode Functions are identical to Trim Mode. See Trim Mode > Processing Slices & Samples to learn more.
285
Sampler
The Sampler lets you record audio samples to use in your projects.
To open the Sampler, do any of the following:
•
Press Menu and then tap Sampler.
•
Press Sampler (MPC X, MPC One), Shift and Mix/Sampler (MPC Live II), or Shift and Sample
Edit/Sampler (MPC Key 61, MPC Key 37).
•
In Main Mode, select an empty pad in a Drum Track. Then, tap the Record icon in the Track Section.
To set up the Sampler before recording:
1.
Make sure to reduce the volume levels of your audio source and speakers, headphones, and/or monitors before
you make any connections to avoid “pops” or feedback.
2.
Connect a synthesizer or other line-level audio source to the input/inputs of your MPC hardware.
3.
Turn the 3/4 Rec Gain (MPC X), Gain (MPC Key 61), or Rec Vol (MPC Live, MPC Live II, MPC One, MPC Key 37)
knob to set the input level while playing your audio source. You should now see the level in the meter. Make sure
it does not exceed the maximum level (the meter should not be “peaking” constantly).
4.
Set the recording controls as desired (described in this chapter).
5.
Tap the Arm button to record-arm the Sampler.
You can use the Sampler to record using four different methods: Sample, Slice, Pad Tap, or Pad Hold, all described
later in this chapter. The following controls are present regardless of which method you use.
The Sampler page also contains the Auto Sampler, which lets you capture and convert any plugin preset or external
instrument preset into a Keygroup sampler patch.
Tap the tuning fork icon to open the Tuner.
286
The upper-left Input Source field defines whether you are going to record an external
audio signal, which you can set to the pair of inputs (Input 1,2) or a single input (Input 1–
2). You can also select an internal signal from within your MPC hardware (Resample L,
Resample R, or Resample L+R).
Resampling does not require an audio connection because the source is internal and is
therefore recorded without any loss in audio quality. You can, for example, use Resample
to record two or more samples by pressing the corresponding pads simultaneously.
Use the second upper-left Mono/Stereo field to choose whether your recorded samples
will be monaural (Mono) or binaural (Stereo).
The Inserts field shows any enabled or disabled effects for the Sampler. Tap the area
under Inserts to open a window where you can load, change, and enable or disable the
effects.
Important: These effects are applied to the audio as you record it. This means that the
effects cannot be “removed” from the sound later. Learn more about how effects work in
General Features > Effects.
Tap the Monitor button to enable or disable input monitoring. When on, the audio you
hear in your headphones will be taken before it reaches the Sampler, ensuring zero
latency. When off, the audio you hear in your headphones will be taken after it is
processed in the Sampler, so there may be some latency, but you will hear the audio
source as it sounds in the recording.
Tip: To avoid possible clicks or feedback while input monitoring, reduce the level of
the audio sources.
Use the threshold slider to adjust the threshold. Alternatively, turn Q-Link 1 when the
Q-Links are set to screen mode.
When the Sampler is record-armed, it automatically starts recording when the level of the
incoming source exceeds this setting. If you set it too high, the recording may not start
when you play the input source, or the start of the material you wanted to record may be
missing. If you set it too low, the recording may start too early, before you play the external
source. Set this parameter to an appropriate level using the level meter.
To reset the “peak hold,” which shows the highest level of your input signal in the level
meter, tap it.
287
For reference, the Sample Length counter shows you the length of your
sample during the recording procedure.
Tap Arm to record-arm the Sampler. The button will then change to Record
and show Waiting for signal.
At that point, start recording by doing either of the following:
•
Start performing so that the incoming audio level exceeds the level
of the threshold slider.
•
Tap Record under the Sample Length counter.
To disarm the track instead, tap Cancel.
Use the Max Length field to define the maximum sampling time.
You can record up to 60 minutes (60:00) per sample. We recommend
setting these to values that roughly match your estimated recording
duration. The default value is 20 seconds.
288
Sample
Using this method, you can insert slice markers directly in your sample as you record it.
Slice markers divide the sample into multiple regions called slices, which you can adjust in Sample Edit Mode > Chop
Mode. This is useful when working with a long sample with different sounds throughout (e.g., a drum loop or a long
melodic or harmonic passage).
To start recording, do one of the following:
•
Start performing so that the incoming audio level exceeds the level of the threshold slider.
•
Tap Record under the Sample Length counter.
To insert a slice marker in a sample while recording, tap Slice+ (in the lower-right corner) as the sample records.
Each time you tap it, a slice marker will be placed at that location.
To stop recording, tap Stop under the Sample Length counter.
289
After you stop your recording, the Keep or Discard Sample window will appear.
Use the Edit Name field to name the new sample. Tap it and use the virtual keyboard that appears.
Use the Track field to assign the new sample to a track. Select <none> if you want to save it to the project without
assigning it to a track. You can also tap Save at the bottom of the screen to save the sample to the general sample
pool.
Use the Assign to Pad field to assign the sample to a pad in the track.
Use the Root Note field to set where the sample’s original pitch will be on the keyboard.
If you recorded a sample while a sequence was playing, the Keep or Discard Sample window will show a few more
options after you select a pad.
Check the Add Event box to automatically add the sample to the currently playing sequence.
Use the At field to select where you want the event to start:
•
Start: The sample will be a note event at the start of the currently playing sequence.
•
Trigger: The sample will be a note event where you began recording it in the currently playing sequence.
Tap Keep at the bottom of the screen to confirm your selections.
Tap Discard at the bottom of the screen to discard the recording and return to the Sampler.
Tap Play at the bottom of the screen to play the recording.
Tap Edit to save the sample and open Sample Edit Mode to edit your recorded sample.
290
Slice
Using this method, the pads correspond to slices of the currently recorded sample. Slice markers divide the sample
into multiple regions called slices, which you can adjust in Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode. This is useful when
working with a long sample with different sounds throughout (e.g., a drum loop or a long melodic or harmonic passage).
To start recording, do one of the following:
•
Start performing so that the incoming audio level exceeds the level of the threshold slider.
•
Tap Record under the Sample Length counter.
To insert a slice marker in a sample while recording, press any pad as the sample records. Each time you press it,
a slice marker will be placed at that location. Alternatively, press the Slice + button at the bottom of the screen.
The number of the pad that flashes red is the number of the slice marker that will be inserted next. The numbers of the
pads that are lit yellow are the numbers of the slice markers that are already inserted.
When you are done recording, you can name the sample and create a new track using the slices.
To stop recording, tap the round Stop button.
After you stop your recording, the Keep or Discard Sample window will appear.
Use the Edit Name field to name the new sample. Tap it and use the virtual keyboard that appears. Otherwise, the
process will add a consecutive number after the sample name.
291
Use the Create New Program field to assign the new sample to a new program:
Off: No program will be created. The slices will still be added to your project’s sample pool.
With Non-Destructive Slices: In the new program, each pad’s Slice setting will be set to the corresponding slice
number. This is identical to how you can assign samples in Sample Edit Mode (as described in Sample Edit Mode
> Chop Mode > Converting or Assigning Slices).
With Pad Parameters: In the new program, each pad’s Slice setting will be set to Pad. The Pad Start and Pad
End will be set to the slice’s start point and end point values, and the Loop Position will be set to the slice’s start
point but with Pad Loop deactivated. This is identical to how you can assign samples in Sample Edit Mode (as
described in Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode > Converting or Assigning Slices).
Tap Create or Keep at the bottom of the screen to confirm your selections.
Tap Discard at the bottom of the screen to discard the recording and return to the Sampler.
Tap Play at the bottom of the screen to play the recording.
Tap Edit to save the sample and open Sample Edit Mode to edit your recorded sample.
Pad Tap
Important: This mode works for drum tracks only; you must select a drum track before using this mode. If you have
another track selected, the pads will flash dim red. Attempting to record will bring up a window notifying you that you
cannot sample into this track type.
With this method, pressing a pad immediately starts or continues recording directly to that pad (make sure you are
using the desired track before you start recording). Pads with assigned samples are lit bright yellow. Pads without
samples are lit dim yellow.
To start recording to a pad, press it. Recording will start immediately, and the pad will flash red. If you press a new
pad, the recording will stop on the previous pad, which will turn green, and start on the new pad, which will flash red.
Note: If you start recording by tapping Record under the Sample Length counter—or if the volume exceeds the level
of the threshold slider—the sample will record to your project’s sample pool, not to a pad.
To stop recording to a pad, press the currently recording pad, which is flashing red. The sample will continue
recording. You can start recording on another pad at any time.
To stop all recording, tap Stop under the Sample Length counter.
When you are done recording, each pad that you have pressed during recording:
•
will have its Slice setting set to Pad;
•
will have its Pad Start and Pad End set to the slice’s start point and end point values; and
•
will have its Loop Position set to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
This is identical to how you can assign samples in Sample Edit Mode (as described in Sample Edit Mode > Chop
Mode > Converting or Assigning Slices).
Tip: We recommend editing your recorded sample in Sample Edit Mode.
292
Pad Hold
Important: This mode works for drum tracks only; you must select a drum track before using this mode. If you have
another track selected, the pads will flash dim red. Attempting to record will bring up a window notifying you that you
cannot sample into this track type.
With this method, pressing and holding a pad immediately starts or continues recording directly to that pad (make sure
you are using the desired track before you start recording). Pads with assigned samples are lit bright yellow. Pads
without samples are lit dim yellow.
To start recording to a pad, press and hold it. Recording will start immediately, and the pad will light red.
Note: If you start recording by tapping Record under the Sample Length counter—or if the volume exceeds the level
of the threshold slider—the sample will record to your project’s sample pool, not to a pad.
To stop recording, release the pad. The pad will light green, and the sample will continue recording. You can start
recording on another pad at any time.
To stop all recording, tap Stop under the Sample Length counter.
When you are done recording, each pad that you have pressed during recording:
•
will have its Slice setting set to Pad;
•
will have its Pad Start and Pad End set to the slice’s start point and end point values; and
•
will have its Loop Position set to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
This is identical to how you can assign samples in Sample Edit Mode (as described in Sample Edit Mode > Chop
Mode > Converting or Assigning Slices).
Tip: We recommend editing your recorded sample in Sample Edit Mode.
293
Auto Sampler
The Sampler page also contains the Auto Sampler, which lets you capture and covert any plugin preset or external
instrument preset into a keygroup sampler patch.
To open the auto sampler, tap the keyboard icon next to the record button in Sampler View. The current
track will be selected as the auto sample source.
Sample Source Information
Use the Track name field to select the target auto sampler
source.
Use the Record from field to select an input to record from.
Select one of the Input options to auto sample an external
instrument, or select one of the Resample options to auto
sample from an internal source.
Note Range
Use the Min Note and Max Note fields to set the range of notes
that will be created.
Use the Note Stride field to set the number of semitones
between each new sample.
Check the Extend min/max notes box to sample all the way to
the lowest and highest notes, regardless of the Min Note and
Max Note settings.
Velocity
Tap the boxes next to Layers 1–8 to select how many layers will
be used to create the sampler patch.
Use the Velocity value sliders to set the velocity of each layer.
Sampling
Use the Note length slider to set the length of the sampled note
in seconds.
Use Tail slider to set the length of the Audio Tail in seconds.
This will add extra seconds to the end of the resulting audio file.
This is useful if you are capturing samples whose sounds
exceed the defined audio length (e.g., long reverb or delay, one-
shot samples with long decays, etc.). We recommend using an
audio tail of at least a couple of seconds.
Use Base name to set the naming convention for the samples
that will be created by the Auto Sampler.
294
Looping
Use the Enable looping field to select how the resulting
samples can or cannot be looped:
•
Off: The sample will not loop.
•
Forward: You can hold down the pad to cause that
sample to repeat from the Loop Position to the end of
the sample. Release the pad to stop the repeating
playback.
•
Reverse: You can hold down the pad to cause that
sample to play in reverse, repeating from the end of the
sample to the Loop Position. Release the pad to stop
the repeating playback.
•
Alternating: You can hold down the pad to cause that
sample to play from the Loop Position to the end of the
sample and then play in reverse until it reaches the Loop
Position again. This will repeat as long as you are holding
the pad down. Release the pad to stop the repeating
playback.
Use the Loop start and Loop end sliders to set the starting and ending points in the sample where the loop will
occur.
Use the Crossfade slider to set the amount of crossfade between the loop end and loop start in seconds.
Use the Crossfade Type field to select Equal Power or Linear crossfade.
Under On completion, check Make current track to load the
completed sampler patch as the current track.
Under Info, the Session Duration field provides an estimate of how
long the auto sampling process will take.
295
Q-Link Edit
Q-Link Edit mode allows you to create and manage macro assignments. Macros can be used to control
multiple automation parameters across different modes using a single Q-Link knob for expanded
expressive performances. You can also map automation parameters to the XY Pad interface using this
mode.
To enter Q-Link Edit Mode, press Menu and then tap Q-Link Edit.
You can also press and hold the Q-Link button on your MPC hardware (or any Q-Link Mode button on
MPC X/X SE) to open the Q-Link window. From here, tap Q-Link Edit at the bottom of the screen to open
Q-Link Edit Mode.
Use the tabs at the bottom of the screen to select a control to assign parameters to:
Q-Links
XY Pad
Crossfader
Click on the links above to jump to that section.
Note: For users with the MPC Pro Pack, a fourth mode—Envelope Follower / LFO—is also available. This tab will be
greyed out when MPC Pro Pack is not activated. For more information on this mode, see the Addenda > MPC Pro
Pack > Q-Link Edit – Envelope Follower / LFO.
On the left side of the screen, use the Mode field to switch between the different modes for each control. Some Modes
cannot be edited using Macros mode, but you can view their assignments here.
Use the Control field to select or view the active control for editing.
The right side of the screen shows the parameters assigned to the selected controls, and the tools for adding and
editing these parameters.
296
Learning Macro Assignments
To learn parameters to a Macro control in user assignable modes:
1.
Select a control type by tapping one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen: Q-Links, XY Pad, or
Crossfader. See the following sections for more information on either control type.
2.
If available, select the desired mode for the control by using the Mode field at the top of the screen. See each
following section for explanation of the available modes for each control in Q-Link Edit mode.
3.
Use the Control field to select the control to learn parameters to. In some modes like Q-Links, you can also
directly tap to select the control below this field or move the desired control.
4.
When one of these editable modes is selected, the yellow Learn button and the learn add (+) button will
appear on the screen.
To learn a single parameter to the control, tap the yellow Learn button so it is highlighted.
5.
Next, navigate to the mode that displays the parameter you would like to learn, and then adjust that parameter.
The screen will show a message, "Learned [parameter] to [Q-Link]."
6.
To lock in the assignment, return to Q-Link Edit mode and tap the yellow Learn button again. The assigned
parameters will be shown when the macro control is selected.
To learn multiple parameters to a macro, simply navigate to more parameters while Learn is engaged (step 4).
To learn another parameter to a macro that replaces the previous parameter, tap the down arrow next to the
yellow Learn button, and then uncheck the Add box. Repeat the steps above to replace the previously learned
parameter with a new one.
To learn a new parameter while also setting it to a range of values, tap the down arrow next to the yellow Learn
button, and then check the Range box. While Learn is engaged (step 4 above), adjust the parameter to the low and
high points of the value range that you want to control. When the assignment is locked in, the macro will control the
parameter in the set value range.
To use a single macro to, for example, mute/unmute multiple tracks at the same time, tap the down arrow next
to the yellow Learn button, and then check the Toggle box. Repeat the steps above to learn a parameter, which will
toggle on/off when the control is touched or moved.
To use a macro to send the max value of a parameter, tap the down arrow next to the yellow Learn button, and
then check the Trigger box. Repeat the steps above to learn a parameter, which will send its maximum value when
the control is touched or moved.
297
Alternatively, you can add parameters by tapping the learn add (+) button, and then using the menu that appears to
select a parameter from your project. The following parameters are available, depending on the selected Mode and
the tracks in your project:
When an Audio Track is selected:
Mixer: Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo, Send 1–4
Event: Mute
Insert 1–4: Available parameters depending on the effect
When a Drum Track is selected, and Parameter is set to Track:
Mixer: Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo, Send 1–4
Event: Mute
Edit: Global Semi Tune, Global Fine Tune
Insert 1–4: Off, other available parameters depending on the effect
298
When a Drum Track is selected, and Parameter is set to Pad:
Mixer: Pan, Level, Send 1–4, Pad Mute, Pad Solo
Edit:
Pad X Position Pitch Env Decay LFO to Pitch Decay Random
Pad Y Position Pitch Env Sustain LFO to Filter Cutoff Random
Tuning Pitch Env Release LFO to Amp Resonance Random
Filter Cutoff Pitch Env Decay Mode LFO to Pan Total Random Amount
Filter Resonance Pitch Env Attack Curve LFO Wave LFO Level (1–2)
Filter Env Amount Pitch Env Release Curve LFO Rate LFO Delay (1–2)
Amp Env Attack Pitch Env Depth LFO Sync LFO Fade In (1–2)
Amp Env Decay Pitch Env Type Velocity to Pitch LFO 2 Wave
Amp Env Release Ramp 1 Time Velocity to Amp Attack LFO 2 Rate
Amp Env Hold Ramp 2 Time Velocity to Amp LFO 2 Sync
Amp Env Sustain Note Counter 1 Size Velocity to Pan LFO 2 Reset
Filter Env Attack Note Counter 2 Size Velocity to Start Global Drift Speed
Filter Env Hold Layer Play Offset (1–8) Layer Slice (1–8)
Voice Drift Speed
Filter Env Decay Velocity Scaling Layer Reverse (1–8) LFO Delay Sync (1–2)
Filter Env Sustain DrumFX (1–8) Layer Offset (1–8) LFO Fade In Sync (1–2)
Filter Env Release DrumFX Type(1–8) Layer Loop Xfade (1–8) Layer Crossfade Mode
Amp Env Attack Curve Layer Level (1–8) Layer Loop Xfade Type (1–8) Layer Crossfade X/Y
Amp Env Decay Curve Layer Sample Pan (1–8) Layer Slice Tail Length (1–8)
A
rticulation Speed (1–4)
Amp Env Release Curve Layer Semi Tune (1–8) Layer Slice Tail Start (1–8)
A
rticulation Dynamics (1–4)
Filter Env Attack Curve Layer Fine Tune (1–8) Layer Pitch Random (1–8)
A
rticulation Stereo (1–4)
Filter Env Decay Curve Vel to Filter Attack Layer Level Random (1–8)
A
rticulation Speed Scale (1–4)
Filter Env Release Curve Velocity to Filter Depth Layer Pan Random (1–8)
Pitch Env Attack Vel to Filter Cutoff Layer Offset Random (1–8)
Pitch Env Hold Filter Type
A
ttack Random
Insert 1–4: Off, other available parameters depend on the effect
When a Keygroup Track is selected, and Parameter is set to Track:
Mixer: Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo, Send 1–4
Event: Mute
Edit: Global Semi Tune, Global Fine Tune
Insert 1–4: Available parameters depending on the effect
299
When a Keygroup Track is selected, and Parameter is set to Keygroup:
Mixer: Pan, Level, Send 1–4, Pad Mute, Pad Solo
Edit:
Tuning Filter Env Attack Curve Layer Fine Tune (1–8) Layer Slice (1–8)
Filter Cutoff Filter Env Decay Curve Vel to Filter Attack Layer Reverse (1–8)
Filter Resonance Filter Env Release Curve Velocity to Filter Depth Layer Offset (1–8)
Filter Env Amount Pitch Env Attack Vel to Filter Cutoff Layer Loop Xfade (1–8)
Amp Env Attack Pitch Env Hold Filter Type Layer Loop Xfade Type (1–8)
Amp Env Decay Pitch Env Decay LFO to Pitch Layer Slice Tail Length (1–8)
Amp Env Release Pitch Env Sustain LFO to Filter Layer Slice Tail Start (1–8)
Amp Env Hold Pitch Env Release LFO to Amp Layer Pitch Random (1–8)
Amp Env Sustain Pitch Env Decay Mode LFO to Pan Layer Level Random (1–8)
Filter Env Attack Pitch Env Attack Curve LFO Wave Layer Pan Random (1–8)
Filter Env Hold Pitch Env Release Curve LFO Rate Layer Offset Random (1–8)
Filter Env Decay Pitch Env Depth LFO Sync
A
ttack Random
Filter Env Sustain Pitch Env Type Velocity to Pitch Decay Random
Filter Env Release Layer Play Offset (1–8) Velocity to Amp Attack Cutoff Random
Amp Env Attack Curve Layer Level (1–8) Velocity to Amp Resonance Random
Amp Env Decay Curve Layer Sample Pan (1–8) Velocity to Pan Total Random Amount
Amp Env Release Curve Layer Semi Tune (1–8) Velocity to Start
Insert 1–4: Available parameters depending on the effect
When a Plugin Track is selected:
Mixer: Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo, Send 1–4
Event: Mute
Track: Available parameters depending on the plugin
Insert 1–4: Available parameters depending on the effect
When a MIDI Track is selected:
Event: Mute
Edit: Standard MIDI control change assignments
When a CV Track is selected:
Event: Mute
Edit: CV Out 1–4
When a Return is selected, the following options are available:
Mixer: Volume, Pan, Mute
Event: Mute
Insert 1–4: Available parameters depend on the effect
When a Submix is selected, the following options are available:
Mixer: Volume, Pan, Mute
Event: Mute
Insert 1–4: Available parameters depend on the effect
300
When a Main Output is selected, the following options are available:
Mixer: Volume, Pan, Mute
Event: Mute
Insert 1–4: Available parameters depend on the effect
To copy an existing macro assignment:
1.
Tap the learn add (+) button to open the parameter menu.
2.
Select Copy Existing Macro.
3.
To replace the current macro settings with the copied macro settings, select Replace.
4.
To merge the current macro settings with the copied macro settings, select Merge.
5.
Use the menu to select the existing macro you would like to copy.
Tap the Momentary button to turn momentary behavior on or off.
When on, moving the Q-Link will adjust its parameter, but the parameter will immediately return to its original position
(when you turned Momentary on) when you release the Q-Link.
When off, moving the Q-Link will adjust its parameter, and the parameter will remain at its new setting when you
release the Q-Link.
Tap the arrow next to the Momentary to adjust additional settings for when the macro control is released:
To revert the macro parameter(s) to its minimum value on release, check the Go to Minimum box.
To revert to the last value state before the macro was changed on release, check to Go to Previous box.
To rename a macro, tap the keyboard icon in the toolbar, and then use the keyboard to enter a new name.
301
Editing Macro Assignments
Above the Q-Link Edit control tabs on the right side of the touchscreen, the collapsible parameter inspector displays
the settings for the currently selected learned parameter assignment. These settings can be edited for further
customization of the macro.
To edit the parameters assigned to a macro:
1.
Tap the macro control on the left side of the screen, or touch or move the control on your MPC, to select it.
2.
Tap the learned parameter that you would like to adjust on the left side of the screen, so it is highlighted gray.
3.
Use the parameter inspector to view and adjust the settings for the assignment. Tap the arrow to view
additional settings.
To reverse the polarity of the knob, tap the Flip button.
To adjust the minimum and maximum values sent by the knob, use the two Parameter Range knobs.
To set the response curve of the macro, use the Control Input field to select Linear, Logarithmic or
Exponential. Use the knobs next to this field to set the percentage of the control that will be active.
To adjust the behavior of the macro, use the Toggle selector. When set to Off, moving the control sends
a continuous range of values. When set to Toggle, moving the control toggles between the minimum and
maximum values set above. When set to Trigger Max, moving the control always send the maximum
value.
To remove a parameter assignment, tap the trash can icon. If all parameters are removed, the macro will no longer
appear.
302
Q-Links
In this tab, you can view and/or edit Q-Link macro assignments, depending on the Mode selected.
To enter Q-Links mode, do either of the following:
•
In Q-Link Edit Mode, tap the Q-Links button at the bottom of the screen.
•
You can also press and hold the Q-Link button on your MPC hardware (or any Q-Link Mode button on MPC
X/X SE) to open the Q-Link window. Then, tap Q-Link Edit at the bottom of the screen to open Q-Link Edit
Mode.
To select a mode for the Q-Links, use the Mode field at the top of the display to select one of the following options:
Screen: In this mode, the Q-Links are fixed to control a
parameter or group of parameters in your currently selected
mode (e.g., Pad Mixer, Sample Edit Mode, etc.).
Project 1–2: In these edit modes, the Q-Link knobs can control
16 parameters within the current project overall.
Any available parameter, including Track, Pad, Keygroup,
Insert, Return, Submix or Main Output parameters, can be
selected as part of a macro control.
303
Track: In this edit mode, the Q-Link knobs can control 16 track
parameters.
Only parameters for the current track, any Pads or Keygroups
on the current track, or any Inserts on the current track can be
selected as part of a macro control. This does not include
Return, Submix or Main Output parameters.
Pad Scene: In this edit mode, the Q-Link knobs can control 16
parameters for the currently selected pad.
You can select another pad simply by pressing it, allowing you
to adjust the same 16 parameters for that new pad. (These
assignments are automatically saved with other user settings.
Any project you load will use these assignments.)
Pad Parameter: In this edit mode, the Q-Link knobs control
the same pad parameter for the each of the 16 pads in the
current pad bank.
For example, if the Parameter is set to Level, the 16 Q-Link
knobs will adjust the 16 independent Level settings for each
pad in the current pad bank. You could then set the Parameter
to Pan and use the Q-Link knobs to adjust the panning of all
16 pads.
Track FX Rack: In this edit mode, the Q-Link knobs can control
16 FX Rack parameters. The assignments can be saved as part
of an FX Rack preset.
Only parameters available in the currently selected track's
Insert effects can be selected as part of a macro control.
MIDI: In this mode, the Q-Links are fixed to a selection of MIDI
performance controls, allowing you to control modulation,
pitch bend, sustain and other common MIDI messages as you
play.
304
Volume: In this mode, the Q-Links are fixed to controlling the
volume level of the available tracks.
Pan: In this mode, the Q-Links are fixed to controlling the
stereo panning of the available tracks.
Send 1–4: In these modes, the Q-Links are fixed to controlling
each Send control on the available tracks.
At any time, in any mode, you can show the Q-Links window over
the screen’s current contents. This lets you quickly select between
the knob modes.
To show the Q-Links window, press and hold the Q-Link
button. On MPC X/X SE, press and hold any of the Q-Link
Mode buttons (Project, Program, Pad Scene, Pad Param, or
Screen Control).
Tap the respective icon to select a Q-Link mode: Volume, Pan,
Send 1–4, Project 1–2, Track, Track FX Rack, Pad Scene,
Pad Parameter, MIDI, or Screen.
Tap Q-Link Edit at the bottom of the window to open Q-Link
Edit mode.
Tap the Q-Link Status button to enable or disable the pop-up
showing the current Q-Link assignments and values when Q-
Links are touched. This can also be adjusted in the
Preferences > General menu.
To close the Q-Links window, release the Q-Link button.
305
XY Pad
In the XY Pad tab, you can learn any automation parameter from within your project to one of four assignable XY Pads.
To cycle between the four available XY Pad assignments, tap the XY Pad tab.
Use the Control field at the top left of the touchscreen to select the part of the XY Pad that you would like to assign
parameters to. This functions like a collection of different macros, allowing you to assign parameters to the X-Axis, Y-
Axis, Columns 1–8, Rows 1–8, or even different to the axes of the Quadrants in the XY Pad.
Use the Full Screen button to make the current XY Pad fill the entire screen.
To learn a parameter to the XY Pad, follow the directions above.
306
Crossfader
In the Crossfader tab, you can learn any automation parameter from within your project to the Crossfader mode of
MPC Key 61/37's Touch Strip.
There are 16 available crossfader scenes, which can be selected using the Control field at the top left of the screen.
Each scene can be assigned to one or more parameters.
To learn a parameter to the crossfader:
1.
Make sure your MPC hardware is not currently in playback.
2.
Select the parameter you would like to assign to the crossfader using the directions above. Any available
parameter, including Track, Pad, Keygroup, Insert, Return, Submix or Main Output parameters, can be selected
as part of a macro control.
3.
Tap the A or B crossfader side to select a crossfader side. When A is selected, the parameter will be assigned to
the crossfader with the minimum value to the left side and the maximum value to the right side. When B is selected,
the parameter will be reversed with the maximum value on the left side and the minimum value on the right side.
307
Next Sequence Mode
Next Sequence Mode lets you trigger different sequences simply by playing the pads. This is useful for
live performances, letting you change a song’s structure in real time.
To enter Next Sequence Mode, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then tap Next Sequence.
•
Press Next Seq (MPC X, MPC Live II, MPC One).
The Time Counter in the upper-right corner the current playhead position.
The sequence playlist on the left side shows a list-style overview of all used sequences in
your project:
The Sequence column shows the name of the song’s sequences.
The Length column shows the bar length of a sequence.
The BPM column shows the tempo of a sequence in beats per minute.
The currently selected sequence is highlighted in the list. Tap a sequence in the list to select
it.
In Next Sequence Mode, every pad is assigned to a sequence,
starting from Pad A01 with Sequence 1, and ascending from there.
The pads will show the names of their corresponding sequences.
Empty pads correspond to unused sequences. The currently
selected pad will flash green.
During playback, change the next sequence that will play by
pressing the corresponding pad or tapping it on the screen. If you
do not select another sequence, the current sequence will repeat
indefinitely.
308
As a sequence plays, you can use the buttons at the bottom
of the screen to change how playback works:
Tap Next Bar to switch to the currently selected
sequence at the beginning of the next bar. This is useful
if you want to switch to another sequence before the
current one ends without having to worry about timing
issues.
Tap Sudden to switch to the currently selected
sequence immediately. The new sequence will start
playing whether or not the current sequence is done.
This is useful in live performances if you need to switch
to the next sequence instantly at a certain cue.
Tap Clear to delete the currently selected sequence
from the sequence playlist. This option is available only
if that sequence is not playing at that moment.
Tap Hold to repeat the current sequence indefinitely
and temporarily ignore pad presses. This is useful if you
want to select other pads without selecting them to play
next. Tap Hold again to return to normal operation.
To copy the sequence playlist to a song, tap
Song while playback is stopped.
In the Copy to Song screen that appears, select a song, and then tap Do It to continue or Close to cancel.
To read more about Song Mode, please see the Song Mode chapter.
309
MIDI Learn
You can use the MIDI Learn function to assign external MIDI controllers to various parameters in your
specific MPC project:
•
Mixer parameters such as volume, pan, mute, and solo for tracks, returns, submixes, and main outputs.
•
Pad parameters (for drum tracks only) such as tuning, filter and amp envelopes, layer settings, LFO
settings, and velocity.
•
Track parameters, which depend on the track type.
•
Insert effects parameters, which depend on the effect type.
These assignments will be saved with your MPC project.
To enter MIDI Learn Mode, press Menu, and then tap MIDI Learn.
Each assignment has the following settings:
Source: This is the name or number of the track, return, submix, or main output.
Target: This is the name of the assigned command or parameter.
Type: This is the type of message:
•
Toggle Button: When the control is a button, pressing it will activate or deactivate its command or parameter.
It will remain in that state until you press it again.
•
Momentary Button: When the control is a button, pressing and holding it down will activate its command or
parameter. Releasing the button will deactivate it.
•
Fixed Button: When the control is a button, pressing it will send its command.
•
Note: When the control is a button, pressing it will send the MIDI note (determined by the Data field).
•
Abs CC: When the control is a knob, turning it will send its CC message (determined by the Data field)
according to the precise physical position of the knob. (When you start turning it, the value may “jump”
from its current value to the one corresponding to the knob’s position.) This is for use with knobs that have
a maximum and minimum position.
•
Rel CC Offset: When the control is a knob, turning it will send the CC message (determined by the Data
field), starting from the current value. This is for use with 360° knobs controlling parameters that have a
maximum and minimum position.
•
Rel CC 2’s Complement: When the control is a knob, turning it will send the CC message (determined by
the Data field), starting from the current value. This is for use with 360° knobs controlling bipolar
parameters where there is a center (12:00) position (e.g., panning).
Type is automatically detected based on the Source and Target fields, though you can use this field to assign it
manually if it does not detect it properly.
Ch: This is the MIDI channel the control is using.
Data: This is the MIDI note number or CC number.
Flip: Tap this box to select or deselect it. When selected, the control’s polarity will be reversed (e.g., a button’s
“off” state will become its “on” state and vice versa).
310
To assign a parameter to a hardware control:
1.
Tap Learn in the upper-right corner so it is on.
2.
Tap + on the left side of the touchscreen to create an “empty” assignment (its Target menus will be set to None
and Off).
Alternatively, tap an assignment that is already in the list if you want to change it.
3.
Move or press the desired control on your MIDI controller. The Type, Ch, and Data fields will be automatically
assigned.
4.
Use the Source field to select a track, return, submix, or main output (for drum tracks, you can select the entire track
or a single pad within it). The Target menu will indicate the source you selected.
5.
Use the Target menu to select the parameter. Your selection will be shown under Target in the list, as well.
The control on your MIDI controller will now control the Target parameter.
To assign more controls, repeat Steps 2–5.
To stop assigning controls, tap Learn again so it turns off.
To clear an assignment, tap it in the list, and then tap Clear in the bottom-left corner. Alternatively, follow the steps
above to reassign its Source field to None and assign its Target field to Off.
To clear all assignments, tap Clear All in the upper-right corner.
To delete an assignment (the entire slot), tap it in the list, and then tap Delete in the lower-right corner.
311
Live Control Mode
Your MPC hardware is pre-mapped to control Ableton Live 10.1.2 or later for instant performance and
production setup, providing an unparalleled level of integration with Ableton Live from a standalone device.
MPC's Control Mode has been carefully designed to allow you to instantly switch between using MPC in
standalone mode and Live Control mode without ever stopping playback. You can control Ableton Live
over a Wi-Fi network for cableless operation, or connect standalone MPC X/X SE or MPC Live/Live II to
your computer using a USB-to-Ethernet adapter for a more tightly controlled setup.
To get started with Ableton Live Control, you will need to follow the directions in the sections below to
download, install and configure the necessary and software.
Note: Live Control Mode is not available with MPC Key 37 and MPC Key 61.
Setup
Akai Network Driver
The Akai Network Driver will allow your MPC to seamlessly communicate with and control Ableton Live.
1.
Download the Akai Network Driver from your account at akaipro.com or using the inMusic Software Center, and
install it by following the directions.
2.
Once the installation has completed, restart your computer.
3.
Power on your MPC.
4.
Press Menu and tap the gear icon to open the Preferences menu.
5.
Tap Wi-Fi to open the Wi-Fi settings. Make sure Wi-Fi is set to On, and then connect to your local wireless network.
Alternatively, you can connect MPC to your network using a USB-to-Ethernet adapter. In this case, select Ethernet
from the Preferences menu and make sure the Enabled option is checked.
6.
Open the Akai Network Driver application.
7.
In the Configured Remote Device field, locate the IP address and Serial Number of your MPC and select it. If you
need to verify you are selecting the correct unit, you can view network information on your MPC in the Wi-Fi menu
by holding Shift and tapping Info.
8.
If you still do not see your unit's Serial Number and IP, click the Add a Device button to manually enter your unit's
IP address.
9.
Once your unit has been successfully configured, you can rename it by pressing the Rename a Selected Device
button. When you are finished, you can close the Akai Network Driver application and open Ableton Live.
Configuring Ableton Live
1.
Important: To use MPC to control Ableton Live, you will need to download and install version 10.1.2 or later.
2.
Open Ableton Live 10.1.2 or later.
3.
Open the Preferences menu by selecting Live > Preferences.
4.
Make sure you have selected your preferred Audio Device in the Audio tab.
5.
In the Link / MIDI tab, click the first available Control Surface field and select Akai Force MPC.
6.
In the same row, select Akai Network – DAW Control as the Input and Output.
7.
Under the MIDI Ports section, set Remote for the Akai_Force_MPC Input and Akai_Force_MPC Output to On.
Once the previous steps have been completed, you can begin controlling Ableton Live with your MPC.
312
To open Live Control mode, press Menu (or tap the icon in the upper-left corner of the screen) on your standalone
MPC hardware and then tap Live Control.
To exit Live Control mode, press Menu (or tap the icon in the upper-left corner of the screen) on your standalone
MPC hardware and then select another mode.
Live Control Mode consists of three main views, which can be selected by tapping the tabs on the left side of the
display: Matrix View, Mixer View, and Device Control View. Click the links to jump to that section.
In each of these modes, you will always have access to the following controls and functions on the display:
Tap a track name to select it.
Tap the stop icons at the bottom of the display to stop clips in the selected track.
Tap the Launch Quantize field (above the scene launch arrows) to set the Launch Quantize value.
Tap the Scene Launch arrows on the right side of the display to launch all clips in that row.
Additionally, MPC's hardware controls are pre-mapped to give you hands-on control of parameters and functions. See
Appendix > Ableton Control Maps for the complete mappings.
313
Control Bar
At the top of the interface is the Control Bar. This toolbar can be configured to one of three presets based on typical
Ableton Live use cases in the Settings window.
To open the Settings window, tap the gear icon in the top-right corner of the display.
Use the Control Bar field to select one of the three preset configurations: Settings, Arrangement or
Performance.
•
Session: The Session View configuration is ideal for working in Ableton Live's 8x8 clip launch matrix.
Use the BPM field to adjust the tempo in Ableton Live.
Tap the Phase Nudge Down and Phase Nudge Up icons to temporarily decrease or increase the tempo
in Ableton Live.
Tap the metronome icon to enable to disable the metronome in Ableton Live.
Tap the follow icon to turn following on or off. When set to on, your Ableton Live software display will
move along with playback to keep the current playback position in view. You can adjust the Follow
Behavior in Ableton Live's Preferences.
Use the Position field to select the playback position.
Tap the + icon to enable or disable MIDI Arrangement Overdubbing.
Tap the automation icon to enable to disable automation recording.
•
Arrangement: The Arrangement configuration is ideal for working with Ableton Live's linear Arrangement view.
Use the BPM field to adjust the tempo in Ableton Live.
Use the Position field to select the playback position.
Use the Start field to select the Arrangement loop start point.
Tap the loop icon to enable or disable Arrangement looping.
Use the Length field to select the Arrangement loop length.
•
Performance: The Performance configuration is ideal for real-time performance with Ableton Live.
Use the BPM field to adjust the tempo in Ableton Live.
Tap the Phase Nudge Down and Phase Nudge Up icons to temporarily decrease or increase the tempo
in Ableton Live.
Use the Quantize To field to set the time division for quantization: 1/4, 1/8, 1/8T, 1/8 and 1/8T, 1/16, 1/16T, 1/16
and 1/16T or 1/32.
314
Matrix View
The Matrix View provides an overview of the clip matrix from Ableton Live's Session view, displaying up to eight tracks
and eight rows of clips on the display. The tracks and clips displayed on your MPC's touchscreen will be shown in
Ableton Live with a colored box outline.
All tracks, clips and scenes will display the same color and names as assigned in Ableton Live. The pads on your MPC
hardware will also change color depending on the playback or recording state:
When a clip is stopped, it will display the color set in Ableton Live on both the hardware pads and display.
When a clip is playing, the hardware pad will blink green, and the clip on the display will fill with white based on
the clip length.
When a clip is preparing to record, it will flash red on both the hardware pads and display until the launch
quantization value is reached.
When a clip is recording, it will blink red on the hardware pads and be lit red on the display.
You can also access the following controls and features by tapping the buttons at the bottom of the display:
Tap Quantize at the bottom of the screen to quantize the currently selected clip according to the Quantize To
value (set in the Ableton Live Control Settings).
Tap Delete at the bottom of the screen to delete the currently selected clip.
Tap Insert Scene at the bottom of the screen to insert a new scene after the currently selected clip.
Tap Rec at the bottom of the screen to enable or disable Ableton Live's Arrangement Record. Use this to capture
your Session performance into the Arrangement view.
315
Mixer View
The Mixer View gives you control of Ableton Live's key mixing features, such as levels, stereo panning, sends and
returns and more. Use the tabs at the bottom of the display to select what information is shown on MPC's display.
•
Levels: The Levels tab gives you an overview of the volume level of your tracks, including the Returns and the
Main Output track.
Tap a level slider and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the volume level of the currently selected
track, return or main output. Alternatively, tap and drag a level slider to adjust the volume level.
The level sliders and meters in each pad show a visual representation of the level. Double-tap a track on the
screen to open a large version of the level slider and meter.
•
Main: The Main tab gives you a full channel strip with a number of mixing options for your tracks.
Tap the track activator (under the track name) to enable or disable (mute) the track.
Tap the S button to solo the track.
Tap the record button to arm the track for recording.
The pan sliders in each track show a visual representation of the pan. Tap a pan slider and then use the data
dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the panning of the currently selected track, return or main output. Alternatively,
tap and drag the pan slider to adjust the panning. Double-tap a pan slider on the screen to open a large
version of the slider.
Tap a level slider and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to adjust the volume of the currently selected
track, return or main output. Double-tap a level slider on the screen to open a large version of the slider.
Alternatively, tap and drag a level slider to adjust the volume level.
•
Sends: The Sends tab gives you an overview of the Send and Return controls in Ableton Live.
Use the send knobs to adjust the send level of tracks. Tap the knob and use the data dial or –/+ buttons to
adjust the level. Alternatively, tap and drag the send knob to adjust the send level.
Tap the A or B icons to assign the track to the Ableton Live's A or B cue mix.
316
Device Control View
The Device Control View allows you to control MIDI Instruments, Audio Effects and other Devices in Ableton Live
directly from your MPC. The current view of the Device Control Tab is determined by the "blue hand" remote control
icon in Ableton Live's Detail View.
Tap the Track Name under the Control Bar to select the Track. If there is a Device(s) associated with the Track,
the first will be shown below.
Tap the lock icon on the right side to lock parameter changes to the device.
Use the sliders to adjust the parameters of the device. Tap a slider and then use the data dial or –/+ buttons to
adjust the parameter. Alternatively, tap and drag a slider to adjust the parameter.
Use the Device – and + buttons to change devices on the same track. The white and grey boxes below the
parameter sliders represent the number of available Devices.
Use the Bank – and + buttons to cycle through banks of controls for the device, if available. For internal Ableton
Live plugins, you will see the name of the current bank. For third party plugins, you will see the number of the
current bank.
Tap Device On to enable or disable (bypass) the device.
Q-Links
The Q-Links on your MPC give you hands-on control of Ableton Live's key parameters.
On MPC X/X SE, Q-Links 1–8 control track volume for the eight tracks currently in view, while Q-Links 9–16 control
the device on the currently selected track, based on the "blue hand" in Ableton Live's Detail View. The OLED screens
above each Q-Link also provide clear visual feedback of the parameter name and value being controlled.
On MPC Live/Live II, Q-Link Banks 1 and 2 control track volume, and Q-Link Banks 3 and 4 control the current device
at the "blue hand" position. Press and hold the Q-Link button to bring up the Q-Links Overview on the touchscreen,
where you can view the current assignments and quickly select another bank.
317
Song Mode
Song Mode lets you arrange sequences in a specific order and/or repetition to create songs. You can edit
the structure of a song during playback for easy, on-the-fly composing.
A project can contain up to 32 songs, each consisting of up to 999 “steps.” Each step can have an assigned
sequence as well as the number of times that sequence will repeat.
To open Song Mode, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then tap Song Mode.
•
Press Shift and Next Seq/Song (MPC X).
Important: If a sequence is currently playing, stop playback before entering Song Mode. You cannot enter Song Mode
during playback.
Use the Song field to select the song you want to show.
Tap the keyboard icon to rename the current song.
Use the BPM field to adjust the tempo of the sequence.
Tap the Seq/Gbl button to set whether the sequence follows its own tempo (Seq)
or a global tempo (Gbl). Alternatively, press Shift and Tap/Master.
The Time Counter shows the current playhead position, in bars:beats:ticks.
318
The sequence playlist on the left lists of the “steps” of a song.
Each step has (in columns, left to right):
•
the step number (each song can contain up to 999 steps)
•
a sequence number and name
•
how many times the sequence plays (each step can play up
to 999 times; set it to Hold [the lowest/minimum value] to set
the sequence to repeat indefinitely until you stop playback)
•
the tempo of the sequence
•
the number of bars the step occupies (based on how many
times it plays)
Each used sequence is assigned to a pad. Empty pads correspond
to unused sequences. Use the Pad Bank buttons to access the
sequences assigned to pads in other banks.
To insert a step:
1.
Tap a step in the sequence playlist after which you want to insert a step.
2.
Tap Insert in the lower-right corner of the screen.
Alternatively, “record” a song using the pads:
Note: The sequences or song will not play back as you use the pads to create your song in this way. Pressing the pads
just enters their corresponding sequences as steps.
1.
Press Rec or Overdub to “record-arm” the song.
2.
Press or tap the pad that corresponds to the first sequence you want to use. That sequence will appear in the
sequence playlist as the first step.
3.
Repeat Step 2 for each additional step you want to add to the sequence playlist. Press or tap a pad multiple times
to add to the number of times it plays.
4.
Press Stop to stop “recording.”
319
To change a step’s sequence:
1.
In the desired step, tap the sequence name.
2.
Use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select another sequence.
Tap Clear to erase the entire sequence playlist (delete all steps).
To delete a step, tap it, and then tap Delete in the lower-right corner of the screen.
Tap Next to switch to the next sequence at the beginning of the next bar during playback. This is useful if you want to
switch to another sequence before the current one ends without having to worry about timing issues.
Tap Sudden to switch to the next sequence immediately during playback. The new sequence will start playing whether
or not the current sequence is done. This is useful in live performances if you need to switch to the next sequence
instantly at a certain cue.
To convert the current song to a single sequence:
1.
Tap Convert > Seq to open the Convert to Sequence
window.
2.
Use the To Sequence field to select which sequence
you want the song to export to.
3.
Use the Track Status field to select whether you want
the song to Exclude Muted Tracks or Include Muted
Tracks in the new sequence.
4.
Tap Do It to confirm your selections.
Tap Close to cancel the process.
Tap Export to open the Audio Mixdown screen, where you
can render/export your song as an audio file.
320
Key Ranges Mode
Key Ranges Mode gives you an overview of the MIDI tracks in your project. This mode includes
functionality similar to Track View mode and Main Mode, but may be more useful when setting up a large
external keyboard to control multiple instruments at the same time.
To open Key Ranges Mode, press Menu, and then navigate to Key Ranges on the second page of
modes and tap it.
Tap the gear icon in the upper-right corner to open the Key Ranges Settings window. Here, you can adjust the Solo
Behavior to be either Single (so only one track can be soloed at a time) or Multi (multiple tracks can be soloed at a
time).
Use the Track field at the top of the screen to select a track. You can also tap a track bar under the keyboard to select
it.
Use the Min and Max field to set the minimum MIDI note value and maximum MIDI note value for the track. You can
also tap and drag along the edges of the track bar to resize the key range, or tap and drag from the middle of the track
bar to move the entire range left or right.
Alternatively, tap the Learn Min or Learn Max buttons at the bottom of the screen, and then press a key on a
connected keyboard to set that note as the minimum or maximum MIDI note value of the key range.
Tap New Track to add a new track.
Tap MIDI Filter to apply MIDI filtering to each track:
Use the Note Min and Note set the minimum MIDI note value and maximum MIDI note value for the track.
Use the Velocity Min and Velocity Max fields to set the range of incoming velocity for the track.
Use the MIDI CC Filter fields enable or disable certain MIDI CC messages from being input. Check a box to enable
the selected message, or uncheck to filter it out.
Tap the Reset button to reset all MIDI Filter settings.
Tap Pads: Mute/Solo to cycle between track muting and soloing using the MPC hardware pads while in Key Ranges
mode.
When using Track Soloing, tap the Clear Solos button to unsolo tracks that have been soloed.
321
To instantly adjust the key range for drum tracks, press and hold Shift and then tap Drum Split. This will
automatically set the key range of Drum Tracks to the first 16 notes of the keyboard so that they correspond with Pads
1–16. This is useful for using the MPC Key 61 to play melodic sounds on the keybed and drum sounds on the pads at
the same time.
Key Ranges mode also provides access to the same XL Channel Strips as seen in Main Mode. Tap the icons at the
top of the condensed strips to show or hide the mixer channel strips.
322
MIDI Control Mode
You can use MIDI Control Mode on your MPC hardware to customize what MIDI messages are sent from
certain controls on your hardware. This custom “control map” will then work whenever you are in MIDI
Control Mode. The edits you make in MIDI Control Mode will be retained with the current MPC project.
This feature enables you to use your MPC hardware to control external MIDI devices connected to its MIDI
out.
To enter MIDI Control Mode, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, and then navigate to MIDI Control on the second page of modes and tap it.
•
Press Shift and Program Edit/MIDI Control (MPC One), or press Shift and Keyboard Control/MIDI Control
(MPC Key 61, MPC Key 37).
Important:
In Standalone Mode: Make sure your MPC hardware is using the correct MIDI output. You can set this using the MIDI
Output Port field at the top of the touchscreen, or in Preferences > MIDI / Sync.
In Controller Mode: In your host software, make sure your MPC hardware is selected as a MIDI controller device.
In the touchscreen, use the fields and selectors to set each control’s parameters to your preference. The available
parameters depend on its type: a pad, or button, a Q-Link knob, or each axis of the XY pad. When you have set all
of the parameters as desired, you can select another control or enter another mode.
Use the MIDI Output Port field at the top of the touchscreen to set the MIDI port that the MPC hardware will send
messages from. You can also set this in the MIDI / Sync section of the Preferences menu.
Tap the I/O buttons at the top of the touchscreen to open the MIDI Monitor.
323
To select a control to edit, do any of the following:
•
Press or turn it. In the lower-left corner, tap the Hardware tab to edit a pad, button, or Q-Link knob, or tap
the XY tab to edit the XY pad.
•
Tap the Control field in the upper-left corner, and then turn the data dial to select one.
•
Double-tap the Control field, and then tap a control name in the menu that appears.
Note: The Control field menu will show many more hardware controls than are actually available on your MPC
hardware. This is because the list includes all possible controls from all current MPC models (MPC X, MPC Live, etc.).
You can edit only the controls that are described in this chapter.
Note: The software window will also display a graphical interface resembling your MPC hardware. Editable controls
show their current MIDI message. Pads and Q-Link knobs show their current MIDI channels.
Pads
These are the MIDI parameters you can edit for each pad:
Control: This is the hardware control you are currently editing (Pad 1–Pad 16).
Bank: This is the pad bank the pad belongs to. If you check the Set All box, the pad’s messages and parameters
will be identical across all eight banks.
Set All: When this box is checked, the pad’s messages and parameters will be identical across all eight banks.
When this box is unchecked, the pad’s messages and parameters will apply to the current pad only.
Light LED: This determines how the pad’s LEDs will behave.
When set to Never, the LEDs will always be off.
When set to MIDI Input, the LEDs will light up when the software receives a MIDI message that matches the pad.
When set to Local, the LEDs will light up when you press the pad and/or MIDI input is received.
MIDI Channel: This determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the pad will use to send its message to the software.
Note: This is the MIDI note number the pad will send to the software when you press it (0–127 or C-2 to G8).
Velocity: This determines whether the pad will be velocity-sensitive (On) or not (Off). When set to Off, pressing the
pad will send a note at full-level (127) always.
Aftertouch: This determines how the pad’s aftertouch (pressure applied to the pad after the initial press) behaves.
Off: The pad will not send any aftertouch messages.
Channel: If you press multiple pads that have this setting, the aftertouch messages they send will be identical.
Poly: If you press multiple pads, the aftertouch message each pad sends will be independent from the others.
324
Buttons
These are the MIDI parameters you can edit for each button. You can edit the Erase, Tap, Undo/Redo, or Copy/Delete
buttons:
Control: This is the hardware control you are currently editing (Erase, Tap, Undo, or Copy).
Light LED: This determines how the button’s LED (or multiple LEDs) will behave.
When set to Never, the LEDs will always be off.
When set to MIDI Input, the LEDs will light up when the software receives a MIDI message that matches the
button.
When set to Local, the LEDs will light up when you press the button and/or MIDI input is received.
MIDI Channel: This determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the button will use to send its message to the software.
CC Number: This determines what MIDI Control Change number the button will send to the software.
Type: This determines whether the button will behave as a Momentary switch or Toggle (latching) switch.
325
Q-Link Knobs
These are the MIDI parameters you can edit for each Q-Link knob and the Touch Strip:
Control: This is the hardware control you are currently editing (Q-Link 1–16, Touch Strip).
Light LED: Although you can edit this parameter, it does not actually have a function on your MPC hardware.
When set to Never, the LEDs will always be off.
When set to MIDI Input, the LEDs will light up when the software receives a MIDI message that matches the
Q-Link knob.
When set to Local, the LEDs will light up when you touch or turn the Q-Link knob and/or MIDI input is received.
MIDI Channel: This determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the Q-Link knob will use to send its message to the
software.
CC Number: This determines what MIDI Control Change number the Q-Link knob will send to the software.
Mode: This determines how the Q-Link knob will control its parameter. This is not available when Touch Strip is
selected.
Absolute: The Q-Link knob’s current position determines its parameter’s value; moving it may cause its
parameter to “snap” to a new position if you’re using it to control different parameters in different modes.
Relative: Moving the Q-Link knob will increase or decrease its parameter regardless of its physical position.
Low Range: This is the Q-Link knob or Touch Strip’s lowest possible value (0–127).
High Range: This is the Q-Link knob or Touch Strip’s highest possible value (0–127).
Touch Sense: This activates or deactivates the Q-Link knob or Touch Strip’s touch-capacitive circuitry.
On: You can touch the Q-Link knob or Touch Strip to send a Note On message to the software (this is how
your MPC hardware normally works).
Off: The Q-Link knob or Touch Strip will not send any Note On messages; it will only send CC messages when
you turn it.
Note: This is the MIDI note number the Q-Link knob or Touch Strip will send to the software when you touch it (0–
127 or C-2 to G8). Touch Sense must be set to On for this to work.
326
XY Pad
These are the MIDI parameters you can edit for each axis of the XY pad:
Control: This is the axis you are currently editing (XYFX X-Axis or XYFX Y-Axis). This field will be hidden if you
tapped the XY tab to show the XY pad’s parameters. You can tap the Hardware tab to show this field.
Mute: This button determines whether the axis is muted or not. When muted, its MIDI output is disabled. You must
be viewing the Settings to do this.
MIDI Channel: This determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the axis will use to send its message to the software.
CC Number: This determines what MIDI Control Change number the axis will send to the software.
Low Range: This is the axis’s lowest possible value (0–127).
High Range: This is the axis’s highest possible value (0–127).
327
Pad Color Mode
Pad Color Mode lets you assign specific colors to your pads in a track.
To enter Pad Color Mode, press Menu, and then navigate to Pad Color on the second page of modes
and tap it.
Use the Track field at the top of the screen to select the desired track. Keygroup, Plugin, MIDI, and CV tracks will use
the Pad Perform mode pad color layout by default. To create a custom pad color layout for these tracks, tap the pad
area on the screen after selecting the track. This will enable custom pad colors for all tracks using Pad Perform mode.
Use the Bank field to select the desired bank of pads in the current track.
Use the field in the lower-left corner to set how the pad lights will display:
•
Off: The pads will be unlit whether you are playing them or not.
•
Classic Velocity: The pads will be unlit while you are not playing them. When you press them, they will light
with colors according to the velocity: red indicates a high velocity, yellow indicates a low velocity.
•
Fixed: The pads will be lit with their assigned colors whether you are playing them or not.
•
Off->Velocity: The pads will be unlit when you are not playing them. When you press them, they will light with
their assigned color with a brightness that corresponds with the velocity.
•
Dim->Velocity: The pads will be dimly lit when you are not playing them. When you press them, they will light
with their assigned color with a brightness that corresponds with the velocity.
•
Bright->Velocity: The pads will be brightly lit when you are not playing them. When you press them, they will
light with their assigned color with a brightness that corresponds with the velocity.
Use the Empty Pads field in the upper-left corner to set how empty pads will display:
•
Empty pads off: Pads without any sounds will remain off.
•
Empty pads dim: Pads without any sounds will remain more dimly lit than pads with sounds assigned.
•
Empty pads normal: Pads without any sounds will appear the same as pads with sounds assigned.
328
Use the Single Pad/All Pads select to determine whether you are setting the color for a Single Pad or All Pads.
Tip: To quickly assign that color to all pads in the track, press and hold Shift while tapping a color button.
Use the color buttons to select which color you are assigning.
Tip: To select the color button corresponding to a specific pad’s color, press and hold Shift, and then press the
pad or tap it on the screen.
Press a pad on your MPC hardware or tap it on the screen to assign the selected color to it.
Tap Make Default to make the current pad color settings the defaults for all tracks on the same type (e.g., drum tracks,
keygroup tracks, etc.). In the window that appears, tap Do It to confirm your choice or Cancel to cancel.
329
Looper
The Looper lets you record and overdub audio in real time—a great tool for live performance as well as
spontaneous moments in the studio. You can export the loop as a sample to use in your project.
To open the Looper, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu and then navigate to Looper on the second page of modes and tap it.
•
Press Shift and Sampler/Looper (MPC X, MPC One).
Below is a brief step-by-step process so you can get started quickly. Continue reading the rest of this chapter to learn
how to use the Looper in different cases.
To get started using the Looper:
1.
Make sure to reduce the volume levels of your audio source and speakers/headphones/monitors before you make
any connections to avoid “pops” or feedback.
2.
Connect your audio source to the input/inputs of your MPC hardware.
For line-level devices such as a synthesizer, set the Line/Inst switch to Line; for instrument-level devices such as
a guitar, set the switch to Inst.
If you are using a microphone that requires phantom power, set the +48V switch to On.
3.
Turn the Gain knob to set the input level while playing your audio source. You should now see the level in the
meter. Make sure it does not exceed the maximum level (the meter should not be “peaking” constantly).
4.
Set the recording controls as desired (described in this chapter).
5.
If the Sync button at the top of the screen is enabled, Looper recording will only be active during sequence
playback. Tap it to disable transport sync, allowing you to freely record with the Looper.
6.
Tap the Record To selector so Overdub is selected.
7.
Tap the Rec/Record button in the lower-right corner to record-arm the Looper.
8.
Play your audio source. The Looper will start recording immediately when the input level reaches the threshold
value. Alternatively, tap
/Play at the bottom of the screen to manually start recording.
Each time the Looper repeats, its contents are being overdubbed—a new layer of audio will be added each time
you let the Looper repeat as it records.
Tip: You can record a loop while playing one or more tracks in the background for reference.
9.
Tap
/Play at the bottom of the screen to stop recording.
Tap Export to Track, or hold Shift and tap Export to Pad, to open the Keep or Discard Sample window and
export your loop as a sample to a track or pad.
Tap Clear to clear the contents of the Looper.
330
The upper-left Input Source field defines whether you are going to record an external
audio signal, which you can set to the pair of inputs (Input 1,2) or a single input (Input 1–
2). You can also select an internal signal from within your MPC hardware (Resample L,
Resample R, or Resample L+R).
Resampling does not require an audio connection because the source is internal and is
therefore recorded without any loss in audio quality. You can, for example, use Resample
to record two or more samples by pressing the corresponding pads simultaneously.
Use the second upper-left Mono/Stereo field to choose whether your recorded loop will
be monaural (Mono) or binaural (Stereo).
The Inserts field shows any enabled or disabled effects for the Looper. Tap the area
under Inserts to open a window where you can load, change, and enable or disable the
effects.
Important: These effects are applied to the audio as you record it. This means that the
effects cannot be “removed” from the sound later. Learn more about how effects work in
General Features > Effects.
Tap the Monitor button to enable or disable input monitoring.
When set to In, the audio you hear in your headphones will be taken before it reaches the Looper, ensuring zero
latency. You can turn input monitoring on only if the Input Source field is set to an input, not to a Resample setting.
When set to Off, the audio you hear in your headphones will be taken after it is processed in the Looper, so there
may be some latency, but you will hear the audio source as it sounds in the recording.
Tip: To avoid possible clicks or feedback while input monitoring, reduce the level of the audio sources.
Use the threshold slider to adjust the threshold. Alternatively, turn Knob 1 when the knobs are set to screen mode.
The threshold slider will work only when Sync is off (see below).
When the Looper is record-armed, it automatically starts recording when the level of the incoming source exceeds this
setting. If you set it too high, the recording may not start when you play the input source, or the start of the material
you wanted to record may be missing. If you set it too low, the recording may start too early, before you play the
external source. Set this parameter to an appropriate level using the level meter.
To reset the “peak hold,” which shows the highest level of your input signal in the level meter, tap it.
Use the Bars field to define the length of your loop. Regardless
of how much or how little audio you record, this is how long your
loop will be.
Use the Sync button to sync or un-sync the looper with transport playback. When on, the Looper will stay in step with
your project. When you play or record into the Looper, it will wait until the transport starts playing to start.
Use the Record To selector to determine the loop recording behavior:
•
Play: Before recording, you must first tap the
/Play button on the screen, which will start playing the Looper.
•
Overdub: Before recording, you must first tap the Rec/Record button in the lower-right corner to record-arm the
Looper.
Use the Output Gain slider to set the output signal level of the Looper.
331
To record with the Looper:
Important:
To record without erasing any audio you’ve already recorded in the loop, use the Overdub button.
To overwrite the audio you’ve already recorded, use the Replace button.
If Record To is set to Play:
To start recording, tap the Replace or Overdub button as the loop is playing. The Looper will start recording
immediately.
To stop recording, tap the Replace or Overdub button. The Looper will stop recording but continue playing.
To stop playback and recording, tap the
/Play button.
If Record To is set to Overdub:
To start recording, tap the
/Play button on the screen.
If Sync is off, you can also play your audio source so that the input level reaches the threshold value.
If Sync is on, you can also press the Play or Play Start button to start transport playback; recording will
start when the transport starts playing.
To stop recording, tap Overdub. The Looper will stop recording but continue playing.
To stop playback and recording, tap the
/Play button, or press Stop to stop transport playback.
To play or stop the loop (without recording), tap the
/Play button on the screen.
To reverse loop playback, tap Reverse. If Sync is on, playback will reverse once the Looper’s playhead reaches the
end of the loop. If Sync is off, playback will reverse immediately.
To erase the loop immediately, tap Clear.
332
To export the loop to an audio track:
1.
Tap Export to Track to open the Looper Export
window.
2.
Use the Audio Track field to select the audio track you
would like to export the sample to.
3.
Tap Export to Track to confirm your choice, or Cancel
to cancel.
When your loop is done exporting, it is assigned to the
track you selected.
To export the loop to a pad:
1.
Press and hold Shift and tap Export to Pad at the
bottom of the screen to open the Keep or Discard
Sample window.
2.
Use the Track field to assign the new sample to a track.
Select <none> if you want to save it to the project
without assigning it to a track. You can also tap Save
at the bottom of the screen to save the sample to the
general sample pool.
Use the Assign to Pad field to assign the sample to a
pad in the track.
Use the Root Note field to set where the sample’s
original pitch will be on the keyboard.
If you recorded a sample while a sequence was playing, the Keep or Discard Sample window will show a few
more options after you select a pad:
Check the Add Event box to automatically add the sample to the currently playing sequence.
Use the At field to select where you want the event to start:
•
Start: The sample will be a note event at the start of the currently playing sequence.
•
Trigger: The sample will be a note event where you began recording it in the currently playing sequence.
3.
Tap Keep at the bottom of the screen to confirm your selections.
Tap Discard at the bottom of the screen to discard the recording and return to the Sampler.
Tap Play at the bottom of the screen to play the recording.
Tap Edit to save the sample and open Sample Edit Mode to edit your recorded sample.
333
Hardware Features
This chapter explains the features and functions of each MPC v3.6-supported model: MPC X / MPC X Special Edition,
MPC Live, MPC Live II, MPC One / MPC One+, MPC Key 61, and MPC Key 37.
MPC X / MPC X Special Edition
Note: Mentions of the features and functions of MPC X hardware throughout this guide also apply to the MPC X Special
Edition unless otherwise noted.
Top Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
21
28
29 30
32 33
34 35
36
37
38
39 40
41
42
43
44
47
48
49
50
51 52
53
54
55 55
45
45
46
44
31
23
24
25
26
27
22
12
15
11
13
16
17 18
19
20
14
334
Navigation & Data Entry Controls
1.
Touchscreen: This full-color multi-touch display shows information relevant to MPC X’s current operation. Touch
the touchscreen (and use the hardware controls) to control the MPC interface.
Tip: If you adjust the angle of the touchscreen, use the stand on its back panel to secure it in place.
2.
Cursors: Press these buttons to navigate through the fields of menus and options shown on the screen.
Press and hold Shift and press these buttons to zoom in or out of the Grid View or Audio Edit Mode. Press and
hold Shift and press the up and down cursors simultaneously or the left and right cursors simultaneously to
return to the default zoom setting.
3.
Data Dial: Use this dial to scroll through the available menu options or adjust the parameter values of the selected
field on the screen.
4.
–/+: Press these buttons to increase or decrease the value of the selected field on the screen.
5.
Numeric Keypad: If the selected field on the screen is a number, press these numbered buttons as you would on
a standard numeric keypad to enter a value. Press the keypad’s Enter to enter it. (A numeric keypad with additional
operations will appear on the screen, as well.)
6.
Undo/Redo: Press this button to undo your last action.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to redo the last action you undid.
7.
Shift: Press and hold this button to access some buttons’ secondary functions (indicated by red writing).
Double-press this button to see which buttons have secondary functions—the buttons will flash for a few seconds.
8.
F-Key: Press this button to activate or deactivate the F-Key feature. When active, the six buttons under the
touchscreen correspond to the options shown at the bottom edge of the screen. The F-Key button and those six
buttons will be lit red when active. When inactive, the six buttons under the touchscreen will access their normal
modes instead (Menu, Browser, Step Seq, Sampler, XYFX, and Looper).
Pad & Q-Link Controls
9.
Q-Link Knobs: Turn these touch-sensitive knobs to adjust various parameters and settings. The display strip
above each knob indicates the parameter it is controlling. If the display strip shows a meter to indicate its value,
you can touch or turn its Q-Link knob to temporarily show its precise numerical value.
10.
Pads: Press these pads to trigger drum hits or other samples in your software. The pads are velocity-sensitive and
pressure-sensitive, which makes them very responsive and intuitive to play. The pads will light up different colors,
depending on how hard you play them (ranging from yellow at a low velocity to red at the highest velocity). You
can also customize their colors.
11.
Pad Bank: Press these buttons to access Pad Banks A–D.
Press and hold Shift while pressing these buttons to access Pad Banks E–H. Alternatively, double-press one of
these buttons.
12.
Copy/Delete: Press this button to copy one pad to another. When the From Pad field is selected, press the
“source” pad (the pad you want to copy). When the To Pad graphic (of all pads) is selected, press the “destination”
pad. You can select multiple destination pads, and you can select pads in different pad banks. Tap Do It to
continue or Close to return to the previous screen.
Tip: To quickly copy a pad, press and hold Copy, press the source pad, press the destination pad, and then
release Copy.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to delete a pad’s sample assignment. When the Delete Pad window is
shown, press any pad/pads whose sample assignments you want to clear. Tap Delete to continue or Cancel to
return to the previous screen.
13.
Full Level/Half Level: Press this button to activate or deactivate the Full Level feature. When activated, the pads
will always trigger their samples at the maximum velocity (127), regardless of how much force you use.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to activate or deactivate the Half Level feature. When activated,
the pads will always trigger their samples at half-velocity (64).
Press and hold this button to set a custom user level velocity that can be used in place of Half Level.
335
14.
16 Level / Pad Perform: Press this button to activate/deactivate 16 Level. When activated, the last pad that was hit
will be temporarily copied to all 16 pads. The pads will now output the same note number as the initial pad, but a
selectable parameter will be fixed at values that increase as the pad numbers increase (e.g., Pad 1 is the minimum,
Pad 16 is the maximum), regardless of how hard you press them. In the screen that appears, use the Type selector
to choose the parameter: Velocity, Tune, Filter, Layer, Attack or Decay. See Operation > General Features > 16
Level to learn more.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter Pad Perform mode for the pads. When activated, you can play
musical scales/modes, chords or progressions using the pads while in any mode.
See Operation > General
Features > Pad Perform to learn more.
15.
Note Repeat/Latch: Press and hold this button, and then press a pad to trigger that pad’s sample repeatedly. The
rate is based on the current tempo and Timing Correct settings.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to “latch” the Note Repeat feature. When latched, you do not have
to hold the Note Repeat button for it to be activated. Press Note Repeat once more to unlatch it.
16.
Project: Press this button to use the Q-Link knobs to adjust parameters related to the current project. Press and
hold Shift and then press this button to enter the Project Q-Link Edit Mode directly.
17.
Program: Press this button to use the Q-Link knobs to adjust parameters of the currently selected track or audio
track. Press and hold Shift and then press this button to enter the Track Q-Link Edit Mode directly.
18.
Pad Scene: Press this button to use the Q-Link knobs to adjust parameters that you have assigned for the currently
selected pad. Press and hold Shift and then press this button to enter the Pad Scene Q-Link Edit Mode directly.
19.
Pad Param: Press this button to use the Q-Link knobs to adjust one parameter across all 16 pads. Each Q-Link
knob corresponds to the pad with the same number and position in the 4-by-4 layout. Press and hold Shift and
then press this button to enter the Pad Param Q-Link Edit Mode directly.
20.
Screen Control/Edit: Press this button to use the Q-Link knobs to adjust parameters in the currently selected
mode as shown on the screen.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to enter Q-Link Edit Mode where you can assign other parameters
to the Q-Link knobs.
Note: See Operation > Modes > Q-Link Edit > Q-Links to learn about the different Q-Link modes.
Mode & View Controls
Note: See Operation > Modes to learn about the different modes you can access with these controls.
21.
Menu: Press this button to open the Menu. You can tap an option in the Menu to enter that mode, view, etc.
22.
Main/Track: Press this button to enter Main Mode.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to enter the Track View.
23.
Browse/Save: Press this button to view the Browser. The Browser lets you navigate your computer’s internal and
external hard disks to load samples, sequences, songs, etc. Using filter buttons and user-definable folders, you
can easily adapt it to your workflow. You can also preview samples before loading them.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to save the current project (including its samples, tracks, sequences, and
songs).
24.
Step Seq/List Edit: Press this button to view the Step Sequencer where you can create or edit sequences by
using the pads as “step buttons,” simulating the experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum machine.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view your sequences using the List Edit View instead of the Grid View.
25.
Sampler/Looper: Press this button to view the Sampler where you can record audio samples to use in your
projects.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view the Looper where you can record and overdub audio in real
time—a great tool for live performance as well as spontaneous moments in the studio. You can export the loop as
a sample to use in your project.
26.
XYFX: Press this button to view XYFX Mode, which turns the touchscreen into an XY pad where each axis
represents the range of an effect parameter. As you move touch or move your finger on the screen, the current
position will determine the current value of the two parameters. You can use this mode to create interesting effect
automation on your tracks.
336
27.
Pad Perform: Press this button to view Pad Perform Mode where you can assign musical scales/modes, chords,
or progressions to the pads for creative performance options.
28.
Prog Edit: Press this button to view Track Edit Mode, which contains all parameters for editing your tracks.
29.
Sample Edit: Press this button to view Sample Edit Mode where you can edit your samples using various functions
and processes.
30.
Pad Mixer: Press this button to view the Pad Mixer where you can set a track’s levels, stereo panning, routing,
and effects.
31.
Ch. Mixer: Press this button to view the Channel Mixer where you can set levels, stereo panning, and other settings
for your tracks, returns, submixes and main outputs.
32.
Track Mute/Pad Mute: Press this button to view Track Mute Mode where you can easily mute tracks within a
sequence or set mute groups for each track.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Pad Mute Mode where you can easily mute pads within a track
or set mute groups for each pad within a track.
33.
Next Seq/Song: Press this button to view Next Sequence Mode where you can trigger different sequences simply
by playing the pads. This is useful for live performances, letting you change a song’s structure in real time.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Song Mode where you can arrange sequences in a specific
order and/or repetition to create songs. You can edit the structure of a song during playback for easy, on-the-fly
composing.
Transport & Recording Controls
34.
Play: Press this button to play the sequence from the audio pointer’s current position.
35.
Play Start: Press this button to play the sequence from its start point.
36.
Stop: Press this button to stop playback. You can double-press this button to silence audio that is still sounding
once a note stops playing. Quickly pressing this button three times will function as a “MIDI panic” and shut off all
voices and stop all audio processing.
37.
Rec: Press this button to record-arm the sequence. Press Play or Play Start to start recording. Recording in this
way (as opposed to using Overdub) erases the events of the current sequence. After the sequence plays through
once while recording, Overdub will be enabled.
38.
Overdub: Press this button to enable Overdub. When enabled, you can record events in a sequence without
overwriting any previously recorded events. You can enable Overdub before or during recording.
39.
</> (Event |</>|): Use these buttons to move the audio pointer left or right, one step at a time.
Press and hold Locate and press one of these buttons to move the audio pointer to the previous/next event in the
sequence grid.
40.
<</>> (Start/End): Use these buttons to move the audio pointer left or right, one bar at a time.
Press and hold Locate and press one of these buttons to move the audio pointer to the start or end of the sequence
grid.
41.
Locate: Press and hold this button to activate the secondary functions of the </> and <</>> buttons (i.e., Event
|</>| and Start/End, respectively).
42.
Erase: As a sequence is playing, press and hold this button and then press a pad to delete the note event for that
pad at the current playback position. This is a quick way to delete note events from your sequence without having
to stop playback. See Operation > General Features > Erase to learn more.
43.
Tap/Master (Global): Press this button in time with the desired tempo to enter a new tempo (in BPM). You can
set how many taps are required in the Preferences (see Operation > General Features > Menu > Preferences
to learn how to do this).
Press and hold Shift and press this button to set whether the currently selected sequence follows its own tempo
(the button will be lit red) or a global tempo (the button will be lit amber).
337
I/O & Level Controls
44.
Gain 1/2: Use these knobs to adjust the gain of the incoming signal from Input 1/2 on the rear panel or Inst 1/2 on
the front panel. Use the Rear/Front switches below the knobs to determine the input. Use the level meter to check
the recording level. Be careful when setting this knob at higher levels, which can cause the signal to distort.
45.
Rear/Front: Use each switch to set whether the Gain 1/2 knob above it will control the gain of the input signal on
the rear panel (Input 1/2) or on the front panel (Inst 1/2).
46.
Phantom Power (+48V): This switch activates and deactivates phantom power for Input 1/2. When activated,
+48V of phantom power will be supplied to both inputs. Note that most dynamic microphones do not require
phantom power, while most condenser microphones do. Refer to your microphone’s documentation to check if it
needs phantom power.
47.
3/4 Rec Gain: Use this knob to adjust the gain of the incoming signal from Input 3/4 on the rear panel. Use the
level meter to check the recording level. Be careful when setting this knob at higher levels, which can cause the
signal to distort.
48.
Master (Main): Turn this knob to adjust the volume level of the Main L/R outputs.
49.
Direct/Main: Turn this knob to adjust the balance between the input and output signals in the headphones.
Direct corresponds to the input signal—all devices connected to the inputs on the front and rear panels. While
recording, you can turn this knob all the way to Direct for zero-latency direct monitoring.
Main corresponds to the output signal—the signal sent from the Main L/R outputs on the rear panel. When
you are not recording, we recommend turning this knob all the way to the Main position to hear the full-volume
playback signal.
50.
Stereo/Mono: Use this switch to set whether the signal in the headphones is binaural (Stereo) or monaural (Mono).
When set to Stereo, the headphone signal will be split so that the input signal (Direct) is heard in the left ear while
the output signal (Main) is heard in the right ear. When set to Mono, the input and output signals are blended into
a single, summed mix, which is heard in both ears.
51.
Rec Arm: Press this button to arm or disarm recording for the currently selected audio track, shown in the display
strip below the level meters.
52.
Read/Write: Press this button to toggle the automation state for the current track between Read (green R) and
Write (red W). The display strip below the level meters must show a track.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to turn off global automation.
53.
Mute: Press this button to mute the track or main output shown in the display strip below the level meters.
54.
Solo: Press this button to solo the currently selected track shown in the display strip below the level meters.
55.
Level Meters: These meters indicate the level of the audio signal shown in the display strip below them.
Note: See Operation > General Features > Menu > Preferences to learn how to set what is shown in the level
meters.
338
Front Panel
1.
SD Card Slot: Insert a standard SD/SDHC card into this slot to access its files directly using MPC X.
2.
Footswitch Inputs (FS 1/2) (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Connect optional 1/4” (6.35 mm) TS footswitches to these inputs.
3.
Instrument Inputs (Inst 1/2) (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TS cables to connect these inputs to
audio sources (guitars, bass, etc.). To use each of these inputs, set the corresponding Rear/Front switch (below
the Gain 1/2 knob on the top panel) to Front.
4.
Mix Knob: Turn this knob to adjust the balance between the Main and 3/4 signals in your headphones. Main is
the signal sent from the Main L/R outputs. 3/4 is the signal sent from the Outputs 3/4.
5.
Headphone Outputs (1/8” or 1/4” / 3.5 mm or 6.35 mm): Connect your headphones (not included) to either or
both of these standard stereo outputs. Use the Mix Knob to determine what signal is heard in the headphones.
Turn the Headphone Volume knob to set the volume level.
6.
Headphone Volume: Turn this knob to adjust the volume of the headphone outputs.
1
2
3
4
5
6
339
Rear Panel
1.
Power Input: Use the included power adapter to connect MPC X to a power outlet. This must be connected to a
power outlet in order for MPC X to power on.
2.
Power Adapter Restraint: Secure the power adapter cable to this restraint to prevent it from accidentally unplugging.
3.
Power Switch: Press this button to turn MPC X’s power on or off. While powered on, press and hold this button
for 5 seconds to force MPC X to power off (similar to a computer).
4.
USB-B Port: Use the included USB cable to connect this USB 3.0 port to an available USB 3.0 port on your
computer. This connection allows MPC X to send/receive MIDI and audio data to/from the MPC software on your
computer. It also allows any connected USB drives, SD cards, and drives connected to the internal SATA port to
mount on your computer if MPC X is in Controller Mode (i.e., your computer can access these storage devices that
are connected to your MPC X).
5.
USB-A Ports: Connect USB flash drives to these USB ports to access their files directly using MPC X. MPC X
supports read and write capability for exFAT, FAT32, NTFS, and EXT4 file systems as well as read-only capability
for HFS+ file systems. (We recommend using an exFAT file system as it is the most robust one supported by both
Windows and macOS.) These USB ports supply power to connected USB devices and can also be used to receive
MIDI messages from external USB MIDI devices.
6.
Inputs 1/2 (XLR or 1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard XLR or 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these inputs to
audio sources (microphone, mixer, synthesizer, etc.). To use each of these inputs, set the corresponding
Rear/Front switch (below the Gain 1/2 knob on the top panel) to Rear. Turn the Gain 1/2 knobs to set the input
level of each one.
Note: When using the XLR connection, the mic pre-amp is automatically engaged. When using a 1/4” (6.35 mm)
TRS cable, the mic pre-amp is bypassed.
7.
Inputs 3/4 (1/4” / 6.35 mm or RCA): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables or stereo RCA cables to connect
these inputs to audio sources (mixer, turntable, synthesizer, etc.). To use the 1/4” (6.35 mm) inputs, set the
Phono/Line switch to Line. To use the RCA inputs, set the Phono/Line switch to Phono. Turn the 3/4 Rec Gain
knob to set their input levels.
8.
Phono/Line Switch: Set this switch to the appropriate position, depending on which Input 3/4 connectors you
want to use. If you are using the 1/4” (6.35 mm) inputs, set this switch to Line. If you are using the RCA inputs, set
this switch to Phono to provide the additional amplification needed for phono-level signals.
9.
Grounding Terminal: If you are sending a phono-level turntable signal to the Input 3/4 RCA connectors and are
hearing a low hum or buzz, it could mean that the turntable is not grounded. If the turntable has a grounding wire,
connect it to this terminal.
Note: Some turntables have a grounding wire built into the RCA connection and, therefore, nothing needs to be
connected to the grounding terminal.
10.
Main L/R Outputs (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these outputs to your
speaker system. The signal sent out of these outputs is the main mix. Turn the Master knob to set their volume.
Tip: To route a track to these outputs, set its routing to Out 1,2 in the Channel Mixer when the Mixer field is set
to Tracks. See Operation > Modes > Channel Mixer to learn more about this.
11.
Outputs 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these outputs to an
external mixer. The signal sent from these outputs is full-volume (0 dB).
Tip: To route a track to these outputs, set its routing to Out 1,2, Out 5,6, or Out 7,8 (respectively) in the Channel
Mixer when the Mixer field is set to Tracks. See Operation > Modes > Channel Mixer to learn more about this.
12.
MIDI In: Use standard 5-pin MIDI cables to connect these inputs to the MIDI outputs of optional external MIDI
devices.
13.
MIDI Out: Use standard 5-pin MIDI cables to connect these outputs to the MIDI inputs of optional external MIDI
devices.
14.
CV/Gate Out: Use standard 1/8” (3.5 mm) TS cables to connect these outputs to optional external sequencers.
MPC X will send control voltage (CV) and/or Gate data over this connection.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
340
MPC Live
Top Panel
1.
Touchscreen: This full-color multi-touch display shows information relevant to MPC Live’s current operation.
Touch the touchscreen (and use the hardware controls) to control the MPC interface.
2.
Data Dial: Use this dial to scroll through the available menu options or adjust the parameter values of the selected
field on the screen. Pressing the dial also functions as an Enter button.
3.
Q-Link Knobs: Use these touch-sensitive knobs to adjust various parameters and settings. The knobs can control
one group of parameters at a time. The lights below the Q-Link button indicate the currently selected column of Q-
Link knobs. Press the Q-Link button to change which parameter or group of parameters they currently control.
4.
Q-Link Button: Press this button to change which parameter or group of parameters the Q-Link knobs currently
control (indicated by the lights above the Q-Link knobs). Each press will select the next column of Q-Link knobs.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to select the previous column of Q-Link knobs instead.
Press and hold this button to show the QLink window over the touchscreen’s current contents. These are the same
parameters and settings as what is shown in Q-Link Edit Mode. You can tap Q-Link Edit at the bottom of the window
to enter Q-Link Edit Mode immediately (see Operation > Modes > Q-Link Edit Mode to learn about this).
5.
Pads: Press these pads to trigger drum hits or other samples in your software. The pads are velocity-sensitive and
pressure-sensitive, which makes them very responsive and intuitive to play. The pads will light up different colors,
depending on how hard you play them (ranging from yellow at a low velocity to red at the highest velocity). You
can also customize their colors.
6.
Pad Bank: Press any of these buttons to access Pad Banks A–D.
Press and hold Shift while pressing any of these buttons to access Pad Banks E–H. Alternatively, double-press
one of these buttons.
7.
Note Repeat/Latch: Press and hold this button, and then press a pad to trigger that pad’s sample repeatedly. The
rate is based on the current tempo and Timing Correct settings.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to “latch” the Note Repeat feature. When latched, you do not have
to hold the Note Repeat button for it to be activated. Press Note Repeat once more to unlatch it.
341
8.
Full Level/Half Level: Press this button to activate or deactivate the Full Level feature. When activated, the pads
will always trigger their samples at the maximum velocity (127), regardless of how much force you use.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to activate or deactivate the Half Level feature. When activated,
the pads will always trigger their samples at half-velocity (64).
Press and hold this button to set a custom user level velocity that can be used in place of Half Level.
9.
16 Level / Pad Perform: Press this button to activate/deactivate 16 Level. When activated, the last pad that was hit
will be temporarily copied to all 16 pads. The pads will now output the same note number as the initial pad, but a
selectable parameter will be fixed at values that increase as the pad numbers increase (e.g., Pad 1 is the minimum,
Pad 16 is the maximum), regardless of how hard you press them. In the screen that appears, use the Type selector
to choose the parameter: Velocity, Tune, Filter, Layer, Attack or Decay. See Operation > General Features > 16
Level to learn more.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter Pad Perform mode for the pads. When activated, you can play
musical scales/modes, chords or progressions using the pads while in any mode. See Operation > General
Features > Pad Perform to learn more.
10.
Erase: As a sequence is playing, press and hold this button and then press a pad to delete the note event for that
pad at the current playback position. This is a quick way to delete note events from your sequence without having
to stop playback. See Operation > General Features > Erase to learn more.
11.
Shift: Press and hold this button to access some buttons’ secondary functions (indicated by gray writing).
Double-press this button to see which buttons have secondary functions—the buttons will flash for a few seconds.
12.
Menu/Browse: Press this button to open the Menu. You can tap an option in the Menu to enter that mode, view, etc.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to view the Browser. You can use the Browser to locate and select
tracks, samples, sequences, etc.
13.
Main/Track: Press this button to enter Main Mode.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to enter the Track View.
14.
Undo/Redo: Press this button to undo your last action.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to redo the last action you undid.
15.
Copy/Delete: Press this button to copy one pad to another. When the From Pad field is selected, press the
“source” pad (the pad you want to copy). When the To Pad graphic (of all pads) is selected, press the “destination”
pad. You can select multiple destination pads, and you can select pads in different pad banks. Tap Do It to
continue or Close to return to the previous screen.
Tip: To quickly copy a pad, press and hold Copy, press the source pad, press the destination pad, and then
release Copy.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to delete a pad’s sample assignment. When the Delete Pad window is
shown, press any pad/pads whose sample assignments you want to clear. Tap Delete to continue or Cancel to
return to the previous screen.
16.
–/+: Press these buttons to increase or decrease the value of the selected field on the screen.
17.
Play: Press this button to play the sequence from the audio pointer’s current position.
18.
Play Start: Press this button to play the sequence from its start point.
19.
Stop: Press this button to stop playback. You can double-press this button to silence audio that is still sounding
once a note stops playing. Quickly pressing this button three times will function as a “MIDI panic” and shut off all
voices and stop all audio processing.
20.
Rec: Press this button to record-arm the sequence. Press Play or Play Start to start recording. Recording in this
way (as opposed to using Overdub) erases the events of the current sequence. After the sequence plays through
once while recording, Overdub will be enabled.
21.
Overdub: Press this button to enable Overdub. When enabled, you can record events in a sequence without
overwriting any previously recorded events. You can enable Overdub before or during recording.
22.
Tap/Master: Press this button in time with the desired tempo to enter a new tempo (in BPM). You can set how
many taps are required in the Preferences (see Operation > General Features > Menu > Preferences to learn
how to do this).
Press and hold Shift and press this button to set whether the currently selected sequence follows its own tempo
(the button will be lit red) or a global tempo (the button will be lit amber).
342
Rear Panel
1.
Power Input: Use the included power adapter to connect MPC Live to a power outlet.
2.
Power Switch: Turns MPC Live’s power on/off.
3.
Charging Indicator: This light (behind the vent) will turn on when MPC Live’s internal battery is charging (when
the power input is connected to a power outlet). When the battery is fully charged or when it is disconnected from
a power outlet, then this light will turn off.
4.
USB-B Port: Use the included USB cable to connect this USB 3.0 port to an available USB 3.0 port on your
computer. This connection allows MPC Live to send/receive MIDI and audio data to/from the MPC software on
your computer. It also allows any connected USB drives, SD cards, and drives connected to the internal SATA
port to mount on your computer if MPC Live is in Controller Mode (i.e., your computer can access these storage
devices that are connected to your MPC Live).
5.
USB-A Ports: Connect USB flash drives to these USB ports to access their files directly using MPC Live. MPC
Live supports read and write capability for exFAT, FAT32, NTFS, and EXT4 file systems as well as read-only
capability for HFS+ file systems. (We recommend using an exFAT file system as it is the most robust one supported
by both Windows and macOS.) These USB ports supply power to connected USB devices and can also be used
to receive MIDI messages from external USB MIDI devices.
6.
SD Card Slot: Insert a standard SD/SDHC card into this slot to access its files directly using MPC Live.
7.
Rec Vol: Turn this knob to adjust the gain of the incoming signal from the 1/4” (6.35 mm) and RCA inputs. Be
careful when setting this knob at higher levels, which can cause the signal to distort.
8.
Master Vol: Turn this knob to adjust the volume of Output 1/2 and the phones output.
9.
Inputs (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these inputs to audio sources
(microphone, mixer, synthesizer, etc.). To use these inputs, set the Line/Phono switch to Line. Turn the Rec Vol
knob to set their input levels.
10.
Inputs (RCA): Use a standard RCA stereo cable to connect these inputs to a phono-level audio source like a turntable.
To use these inputs, set the Line/Phono switch to Phono. Turn the Rec Vol knob to set their input levels.
11.
Line/Phono Switch: Set this switch to the appropriate position, depending on which inputs you want to use. If
you are using the RCA inputs, set this switch to Phono to provide the additional amplification needed for phono-
level signals. If you are using the 1/4” (6.35 mm) inputs, such as a keyboard or a sampler, set this switch to Line.
12.
Grounding Terminal: If using phono-level turntables with a grounding wire, connect the grounding wire to these
terminals. If you experience a low “hum” or “buzz,” this could mean that your turntables are not grounded.
Note: Some turntables have a grounding wire built into the RCA connection and, therefore, nothing needs to be
connected to the grounding terminal.
13.
Outputs (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these outputs to your speaker
system, external mixer, etc. The signal sent out of the Master L/R outputs is the main mix. Turn the Master Vol
knob to set their volume. The signals sent from Outputs 3–6 are full-volume (0 dB).
Tip: To route a track to these outputs, set its routing to Out 1,2, Out 3,4, or Out 5,6 (respectively) in the Channel
Mixer when the Mixer field is set to Tracks. See Operation > Modes > Channel Mixer to learn more about this.
14.
Phones (1/8” / 3.5 mm): Connect standard 1/8” (3.5 mm) stereo headphones to this output. Turn the Master Vol
knob to set the volume level.
15.
MIDI In: Use standard 5-pin MIDI cables to connect these inputs to the MIDI outputs of optional external MIDI
devices.
16.
MIDI Out: Use standard 5-pin MIDI cables to connect these outputs to the MIDI inputs of optional external MIDI
devices.
17.
Kensington
®
Lock Slot: You can use this slot to secure your MPC Live to a table or other surface.
343
MPC Live II
Top Panel
1.
Touchscreen: This full-color multi-touch display shows information relevant to MPC Live II’s current operation.
Touch the display (and use the hardware controls) to control the MPC interface.
2.
Data Dial: Use this dial to scroll through the available menu options or adjust the parameter values of the selected
field in the display. Pressing the dial also functions as an Enter button.
3.
Q-Link Knobs: Use these touch-sensitive knobs to adjust various parameters and settings. The knobs can control
one column of parameters at a time. The lights above the Q-Link Knobs indicate the currently selected column.
Press the Q-Link button above them to change which column of parameters they currently control.
4.
Q-Link Button: Press this button to change which column of parameters the Q-Link Knobs currently control
(indicated by the lights above the Q-Link Knobs). Each press will select the next column.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to select the previous column instead.
Press and hold this button to show the QLink window over the touchscreen’s current contents. These are the same
parameters and settings as what is shown in Q-Link Edit Mode. You can tap Q-Link Edit at the bottom of the window
to enter Q-Link Edit Mode immediately (see Operation > Modes > Q-Link Edit Mode
to learn about this).
5.
Pads: Use these pads to trigger drum hits or other samples. The pads are velocity-sensitive and pressure-sensitive,
which makes them very responsive and intuitive to play. The pads will light up different colors, depending on how hard
you play them (ranging from yellow at a low velocity to red at the highest velocity). You can also customize their colors.
6.
Pad Bank Buttons: Press any of these buttons to access Pad Banks A–D. Press and hold Shift while pressing
any of these buttons to access Pad Banks E–H. Alternatively, double-press one of these buttons.
7.
Note Repeat / Latch: Press and hold this button, and then press a pad to trigger that pad’s sample repeatedly.
The rate is based on the current tempo and Timing Correct settings.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to “latch” the Note Repeat feature. When latched, you do not have
to hold the Note Repeat button for it to be activated. Press Note Repeat once more to unlatch it.
8.
Full Level / Half Level: Press this button to activate/deactivate Full Level. When activated, the pads will always
trigger their samples at the maximum velocity (127), regardless of the amount of force you use.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to activate/deactivate Half Level. When activated, the pads will
always trigger their samples at half-velocity (64).
Press and hold this button to set a custom user level velocity that can be used in place of Half Level.
1
2
3
3
3
3
4
5
6666
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 18
19
20
21
21
22
17
29
344
9.
16 Level / Pad Perform: Press this button to activate/deactivate 16 Level. When activated, the last pad that was
hit will be temporarily copied to all 16 pads. The pads will now output the same note number as the initial pad, but
a selectable parameter will be fixed at values that increase as the pad numbers increase (e.g., Pad 1 is the
minimum, Pad 16 is the maximum), regardless of how hard you press them. In the screen that appears, use the
Type selector to choose the parameter: Velocity, Tune, Filter, Layer, Attack or Decay. See Operation > General
Features > 16 Level to learn more.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to activate/deactivate Pad Perform mode for the pads. When activated,
you can play musical scales/modes, chords or progressions using the pads while in any mode. Use the Pad
Perform
window to configure the settings for the pads.
10.
Erase: As a Sequence is playing, press and hold this button and then press a pad to delete the note event for that
pad at the current playback position. This is a quick way to delete note events from your sequence without having
to stop playback. When playback is stopped, press this button to open the Erase window where notes, automation
and other sequence data can be erased from the sequence. See Operation > General Features > Erase to learn
more.
11.
Undo / Redo: Press this button to undo your last action. Hold down Shift and press this button to redo the last
action you undid.
12.
Copy / Delete: Press this button to copy one pad to another. When the From Pad field is selected, press the
“source” pad (the pad you want to copy). When the To Pad graphic (of all pads) is selected, press the “destination”
pad. You can select multiple destination pads, and you can select pads in different pad banks. Tap Do It to
continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to delete.
13.
Step Seq/Automation: Press this button to view Step Sequencer mode where you can create or edit sequences
by using the pads as "step buttons," simulating the experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum machine.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to toggle the Global Automation state between Read and Write.
14.
TC / On/Off: Press this button to open the Timing Correct (TC) window, which contains various settings to help
quantize the events in your sequence.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to turn Timing Correct on and off.
15.
Shift: Press and hold this button to access some buttons’ secondary functions (indicated by gray writing).
Double-press this button to see which buttons have secondary functions—the buttons will flash for a few seconds.
16.
Menu / Browse: Press this button to open the mode Menu. You can tap an option on the Menu screen to enter
that mode, view, etc.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to view the Browser. You can use the Browser to locate and select
tracks, samples, sequences, etc.
17.
Main / Grid: Press this button to enter Main Mode.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to enter Grid View mode.
18.
Mix / Sampler: Press this button to view the last used Mixer Mode, either Channel Mixer (default) or Pad Mixer.
In Channel Mixer Mode, you can set levels, stereo panning, and other settings for your tracks, returns, submixes,
and main outputs. In Pad Mixer Mode, you can set a track’s levels, stereo panning, routing, and effects. Pressing
the button multiple times will toggle between the two Mixer Modes.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to view the Sampler, where you can record audio samples to use
in your projects.
19.
Mute / Sample Edit: Press this button to view the last used Mute Mode, either Track Mute (default) or Pad Mute.
In Track Mute Mode, you can mute tracks within a sequence or set mute groups for each track. In Pad Mute Mode,
you can mute pads within a track or set mute groups for each pad within a track. Pressing the button multiple
times will toggle between the two Mute Modes.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to enter Sample Edit Mode where you can edit your samples
using various functions and processes.
20.
Next Seq / XYFX: Press this button to view Next Sequence Mode where you can trigger different sequences
simply by playing the pads. This is useful for live performances, letting you change a song’s structure in real time.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view XYFX Mode, which turns the touchscreen into an XY pad where
each axis represents the range of an effect parameter. As you move touch or move your finger on the touchscreen,
the current position will determine the current value of the two parameters. You can use this mode to create
interesting effect automation on your tracks.
21.
–/+: Press these buttons to decrease/increase the value of the selected field in the display.
345
22.
Tap Tempo / Master: Press this button in time with the desired tempo to enter a new tempo (in BPM). You can
set how many taps are required in the Preferences (see Operation > General Features > Menu > Preferences
to learn how to do this).
Press and hold Shift and press this button to set whether the currently selected sequence follows its own tempo
(the button will be lit amber) or a global tempo (the button will be lit red).
23.
Rec: Press this button to record-arm the sequence. Press Play or Play Start to start recording. Recording in this
way (as opposed to using Overdub) erases the events of the current sequence. After the sequence plays through
once while recording, Overdub will be enabled.
24.
Overdub: Press this button to enable Overdub. When enabled, you can record events in a Sequence without
overwriting any previously recorded events. You can enable Overdub before or during recording.
25.
Stop: Press this button to stop playback. You can double-press this button to silence audio that is still sounding
once a note stops playing. Press and hold Shift and press this button to stop playback and return the playhead to
1:1:0.
26.
Play: Press this button to play the sequence from the playhead’s current position.
27.
Play Start: Press this button to play the sequence from its start point.
28.
Master Vol: Turn this knob to adjust the volume of the Master L/R outputs, phones output and speakers.
29.
Speakers: When the Speaker switch on the rear panel is set to On, these speakers will play the current audio.
Use the Master Volume knob to control the volume of the speakers.
346
Rear Panel
1.
Power Input: Use the included power adapter to connect MPC Live II to a power outlet.
2.
Power Adapter Restraint: Secure the power adapter cable to this restraint to prevent it from accidentally
unplugging.
3.
Power Switch: Turns MPC Live II’s power on/off.
4.
Charging Indicator: This light (behind the vent) will turn on when MPC Live II’s internal battery is charging (when
the power input is connected to a power outlet). When the battery is fully charged or when it is disconnected from
a power outlet, then this light will turn off.
5.
Link: Connect a standard Ethernet cable to this port to use Ableton Link and other compatible devices with MPC
Live II. See Operation > General Features > Menu > Sync for more information.
Note: You can also use Ableton Link wirelessly over a Wi-Fi connection.
6.
USB-B Port: Use the included USB cable to connect this high-retention-force USB port to an available USB port
on your computer. This connection allows MPC Live II to send/receive MIDI and audio data to/from the MPC
software on your computer.
7.
USB-A Ports: Connect USB flash drives to these USB ports to access their files directly using MPC Live II. When
connected to a computer in Controller Mode, you can access drives connected to this port from your computer.
You can also connect standard MIDI controllers to these ports.
8.
SD Card Slot: Insert a standard SD, SDHC or SDXC card into this slot to access its files directly using MPC Live II.
9.
Rec Vol: Turn this knob to adjust the volume of the inputs.
10.
Inputs (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these inputs to an audio source
(mixer, synthesizer, drum machine, etc.). In Sample Record Mode, you can select whether you want to record
either channel or both channels in stereo or in mono. To use these inputs, set the Line/Phono switch to Line.
11.
Inputs (RCA): Use a standard RCA stereo cable to connect these inputs to a phono-level audio source like a
turntable. In Sample Record Mode, you can select whether you want to record either channel or both channels in
stereo or in mono. To use these inputs, set the Line/Phono switch to Phono.
12.
Line/Phono Switch: Set this switch to the appropriate position, depending on which inputs you want to use. If
you are using the RCA inputs, set this switch to Phono to provide the additional amplification needed for phono-
level signals. If you are using the 1/4” (6.35 mm) inputs, such as a CD player or sampler, set this switch to Line.
13.
Grounding Terminal: If using phono-level turntables with a grounding wire, connect the grounding wire to these
terminals. If you experience a low “hum” or “buzz,” this could mean that your turntables are not grounded.
Note: Some turntables have a grounding wire built into the RCA connection and, therefore, nothing needs to be
connected to the grounding terminal.
14.
Outputs (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these outputs to your monitors,
mixer, etc.). The Master L/R outputs are the same as Outputs 1,2.
15.
Phones (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Connect standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) stereo headphones to this output.
16.
Speaker On/Off: Use this switch to turn the MPC Live II internal speakers on or off.
17.
MIDI In: Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect these inputs to the MIDI output of an external MIDI device
(synthesizer, drum machine, etc.).
18.
MIDI Out: Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect these outputs to the MIDI input of an external MIDI device
(synthesizer, drum machine, etc.).
19.
CV/Gate Out: MPC Live II will send control voltage (CV) and/or Gate signals over these outputs to optional external
sequencers. Use standard 1/8” (3.5 mm) TS cables to send a single CV/Gate signal per output, or use a stereo TRS-
to-dual mono TSF breakout cable (such as a Hosa YMM-261) to send two CV/Gate signals per output.
20.
Kensington
®
Lock Slot: You can use this slot to secure your MPC Live II to a table or other surface.
1
2
3
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
14
14
15
16
17
4
5
6
347
MPC One / MPC One+
Note: Mentions of the features and functions of MPC One hardware throughout this guide also apply to the MPC One+
unless otherwise noted.
Top Panel
Navigation & Data Entry Controls
1.
Touchscreen: This full-color multi-touch display shows information relevant to MPC One’s current operation.
Touch the display (and use the hardware controls) to control the MPC interface.
2.
Data Dial: Use this dial to scroll through the available menu options or adjust the parameter values of the selected
field in the display. Pressing the dial also functions as an Enter button.
3.
–/+: Press these buttons to increase or decrease the value of the selected field in the display.
4.
Undo / Redo: Press this button to undo your last action.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to redo the last action you undid.
5.
Shift: Press and hold this button to access some buttons’ secondary functions (indicated by red writing).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
21
28
29
30
31
23 24
25
26
27
22
12
15
11
13
16
17
18
19
20
14
348
Pad & Q-Link Controls
6.
Pads: Use these pads to trigger drum hits or other samples. The pads are velocity-sensitive and pressure-sensitive,
which makes them very responsive and intuitive to play. The pads will light up different colors, depending on how
hard you play them (ranging from yellow at a low velocity to red at the highest velocity). You can also customize
their colors.
7.
Pad Bank Buttons: Press any of these buttons to access Pad Banks A–D. Press and hold Shift while pressing
any of these buttons to access Pad Banks E–H. Alternatively, double-press one of these buttons.
8.
Full Level / Half Level: Press this button to activate/deactivate Full Level. When activated, the pads will always
trigger their samples at the maximum velocity (127), regardless of the amount of force you use.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to activate/deactivate Half Level. When activated, the pads will
always trigger their samples at half-velocity (64).
Press and hold this button to set a custom user level velocity that can be used in place of Half Level.
9.
16 Level / Pad Perform (Notes):
Press this button to activate/deactivate 16 Level. When activated, the last pad that
was hit will be temporarily copied to all 16 pads. The pads will now output the same note number as the initial pad,
but a selectable parameter will be fixed at values that increase as the pad numbers increase (e.g., Pad 1 is the
minimum, Pad 16 is the maximum), regardless of how hard you press them. In the screen that appears, use the Type
selector to choose the parameter: Velocity, Tune, Filter, Layer, Attack or Decay.
See Operation > General
Features > 16 Level to learn more.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to enter Pad Perform (Notes) mode for the pads. When activated, you
can play musical scales/modes, chords or progressions using the pads while in any mode. See Operation >
General Features > Pad Perform o learn more.
10.
Copy / Delete: Press this button to copy one pad to another. When the From Pad field is selected, press the “source”
pad (the pad you want to copy). When the To Pad graphic (of all pads) is selected, press the “destination” pad. You
can select multiple destination pads, and you can select pads in different pad banks. Tap Do It to continue or Cancel
to return to the previous screen.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to delete.
11.
Note Repeat / Latch: Press and hold this button, and then press a pad to trigger that pad’s sample repeatedly.
The rate is based on the current tempo and Timing Correct settings.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to “latch” the Note Repeat feature. When latched, you do not have
to hold the Note Repeat button for it to be activated. Press Note Repeat once more to unlatch it.
12.
Q-Link Knobs: Use these touch-sensitive knobs to adjust various parameters and settings. The knobs can control
one column of parameters at a time. The lights above the Q-Link Knobs indicate the currently selected column.
Press the Q-Link button to change which column of parameters they currently control.
13.
Q-Link Button: Press this button to change which column of parameters the Q-Link Knobs currently control
(indicated by the lights above the Q-Link Knobs). Each press will select the next column.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to select the previous column instead.
Mode & View Controls
14.
Menu / Prefs: Press this button to open the mode Menu. You can tap an option on the Menu screen to enter that
mode, view, etc.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to open the Preferences page in the Menu.
15.
Main / Grid: Press this button to enter Main Mode.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to enter Grid View mode.
16.
Browse / Save: Press this button to view the Browser. You can use the Browser to locate and select tracks,
samples, sequences, etc.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to save the current project (including its samples, tracks,
sequences, and songs).
17.
Track Mix / Pad Mix: Press this button to view the Channel Mixer where you can set levels, stereo panning, and
other settings for your tracks, returns, submixes, and main outputs.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to view the Pad Mixer where you can set a track’s levels, stereo
panning, routing, and effects.
349
18.
Track Mute / Pad Mute: Press this button to view Track Mute Mode where you can easily mute tracks within a
sequence or set mute groups for each track.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Pad Mute Mode where you can easily mute pads within a track
or set mute groups for each pad within a track.
19.
Next Seq / XYFX: Press this button to view Next Sequence Mode where you can trigger different sequences
simply by playing the pads. This is useful for live performances, letting you change a song’s structure in real time.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view XYFX Mode, which turns the touchscreen into an XY pad where
each axis represents the range of an effect parameter. As you move touch or move your finger on the touchscreen,
the current position will determine the current value of the two parameters. You can use this mode to create
interesting effect automation on your tracks.
20.
Step Seq / Automation: Press this button to view Step Sequencer mode where you can create or edit sequences
by using the pads as "step buttons," simulating the experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum machine.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to toggle Global Automation between Read and Write.
21.
TC / On/Off: Press this button to open the Timing Correct (TC) window, which contains various settings to help
quantize the events in your sequence.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to turn Timing Correct on and off.
22.
Sampler / Looper: Press this button to view the Sampler where you can record audio samples to use in your
projects.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view the Looper where you can record and overdub audio in real
time—a great tool for live performance as well as spontaneous moments in the studio. You can export the loop as
a sample to use in your project.
23.
Sample Edit / Q-Link Edit: Press this button to view Sample Edit Mode where you can edit your samples using
various functions and processes.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Q-Link Edit Mode where you can assign other parameters to
the Q-Link knobs.
24.
Program Edit / MIDI Control: Press this button to view Track Edit Mode, which contains all parameters for editing
your tracks.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view MIDI Control Mode where you can customize what MIDI
messages are sent from certain controls on your hardware.
Transport & Recording Controls
25.
Rec: Press this button to record-arm the sequence. Press Play or Play Start to start recording. Recording in this
way (as opposed to using Overdub) erases the events of the current sequence. After the sequence plays through
once while recording, Overdub will be enabled.
26.
Overdub: Press this button to enable Overdub. When enabled, you can record events in a Sequence without
overwriting any previously recorded events. You can enable Overdub before or during recording.
27.
Stop: Press this button to stop playback. You can double-press this button to silence audio that is still sounding
once a note stops playing. Press and hold Shift and press this button to return the playhead to 1:1:0.
28.
Play: Press this button to play the sequence from the playhead’s current position.
29.
Play Start: Press this button to play the sequence from its start point.
30.
Tap Tempo / Master (Global): Press this button in time with the desired tempo to enter a new tempo (in BPM).
Press and hold Shift and press this button to set whether the currently selected sequence follows its own tempo
(the button will be lit amber) or a global tempo (the button will be lit red).
31.
Erase: As a Sequence is playing, press and hold this button and then press a pad to delete the note event for that
pad at the current playback position. This is a quick way to delete note events from your sequence without having
to stop playback. When playback is stopped, press this button to open the Erase window where notes, automation
and other sequence data can be erased from the sequence.
350
Front Panel
1.
SD Card Slot: Insert a standard SD, SDHC or SDXC card into this slot to access its files directly using MPC One.
2.
Phones (1/8” / 3.5 mm): Connect standard 1/8” (3.5 mm) stereo headphones to this output.
Rear Panel
1.
Power Input: Use the included power adapter to connect MPC One to a power outlet.
2.
Power Adapter Restraint: Secure the power adapter cable to this restraint to prevent it from accidentally
unplugging.
3.
Power Switch: Turns MPC One’s power on/off.
4.
Link: Connect a standard Ethernet cable to this port to use Ableton Link and other compatible devices with MPC
One. See Operation > General Features > Menu > Sync for more information.
Note: You can also use Ableton Link wirelessly over a Wi-Fi connection.
Note: Not available on MPC One+.
5.
USB-B Port: Use the included USB cable to connect this high-retention-MPC One USB port to an available USB
port on your computer. This connection allows MPC One to send/receive MIDI and audio data to/from the MPC
software on your computer.
6.
USB-A Port: Connect a USB flash drive to this USB port to access files directly using MPC One. You can also
connect a standard MIDI controller to this port.
7.
Rec Vol: Turn this knob to adjust the volume of the inputs.
8.
Inputs (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these inputs to an audio source
(mixer, synthesizer, drum machine, etc.). In Sample Record Mode, you can select whether you want to record
either channel or both channels in stereo or in mono.
9.
Master Vol: Turn this knob to adjust the volume of the outputs and phones output.
10.
Outputs (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these outputs to your monitors,
mixer, etc.
11.
MIDI In: Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect this input to the MIDI output of an external MIDI device
(synthesizer, drum machine, etc.).
12.
MIDI Out: Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect this output to the MIDI input of an external MIDI device
(synthesizer, drum machine, etc.).
13.
CV/Gate Outs: MPC One will send control voltage (CV) and/or Gate signals over these outputs to optional external
sequencers. Use standard 1/8” (3.5 mm) TS cables to send a single CV/Gate signal per output, or use a stereo TRS-
to-dual mono TSF breakout cable (such as a Hosa YMM-261) to send two CV/Gate signals per output.
14.
Kensington
®
Lock Slot: You can use this slot to secure your MPC One to a table or other surface.
1
2
1
2
3
45
6
7
8
9
10
12 11
13
14
351
MPC Key 61
Top Panel
1.
Display: This full-color multi-touch display shows information relevant to MPC Key 61’s current operation. Touch
the display (and use the hardware controls) to control the MPC interface.
2.
Data Dial: Use this dial to scroll through the available menu options or adjust the parameter values of the selected
field on the display. Pressing the dial also functions as an Enter button.
3.
–/+: Press these buttons to increase or decrease the value of the selected field on the display.
4.
Q-Link Knobs: Use these touch-sensitive knobs to adjust various parameters and settings. The knobs can control
one column of parameters at a time. The lights above the Q-Link button indicate the currently selected column.
Press the Q-Link button to change which column of parameters they currently control.
5.
Q-Link Button: Press this button to change which column of parameters the Q-Link Knobs currently control
(indicated by the lights above the button). Each press will select the next column.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to view the Q-Link Configuration window. Press and hold Shift
and then press this button again to return to the Main page.
6.
</> (Event |</>|): Use these buttons to move the audio pointer left/right, one step at a time.
Press and hold Locate and press one of these buttons to move the audio pointer to the previous/next event in the
sequence grid.
7.
Locate: Press this button to open the Locate window, which allows you to quickly jump to specific points in your
project.
Press and hold this button to activate the secondary functions of the </> and <</>> buttons (i.e., Event |</>| and
Start/End, respectively).
8.
<</>> (Start/End): Use these buttons to move the audio pointer left/right, one bar at a time.
Press and hold Locate and press one of these buttons to move the audio pointer to the start or end of the sequence
grid.
9.
Rec / Recall: Press this button to record-arm the sequence. Press Play or Play Start to start recording. Recording
in this way (rather than using Overdub) erases the events of the current sequence. After the sequence plays through
once while recording, Overdub will be enabled.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to recall recently played MIDI note events when recording was disabled
and insert them into the current sequence.
10.
Overdub: Press this button to enable Overdub, which allows you to record note events in a sequence without
overwriting any previously recorded note events. You can enable Overdub either before or during recording.
11.
Stop / Return: Press this button to stop playback. Double-press this button to immediately stop all sound.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to stop playback and return the playhead to the Loop Start value.
12.
Play: Press this button to play the sequence from the audio pointer’s current position.
13.
Play Start: Press this button to play the sequence from its start point.
14.
Edit / XYFX: Press this button to view Track Edit Mode, which contains all parameters for editing your tracks.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view XYFX Mode, which turns the touchscreen into an XY pad where
each axis represents the range of an effect parameter. As you touch or move your finger on the touchscreen, the
current position will determine the current value of the two parameters. You can use this mode to create interesting
effect automation on your tracks.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
14
11
16
19 20
17 18
12 13
15
9
10
21 22 23
352
15.
Grid / Step Seq: Press this button to enter Grid View mode, where you can view and edit the note events of each
track of a sequence in a project and their velocities.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Step Sequencer mode where you can create or edit sequences
by using the pads as "step buttons," simulating the experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum machine.
16.
Mix / Pad: Press this button to view the Channel Mixer where you can set levels, stereo panning, and other
settings for your tracks, returns, submixes, and main outputs.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to view the Pad Mixer where you can set a track’s levels, stereo
panning, routing, and effects.
17.
Mute / Pad: Press this button to view Track Mute Mode where you can easily mute tracks within a sequence or
set mute groups for each track.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Pad Mute Mode where you can easily mute pads within a track
or set mute groups for each pad within a track.
18.
Automation Read/Write / Off: Press this button to toggle the Global Automation state between Read and Write.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to disable or enable Global Automation.
19.
Keyboard Control / MIDI CTRL: Press this button to view the Keyboard Control menu, where you can customize
the functions of the keyboard and wheels, including velocity response, routing, MIDI assignments, ranges and
more.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view MIDI Control Mode, where you can use the device as a MIDI
controller and customize what MIDI messages are sent from the hardware controls.
20.
Sample Edit / Sampler: Press this button to view Sample Edit Mode where you can edit your samples using
various functions and processes.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view the Sampler where you can record audio samples to use in your
projects.
21.
Timing Correct / On/Off: Press this button to open the Timing Correct (TC) window, which contains various
settings to help quantize the events in your sequence.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to turn Timing Correct on and off.
22.
Undo / Redo: Press this button to undo your last action.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to redo the last action you undid.
23.
Shift: Press and hold this button to access some buttons’ secondary functions (indicated by white writing).
353
24.
Menu / Browse: Press this button to open the mode Menu. You can tap an option on the Menu screen to enter
that mode, view, etc.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to view the Browser. You can use the Browser to locate and select
tracks, samples, sequences, etc.
25.
Main / Track: Press this button to view Main Mode.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Track View Mode, an overview of the tracks of each sequence.
You can also set key ranges in this mode.
26.
Sounds / Favorites: Press this button to view Sounds Mode, where you can browse MPC Key 61's built-in
instruments and presets.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Favorites, where you can quickly select instruments and presets
that you have defined as your favorites.
27.
Pads: Use these pads to trigger drum hits or other samples. The pads are velocity-sensitive and pressure-sensitive,
which makes them very responsive and intuitive to play. The pads will light up different colors, depending on the
current function. You can also customize their colors.
28.
Pad Bank Buttons: Press any of these buttons to access Pad Banks A–D. Press and hold Shift while pressing
any of these buttons to access Pad Banks E–H. Alternatively, double-press one of these buttons.
29.
Full Level / Half Level: Press this button to activate/deactivate Full Level. When activated, the pads will always
trigger their samples at the maximum velocity (127), regardless of the amount of force you use.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to activate/deactivate Half Level. When activated, the pads will always
trigger their samples at half-velocity (64).
Press and hold this button to set a custom user level velocity that can be used in place of Half Level.
30.
16 Level / Notes: Press this button to activate/deactivate 16 Level. When activated, the last pad that was hit will
be temporarily copied to all 16 pads. The pads will play the same sample as the original pad, but a selectable
parameter will increase in value with each pad number, regardless of the amount of force you use. In the screen
that appears, use the Type selector to choose another parameter: Velocity, Tune, Filter, Layer, Attack or Decay.
See Operation > General Features > 16 Level
to learn more.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to activate/deactivate Notes mode for the pads. When activated, you
can play musical scales/modes, chords or progressions using the pads while in any mode. Use the Pad Perform
window to configure the settings for the pads. See Operation > General Features > Pad Perform to learn more.
31.
Erase: As a Sequence is playing, press and hold this button and then press a pad or key to delete the note event
for that pad or key at the current playback position. This is a quick way to delete note events from your sequence
without having to stop playback. When playback is stopped, press this button to open the Erase window where
notes, automation and other sequence data can be erased from the sequence.
23 24
2526
28
27
29 30
32 31
35
34
33
43
36
39
37
41
40
38
42
44
45
354
32.
Copy / Delete: Press this button to copy one pad to another in Drum tracks. When the From Pad field is selected,
press the “source” pad (the pad you want to copy). When the To Pad graphic (of all pads) is selected, press the
“destination” pad. You can select multiple destination pads, and you can select pads in different pad banks. Tap
Do It to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to delete.
33.
Touch Strip: The touch strip can be used as an expressive control for playing and can be configured to control
Note Repeat, Pitch Bend, Modulation and more.
34.
Touch Strip / Config: Press this button to cycle between control modes for the Touch Strip. Press and hold the
button to quickly select one of the control modes.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view the Touch Strip Configuration window.
35.
Touch FX / Config: Press this button to enable Touch FX control for the Touch Strip. This allows you to control
parameters from the Touch FX plugin using the Touch Strip. Press and hold this button to quickly select a Touch
FX preset.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view the Touch FX Configuration window.
36.
Note Repeat / Latch: Press and hold this button, and then press a pad to trigger that pad’s sample repeatedly. The
rate is based on the current tempo and Timing Correct settings.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to “latch” the Note Repeat feature. When latched, you do not have to
hold the Note Repeat button for it to be activated. Press Note Repeat once more to unlatch it.
37.
Tap Tempo / Global: Press this button in time with the desired tempo to enter a new tempo (in BPM). Press and
hold this button to adjust the tempo manually using the data dial.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to set whether the currently selected sequence follows its own tempo
(the button will be lit white) or a global tempo (the button will be lit red).
38.
Metronome / Config: Press this button to enable or disable the Metronome (Click/Metro).
Press and hold Shift and press this button, or press and hold this button, to open the Metronome Configuration
window.
39.
Arp / Config: Press this button to enable or disable the internal Arpeggiator, whose rate is based on the current
Tempo and Time Division settings.
Press and hold Shift and press this button, or press and hold this button, to configure the Arpeggiator's settings.
40.
Latch: Press this button to enable or disable latch for the Arpeggiator. When latched, you do not have to hold the
keys for the arpeggiation to continue.
41.
Oct - / Oct +: Press these buttons to transpose the keyboard down or up one octave at a time. The lights below
this button will indicate the current octave setting.
Press and hold Shift and press these buttons to transpose the keyboard down or up one semitone at a time.
Press and hold both buttons and press a key on the keybed to set the transposition to that value.
Press and hold both buttons and release to reset the transposition.
42.
Keybed: Use this 61-key semi-weighted, velocity-sensitive keybed to input notes and aftertouch.
43.
Pitch Wheel: The pitch bend wheel is primarily used to bend the notes played on the keyboard up or down. This
allows you to play phrases not normally associated with keyboard playing, such as guitar-style riffs.
44.
Modulation Wheel: The modulation wheel is typically used to add variation for the sound you are playing. This
type of real-time controller was originally introduced on electronic keyboard instruments to give the performer
options such as adding vibrato, just like the players of acoustic instruments do.
45.
Main Volume: Turn this knob to adjust the volume of the outputs and phones output.
355
Rear Panel
1.
Power Input: Use the included power adapter to connect MPC Key 61 to a power outlet.
2.
Power Switch: Turns MPC Key 61’s power on and off.
3.
Network: Connect a standard Ethernet cable to this port to use Ableton Link and other compatible devices with
MPC Key 61. See Operation > General Features > Menu > Sync
for more information.
Note: You can also use Ableton Link wirelessly over a Wi-Fi connection.
4.
USB-B Port: Use the included USB cable to connect this high-retention-force USB port to an available USB port
on your computer. This connection allows MPC Key 61 to send/receive MIDI and audio data to/from the MPC
software on your computer.
5.
USB-A Ports: Connect a USB flash drive to these USB ports to access its files directly using MPC Key 61. You
can also connect any class-compliant MIDI device to these ports.
6.
Phones (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Connect standard stereo headphones to this output.
7.
Outputs (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard TRS cables to connect these outputs to your monitors, mixer, etc.). The
Main L/R outputs are the same as Outputs 1,2.
8.
Gain: Use these knobs to adjust the gain of the incoming signal from Input 1/2 on the rear panel. Be careful when
setting this knob at higher levels, as this can cause the signal to distort.
9.
Inputs 1/2 (XLR or 1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard XLR or TRS cables to connect these inputs to audio sources
(microphone, mixer, synthesizer, etc.). When using a 1/4” cable, the Mic preamp is removed from the circuit, and
the Line/Inst switch can be used to set the impedance.
Turn the Gain knobs to set the input level of each one.
10.
Line/Inst: Use these switches to set Inputs 1/2 to accept either a Line-level or Instrument-level sound source
when using a 1/4” connection.
11.
Phantom Power (+48V): This switch activates and deactivates phantom power for Inputs 1/2 when using an XLR
connection. When activated, +48V of phantom power will be supplied to both inputs. Note that most dynamic
microphones do not require phantom power, while most condenser microphones do. Refer to your microphone’s
documentation to check if it needs phantom power.
1
2
3
4
56
7
89
9
1010
11
7
8
356
12.
CV/Gate Out (1/8" / 3.5 mm, TS): MPC Key 61 will send control voltage (CV) and/or Gate signals over these outputs
to optional external synths or sequencers. Use standard 1/8” (3.5 mm) TS cables to send a single CV/Gate signal
per output.
13.
MIDI In: Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect these inputs to the MIDI output of an external MIDI device
(additional MIDI keyboard, pad controller, etc.).
14.
MIDI Out: Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect these outputs to the MIDI input of an external MIDI device
(synthesizer, drum machine, etc.).
15.
MIDI Thru: Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect this thru-port to the MIDI input of an external MIDI device
(synthesizer, drum machine, etc.). MIDI from the MIDI In will be sent through this output.
16.
Sustain (1/4” / 6.35 mm, TRS): This input accepts an optional momentary-contact foot pedal. When pressed, the
pedal will sustain the sound you are playing without having to keep your fingers pressed down on the keys.
17.
FS2 (1/4” / 6.35 mm, TRS): Connect an optional 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS footswitch or other foot pedal to this input.
18.
Expression (1/4” / 6.35 mm, TRS): Connect an optional expression pedal to this input for adding expressive
changes during performances.
357
MPC Key 37
Top Panel
1.
Display: This full-color multi-touch display shows information relevant to MPC Key 37’s current operation. Touch
the display (and use the hardware controls) to control the MPC interface.
2.
Data Dial: Use this dial to scroll through the available menu options or adjust the parameter values of the selected
field on the display. Pressing the dial also functions as an Enter button.
3.
–/+: Press these buttons to increase or decrease the value of the selected field on the display.
4.
Q-Link Knobs: Use these touch-sensitive knobs to adjust various parameters and settings. The knobs can control
one column of parameters at a time. The lights above the Q-Link button indicate the currently selected column.
Press the Q-Link button to change which column of parameters they currently control.
5.
Q-Link Button: Press this button to change which column of parameters the Q-Link Knobs currently control
(indicated by the lights above the button). Each press will select the next column.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to view the Q-Link Configuration window. Press and hold Shift
and then press this button again to return to the Main page.
6.
Rec: Press this button to record-arm the sequence. Press Play or Play Start to start recording. Recording in this way
(rather than using Overdub) erases the events of the current sequence. After the sequence plays through once while
recording, Overdub will be enabled.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to recall recently played MIDI note events when recording was disabled
and insert them into the current sequence.
7.
Overdub: Press this button to enable Overdub, which allows you to record note events in a sequence without
overwriting any previously recorded note events. You can enable Overdub either before or during recording.
8.
Stop: Press this button to stop playback. Double-press this button to immediately stop all sound.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to stop playback and return the playhead to the Loop Start value.
9.
Play: Press this button to play the sequence from the playhead’s current position.
10.
Play Start: Press this button to play the sequence from its start point.
11.
Sounds / Favorites: Press this button to view Sounds Mode, where you can browse MPC Key 37's built-in
instruments and presets.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Favorites, where you can quickly select instruments and presets
that you have defined as your favorites.
12.
Menu / Prefs: Press this button to open the mode Menu. You can tap an option on the Menu screen to enter that
mode, view, etc.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to open the Preferences page in the Menu.
13.
Main / Track: Press this button to view Main Mode.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Track View Mode, an overview of the tracks of each sequence.
You can also set key ranges in this mode.
358
14.
Edit / XYFX: Press this button to view Track Edit Mode, which contains all parameters for editing your tracks.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view XYFX Mode, which turns the touchscreen into an XY pad where
each axis represents the range of an effect parameter. As you touch or move your finger on the touchscreen, the
current position will determine the current value of the two parameters. You can use this mode to create interesting
effect automation on your tracks.
15.
Grid / Step Seq: Press this button to enter Grid View mode, where you can view and edit the note events of each
track of a sequence in a project and their velocities.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Step Sequencer mode where you can create or edit sequences
by using the pads as "step buttons," simulating the experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum machine.
16.
Mix / Pad: Press this button to view the Channel Mixer where you can set levels, stereo panning, and other
settings for your tracks, returns, submixes, and main outputs.
Press and hold Shift and then press this button to view the Pad Mixer where you can set a track’s levels, stereo
panning, routing, and effects.
17.
Undo / Redo: Press this button to undo your last action.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to redo the last action you undid.
18.
Automation / On/Off: Press this button to toggle the Global Automation state between Read and Write.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to disable or enable Global Automation.
19.
TC / On/Off: Press this button to open the Timing Correct (TC) window, which contains various settings to help
quantize the events in your sequence.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to turn Timing Correct on and off.
20.
Load / Looper: Press this button to view the Browser. You can use the Browser to locate and select tracks,
samples, sequences, etc.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view the Looper where you can record and overdub audio in real
time—a great tool for live performance as well as spontaneous moments in the studio. You can export the loop as
a sample to use in your project.
21.
Save / Save As: Press this button to save the current project.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to open the Save window.
22.
Sample Edit / Sampler: Press this button to view Sample Edit Mode where you can edit your samples using
various functions and processes.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view the Sampler where you can record audio samples to use in your
projects.
23.
Shift: Press and hold this button to access some buttons’ secondary functions (indicated by white writing).
24.
Arp / Config: Press this button to enable or disable the internal Arpeggiator, whose rate is based on the current
Tempo and Time Division settings.
Press and hold Shift and press this button, or press and hold this button, to configure the Arpeggiator's settings.
25.
Latch / Chord: Press this button to enable or disable latch for the Arpeggiator. When latched, you do not have to
hold the keys for the arpeggiation to continue.
Play a chord on the keyboard and then press and hold Shift and press this button to enable Chord Mode. Playing
any note will now play the full chord transposed to the new note with a single key press.
26.
Metronome / Config: Press this button to enable or disable the Metronome (Click/Metro).
Press and hold Shift and press this button, or press and hold this button, to open the Metronome Configuration
window.
27.
Keyboard Control / MIDI CTRL: Press this button to view the Keyboard Control menu, where you can customize
the functions of the keyboard and wheels, including velocity response, routing, MIDI assignments, ranges and
more.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view MIDI Control Mode, where you can use the device as a MIDI
controller and customize what MIDI messages are sent from the hardware controls.
28.
Tap Tempo / Global: Press this button in time with the desired tempo to enter a new tempo (in BPM). Press and
hold this button to adjust the tempo manually using the data dial.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to set whether the currently selected sequence follows its own tempo (the
button will be lit white) or a global tempo (the button will be lit red).
359
29.
Mute / Pad: Press this button to view Track Mute Mode where you can easily mute tracks within a sequence or
set mute groups for each track.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to view Pad Mute Mode where you can easily mute pads within a track
or set mute groups for each pad within a track.
30.
Pads: Use these pads to trigger drum hits or other samples. The pads are velocity-sensitive and pressure-sensitive,
which makes them very responsive and intuitive to play. The pads will light up different colors, depending on the
current function. You can also customize their colors.
31.
Pad Bank Buttons: Press any of these buttons to access Pad Banks A–D. Press and hold Shift while pressing
any of these buttons to access Pad Banks E–H. Alternatively, double-press one of these buttons.
32.
Full Level / Half Level: Press this button to activate/deactivate Full Level. When activated, the pads will always
trigger their samples at the maximum velocity (127), regardless of the amount of force you use.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to activate/deactivate Half Level. When activated, the pads will always
trigger their samples at half-velocity (64).
Press and hold this button to set a custom user level velocity that can be used in place of Half Level.
33.
16 Level / Notes: Press this button to activate/deactivate 16 Level. When activated, the last pad that was hit will
be temporarily copied to all 16 pads. The pads will play the same sample as the original pad, but a selectable
parameter will increase in value with each pad number, regardless of the amount of force you use. In the screen
that appears, use the Type selector to choose another parameter: Velocity, Tune, Filter, Layer, Attack or Decay.
See Operation > General Features > 16 Level
to learn more.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to activate/deactivate Notes mode for the pads. When activated, you
can play musical scales/modes, chords or progressions using the pads while in any mode. Use the Pad Perform
window to configure the settings for the pads. See Operation > General Features > Pad Perform to learn more.
34.
Note Repeat / Latch: Press and hold this button, and then press a pad to trigger that pad’s sample repeatedly. The
rate is based on the current tempo and Timing Correct settings.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to “latch” the Note Repeat feature. When latched, you do not have to
hold the Note Repeat button for it to be activated. Press Note Repeat once more to unlatch it.
360
35.
Copy / Delete: Press this button to copy one pad to another in Drum tracks. When the From Pad field is selected,
press the “source” pad (the pad you want to copy). When the To Pad graphic (of all pads) is selected, press the
“destination” pad. You can select multiple destination pads, and you can select pads in different pad banks. Tap
Do It to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
Press and hold Shift and press this button to delete.
36.
Erase: As a Sequence is playing, press and hold this button and then press a pad or key to delete the note event
for that pad or key at the current playback position. This is a quick way to delete note events from your sequence
without having to stop playback. When playback is stopped, press this button to open the Erase window where
notes, automation and other sequence data can be erased from the sequence.
37.
Oct - / Oct +: Press these buttons to transpose the keyboard down or up one octave at a time.
Press and hold Shift and press these buttons to transpose the keyboard down or up one semitone at a time.
Press and hold both buttons and press a key on the keybed to set the transposition to that value.
Press and hold both buttons and release to reset the transposition.
38.
Pitch Wheel: The pitch bend wheel is primarily used to bend the notes played on the keyboard up or down. This
allows you to play phrases not normally associated with keyboard playing, such as guitar-style riffs.
39.
Modulation Wheel: The modulation wheel is typically used to add variation for the sound you are playing. This
type of real-time controller was originally introduced on electronic keyboard instruments to give the performer
options such as adding vibrato, just like the players of acoustic instruments do.
40.
Keybed: Use this 37-key semi-weighted, velocity-sensitive keybed to input notes and aftertouch.
41.
Main Volume: Turn this knob to adjust the volume of the outputs and phones output.
361
Rear Panel
1.
Power Switch: Turns MPC Key 37’s power on/off.
2.
Power Input: Use the included power adapter to connect MPC Key 37 to a power outlet.
3.
Power Adapter Restraint: Secure the power adapter cable to this restraint to prevent it from accidentally unplugging.
4.
USB-B Port: Use the included USB cable to connect this high-retention-force USB port to an available USB port
on your computer. This connection allows MPC Key 37 to send/receive MIDI and audio data to/from the MPC
software on your computer.
5.
USB-A Port: Connect a USB flash drive to this USB port to access files directly using MPC Key 37. You can also
connect a standard MIDI controller to this port.
6.
SD Card Slot: Insert a standard SD, SDHC or SDXC card into this slot to access its files directly using MPC Key 37.
7.
Kensington
®
Lock Slot: You can use this slot to secure your MPC Key 37 to a table or other surface.
8.
Inputs (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these inputs to an audio source
(mixer, synthesizer, drum machine, etc.). In Sample Record Mode, you can select whether you want to record
either channel or both channels in stereo or in mono.
9.
Rec Vol: Turn this knob to adjust the volume of the inputs.
10.
Main Outputs (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Use standard 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS cables to connect these outputs to your
monitors, mixer, etc.
11.
Phones (1/4” / 6.35 mm): Connect standard stereo headphones to this output.
12.
CV/Gate Outs (1/8” / 3.5 mm, TRS): MPC Key 37 will send control voltage (CV) and/or Gate signals over these
outputs to optional external sequencers. Use standard 1/8” (3.5 mm) TS cables to send a single CV/Gate signal per
output, or use a stereo TRS-to-dual mono TSF breakout cable (such as a Hosa YMM-261) to send two CV/Gate
signals per output.
13.
MIDI In: Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect this input to the MIDI output of an external MIDI device
(additional MIDI keyboard, pad controller, etc.).
14.
MIDI Out: Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect this output to the MIDI input of an external MIDI device
(synthesizer, drum machine, etc.).
15.
Sustain (1/4" / 6.35 mm, TRS): This input accepts an optional momentary-contact foot pedal. When pressed, the
pedal will sustain the sound you are playing without having to keep your fingers pressed down on the keys.
16.
FS2 (1/4” / 6.35 mm, TRS): Connect an optional 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS footswitch or other foot pedal to this input.
17.
Expression (1/4” / 6.35 mm, TRS): Connect an optional expression pedal to this input for adding expressive
changes during performances.
362
Appendix
Glossary
This glossary briefly defines and explains many of the technical terms used throughout this manual.
A
ftertouch
The majority of contemporary keyboards are capable of generating aftertouch messages. On this
type of keyboard, when you press harder on a key you are already holding down, a MIDI aftertouch
message is generated. This feature makes sounds even more expressive (e.g., through vibrato).
A
liasing
A
liasing is an audible side effect arising in digital systems as soon as a signal contains harmonics
higher than half the sampling frequency.
A
mount
Describes to which extent a modulation source influences a given parameter.
A
mplifier
A
n amplifier is a component that influences the volume level of a sound via a control signal. It can
be modulated by a control signal (e.g., generated by an envelope or an LFO).
A
ttac
k
A
n envelope parameter. This term describes the ascent rate of a time-relevant process (e.g., an
envelope from its starting point to the point where it reaches its highest value). The attack phase
is initiated immediately after a trigger signal is received (e.g., after you play a note on a trigger pad
or a keyboard).
Bit Rate Bit rate (also known as word length), is the number of bits used to store the level information of
each single sample slice within a whole sample. The higher the bit rate, the more precise the
information about a sample (i.e., its dynamics’ resolution). Normal audio CDs are 16-bit. The MPC
hardware supports full 24-bit resolution.
Clipping
Clipping is a sort of distortion that occurs when a signal exceeds the maximum value that can be
managed by a signal processing system it is fed into. The curve of a clipped signal is dependent
on the system where the clipping occurs. In the analog domain, clipping effectively limits the signal
to a given maximum level. In the digital domain, clipping is similar to a numerical overflow, resulting
in negative polarity of the signal’s portions exceeding the maximum level.
Control Change
(Controllers)
MIDI messages enable you to manipulate the behavior of a sound generator to a significant degree.
This message essentially consists of two components:
•
The controller number, which defines the parameter to be influenced. It can range from 0
to 127.
•
The controller value, which determines the extent of the modification.
Controllers can be used for effects such as slowly swelling vibrato, changing the stereo panning
position and influencing filter frequency.
Cutoff The cutoff frequency is a significant factor for a filter. A low-pass filter for example dampens the
portion of the signal that lies above this frequency. Frequencies below this value are allowed to
pass through without being processed.
CV CV stands for control voltage, an analog method of sending control messages to external
synthesizers, drum machines, etc. CV messages are typically used in conjunction with Gate
messages (CV messages determine the pitch of notes while Gate messages determine note
activation and length). CV messages are sent from the CV out ports of your MPC hardware and to
the CV in ports of your external device.
Please note that each external device uses a specific control voltage range, which determines how
many volts are used in each octave (e.g., 1V/oct). Be mindful of this when setting it up with the
MPC software and/or controller hardware—mismatched voltage ranges can produce
unusual/undesirable “re-scaling” of the octaves.
Decay Decay describes the descent rate of an envelope once the attack phase has reached its maximum
and the envelope drops to the level defined by the sustain value.
363
Envelope
A
n envelope is used to modulate a sound-shaping component within a given time. For instance,
an envelope that modulates the cutoff frequency of a filter opens and closes this filter over a period
of time. An envelope is started via a trigger, usually a MIDI note.
The classic ADSR envelope consists of four individually variable phases: attack, decay, sustain,
and release. Attack, decay and release are time or slope values, while sustain is an adjustable
level. Once an incoming trigger is received, the envelope runs through the attack and decay phases
until it reaches the programmed sustain level. This level remains constant until the trigger is
terminated. The envelope then initiates the release phase until it reaches the minimum value.
You can see and read about the envelopes used in MPC in Operation > Modes > Track Edit
Mode > Anatomy of an Envelope.
Filter
A
filter is a component that allows some of a signal’s frequencies to pass through it and dampens
other frequencies. The most important aspect of a filter is the filter cutoff frequency. Filters
generally come in four categories: low-pass, high-pass, band-pass, and band-stop. These are
the available filters:
A low-pass filter (the most common type) dampens all frequencies above the cutoff frequency.
A high-pass filter in turn dampens the frequencies below the cutoff.
A band-pass filter allows only those frequencies around the cutoff frequency to pass. All others
are dampened.
A band-stop filter does the opposite of a band-pass: it dampens only the frequencies around
the cutoff frequency.
A band-boost filter boosts the frequencies around the cutoff frequency, similar to what a band
on an equalizer would do. All other frequencies pass through normally.
The number of poles in a filter’s “slope” determines how extreme or subtle the effect of the filter
will be. Filters with one or two poles produce a subtler sound while filters with six or eight poles
are much more pronounced.
The Model filters are analog-style emulations of famous vintage synth filters. Model1 is a four-
pole filter that distorts at high input levels. Model2 uses a mellow resonance with a “fattening”
distortion in the lower frequencies. Model3 can produce howling, piercing resonances and
extreme sub frequencies—watch your speakers!
The Vocal filters are formant filters that emulate the human voice. Vocal1 produces “ah” and
“ooh” vowel sounds. Vocal2 uses three bands to produce “oh” and “ee” vowel sounds. Vocal3
uses five bands to emulate an idealized model of the vocal tract.
MPC3000 LPF is a dynamic, resonant low-pass filter (12 dB/oct) that was used on the original
MPC3000, released in 1994.
Please also see the entry for Resonance, an essential characteristic of a filter’s sound.
Gate Gate messages are analog messages sent to external synthesizers, drum machines, etc. Gate
messages are typically used in conjunction with CV messages (CV messages determine the pitch of
notes while Gate messages determine note activation and length). Gate messages are sent from the
CV out ports of your MPC hardware and to the CV/Gate in ports of your external device.
LFO LFO is an acronym for low-frequency oscillator. The LFO generates a periodic oscillation at a low
frequency and features variable waveshapes. Similar to an envelope, an LFO can be used to
modulate a sound-shaping component.
364
MIDI MIDI stands for musical instrument digital interface. Developed in the early 1980s, MIDI enables
interaction between various types of electronic music instruments from different manufacturers. At
the time a communications standard for heterogeneous devices did not exist, so MIDI was a
significant advance. It made it possible to link various devices with one another through simple,
standardized connectors.
Essentially, this is how MIDI works: One sender is connected to one or several receivers. For
instance, if you want to use a computer to play a MIDI synthesizer, the computer is the sender and
the synthesizer acts as the receiver. With a few exceptions, the majority of MIDI devices are
equipped with two or three ports for this purpose: MIDI In, MIDI Out and in some cases MIDI Thru.
The sender transfers data to the receiver via the MIDI Out jack. Data are sent via a cable to the
receiver’s MIDI In jack.
MIDI Thru has a special function. It allows the sender to transmit to several receivers. It routes the
incoming signal to the next device without modifying it. Another device is simply connected to this
j
ack, thus creating a chain through which the sender can address a number of receivers. Of course,
it is desirable for the sender to be able to address each device individually. To achieve this, a MIDI
channel message is sent with each MIDI event.
MIDI Channel
This is a very important element of most messages. A receiver can only respond to incoming
messages if its receive channel is set to the same channel as the one the sender is using to transmit
data. Subsequently, the sender can address specific receivers individually. MIDI Channels 1–16 are
available for this purpose.
MIDI Clock
The MIDI clock message transmits real-time tempo information to synchronize processes among
several connected devices (e.g., a sound generator’s delay time to a MIDI sequencer).
Modulation
A
modulation influences or changes a sound-shaping component via a modulation source.
Modulation sources include envelopes, LFOs or MIDI messages. The modulation destination is a
sound-shaping component such as a filter or a VCA.
Note On &
Note Off
This is the most important MIDI message. It determines the pitch and velocity of a generated note.
A
note-on message will start a note. Its pitch is derived from the note number, which can range
from 0 to 127. The velocity ranges from 1 to 127. A velocity value of 0 is equivalent to a note-off
message.
Normalize Normalization is a function to raise the level of a sample to its maximum (0 dB) without causing
distortion. This function automatically searches a sample for its maximum level and consequently
raises the entire sample’s level until the previously determined maximum level reaches 0 dB. In
general, this results in a higher overall volume of the sample.
Panning
The process or the result of changing a signal’s position within the stereo panorama.
Pitch-Bend
Pitch-bend is a MIDI message. Although pitch-bend messages are similar in function to control
change messages, they are a distinct type of message. The resolution of a pitch-bend message is
substantially higher than that of a conventional controller message. The human ear is exceptionally
sensitive to deviations in pitch, so the higher resolution is used because it relays pitch-bend
information more accurately.
Program Change These are MIDI messages that select sound programs. Programs 1–128 can be changed via
program change messages.
Release
A
n envelope parameter. This term describes the descent rate of an envelope to its minimum value
after a trigger is terminated. The release phase begins immediately after the trigger is terminated,
regardless of the envelope’s current status. For instance, the release phase may be initiated during
the attack phase.
Resonance Resonance or emphasis is an important filter parameter. It emphasizes the frequencies around the
filter cutoff frequency by amplifying them with a narrow bandwidth. This is one of the most popular
methods of manipulating sounds. If you increase the emphasis to a level where the filter enters a
state of self-oscillation, it will generate a relatively pure sine waveform.
365
Root Key
The root key defines the original pitch of a recorded instrument or of a sample. Samples in MPC
contain the dedicated root key information. This information will be created automatically during
recording or importing.
Sample When you tap the pads on your MPC hardware, you can trigger sounds that we call samples.
Samples are digitized snippets of audio that can be recorded using the recording (sampling)
function of your MPC hardware or loaded from the Browser.
You can edit and process a sample in different ways. For example, a sample can be trimmed,
looped, pitch-shifted or processed, using various effects. When you have finished editing your
sample, you can assign it to one or more drum pads to play it. Samples can be either mono or
stereo.
Sample Rate
This is the frequency representing the amount of individual digital sample scans per second that
are taken to capture an analog signal digitally. For normal CD audio recordings, 44100 samples
per second are used, also written as 44.1 kHz.
Stretch Factor The stretch factor is a value generated by the Warp algorithm in the software. When you record
an audio file, the current project tempo will be embedded with it. This information is stored within
the sample file when you save the project. When you warp an audio track region, the warping
algorithm uses this project tempo and the current value in the BPM field to generate the stretch
factor.
Sustain This term describes the level of an envelope remaining constant after it has passed the attack and
decay phases. Once reached, the sustain level is kept until the trigger is terminated.
Time-Stretch See Warp below.
Track
A
project on your MPC hardware can contain 128 MIDI tracks and 8 audio tracks.
Each MIDI track contains MIDI note events and controller data. In this case, the track contains no
audio information—only MIDI information that uses the samples in a drum track or keygroup track
(or an external MIDI sound module) to generate its audio. You can edit your performance in many
different ways once the performance has been captured.
Each audio track contains an audio signal that has been recorded or imported into your project.
You can edit this audio within the software and incorporate it into your project alongside your MIDI
tracks.
Trigger
A
trigger is a signal that initiates events. Trigger signals are very diverse. For instance, a MIDI note
or an audio signal can be used as a trigger. The events a trigger can initiate are also very diverse.
A
common application for a trigger is its use to start an envelope.
Warp
The Warp feature lengthens or shortens a region of an audio track or sample without changing its
pitch. This enables you to fit the length of an audio track or sample to the length of a sequence, a
bar in your sequence, etc. while maintaining its original key.
Please note that the Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs
during playback if used too freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function.
You can reduce the CPU resources required by doing any/all of the following:
Minimize the amount of pitch adjustment of warped audio.
In Track Edit Mode, avoid using extreme Stretch values.
Avoid warping very small audio regions.
Warp as few tracks or track regions as possible (i.e., reduce the number of total number of
voices of the polyphonic limit that use the Warp algorithm at a given time), especially instances
where the warped regions start at the same time.
Avoid rapidly triggering samples that are warped.
If you have warped samples used in a drum track or keygroup track, consider using the Flatten
Pad function to consolidate the affected pad’s layers into one audio sample (see here to learn
about this). After you flatten the pad, its sample/samples no longer need to be warped.
366
Effects & Parameters
This chapter lists the available effects. To learn more about how effects work with MPC, please see General Features >
Effects.
Effects with a * next to their name are not included with MPC and are available for purchase from thempcstore.com.
Note: Some of these effects have a “sync” version (e.g., Flanger Sync, Autopan Sync, etc.) whose rates will be
affected by the current tempo. While viewing the rate of these effects, a “.” next to the time division indicates a triplet-
based rate.
Delay/Reverb
Options: AIR Delay, AIR Diff Delay, AIR Multitap Delay, AIR Non-Lin Reverb, AIR Reverb, AIR Spring Reverb,
Delay Analog Sync, Delay Analog, Delay HP, Delay LP, Delay Mono Sync, Delay Mono, Delay Multi-Tap, Delay
Ping Pong, Delay Stereo, Delay Sync (Stereo), Delay Tape Sync, Reverb In Gate, Reverb Large 2, Reverb Large,
Reverb Medium, Reverb Out Gate, Reverb Small, Sample Delay
AIR Delay
This is a classic delay line effect with a variable feedback
filter. Additional Ratio and Width parameters enable you to
achieve a wide range of stereo delay effects.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Time
Sync Off
Sync On
1 ms – 2.00 s
1/32 – 8/4
388 ms
1/8D
Sync Off, On Off
Feedback 0–100% 40%
Mix 0
–
100% (dr
y
–
wet) 50%
Delay Ratio 50:100 – 100:50
100:100
Delay HPF 20.0 Hz – 1.0 kHz 20.0 Hz
Delay Width 0–100% 100%
Feedback Damp 1.0 – 20.0 kHz 20.0 kHz
Feedback Reso 0–100% 0%
Fdbk. Reso Freq 100 Hz
–
10.0 kHz 1.0 kHz
367
AIR Diff Delay
This is a delay line effect that is synchronized to
your session tempo and uses an adjustable amount
of diffusion to emulate the dissipation of echoes in
reverberant space.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Time
Sync Off:
Sync On:
1 – 1000 ms
1/64 – 4/4 (including
Triplet and Dotted
variations)
161 ms
1/16D
Sync Off, On On
Width 0–100% 100%
Mix 0
–
100% (dr
y
–
wet) 40%
Feedback 0–100% 50%
Fdbk. Diffusion 0–100% 40%
Fdbk. High Damp 0–100% 35%
Low Cut 20.0 Hz – 1.00 kHz 20.0 Hz
Pan -100 – 0 – +100% 0%
AIR Multitap Delay
This effect is a versatile, creative delay plugin with a
wide range of applications from subtle stereo delays
to complex repeating patterns.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Delay
Sync On: 1/16 – 8/4 4/4
Sync Off: 0 ms – 4.00 s 2.25 s
Feedback 0–100% 50%
Mix -100.0 – 0.0 dB -50.0 dB
From/To
V
aries Tap 5 / Input
Sync Off, On On
Low Cut 20.0 Hz
–
1.00 kHz 500 Hz
Hi
g
h Cut 1.00 kHz – 20.0 kHz 2.00 kHz
1–5 Off, On On
Tap Delay 10.0 ms – 10.0 s
V
aries
Pan L100 – C – R100
V
aries
Level -Inf – 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
368
AIR Non-Lin Reverb
This is a spatial effect, designed to produce synthetic,
processed ambience with special gated and reversed reverb
effects.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Pre-Delay 0–250 ms 0 ms
Dry Delay 0–1500 ms 0 ms
Time 0–1000 ms 250 ms
Mix 0
–
100% (dr
y
–
wet) 50%
Diffusion 0–100% 100%
Width 0–100% 50%
Shape Gated, Reverse Gated
Low-Cut 20.0 Hz–1.00 kHz 141 Hz
Hi
g
h-Cut 1.00
–
20.0 kHz 9.46 kHz
AIR Reverb
This is a spatial effect, with a wide range of reverb types to add space or room to your audio signal.
Tab Parameter Values Default Value
Reverb
Pre-Delay 0–250 ms 0 ms
Room Size 0–100% 100%
Time 0.4 ms – +inf s 1.9 s
Mix 0–100% 50%
Early Reflection Type Off, Booth, Club, Room, Small
Chamber, Medium Chamber, Large
Chamber, Small Studio, Large
Studio, Scoring Stage,
Philharmonic, Concert Hall, Church,
Opera House, Vinta
g
e 1, Vinta
g
e 2
Off
Length 0–100% 100%
ER / Tail Mix 0–100% 50%
Reverb Input Width 0–100% 0%
Output Width 0–100% 0%
Delay 0–250 ms 0 ms
Room
A
mbience 0–100% 0%
Density 0–100% 100%
Hi/Lo Freq
Hi Freq Time -100 – 0 – 100% 0%
Freq 2.00 – 20.0 kHz 6.32 kHz
Cut 1.0 – 20.0 kHz 9.46 kHz
Lo Freq Time -100 – 0 – 100% 0%
Freq 20.0 Hz – 2.00 kHz 200 Hz
Cut 1 – 1000 Hz 1 Hz
369
AIR Spring Reverb
This is a spatial effect, designed to emulate the sound of a
spring reverb tank.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Pre-Delay 0–250 ms 3 ms
Time 1.0–10.0 s 4.0 s
Mix 0–100 (dry–wet) 50%
Diffusion 0–100% 100%
Width 0–100% 0%
Low Cut 20.0 Hz
–
1.0 kHz 141 Hz
Delay Analog Sync
Analog Delay is similar to Mono Delay, except that it’s
designed to emulate an analog “Bucket Brigade”-style delay.
This delay has a unique character to it that gives a warmer
sound by adding subtle inaccuracies in phase and timing.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Time 1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback 0–100 50
Ramp 0–100 50
Delay Analog
Analog Delay is similar to the Mono Delay, except that it’s
designed to emulate an analog “Bucket Brigade”-style delay.
This delay has a unique character to it that gives a warmer
sound by adding subtle inaccuracies in phase and timing.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Time 2–2000 ms 100
Feedback 0–100 25
Delay HP
HP Delay is identical to the Mono Delay, but it uses a
resonant high-pass filter in the delay line.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Time 2–2000 ms 100
Feedback 0–100 50
Cutoff 0–100 33
Resonance 0–100 33
Delay LP
LP Delay is identical to the Mono Delay, but it uses a
resonant low-pass filter in the delay line.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Time 2–2000 ms 500
Feedback 0–100 50
Cutoff 0–100 50
Resonance 0–100 20
370
Delay Mono Sync
This mono effect delays the original signal for a specified
period of time (synced to the project tempo) and plays it
back over an adjustable period of time.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Time 1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback 0–100 50
Dampin
g
0–100 100
Delay Mono
This mono effect delays the original signal for a specified
period of time and plays it back over an adjustable period of
time.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Time 2–2000 ms 100
Feedback 0–100 25
Dampin
g
0–100 100
Delay Multi-Tap
This delay is a mono delay which has three delay generators
with independently adjustable delay times and stereo
position.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Time 1 2–2000 ms 100
Time 2 2–2000 ms 100
Time 3 2–2000 ms 100
Feedback 0–100 25
Pan 1 0–100 50
Pan 2 0–100 50
Pan 3 0–100 50
Dampin
g
0–100 100
Gain 1 0–100 25
Gain 2 0–100 25
Gain 3 0–100 25
Delay Ping Pong
This stereo delay allows you to set different delay times for
its left and right repeats.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Time, Left 2–2000 ms 100
Time, Ri
g
ht 2–2000 ms 100
Feedback 0–100 25
Damping 0–100 100
371
Delay Stereo
Stereo Delay operates similarly to Mono Delay but in true
stereo.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Time 2–2000 ms 100
Feedback 0–100 25
Dampin
g
0–100 100
Delay Sync (Stereo)
This effect is the same as Delay Stereo but is synced to the
project tempo.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Time 1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback 0–100 50
Dampin
g
0–100 100
Delay Tape Sync
Tape Delay emulates a delay system using an analog tape
loop and a series of tape heads to produce an echo effect.
This delay type yields a very distinct echo sound often heard
in reggae and dub-style music.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Time 1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback 0–100 50
Ramp 0–100 50
Head 1 0–100 100
Head 2 0–100 0
Head 3 0–100 0
Head 4 0–100 0
Tone 0–100 50
Spread 0–100 50
Wow & Flutte
r
0–100 50
Reverb In Gate
This is a hall reverb with an additional control. The reverb
effect is cut off when the input drops below the level set in
the Gate In parameter.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Pre-Delay 1–100 50
Early Reflection 0–100 50
Density 0–100 50
Diffuse 0–100 50
Decay 0–100 75
Lo-Cut 0–100 10
Hi-Cut 0–100 10
Gate In 0–100 0
372
Reverb Large 2
This is a less CPU-intensive spatial effect, emulating the
sound of a large hall.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Pre-Delay 1–100 50
Early Reflection 0–100 50
Density 0–100 50
Diffuse 0–100 50
Decay 0–100 75
Lo-Cut 0–100 10
Hi-Cut 0–100 10
Reverb Large
This is a spatial effect, designed to emulate the sound of a
large hall.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Pre-Delay 1–100 50
Early Reflection 0–100 50
Density 0–100 50
Diffuse 0–100 50
Decay 0–100 75
Lo-Cut 0–100 10
Hi-Cut 0–100 10
Reverb Medium
This is a spatial effect, designed to emulate a medium room.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Pre-Delay 1–100 50
Early Reflection 0–100 50
Density 0–100 50
Diffuse 0–100 50
Decay 0–100 50
Lo-Cut 0–100 15
Hi-Cut 0–100 10
373
Reverb Out Gate
This is a hall reverb that has an additional control. The reverb
effect is cut off when the output drops below the level set in
the Gate Out parameter.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Pre-Delay 1–100 50
Early Reflection 0–100 50
Density 0–100 50
Diffuse 0–100 50
Decay 0–100 75
Lo-Cut 0–100 10
Hi-Cut 0–100 10
Gate Out 0–100 0
Reverb Small
This is a spatial effect, designed to emulate a small room.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 50
Pre-Delay 1–100 50
Early Reflection 0–100 50
Density 0–100 50
Diffuse 0–100 50
Decay 0–100 50
Lo-Cut 0–100 15
Hi-Cut 0–100 10
Sample Delay
This effect is a utility delay plugin that can delay the left and
right channels by different, small amounts to loosen
percussion elements or add stereo width.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Left / Right 0–11025 Samples
or
0.0–250.0 ms
0 Samples
or
0.0 ms
Samples / MS Samples, MS Samples
Link Off, On Off
374
Dynamics
Options: AIR Channel Strip, AIR Compressor, AIR Limiter, AIR Maximizer, AIR Noise Gate, AIR Pumper, AIR
Transient, Bus Compressor, Compressor Opto, Compressor VCA, Compressor Vintage, Mother Ducker Input,
Mother Ducker, Transient Shaper
AIR Channel Strip
This specially-designed plugin combines multiple effects with a fast interface. The EQ section provides a highpass
filter, low and high shelves, and a fully parametric mid-band. For dynamics, the AIR Compressor and Gate algorithms
are perfect for achieving hard-hitting drum sounds.
Tab Parameter Value Range Default Value
EQ Enable Enabled, Bypass Enabled
Gate Enable Enabled, Bypass Enabled
Comp Enable Enabled, Bypass Enabled
Output -Inf – +24.00 dB 0.00 dB
EQ High Shelf Gain -12.0 – +12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Hi
g
h Shelf Freq 1.20 – 20.0 kHz 6.00 kHz
Mid Gain -18.0 – +18.0 dB 0.0 dB
Mid Freq 40.0 Hz – 16.0 kHz 247 Hz
Mid Q 0.40 – 10.00 1.00
Low Shelf Gain -12.0 – +12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Low Shelf Freq 20.0 Hz – 1.00 kHz 100 Hz
HP Filte
r
0 – 1000 Hz 0 Hz
Gate/Comp Gate Thresh -120.0 – 0.0 dB -120.0 dB
Gate Depth 0 – -120.0 dB -120.0 dB
Gate Attack 0.01 – 1000.00 ms 0.18 ms
Gate Release 1.00 – 3000.00 ms 7.40 ms
Comp Thresh 0.0 – -60.0 dB 0.0 dB
Comp Ratio 1.0:1 – 100.0:1 3.9:1
Comp Attack 100 us – 300 ms 5.48 ms
Comp Release 10.0 ms – 4.00 s 200 ms
AIR Compressor
This basic compressor effect changes the dynamic
range of a signal by automatically reducing its gain if it
exceeds a certain level (the threshold).
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Threshold -60.0 – 0 dB -48.0 dB
Ratio 1.0:1 – 100.0:1 3.9:1
Output 0.0 – 30.0 dB 15.0 dB
Mix 0–100% (dry-wet) 100%
Knee 0–100% 50%
A
ttack 100 us – 300 ms 5.48 ms
Release 10.0 ms – 4.00 s 200 ms
375
AIR Limiter
This is a lookahead limiter perfect for mastering or
mixing.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Gain -12.0 – 36.0 dB 0.0 dB
Ceilin
g
-24.0
–
0.0 dB 0.0 dB
Look Ahead 0.0 – 20.0 ms 0.0 ms
Release 10.0 ms – 10.0 s 316 ms
LF Mono 10.0 Hz – 1.00 kHz 10.0 Hz
AIR Maximizer
This effect is a limiter optimized for professional
mastering.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Threshold -40.0 – 0.0 dB -20.0 dB
Ceilin
g
-20.0 – 0.0 dB FS -5.0 dB FS
Look Ahead 0.0 – 20.0 ms 0.0 ms
Knee Hard, Soft Hard
Release 10.0 ms – 10.0 s 316 ms
LF Mono 10.0 Hz – 1.00 kHz 10.0 Hz
AIR Noise Gate
This effect is similar to a compressor, but instead of
attenuating audio signal that rises above a threshold, a noise
gate attenuates audio signal that falls below a threshold by a
set amount. This can help reduce background noise in your
audio signal.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Threshold -120.0 – 0.0 dB -48.0 dB
Depth 0 dB – -120.0 dB -120 dB
Denoise Filte
r
Off, On Off
Denoise Thresh -120.0 – 0.0 dB -60.0 dB
A
ttack 0.01 – 1000.00 ms 0.18 ms
Hold 0 – 1000 ms 250 ms
Release 1.00 – 3000.00 ms 7.40 ms
AIR Pumper
This effect creates a rhythmic pumping effect, similar to that
of sidechain compression.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Depth 0–100% 80%
Speed Bar, 1/2 – 1/32T 1/4
Release Shape 0–100% 10%
Tri
gg
er Offset -100.0 – +100.0 ms 0.0 ms
A
ttack 0–100% 5%
Hold 0–100% 10%
Release 0–100% 60%
376
AIR Transient
This effect is used to enhance or soften the Attack and
Release phases of audio material.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
A
ttack -100 – 0 – +100% 0%
A
ttack Shape 0–100% 50%
Sustain -100 – 0 – +100% 0%
Output -20.0 – +20.0 dB 0.0 dB
Limit Off, On On
Bus Compressor
This is the most transparent compressor, able to perform
substantial volume adjustments without artifacts.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Attack 0–100 50
Release 0–100 50
Threshold -50 – 0 dB 0
Ratio 1–20 1
Oldskool Off, On Off
Output -6 – 24 dB 0
Compressor Opto
The Opto Compressor is modeled after a vintage
compressor type using an optical circuit to control the
volume reduction of the input signal. These compressors are
usually associated with soft and unobtrusive attack and
release characteristics.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Input -6 – 18 dB 0
Attack 0–100 50
Release 0–100 50
Threshold -50 – 0 dB 0
Ratio 1–20 1
Knee 1–100 1
Output -6 – 24 dB 0
Compressor VCA
This compressor is more modern-sounding, with a slightly
more transparent sound. A VCA Compressor tends to have
quicker attack and release times than an Opto Compressor.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Input -6 – 18 dB 0
A
ttack 0–100 50
Release 0–100 50
Threshold -50 – 0 dB 0
Ratio 1–20 1
Knee 1–100 1
Output -6 – 24 dB 0
377
Compressor Vintage
This compressor has a sound similar to classic tube
compressors, with their gentle yet pumping response and a
dash of tube saturation.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Input -6 – 18 dB 0
A
ttack 0–100 50
Release 0–100 50
Threshold -50 – 0 dB 0
Ratio 1–20 1
Knee 1–100 1
Output -6 – 24 dB 0
Mother Ducker Input
Add this effect as an insert to the track you want to use as a
trigger input, such as a kick drum track.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
To Bus 1–8 Bus 1
Mother Ducker
Add this effect as an insert to the track you want to have the
ducking effect applied to. Use the meters to monitor the
level from your trigger input and tweak the Threshold and
Ratio parameters to adjust the amount of ducking. The
Attack and Release parameters can be used to sculpt the
envelope of the gain reduction to achieve exactly the
pumping effect you are after. Mother Ducker has eight
internal buses so you can set up multiple channel strips with
ducking effects from different sources.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Ratio 1.00:1 – 60.00:1 6.00:1
Knee 0.000 – 6.000 dB 0.000 dB
A
ttack 1.0 – 1000.0 ms 10.0 ms
Release 1.0 – 1000.0 ms 100.0 ms
Threshold -100.000 – 0.000 dB -6.021 dB
Gain -100.000 – +12.000 dB -0.000 dB
A
uto Gain On, Off On
From Bus 1–8 Bus 1
Transient Shaper
A transient shaper can be used to enhance or soften the
Attack and Release phases of audio material.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Attack 0–100 50
Release 0–100 50
Output 0–100 50
378
EQ/Filter
Options: AIR Enhancer, AIR Filter Gate, AIR Filter, AIR Kill EQ, AIR Para EQ, AIR Vintage Filter, HP Filter Sweep,
HP Filter Sync, HP Filter, HP Shelving Filter, LP Filter Sweep, LP Filter Sync, LP Filter, LP Shelving Filter, PEQ
2-Band, 2-Shelf, PEQ 4-Band
AIR Enhancer
This effect enhances the low and high
broadband frequencies of the audio signal.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
High Gain 0.0 – 12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Low Gain 0.0 – 12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Output - Inf – 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
Freq. High 1.0 – 10.0 kHz 3.16 kHz
Freq. Low 40.0 – 640 Hz 160 Hz
Harmonics 0.0 – 12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Phase + (positive), - (negative) +
AIR Filter Gate
This effect chops your audio signal into
rhythmic patterns with variable filtering,
amplitude and panning.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Pattern Straight, Pulse, Pumper, Marching,
Fader, Offbeats, Off+Pan, L/R Pan,
LL/RR Pan, Slow Pan, Rand Pan,
Shorter, Longer, Reverse, Random,
Keyed 1–2, Half Time, 12-Step,
Ducked, Trance 1
–
6, Tech 1
–
6
Straight
Rate 1/2–1/32, including Dotted and Triplet 1/16
Swing 50.0–66.7% 50.0%
Mix 0–100% 100%
Filter Mode Off, LP, BP, HP, Phase
r
LP
Filter Cutoff -100 – 0 – 100% 0%
Filter Reso -100 – 0 – 100% 0%
Gate Attack 0–100% 25%
Gate Hold 0–100% 50%
Gate Release 0–100% 25%
Mod LFO Wave Random; 2–12, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64,
96, 128, 192, 256 Steps
Random
Mod Env -100 – 0 – 100% 0%
Mod LFO 0–100% 0%
379
AIR Filter
This effect applies a filter to the audio
signal and then applies selectable
saturation or reduction to the filtered
signal.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Cutoff Freq 55.0 Hz – 20.0 kHz 20.0 kHz
Reso Facto
r
0.7 – 20.0 1.0
Type LP4–1, BP2, BP4, HP2_LP1,
HP3_LP1, HP4–1, BR2, BR4,
BR2_LP1, BR2_LP2, HP1_BR2,
BP2_BR2, HP1_LP2, HP1_LP3,
AP3, AP3_LP1, HP1_AP3
LP4
Output Gain -Inf dB – 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
Saturation
Type
Resample, Bit Crush, Rectify, Hard
Clip, Distort, Overdrive
Overdrive
Saturation
Drive
0.0 – 12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Saturation
Mode
DCF, CVF DCF
AIR Kill EQ
This effect can zap out the Low, Mid or High broadband
frequency from an audio signal.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Hi
g
h Thru, Kill Thru
Mid Thru, Kill Thru
Low Thru, Kill Thru
Output -20.0 – +20.0 dB 0.0 dB
High Gain -Inf – +12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Mid Gain -Inf – +12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Low Gain -Inf – +12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Hi
g
h Freq. 500 Hz – 8.00 kHz 2.00 kHz
Offset -100 – +100% 0%
Low Freq. 50.0 – 800 Hz 200 Hz
380
AIR Para EQ
This effect is a powerful four-band parametric equalizer with
four independent EQ ranges, adjustable Low and High EQ
filter types, and dedicated Low Cut and High Cut.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Hi
g
h Freq 1.2 – 20.0 kHz 6.00 kHz
High Q
Shelf
Bell
0.40 – 2.00
0.40 – 10.00
1.00
1.00
High Gain
Shelf
Bell
-12.0 – +12.0 dB
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
Hi
g
h Type Shelf, Bell Shelf
High Out/In Out, In
Hi
g
h Mid Freq 120 Hz – 16.0 kHz 2.00 kHz
Hi
g
h Mid Q 0.40 – 10.00 1.00
Hi
g
h Mid Gain -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0 dB
Hi
g
h Mid Out/In Out, In
Low Mid Freq 40.0 Hz – 16.00 kHz 247 Hz
Low Mid Q 0.40 – 10.00 1.00
Low Mid Gain -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0 dB
Low Mid Out/In Out, In
Low Freq 20.0 Hz – 1.00 kHz 100 Hz
Low Q
Shelf
Bell
0.40 – 2.00
0.40 – 10.00
1.00
1.00
Low Gain
Shelf
Bell
-12.0 – +12.0 dB
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
Low Type Shelf, Bell Shelf
Low Out/In Out, In
Output -20.0 – +20.0 dB 0.0 dB
High Cut
Freq
120 Hz – 20.0 kHz 20.0 kHz
High Cut Type 6, 12, 18, 24 dB 12 dB
High Cut Out/In Out, In
Low Cut Freq 20.0 Hz – 8.00 kHz 100 Hz
Low Cut Type 6, 12, 18, 24 dB 12 dB
Low Cut Out/In Out, In
381
AIR Vintage Filter
This effect is a powerful filter plugin for bringing
those classic analog filter sounds to your tracks,
perfect for synths, guitars plus loads more.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Cutoff 20.0 Hz – 20.0 kHz 878 Hz
Resonance 0–100% 0%
Fat 0–200% 200%
Mode LP24, LP18, LP12, BP, HP LP18
A
ttack 10.0 ms – 10 s 10.0 ms
Release 10.0 ms – 10 s 966 ms
Env. Depth -100 – 0 – +100% +37%
Sync Off, On On
Rate
Sync On: 16 – 8/4 4T
Sync Off: 0.01
–
10.0 Hz 2.54 Hz
LFO Depth 0–100% 61%
Output –Inf dB — 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
HP Filter Sweep
This effect is a high-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 80
Low Frequency 0–100 50
Hi
g
h Frequency 0–100 100
Resonance 0–100 33
Rate 0–100 10
HP Filter Sync
This effect is a high-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Low Frequency 0–100 0
Hi
g
h Frequency 0–100 100
Resonance 0–100 50
Rate 8 bars – 1/32 1/4
HP Filter
This effect is a static filter without modulation.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Frequency 10
–
19999 Hz 1500
Resonance 0–100 0
382
HP Shelving Filter
This filter differs from the standard filter type, as it attenuates
all frequencies after the cutoff point equally.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Frequency 10
–
19999 Hz 1500
Resonance 0–100 0
Gain -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
LP Filter Sweep
This effect is a low-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 80
Low Frequency 0–100 0
Hi
g
h Frequency 0–100 100
Resonance 0–100 33
Rate 0–100 10
LP Filter Sync
This effect is a low-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Low Frequency 0–100 0
High Frequency 0–100 100
Resonance 0–100 50
Rate 8 bars – 1/32 1/4
LP Filter
This effect is a static filter without modulation.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Frequency 10
–
19999 Hz 1500
Resonance 0–100 0
LP Shelving Filter
This filter differs from the standard filter type, as it attenuates
all frequencies after the cutoff point equally.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Frequency 10
–
19999 Hz 1500
Resonance 0–100 0
Gain -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
383
PEQ 2-Band, 2-Shelf
This effect is a combination of one two-band parametric
equalizer and two shelving filters.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Low Frequency 22
–
1000 Hz 220
Frequency 1 82–3900 Hz 820
Frequency 2 220–10000 Hz 2200
Hi
g
h Frequency 560–19999 Hz 5600
Q1 0–100 0
Q2 0–100 0
Low Gain -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
Gain 1 -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
Gain 2 -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
Hi
g
h Gain -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
PEQ 4-Band
This effect is a powerful four-band parametric equalizer with
four independent EQ ranges.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Low Frequency 22–1000 Hz 220
Frequency 1 82
–
3900 Hz 820
Frequency 2 220–10000 Hz 2200
High Frequency 560–19999 Hz 5600
Q1 0–100 5
Q2 0–100 5
Q3 0–100 5
Q4 0–100 5
Gain 1 -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
Gain 2 -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
Gain 3 -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
Gain 4 -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
384
Harmonic
Options: AIR Amp Sim, AIR Diode Clip, AIR Distortion, AIR Flavor, AIR Freq Shift, AIR Lo-Fi, AIR Talk Box, AIR
Tube Drive, Decimator, Distortion Amp, Distortion Custom, Distortion Fuzz, Distortion Grimey, Distortion
Overdrive, Frequency Shifter, Granulator, Resampler, TouchFX, XYFX
AIR Amp Sim
This effect simulates guitar and bass amplifiers with a
wide range of available cabinet models and tone shaping
options.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Cab Model D.I., Brit, 1x8”, 1x12”,
2x10”, 2x12”, 4x10”,
4x12”, 1x15” Bass,
4x10” Bass, Radio
4x10”
Drive 0.0–11.0 0.0
Mode Mono, Stereo Stereo
Output -12.0
–
0.0
–
+12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Soft Clip 0–100% 0%
Top Boost 0
–
100% 0%
Bias 0
–
100% 0%
Bass -12.0 – 0.0 – +12.0 dB -12.0 dB
Mid -12.0 – 0.0 – +12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Mid Freq 250 Hz – 4.00 kHz 1.00 kHz
Treble -12.0 – 0.0 – +12.0 dB 0.0 dB
AIR Diode Clip
This is a distortion effect that can be used for anything
from adding subtle grit to drum breaks to aggressive
distorted mayhem.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Input HP 200 – 800 Hz 500 Hz
Env Speed 0
–
100% 50%
Output HP 1000
–
4000 Hz 2000 Hz
Output LP 1000
–
12000 Hz 6000 Hz
Wide Off, On Off
Solo Off, On Off
Oversampling Off, On On
Level -inf – 0.0 – +12.0 dB 0.0 dB
385
AIR Distortion
This effect is a multi-type distortion that adds color to your
audio signal with varying types and amounts of distortion.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Mode Hard, Soft, Wrap Hard
Drive 0 – 60 dB 15 dB
Output 0–100% 100%
Mix 0–100% (dry-wet) 100%
Tone Pre-Shape -100 – 0 – +100% 0%
Tone Hi
g
h Cut 1.00 – 20.0 kHz 20.0 kHz
Stereo On, Off Off
Clippin
g
Thresh. -20.0 – 0.0 dB FS -10.0 dB FS
Clipping Edge 0–100% 0%
AIR Flavor
This effect applies EQ simulations of radios, phones, tape
machines, and more to dramatically change the timbre of
your sound.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Timbre Varies Neutral
Timbre Depth 0–100% 100%
V
inyl Distortion 0–100% 0%
V
inyl Noise 0–100% 0%
Flutte
r
0–100% 0%
Monofy 0–100% 0%
AIR Freq Shift
This effect shifts the audio signal's individual frequencies for
unique effects.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Mode Up, Down, Up &
Down, Stereo
Up
Frequency 10.0 mHz – 10.0 kHz 316 mHz
Feedback 0–100% 0%
Mix 0–100% (dry–wet) 100%
386
AIR Lo-Fi
This effect is used to bit-crush, down-sample, clip, rectify and mangle an audio signal.
Tab Parameter Value Range Default Value
Lo-Fi Bit Depth 1.0 – 16.0 bit 16.0 bit
Sample Rate 500 Hz – 50.0 kHz 50.0 kHz
Mix 0–100% 100%
Distortion Clip 0.0 – 40.0 dB 0.0 dB
Rectify 0–100% 0%
Noise Mod 0–100% 0%
A
nti-
A
lias Pre 0.125 – 2.000 Fs 0.5000 Fs
Post 0.125 – 2.000 Fs 1.000 Fs
Enable On, Off Off
LFO / Env Wave Sine, Tri, Saw, Square, Morse,
S&H, Random
Sine
Rate
Sync Off:
Sync On:
0.01 – 10.0 Hz
8/4 – 16
1.00 Hz
2T
Sync On, Off Off
Depth -100 – 0 – 100% 0%
Attack 0.1 – 10.0 s 0.5 s
Release 0.1 – 10.0 s 0.5 s
Depth -100 – 0 – 100% 0%
AIR Talk Box
This effect adds voice-like resonances to
audio signals.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Vowel OO, OU, AU, AH, AA, AE, EA, EE,
EH, ER, UH, OH, OO
AH
Env Depth -100 – 0 – +100% 0%
Formant -12.00 – +12.00 0.00
Mix 0–100% 100%
LFO Wave Sine, Tri, Saw, Square, S&H,
Random
Sine
LFO Rate
Sync Off:
Sync On:
0.01 – 10.0 Hz
8/4 – 16
1.00 Hz
2T
LFO Sync Off, On Off
LFO Depth -100 – 0 – +100% 0%
Env Thresh -60.0 – 0.0 dB -30.0 dB
Env Attack 0.1 – 10.0 s 0.5 s
Env Release 0.1 – 10.0 s 0.5 s
387
AIR Tube Drive
This effect is designed to reproduce the sound of an
overdriven tube amplifier.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Drive 0–100% 0%
Headroom -30.0 – 0.0 dB -15.0 dB
Saturation 0–100% 50%
Output -20.0 – +20.0 dB 0.0 dB
Decimator
Decimator down-samples the incoming signal by removing
bits from the digital signal. The difference between
decimation and resampling is that Decimator does not use
any filtering to mask or correct digital artifacts. The result is
an effect ranging from mild to almost completely pure digital
distortion, dependin
g
on the settin
g
and the source material.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Decimate 0–100 0
Bit Reducer 4–32 32
Distortion Amp
This effect is designed to reproduce the sound of a tube
amplifier at high volumes.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Drive 0–100 50
Tone 0–100 50
Dynamics 0–100 50
Output 0–100 50
Distortion Custom
This effect is a highly customized distortion, capable of a
wide range of useable sounds.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Drive 0–100 50
+Soft 5–75 2
+Clip 5–50 25
–Soft 5–75 2
–Clip 5–50 25
Low -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
Mid -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
Hi
g
h -18.0 – 18.0 dB 0.0
Output -18.0 – 18.0 dB 50
388
Distortion Fuzz
This popular effect uses hard clipping of the audio signal,
which, at extreme settings, can turn a standard waveform
into a square wave, producing a “razor” effect.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Drive 0–100 50
Output 0–100 50
Low 0–100 50
Low-Mid 0–100 50
Hi
g
h-Mid 0–100 50
Hi
g
h 0–100 50
Distortion Grimey
This is a unique distortion effect that distorts a frequency
range in a selectable band.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Drive 0–100 50
Grime 0–100 50
Center 0–100 50
Width 0–100 50
Resonance 0–100 50
Output 0–100 50
Distortion Overdrive
This distortion is designed to sound like a mildly distorting
amplifier at medium volumes. It is the smoothest distortion
type available.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Drive 0–100 50
Tone 0–100 50
Output 0–100 50
Frequency Shifter
A frequency shifter changes the frequencies of an input
signal by a fixed amount and alters the relationship of the
original harmonics. This can produce a chorus-like effect as
well as very crazy artificial timbres.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Frequency -1000 – 1000 0
A
synchrony 0–1000 0
A
Pan 0–100 0
B Pan 0–100 100
A
Gain 0–100 75
B Gain 0–100 75
389
Granulator
This effect turns your incoming audio into small grains of
sound that can be looped, pitch shifted, and manipulated
in new and interesting ways.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Grain Density 1.0–300.0
g
rains/sec
68.0
g
rains/sec
Grain Window 20.0–1000.0 ms 608.0 ms
Grain Len
g
th 10.0
–
200.0 ms 171.9 ms
Grain Feedback -99.9
–
0.0
–
99.9% 0.0%
Trigger
Randomization
0–100% 0.0%
Pitch
Randomization
0–100% 0.0%
Pitch -12.0 – 0.0 – 12.0
semitones
0.0 semitones
Fine -50.0 – 0.0 – 50.0% 0.0%
Stereo 0–100% 0.0%
Mix 0–100% 34.6%
Freeze Off, On Off
Resampler
Resampler is similar to Decimator in that it removes bits
from an incoming signal. The difference is that Resampler
applies a complex suite of filters and anti-aliasing to
attempt to retain the original sound quality. This is a
method used by popular vintage samplers and sampling
drum machines from the 1980s. Resampler can be used
to achieve a “dirty” sound on drum loops, without the
harshness of distortion.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Rate 0–100 0
Decimate 0–100 0
TouchFX
TouchFX is specially designed for use with the touch strip controller on hardware such as MPC Key 61 and MPC Key
37, but can be used on any MPC hardware and controlled using the onscreen touch slider or an external MIDI device.
The following effects can be selected:
Manual Filter
The touch strip controls a static, multi-mode filter without
modulation.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Cutoff 40.00–10000 Hz 2530.00 Hz
Resonance 0.00
–
1.00 0.50
Mode LowPass,
BandPass, HiPass
LowPass
390
Beat Sync Filter
The touch strip controls a multi-mode filter with its cutoff
frequency modulated by an LFO, which can be synced to
the project tempo.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Cutoff 40.00–10000 Hz 34737.15 Hz
Resonance 0.00
–
1.00 0.50
Manual Speed Off, 0.10–50.00 Hz Off
Depth 0.0–100.0% 50.0%
Mode LowPass,
BandPass, HiPass
BandPass
Shape Ramp Up, Ramp
Down, Triangle,
Sine, Square,
Random1,
Random2
Ramp Up
Sync Speed Off, 2 Bars, 1 Bar,
1/2, 1/4, 1/4t, 1/8,
1/8t, 1/16, 1/16t,
1/32, 1/64
1/4
Beat Sync Delay
The touch strip controls repeated instances of the original
signal that decay over a period of time that is synced to the
project tempo.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Cutoff 40.00–10000 Hz 3052.90 Hz
Resonance 0.00
–
1.00 0.50
Feedback -99.00 – 0.00 –
99.00
49.50
Diffusion 0.00–1.00% 0.50%
Mode LowPass,
BandPass, HiPass
LowPass
Delay Time 1 Bar, 1/2, 1/4, 1/4t,
1/8, 1/8t, 1/16,
1/16t, 1/32, 1/64
1/4
Delay Mode Normal, Cross-
Feedback, Ping-
Pong
Normal
Octave Mode Off, On Off
Beat Repeat
The touch strip controls an effect that will slice and repeat
the source audio according to a tempo-synced beat value.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Cutoff 40.00–10000 Hz 2530.00 Hz
Resonance 0.00
–
1.00 0.50
Mode LowPass,
BandPass, HiPass
LowPass
Delay Time 1/4, 1/4t, 1/8, 1/8t,
1/16, 1/16t, 1/32,
1/64
1/4
Reverse Off, On Off
391
Tape Stop
The touch strip controls a tape stop effect that emulates the
slowing down of analog tape playback.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Cutoff 40.00–10000 Hz 2530.00 Hz
Manual Stop
Time
1.00 – 4.00 s 2.50 s
Sync Stop
Time
Off, 1/4, 1/4t, 1/8,
1/8t, 1/16, 1/16t,
1/32, 1/64
Off
Phaser
The touch strip controls a phaser effect, created by multiple
ganged all-pass filters to create “notches,” or sharp spikes,
in the frequency spectrum. The frequencies of these all-pass
filters can be modulated by an LFO to create a sweeping
sound.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Feedback 0.0–100.0% 100.0%
Manual Speed 0.10
–
50.00 Hz Off
Sync Speed Off, 2 Bars, 1 Bar,
1/2, 1/4, 1/4t, 1/8,
1/8t, 1/16, 1/16t,
1/32, 1/64
1/4
Comb Filter
The touch strip controls a comb filter, which creates
“notches” in the frequency spectrum, similar to the phaser,
by delaying the audio signal and adding it back to itself.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Feedback 0.0–100.0% 100.0%
Manual Speed 0.10–50.00 Hz Off
Sync Speed Off, 2 Bars, 1 Bar,
1/2, 1/4, 1/4t, 1/8,
1/8t, 1/16, 1/16t,
1/32, 1/64
1/4
Washout
The touch strip controls an echo effect that is useful for
creating transitions.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Cutoff 40.00–9000 Hz 1160.00 Hz
Resonance 0.00
–
100.00% 0.50%
Feedback 0.00–100.00% 0.50%
Diffusion 0.0–10000.0% 5000.0%
Delay Time 1 Bar, 1/2, 1/4,
1/4t, 1/8, 1/8t,
1/16, 1/16t, 1/32,
1/64
1 Bar
392
Granulator
The touch strip controls a granulator effect, which turns your
incoming audio into small grains of sound that can be
looped, pitch-shifted, and manipulated.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Density 1.0–300.0
grains/sec
150.0
grains/sec
Window Len
g
th 20.0
–
1000.0 ms 510.0 ms
Grain Len
g
th 10.0
–
200.0 ms 105.0 ms
Grain Feedback -99.00 – 0.00 –
99.00
0.0%
Pitch -12.0 – 0.0 – 12.0
semi
0.0 semi
Stereo Spread 0.0–100.0% 0.0%
Manual Flanger
The touch strip controls a flanger effect, a modulated delay
that emulates the sound created when running two analog
tape machines in parallel with a slight time misalignment.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Frequency 100.00–4000.00
Hz
4000.00 Hz
Feedback 0.0–100.0% 100.0%
XYFX
See Operation > Modes > XYFX Mode for more information.
393
Modulation
Options: AIR Chorus, AIR Ensemble, AIR Flanger, AIR Fuzz-Wah, AIR Half Speed, AIR Multi-Chorus, AIR Phaser,
AIR Pitch Shifter, AIR Stereo Width, AIR Stutter, Auto Wah, Autopan Sync, Autopan, Chorus 2-Voice, Chorus 4-
Voice, Flanger Sync, Flanger, Phaser 1, Phaser 2, Phaser Sync, Tremolo Sync, Tremolo
AIR Chorus
This effect is a compact but powerful plugin for
classic chorus warmth and depth.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Rate 0.01 – 10.0 Hz 1.01 Hz
Depth 0.00 – 24.00 ms 7.10 ms
Mix 0–100% 50%
Feedback 0–100% 0%
Pre-Delay 0.00
–
24.00 ms 2.00 ms
Wave Triangle, Sine Sine
Offset -180 – 0 – +180 de
g
. +90 de
g
.
AIR Ensemble
This effect applies fluid, shimmering modulation
effects to the audio signal.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Rate 0.01 – 10.0 Hz 1.00 Hz
Depth 0.00 – 24.00 ms 6.00 ms
Width 0–100% 100%
Mix 0–100% (dry–wet) 75%
Mod. Delay 0.00 – 24.00 ms 0.00 ms
Mod. Shimme
r
0–100% 50%
AIR Flanger
This effect applies a short, modulating delay to the
audio signal.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Rate 0.02 – 10.00 Hz 0.40 Hz
Depth 0–100% 50%
Feedback 0–100% 50%
Mix 0–100% (dry–wet) 50%
Headroom -20.0 – 0.0 dB FS -10.0 dB FS
394
AIR Fuzz Wah
This is a multi-effect that combines transistor-like distortion and wah.
Tab Parameter Value Range Default Value
Fuzz-Wah Mix 0–100% (dry–wet) 100%
Order Fuzz>Wah, Wah>Fuzz Fuzz>Wah
Fuzz Mix 0–100% (dry–wet) 100%
Wah Mix 0–100% (dry–wet) 100%
Fuzz Drive 0 – 40 dB 20 dB
Fuzz Tone 1.00 – 10.0 kHz 3.16 kHz
Fuzz Output -Inf – 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
Fuzz Enable Off, On Off
Wah Pedal 0–100% 50%
Wah Filter Mode Lowpass, Bandpass, Hi
g
hpass Bandpass
Min. Freq. 50.0 Hz – 4.00 kHz 428 Hz
Max Freq. 50.0 Hz – 4.00 kHz 2.07 kHz
Min. Resonance 0–100% 55%
Max Resonance 0–100% 33%
Wah Enable Off, On On
Modulation Mode LFO, Env LFO
Rate
LFO
Env
8/4 – 16
0–100%
4T
75%
Depth -100 – 0 – 100% 0%
AIR Half Speed
This effect can quickly create half-speed versions from any
input material. Filter the processed audio using the built-in
high pass and low pass filter to create dramatic transitions,
and use the fade in and fade out parameters to create
synchronized transitions between dry and effected audio.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Start, Stop
Loop Len
g
th 1/16
–
4 Bars 1 Ba
r
Mode *1.5, *2, *4 *2
Mix 0–100% 100%
Loop Fade 1.00 – 200 ms 4.90 ms
Fade In
Hard, Soft, 1/16–4
Bars
Hard
Fade Out
Hard, Soft, 1/16–4
Bars
Hard
HPF Off, 20.0 Hz – 20.0
kHz
Off
LPF 20.0 Hz – 19.9 kHz,
Off
Off
Band Off, On Off
395
AIR Multi-Chorus
This effect applies a thick, complex chorus effect to your
audio signal.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Rate 0.01 – 10.0 Hz 1.00 Hz
Depth 0.00 – 24.00 ms 6.00 ms
Voices 3, 4, 6 4
Mix 0–100% (dry–wet) 50%
Chorus Low
Cut
20.0 Hz – 1.00 kHz 20.0 Hz
Chorus Width 0–100% 100%
Mod Wave Sine, Tri Tri
Mod Delay 0.00 – 24.00 ms 6.0 ms
AIR Phaser
This effect applies a phaser to your audio signal, for that
wonderful "wooshy," "squishy" sound.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Rate 0.10 – 10.00 Hz 1.00 Hz
Depth 0–100% 50%
Feedback 0–100% 0%
Mix 0–100% (dry–wet) 50%
Phaser Model Vibe, Stone, Ninety,
Tron,
Ninety
Offset
Phase
Rate
-180 – +180 deg.
25–400%
0 deg.
100%
Type Phase, Rate Phase
AIR Pitch Shifter
This effect alters the pitch of the audio signal and can be
adjusted based on the source or style of the signal.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Mode Vocal, Bass, Beats,
Chords, Textures
Vocal
Shift -24.0 – 0 – 24.0 0.0
Mix 0–100% 100%
AIR Stereo Width
This effect creates a wider stereo presence in an audio
signal.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Width 0–200% 100%
Delay 0.0 – 8.0 ms 0.0 ms
Level Trim -Inf – 0.0 – +12.0 dB 0.0 dB
Pan Trim L100 – <C>
–
R100 <C>
High 0–200% 100%
Mid 0–200% 100%
Low 0–200% 100%
396
AIR Stutter
This effect creates mind-blowing glitch effects using a
wide range of volume, pan and pitch stutter effects.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Intervals 1/64 – ¼ 1/16
Sync Off, On On
Steps 2–64 5
Step Length 0–100% 100%
Freeze Off, On Off
Decay 50.0 ms – 100 s 6.99 s
V
olume -12.0 – 0.0 – 6.0 dB -1.2 dB
Mix 0–100% 100%
Pan Mod 0–100% 50%
Pitch Mod -100 – 0 – +100% 0%
Auto Wah
This effect is a low-pass filter modulated by an envelope that
yields a classic funky “wah-wah”- like sound. The envelope
is triggered by the incoming signal’s amplitude. The amount
of the envelope on the cutoff frequency is user-definable.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Resonance 0–100 75
Attack 0–100 30
Release 0–100 30
Cente
r
0–100 50
Sensitivity 0–100 50
Autopan Sync
This effect uses an LFO (tempo-synced to your project) to
move the incoming signal back and forth across the stereo
field, creating a rotary effect.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Rate 8 bars – 1/32 1/4
Autopan
This effect uses an LFO to move the incoming signal back
and forth across the stereo field, creating a rotary effect.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Rate 0–100 10
Chorus 2-Voice
This effect uses an LFO to modulate the pitch and a delay of
the input signal, which are then added to the dry signal. In
small amounts, this creates the illusion of multiple voices
playing at once. Turn up the Feedback and Amount for
more pronounced “shimmering” and “watery” sounds.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Delay 0–100 20
A
mount 0–100 80
Width 0–100 80
Feedback 0–100 50
Rate 0–100 10
397
Chorus 4-Voice
This effect is the same as Chorus 2-Voice, but adds
additional voices for more pronounced modulation.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Delay 0–100 20
Amount 0–100 80
Width 0–100 80
Feedback 0–100 50
Rate 0–100 10
Flanger Sync
This effect is the same as Flanger, but syncs to your project
tempo.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Rate 8 bars – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback -100 – 100 0
Delay 0–100 20
Width 0–100 80
Flanger
A flanger is a modulated delay to emulate the sound created
when running two analog tape machines in parallel with a
slight time misalignment. Slow Rate settings can produce a
“whooshing” jet engine sound, while faster rates result in
more of a “warble.”
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Rate 0–100 10
Feedback -100 – 100 0
Delay 0–100 20
Width 0–100 80
Phaser 1
This effect applies multiple ganged all-pass filters to create
“notches,” or sharp spikes, in the frequency spectrum. The
frequencies of these all-pass filters are usually modulated
by an LFO to create a sweeping sound.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Rate 0–100 10
Phaser 2
This effect is a variation on Phaser 1.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Rate 0–100 10
Phaser Sync
This effect is similar to Phaser 1/Phaser 2, but the LFO is
synced to the project tempo.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Rate 1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
398
Tremolo Sync
This effect uses an LFO (synced to project tempo) to
increase and decrease the volume of the signal. Depending
on the LFO shape, this can produce a smooth wave effect
(sine wave) or a stuttering “on-off” effect (square wave).
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Rate 1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Sine to Square 0–100 (sine–square) 0
Tremolo
This effect is the same as Tremolo sync, but the LFO is
not synced to project tempo.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Dry/Wet 0–100 (dry–wet) 100
Rate 0–100 10
Sine to Square 0–100 (sine–square) 0
Vocal
Options: AIR Vocal Doubler, AIR Vocal Harmonizer, AIR Vocal Tuner
AIR Vocal Doubler
This effect creates realistic vocal doubles to add width
or thickness to a vocal line.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Voices 1–8 4
Stereo Spread 0
–
100% 70%
Lead Volume -Inf
–
+6.0 dB 0.0 dB
Doubler Volume -Inf
–
+6.0 dB 0.0 dB
Pitch +/- 0
–
250% +/- 38%
Pitch Speed 0–100% 75%
Timing 0–800 ms 63 ms
399
AIR Vocal Harmonizer
This effect can create up to four-part realistic vocal
harmonies and complex doubling effects. Each vocal part
has its own level, delay, formant, mode, and interval
parameters.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
Key
A
–G# C
Scale Major, Minor, Harm
Minor, Melo Minor,
Dorian, Phrygian,
Lydian, Mixo,
Locrian, Chromatic,
Penta, Maj Triad,
Min Triad, Root
Major
Lead Volume -Inf
–
0.0 dB 0.0 dB
Harmony Volume -Inf – 0.0 dB -2.5 dB
Timing 0–100% 42%
Tunin
g
0–100% 14%
Smooth 5–200 ms 8 ms
Voice Range Very Low, Low, Mid,
High, Very High
Mid
Root Mode Split
A
–G# E
Reference 420.0
–
460.0 Hz 440.0 Hz
Delay Sync Off, On On
Harmony 1–4 Off, On 1 On
AIR Vocal Tuner
This effect applies pitch correction for natural sounding or
hard-tuned vocal effects.
Parameter
V
alue Range Default Value
Detection Unworried, Default,
Selective, Picky,
Blind
Default
Voice Range Very Low, Low, Mid,
High, Very High
Mid
Key
A
–
G#
A
Scale Major, Minor, Harm
Minor, Melo Minor,
Dorian, Phrygian,
Lydian, Mixo,
Locrian, Chromatic,
Penta, Maj Triad,
Min Triad, Root
Minor
Retune Time 1–1000 ms 32 ms
Reference 420.0
–
460.0 Hz 440.0 Hz
400
Plugins
Plugins included with your MPC purchase are described below. For plugins purchases separately for use with MPC,
refer to the plugin’s own User Guide.
Bassline
The AIR Bassline plugin emulates the sound of classic mono synths,
with a contemporary twist.
Osc / Filter / Envelope
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the oscillators, as well as their
filter and envelope settings.
Parameter Description Value Range
Oscillator Waveform Continuously variable waveshape for the oscillator. Saw Octave, Saw,
Square, Sine
Sub-Octave
A
mount of sub-octave oscillator. 0–100%
Fifth
A
mount of fifth-oscillator. 0–100%
Start Phase Position of the waveform when a note is tri
gg
ered. Free, 0 de
g
r., 180 de
g
r.
Glide Time Amount of time to slide from the pitch of one note to
the next note played.
10.0 ms – 2.00 s
Boost Boosts the si
g
nal of the oscillator. 0.0 dB – 48.0 dB
Boost Freq. Center frequency of the boost. * 1.0 – * 240.0
Boost Envelope Amount of effect of the envelope on the Boost section.
Adjust Gain to control the amount of boost.
Adjust Frequency to control the width of the boosted
frequency.
Gain 100–0%, Off,
Frequency 0–100%
Filter LP Cutoff Cutoff frequency for the low-pass filter. 20.0 Hz – 20.0 kHz
Reso Resonance of the filter. 0–100%
Filter Env Envelope of the filter.
At negative values, decreases the cutoff value based
on the filter decay value.
At positive values, increases the cutoff value based on
the filter decay value.
-100% – 0 – 100%
HP Cutoff Cutoff frequency for the hi
g
h-pass filter. 10.0 Hz – 500 Hz
Envelope Amp Attack Length of time for the note to reach full volume. 100–0% Soft to 0–100%
Hard
Amp Decay Length of time for the note to reach the sustained
volume.
0–100%
Filter Decay Length of time for the filter to reset after being
released.
0–100%
Pitch Mod Amount of pitch modulation applied to the envelope. 0–100%
401
Velocity / Global / Chorus
Use this tab to adjust the Velocity Control settings, and Global volume. You can also apply and adjust the settings for
the built-in Chorus effect.
Parameter Description Value Range
Velocity Amp Control The amount of effect velocity has on amplitude
control.
0–100%
Filter Control The amount of effect velocity has on filter control. 0–100%
Boost Control The amount of effect velocity has on boost control. 0–100%
Env Retrigger Sets whether the envelope will retrigger when a note is
played while another note is being held.
Off, On
Global Global
V
olume Sets the volume level. -inf dB – +6.0 dB
Drive Type Choose one of two drive al
g
orithms. Overdrive, Clip
Drive Amount
A
mount of drive applied. 0–100%
Bend Range Number of semitones up or down controlled by MIDI
pitch bend messa
g
es
0–12
Chorus Rate Modulation speed of the chorus effect. 0.40 Hz – 3.20 kHz
Depth Modulation depth of the chorus effect. 0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the chorus effect. 0–100%
On/Off Enables or disables the effect. Off, On
Delay
Use this tab to apply and adjust the settings for the built-in delay effect.
Parameter Description Value Range
Time Len
g
th of time of the delayed si
g
nal.
When Sync is set to Free:
1 ms – 2.00 s
When Sync is set to Sync:
1/32 – 8/4
Sync
Set to Free to adjust Time by milliseconds, or set to Sync to match the
Delay Time to the Global Tempo.
Free, Sync
Mix Wet/dry amount of the delay effect. 0–100%
Feedback
A
mount of si
g
nal fed back into the delay line. 0–100%
Damp Center frequency of where the delay si
g
nal will be dampened. 1.00 – 20.0 kHz
Reso Amount of resonance of the feedback signal. 0–100%
Reso Freq Center frequency for feedback resonance. 100 Hz – 10.0 kHz
Ratio
Reduces the delay Time in either the Left or Right stereo field. This is
useful for creatin
g
offset, panned delays.
L 50:100, R 50:100
HPF Center frequency for delay si
g
nal hi
g
h-pass filter. 20.0 Hz – 1.0 kHz
Width Stereo width of delay si
g
nal. Hi
g
her values
g
ive wider stereo separation. 0–100%
On/Off Enables or disables the effect. Off, On
402
Compressor / Hype
Use this tab to apply and adjust the settings for the built-in Compressor and Hype effects.
Parameter Description Value Range
Compresso
r
Threshold Si
g
nal level after which the compressor will be applied. 0.0 – -60. dB
Ratio Amount of compression applied. 1.0:1 – 100.0:1
Output Amount of additional output gain for the compressed
si
g
nal.
0.0 – +30.0 dB
Mix Wet/dry mix of the compressor effect. 0–100%
Knee How gradually the compressor reacts as the threshold
is reached.
Lower values apply a "soft" knee (compression is
applied more slowly as signal approaches the
threshold), and higher values apply a "hard" knee
(compression is immediately applied when the
threshold is reached).
0–100%
A
ttack Len
g
th of time to apply the compression. 100 us – 300 ms
Release Length of time for compressed signal to return to
original level.
10 ms – 4.00 s
On/Off Enables or disables the effect. Off, On
Hype Hi
g
h Dampens or maximizes hi
g
h end frequencies. -100 – 0 – +100%
Low Dampens or maximizes low end frequencies. -100 – 0 – +100%
On/Off Enables or disables the effect. Off, On
403
Electric
The AIR Electric plugin emulates the sound of classic electric pianos.
While viewing any of the tabs listed below, you can quickly enable
or disable the Bell and Noise sounds, as well as the built-in effects
(Tremolo, Tube, Chorus, Delay and Spring Reverb).
When viewing a specific tab, you can enable or disable the sound or
effect by pressing the circle in the upper-right corner of each
section.
Pickup / Env
Use this tab to edit the settings for the emulated pickup and the
sound envelope.
Parameter Description Value Range
Pickup Type Type of pickup emulated. Pickup, 0–100%
Electro-Static, 0–100%
Electro-Ma
g
netic
Height Height of the pickup to the tines. 0.0 – 5.0 mm
Distance Distance of the pickup to the tines. 0.1 – 10.0 mm
Clip Amount of clipping applied to the signal. 0–100%
Keytrack Ties the pickup parameters to the pitch being played.
At higher values, the Distance is increased as the
pitch is increased.
0–100%
Envelope Attack Length of time for the note to reach full volume. 100–0% Hard,
0–100% Soft
Decay Length of time for the note to reach the sustained
volume.
100 ms – 20.0 s
Release Length of time for the note to become silent after
bein
g
released.
100 ms – 5.0 s
Peak Length Length of time full volume is held before decaying. 3 – 50 ms
Keytrack Ties the envelope parameters to the pitch being
played.
At higher values, the envelope time is decreased as
the pitch is increased.
0–100%
404
Bell / Noise
Use this tab to apply and adjust the settings for the Bell and Noise sounds.
Parameter Description Value Range
Bell Tune Pitch of the bell sound, in semitones above the root
pitch.
0– 60 semitones
Dry/PU Mix of Dry versus Pickup si
g
nal for the bell sound. -100% – 0% – +100%
V
olume Level of the bell sound. -inf dB – +6.0 dB
Tune Keytrack Ties the tuning of the bell sound to the pitches
played.
0–100%
Decay How long it takes for the bell sound to dissipate 100 ms – 7.0 s
Keytrack Ties the amount of bell sound to the pitch being
played.
At negative values, the bell sound is increased as the
pitch increases.
At positive values, the bell sound is increased as the
pitch decreases.
-100% – 0% – +100%
Noise Freq Center frequency of the noise effect 200 Hz – 16.0 kHz
Random
A
mount of randomization applied to the noise effect 0–100%
Mix Level of noise effect present -inf dB – +6.0 dB
A
ttack Len
g
th of time for the noise effect to reach full level 1–50 ms
Decay Length of time for the noise effect to dissipate 100 ms – 3.00 s
Keytrack
Ties the Freq to the pitch being played.
0–100%
Setup
Use this tab to adjust general settings for the plugin.
Parameter Description Value Range
Polyphony Number of voices available. 1–16 Voices
Level Overall level of the plu
g
in. -inf dB – +6.0 dB
Velo Level Adjusts how much incoming velocity is applied. 0–100%
Velo Tone Ties the incoming velocity to tone.
A
t hi
g
her values, increased velocity increases tone bri
g
htness.
0–100%
Velo Attack Ties the incoming velocity to the attack envelope.
A
t hi
g
her values, low velocities feature lon
g
er attack times.
0–100%
405
Trem / Tube / Chorus
Use this tab to apply and adjust the settings for the built-in Tremolo, Tube (Over Drive), and Chorus effects.
Parameter Description Value Range
Tremolo Rate Modulation speed of the effect.
When Sync is set to Free:
0.25 – 13.00 Hz
When Sync is set to Sync:
8/4 – 1/16
Sync
Sync the Tremolo Rate to the Global Tempo or let it
run Free.
Free, Sync
Mode
Select Pan for stereo field modulation, or Tremolo
for amplitude modulation.
Pan, Tremolo
Depth
A
mount of modulation applied. 0–100%
Tube Drive
A
mount of drive applied. 0–100%
Headroom Amount of gain reduction between the clean signal
and the driven signal.
-30.0 – 0.0 dB
Saturation
A
mount of saturation applied. 0–100%
Output Output level of the tube driven signal. -20.0 – 0.0 – +20.0 dB
Chorus Rate Modulation speed of the effect. 0.40 – 3.20 Hz
Depth
A
mount of pitch modulation of the effect. 0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the chorus effect. 0–100%
Delay
Use this tab to apply and adjust the settings for the built-in Delay effect.
Parameter Description Value Range
Time
A
mount of time between the dry si
g
nal and the delayed si
g
nal.
When Sync is set to Free:
1 ms – 2.00 s
When Sync is set to Sync:
1/32 – 8/4
Sync
Sync the Delay Time to the Global Tempo or set to Free to adjust Time
by milliseconds.
Free, Sync
Mix Wet/dry amount of the delay effect. 0–100%
Feedback Amount of signal fed back into the delay line. 0–100%
Damp Center frequency of where the delay si
g
nal will be dampened. 1.00 – 20.0 kHz
Reso
A
mount of resonance of the feedback si
g
nal. 0–100%
Reso Freq Center frequency for feedback resonance. 100 Hz – 10.0 kHz
Ratio
Reduces the delay Time in either the Left or Right stereo field. This is
useful for creating offset, panned delays.
L 50:100, R 50:100
HPF Center frequency for delay signal high-pass filter. 20.0 Hz – 1.0 kHz
Width Stereo width of delay si
g
nal. Hi
g
her values
g
ive wider stereo separation. 0–100%
406
Spring Reverb
Use this tab to apply and adjust the settings for the built-in Spring Reverb effect.
Parameter Description Value Range
Pre-Delay Len
g
th of time between dry si
g
nal and reverberated si
g
nal. 0 ms – 250 ms
Time Len
g
th of reverb tail. 1.0 – 10.0 s
Mix Wet/dry amount of the reverb effect. 0–100%
Diffusion Rate of increasing density of reverb reflections.
At lower settings, the sound of individual reflections is more present.
A
t hi
g
her settin
g
s, reflections are more uniform.
0–100%
Width Stereo width of reverb si
g
nal. Hi
g
her values
g
ive wider stereo separation. 0–100%
Low Cut Center frequency for reverb si
g
nal low-cut filter. 20.0 Hz – 1.00 kHz
407
Hype
The AIR Hype plugin is a modern style dual-oscillator synthesizer
that includes a wide variety of built-in effects for endless
combinations of sound, as well as convenient macro controls for
lightning-fast adjustments.
Macro
Use this tab to adjust the macro settings for the plugin. You can
access the Effect on/off switches in all tabs.
Parameter Description Value Range
Macros These six macro controls are unique to each preset. Varies
Cutoff
A
mount of filter cutoff applied. 0–100%
Reso
A
mount of filter resonance applied. 0–100%
Mod
A
mount of modulation effect applied. 0–100%
Distortion
A
mount of distortion effect applied. 0–100%
Delay Amount of delay effect applied. 0–100%
Reverb Amount of reverb effect applied. 0–100%
Pumpe
r
A
mount of pumper effect applied. 0–100%
V
olume Main output volume. -inf – +6.0 dB
408
Filter / Amp
Use this tab to adjust the filter and amplitude envelope settings.
Parameter Description Value Range
Filte
r
Cutoff Cutoff frequency for the filter. 0–100%
Reso Amount of resonance of the filter. 0–100%
Filter Envelope
A
ttack Len
g
th of time for the filter to reach full level. 0–100%
Decay Length of time for the filter to reach sustain level. 0–100%
Sustain Len
g
th of time for the filter to hold sustain level. 0–100%
Release Length of time for the filter to dissipate when released. 0–100%
Envelope
Depth
Amount of Filter Envelope added to the filter cutoff. 0–100%
Envelope
V
elocity
Amount of effect the note velocity has on the filter
envelope.
0–100%
A
mp Spike
A
pplies additional velocity to the amplitude attack. 0–100%
Spike Decay Length of time for the Spike to decay. 0–100%
Amp Envelope Attack Length of time for the note to reach full level. 0–100%
Decay Len
g
th of time for the note to reach sustain level. 0–100%
Sustain Length of time for the note to hold sustain level. 0–100%
Release Len
g
th of time for the note to dissipate when released. 0–100%
Fade Amount added to the envelope sustain level. 0–100%
Velocity Amount of effect the note velocity has on the
amplitude envelope.
0–100%
409
Effects 1
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the Low-Frequency Oscillator and Modulation, Distortion and Hype effects.
Parameter Description Value Range
LFO Rate Speed of the low frequency oscillator.
When Sync is set to 1st Note or Each Note:
0.03 – 30.00 Hz
When Sync is set to Temp+Note or Tempo+Beat:
8/4 – 1/64
Sync Enables or disables LFO sync, and sets how it is
synced when enabled.
Off, 1st Note, Each Note,
Tempo+Note,
Tempo+Beat
Depth
A
mount of LFO modulation applied. 0–100%
Mod Rate Speed of modulation. 0.05 – 20.00 Hz
Adjust Length of time the wet signal is offset from the dry
signal.
0.0 – 24.0 ms
Depth
A
mount of modulation applied. 0–100%
Mix Wet/dry mix of the modulation effect. 0–100%
Distortion Drive Amount of drive applied. 0–100%
Bias Emulates amount of volta
g
e sent to a tube powe
r
-amp. -100 – 0 – 100%
Output Output level of the distorted signal. 0–100%
Mix Wet/dry mix of the distortion effect. 0–100%
Hype Low Dampens or maximizes low end frequencies. -12.0 – +12.0 dB
Lo-Mid Dampens or maximizes low-mid frequencies. -20.0 – +20.0 dB
Hi-Mid Dampens or maximizes hi
g
h-mid frequencies. -20.0 – +20.0 dB
Hi
g
h Dampens or maximizes hi
g
h end frequencies. -12.0 – +12.0 dB
410
Effects 2
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the Delay, Reverb, Compressor, Pumper, and Limiter effects.
Parameter Description Value Range
Delay Time Amount of time between the dry signal and the
delayed si
g
nal.
1/32 – 8/4
Feedback
A
mount of si
g
nal fed back into the delay line. 0–100%
Freq Adjusts the filter cutoff frequency of the delayed
signal.
0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the delay effect. 0–100%
L/R
Reduces the delay Time in either the Left or Right
stereo field. This is useful for creating offset, panned
delays.
L 50:100 – R 100:50
Reverb Pre-Delay Length of time between dry signal and reverberated
si
g
nal.
0.0 – 250.0 ms
Time Length of reverb tail. 0.0 – 30.0 s
Mix Wet/dry amount of the reverb effect. 0–100%
Compressor Threshold Signal level after which the compressor will be
applied.
-30.0 – +10.0 dB
Ratio Amount of compression applied. 1.0:1 – 20.0:1
A
ttack Len
g
th of time to apply the compression. 0–100%
Output Amount of additional output gain for the compressed
si
g
nal.
-20.0 – +20.0 dB
Pumpe
r
Rate Speed of the pumper effect. Bar, 1/2 – 1/32T
Depth
A
mount of si
g
nal attenuation by the effect. 0–100%
Release
A
mount of time to release the effect. 0–100%
Limiter Drive Amount of drive added after the limiter effect. 0.0 – 32.0 dB
411
Setup
Use this tab to adjust the plugin setup parameters.
Parameter Description Value Range
Setup Transpose Transposition of the plu
g
in, in semitones. -36 – +36
Tune Fine tuning of the plugin, in cents. -100 – +100
Glide Time Amount of time to slide from the pitch of one note to
the next note played.
0 ms – 32 s
Glide Mode Enables or disables pitch gliding for all triggered notes
or le
g
ato notes.
Off, Legato, On
Mode Sets the plugin to polyphonic or monophonic Poly, Mono
Del-Rev Level of the delay and reverb si
g
nals. -inf – +6.0 dB
Volume Overall level of the plugin. -inf – +6.0 dB
MIDI Control
Mod Wheel Destination Send Mod Wheel data to one of the following control
destinations.
Pitch, Cutoff, Reso,
A
mp, Pan
Depth
A
mount of modulation applied.
When Destination is set to Pitch:
-12.0 – +12.0
When Destination is set to Cutoff, Reso, Amp or Pan:
-100 – 0 – 100%
LFO Ties the modulation to the Control LFO. Off, On
Aftertouch Destination Send Aftertouch data to one of the following control
destinations.
Pitch, Cutoff, Reso,
Amp, Pan
Depth
A
mount of modulation applied. 0–100%
When Destination is set to Pitch:
-12.0 – +12.0
When Destination is set to Cutoff, Reso,
A
mp or Pan:
-100 – 0 – 100%
LFO Ties the modulation to the Control LFO. Off, On
Control LFO Sync Enables or disables Control LFO sync, and sets how
the Control LFO is synced when enabled.
Off, First Note, Each
Note, BPM & Note, BPM
& Beat
Rate Speed of modulation of the Control LFO.
When Sync is set to First Note or Each Note:
0.03 – 30.00 Hz
When Sync is set to BPM & Note or BPM & Beat:
8/4 – 1/64
Shape Waveshape of the Control LFO. Sine, Triangle, Sawtooth,
Square, S&H Random,
S&H Alternate, Random
Drift, Slow Drift
412
TubeSynth
The AIR TubeSynth plugin emulates the sound of classic vintage analog polysynths. TubeSynth is based on the highly
acclaimed AIR Vacuum Pro desktop synth plugin and also includes 5 integrated AIR effects.
Oscillator
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the two variable Oscillators
and the Sub Oscillator.
Parameter Description Value Range
Oscillator 1 Octave Coarse tuning of the oscillator by octaves.
The Wide setting provides additional Fine tuning
controls.
Wide, 32', 16', 8', 4', 2'
Fine Fine tuning of the oscillator by semitones.
When Octave is set to Wide:
-70.00 – 0.00 – +70.00
When Octave is set to 32'–2':
-12.00 – 0.00 – +12.00
Shape Waveshape of Oscillator 1 (continuously
variable)
Triangle, Saw, Square, Pulse
F-Env
Shape Amount of Filter Envelope output subtracted
from or added to the value defined by the Osc 1
Shape parameter.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Quad Enables or disables four-voice emulation for the
oscillator.
Off, On
Detune
Adjusts tuning of the additional Quad voices.
0–100%
Oscillator 2 Octave Coarse tuning of the oscillator by octaves, all the
way down to LFO speed.
LFO, 32', 16', 8', 4', 2'
Fine Fine tunin
g
of the oscillator.
When Octave is set to LFO:
0.01 – 20.00 Hz
When Octave is set to 32'–2':
-12.00 – 0.00 – +12.00
semitones
Shape Waveshape of Oscillator 2 (continuously
variable)
Noise, Saw, Square, Pulse
F-Env
Shape Amount of Filter Envelope output subtracted
from or added to the value defined by the Osc 2
Shape parameter.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Sync Enables of disables syncing of Oscillator 2 to
Oscillator 1.
Off, On
Micro Detune
A
dditional detunin
g
of Oscillator 2. 0–100%
Phase Position of the waveshape when the sound is
triggered.
0 – 360 degrees
Sub Oscillator Shape Waveshape of the sub oscillator (continuously
variable).
Triangle, Saw, Square, Pulse
413
Mixer / Filter
Use this tab to control EQ for Oscillator 2, set the levels of the oscillators and effects, and edit the low-pass filter.
Parameter Description Value Range
Osc 2 EQ Gain
Amount of gain applied to the selected Frequency.
-48 – 0 – +48 dB
Frequency Center frequency for the equalization band. 25 – 10,000 Hz
Drive Amount of drive added to the EQ signal. 0–100%
Keytrack Ties the EQ settin
g
s to the pitch bein
g
played 0–100%
Mixe
r
Osc 1 Level of Oscillator 1. 0–100%
Osc 2 Level of Oscillator 2. 0–100%
Sub Osc Level of the Sub Oscillator. 0–100%
Rin
g
Mod Level of Rin
g
Modulation effect. 0–100%
Drive Level of Drive effect. 0–100%
LP Filter Cutoff Center frequency of the low-pass filter cutoff. 0–100%
Reso
A
mount of resonance of the low-pass filter. 0–100%
Slope Amount of attenuation applied above the cutoff
frequency.
0 – 24 dB/oct
Saturation Amount of saturation applied to the low-pass filter. 0–100%
Env Percentage of the envelope output subtracted from or
added to the LP Filter Cutoff.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Keytrack
Ties the LP Filter Cutoff to the pitch being played.
0–100%
414
Envelope
Use this tab to adjust the various envelope settings.
Parameter Description Value Range
Filter Envelope
A
ttack Len
g
th of time for the filter to reach full level. 1.00 ms – 100 s
Decay Length of time for the filter to reach sustain level. 1.00 ms – 100 s
Sustain Level that a sustained note is held at, as a
percenta
g
e of the maximum level.
0–100%
Release Length of time for the filter to dissipate when
released.
1.00 ms – 100 s
A
mp Envelope
A
ttack Len
g
th of time for the note to reach full level. 1.00 ms – 100 s
Decay Length of time for the note to reach sustain level. 1.00 ms – 100 s
Sustain Level that a sustained note is held at, as a
percenta
g
e of the maximum level.
0–100%
Release Length of time for the note to dissipate when
released.
1.00 ms – 100 s
Envelope 3 Start Level Initial velocity level of the envelope. 0–100%
Start Time Length of time for the envelope to start. 0–5000 ms
Slope Hold Amount of Envelope subtracted from or added to
the Destination when a note is held.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Slope Rel Amount of Envelope subtracted from or added to
the Destination when a note is released.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Destination Where the envelope will be applied to. Off, Pitch, Osc 2 Pitch,
LFO 1/2 Rate, Osc1
Quad Det., Osc 1/2
Shape, Osc 1/2 Level,
Rin
g
Level
415
LFO
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the low-frequency oscillators.
Parameter Description Value Range
LFO 1/LFO 2 Shape Waveshape of the low-frequency oscillator. Sine, Square. Saw Up,
Saw Down, Pump,
S&H, Drift
Destination Where the low-frequency oscillator is sent.
LFO1:
Off, Pitch, Filter, Level,
Pan
LFO2:
Pitch, Osc 1/2 Shape,
Osc 1/2 Pitch, LPF,
Quad Detune, Osc 2
EQ Freq, Osc 2 EQ
Gain, Rin
g
Level
Rate Speed of modulation.
When Sync is Off:
0.01 – 20.00 Hz
When Sync is On:
8/4 – 1/32
Depth Amount of modulation applied. 0–100%
Fade Apply a fade-in or fade-out of the LFO signal. 0.00 – 20.00 s out,
No fade,
0.00 – 20.00 s in
Sync
Sync the LFO Rate to the Global Tempo or turn Off
to adjust Rate by Hertz.
Off, On
Modulation Source Where the modulation signal is sent from. Filter Env, Amp Env,
Osc 1, Osc 2
Destination Where the modulated signal is received. Pitch, Osc 1/2 Shape,
Osc 1/2 Pitch, LPF,
Quad Detune, Osc EQ
2 Freq, Osc 2 EQ Gain,
Ring Level
Depth
A
mount of modulation applied. -100 – 0 – 100%
416
Setup
Use this tab to adjust plugin setup parameters.
Parameter Description Value Range
Controller Destinations
Velocity 1 Send Velocity data to one of the following control
destinations.
Amp, Cutoff, Osc1 Shape,
Osc2 Shape, Osc1&2
Shape
Depth Amount of modulation applied. 0–100%
Velocity 2 Send Velocity data to one of the following control
destinations.
Amp, Cutoff, Osc1 Shape,
Osc2 Shape, Osc1&2
Shape
Depth
A
mount of modulation applied. 0–100%
Modwheel Send Modwheel data to one of the following
control destinations.
Amp, Cutoff, Osc1 Shape,
Osc2 Shape, Osc1&2
Shape
Depth
A
mount of modulation applied. -100 – 0 – 100%
Aftertouch Send Aftertouch data to one of the following
control destinations.
LFO 1 Depth, Cutoff, Osc1
Shape, Osc2 Shape,
Osc1&2 Shape
Depth Amount of modulation applied. -100 – 0 – 100%
Setup Polyphony Number of allowable voices, and how voices are
triggered.
Legato, Retrigger, 2, 3, 4
Bend Range Number of semitones up or down controlled by
MIDI pitch bend messages
2–12 (semitones)
Glide Time Amount of time to slide from the pitch of one note
to the next note played.
1.00 ms – 100 s
Glide All Enables or disables pitch gliding for all triggered
notes, not just le
g
ato notes.
Off, On
Detune Amount of detuning applied. This setting is only
applied when Doubling is enabled.
0–100%
Doublin
g
Enables or disables voice doublin
g
. Off, On
Output Shape
A
mount of si
g
nal sent to a Tube Drive. 0–100%
Width Stereo width of the audio signal. Higher values
give wider stereo separation.
0–100%
Level Overall output volume of the plu
g
in. -inf dB – +12.0 dB
417
Chorus
Use this tab to apply and adjust the settings for the built-in Chorus effect.
Parameter Description Value Range
Rate Modulation speed of the effect. 0.01 – 10.0 Hz
Delay Len
g
th of time the wet si
g
nal is offset from the dry si
g
nal. 0.00 – 24.00 ms
Voices Number of voices used in the chorus effect. 3, 4, 6
LFO Wave Waveshape of the low-frequency oscillator for the chorus effect. Tri, Sine
Depth
A
mount of pitch modulation of the effect. 0.00 – 24.00 ms
Width Stereo width of the chorus effect. Higher values give wider stereo
separation.
0–100%
Lo Cut Center frequency for the chorus low-cut filter. 20.0 Hz – 1.0 kHz
Mix Wet/dry amount of the chorus effect. 0–100%
Delay
Use this tab to apply and adjust the settings for the built-in delay effect.
Parameter Description Value Range
Time Length of time between the dry signal and the delayed signal.
When Sync is set to Free:
1 ms – 2.00 s
When Sync is set to Sync:
1/32 – 8/4
Sync
Enable to sync the Delay Time to the Global Tempo, disable to set the
Time in milliseconds.
Off, On
Feedback
A
mount of delay si
g
nal fed back into the delay line. 0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the delay effect. 0–100%
Damp Center frequency of where the delayed signal will be dampened. 1.00 – 20.0 kHz
Reso
A
mount of resonance of the feedback si
g
nal. 0–100%
Reso Freq Center frequency for feedback resonance. 100 Hz – 10.0 kHz
Ratio
Reduces the delay Time in either the Left or Right stereo field. This is
useful for creatin
g
offset, panned delays.
L 100:50, R 50:100
HPF Center frequency for delay signal high-pass filter. 20.0 Hz – 1.0 kHz
Width Stereo width of delay signal. Higher values give wider stereo separation. 0–100%
418
Reverb / Compressor / Hype
Use this tab to apply and adjust the settings for the built-in Reverb, Compressor and Hype effects.
Parameter Description Value Range
Reverb Mode Type of reverb applied. Hall, Stadium, Room,
A
bstract
Time Len
g
th of reverb tail. 0.4 s – +inf s
Lo Cut Center frequency for the reverb low-pass filter. 1 – 1000 Hz
Hi Cut Center frequency for the reverb hi
g
h-pass filter. 1.0 – 20.0 kHz
Mix Wet/dry mix of the reverb effect. 0–100%
Compressor Threshold Signal level after which the compressor will be
applied.
0.0 – -60. dB
Output Amount of additional output gain for the compressed
si
g
nal.
0.0 – +30.0 dB
Mix Wet/dry mix of the compressor effect. 0–100%
Ratio
A
mount of compression applied. 1.0:1 – 100.0:1
Knee How gradually the compressor reacts as the threshold
is reached.
Lower values apply a "soft" knee (compression is
applied more slowly as signal approaches the
threshold), and higher values apply a "hard" knee
(compression is immediately applied when the
threshold is reached).
0–100%
A
ttack Len
g
th of time to apply the compression. 100 us – 300 ms
Release Length of time for compressed signal to return to
ori
g
inal level.
10 ms – 4.00 s
Hype Hi
g
h Dampens or maximizes hi
g
h end frequencies. -100 – 0 – +100%
Low Dampens or maximizes low end frequencies. -100 – 0 – +100%
419
DrumSynth
The AIR DrumSynth plugins emulate the sound of classic
drum machines and feature multiple synthesis types,
advanced modeling and carefully crafted, built-in effects to
create powerful contemporary drum sounds.
You can add the following drum types as individual plugins
per track: Clap, Crash, HiHat, Kick, Perc, Ride, Snare
and Tom. Each of these instruments has comprehensive
synthesis and effects sections described below.
In each plugin, you can quickly enable or disable the built-
in effects (Transient, Distortion, EQ and Compressor)
while viewing any of the tabs listed below by tapping the
buttons on the right side of the touchscreen under FX.
Drum Sound
Use this tab to adjust the basic settings for the drum sound. You can also use the knobs on this tab to quickly
adjust up to eight parameters specifically chosen for each sound.
Parameter Description Value Range
Model Type of drum sound emulated. Varies
One-Shot Allows the drum sound to play entirely when triggered
or only for how long the note length is set.
Enabled, Disabled
Velocity Amount of incoming Velocity applied. When set to 0,
all notes will sound as if Full Level.
0–100%
Velocity 2 Amount of additional Velocity envelope that can be
used to control a parameter.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Target Select the Parameter where the Velocity 2 information
is sent.
Param 1–8
Gain Volume level of the drum sound. -Inf, -68.0 – 0 – +12.0 dB
Parameter
Knobs
Each drum sound has up to eight associated
parameters that can be used to further shape the
sound. The available parameters vary based on the
type of drum sound selected. Use the knobs to adjust
the selected parameter.
Varies
420
Trans/Dist
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the Transient and Distortion effects.
Parameter Description Value Range
Transient Attack Decreases or increases the amount of
transient attack applied to the signal.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Shape Adjusts the shape of the processed transient. 0–100%
Sustain Percentage of sustain envelope subtracted
from or added to the transient effect.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Distortion Pre-Shape Increases or decreases the high-end tone of
the incoming audio signal pre-distortion.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Drive Amount of drive applied. 0–60 dB
Threshold Signal level after which the distortion will be
applied.
-20.0–0.0 dB FS
High Cut Center frequency of the distortion signal high-
cut filter.
1.00–20.0 kHz
Mix Wet/dry amount of the distortion effect. 0–100%
EQ/Comp
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the EQ and Compressor effects.
Parameter Description Value Range
EQ High Freq Center frequency for the High EQ band. 1.20 – 20.0 kHz
High Gain Amount of gain applied to the High EQ band. Cut, -12.0 – 0 – +12.0 dB
High Mid Freq Center frequency for the High Mid EQ band. 120 Hz – 16.0 kHz
High Mid Q Width of the High Mid EQ band. 0.40–10.00
High Mid Gain Amount of gain applied to the High Mid EQ
band.
-18.0 – 0 – +18.0 dB
Low Mid Freq Center frequency for the Low Mid EQ band. 40.0 Hz – 8.00 kHz
Low Mid Q Width of the Low Mid EQ band. 0.40–10.00
Low Mid Gain Amount of gain applied to the Low Mid EQ
band.
-18.0 – 0 – +18.0 dB
Low Freq Center frequency for the Low EQ band. 20.0 Hz – 1.00 kHz
Low Gain Amount of gain applied to the Low EQ band. Cut, -12.0 – 0 – +12.0 dB
Compressor Ratio Amount of compression applied. 1.0:1 – 100.0:1
Attack Length of time to apply the compression. 100 us – 300 ms
Threshold Signal level after which the compressor will
be applied.
-60.0–0.0 dB
Output Amount of additional output gain for the
compressed signal.
0.0–30.0 dB
421
You can also use the DrumSynth:Multi plugin to access all
DrumSynth sounds from one plugin, which includes
additional dedicated effects and mixing controls.
Note: You can only have one DrumSynth:Multi plugin
active per project.
DrumSynth 1–8 / Trans/Dist / EQ/Comp
Use the first eight tabs in the Multi to control the same
parameters as the individual DrumSynth plugins. Tap
each tab to cycle between the Drum Sound view, the
Trans/Dist view, and the EQ/Comp view.
Send FX
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the Delay, Diffuser and Reverb effects.
Parameter Description Value Range
Delay Time Length of time between the dry signal and the
delayed signal.
1/32 – 8/4
Ratio
Reduces the delay Time in either the Left or
Right stereo field. This is useful for creating
offset, panned delays.
L 100:50, R 50:100
Feedback Amount of delay signal fed back into the
delay line.
0–100%
Filter Freq Sets the center frequency of the filtered delay
signal.
1.00 – 20.0 kHz
Reso Amount of resonance of the feedback signal. 0–100%
Reso Freq Center frequency for feedback resonance. 100 Hz – 10.0 kHz
Diffuser Delay Delay time between the dry signal and the
diffused signal.
1/64 – 4/4
Feedback Amount of diffused signal sent back into the
delay line.
0–100%
Diffusion Rate of increasing density of reverb
reflections.
At lower settings, the sound of individual
reflections is more present.
At higher settings, reflections are more
uniform.
0–100%
Bright Adjusts the high-end tone of the diffused
signal.
0–100%
Reverb Mode Type of reverb applied. Hall, Stadium, Room,
Abstract
Time Length of reverb tail. 0.4 s – +Inf s
Low Cut Center frequency for the reverb low-pass
filter.
1 – 1000 Hz
High Cut Center frequency for the reverb high-pass
filter.
1.00 – 20.0 kHz
422
Mixer / FX / Sends
Use this tab to mix the individual drum sounds as well as control their effects. The Mixer / FX / Sends tab contains
three different views that can be accessed by tapping the tab at the bottom of the display.
Use the Mixer view to adjust the volume, panning, muting, and soloing for each drum.
Tap the 1–8 icons to mute or unmute the selected drum.
Tap the S icon to solo the selected drum.
Tap and drag the pan slider to adjust the drum panning. Alternatively, tap the slider and use the encoder, or
use the appropriate knob in Screen mode.
Tap and drag the volume slider to adjust the drum volume. Alternatively, tap the slider and use the encoder,
or use the appropriate knob in Screen mode.
Use the FX view to enable or disable the Transient, Distortion, EQ and Compressor effects for each drum sound.
Tap the FX box to enable or disable the selected FX on the selected drum.
Use the Sends view to adjust the send levels for the Delay, Diffuser and Reverb Send FX.
Tap and drag the Send knob to adjust the send level for the selected effect on the selected drum. Alternatively,
tap the knob and use the encoder, or use the appropriate knob in Screen mode.
423
Mellotron
The AIR Mellotron plugin is a software recreation of the classic tape
keyboard, including reproductions of the original tape samples in
both clean and dirty versions.
Model
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the tape sample.
Parameter Description Value Range
Sample Select the tape loop sample. 8 Voice Choir, Boys
Choir, Flute, Violins 1,
Violins 2, Violin
Clean Enables or disables a cleaner sample sound. Off, On
Formant Decreases or increases the harmonic resonance of
the formant frequency.
-12 – 0 – +12
Ag
e
A
mount of sound de
g
radation applied. 0–100%
Smpl Start Startin
g
point of the tape loop sample. 0–100%
Cutoff
A
mount of filter cutoff applied. 0–100%
A
ttack Len
g
th of time for the sound to reach full level. 0 ms – 32 s
Release Length of time for the sound to dissipate when the
note is released.
0 ms – 32 s
Vel > Amp The amount of effect velocity has on amplitude
control.
0–100%
MW Vib
A
mount of vibrato applied from the mod wheel. 0–100%
A
T Vib
A
mount of vibrato applied from aftertouch. 0–100%
Vib Speed Modulation speed of the vibrato effect. 0.03 – 30.00 Hz
Key On Enables or disables key action noise on note on. Off, On
Key Off Enables or disables key action noise on note off. Off, On
On Vol
A
mount of key-on noise. 0–100%
Off Vol
A
mount of key-off noise. 0–100%
Smpl Poly Number of voices available. 1–40
Level Overall level of the plugin. 0–100%
424
Flavor / Compressor / EQ
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the flavor, compressor, and EQ effects. Each effect can be turned on and off by
using the buttons on the right side.
Parameter Description Value Range
Flavor Use the button in the upper-right corner to enable or
disable the flavor effect.
Off, On
Timbre Selects an emulation type to color the sound. Varies
Timbre Depth
A
mount of timbre emulation applied to the sound. 0–100%
Flutte
r
A
mount of speed fluctuation of the sound playback. 0–100%
V
inyl Distortion
A
mount of vinyl distortion noise applied to the si
g
nal. 0–100%
Vinyl Noise Amount of vinyl noise such as clicks and pops applied
to the si
g
nal.
0–100%
Compressor Use the button in the upper-right corner to enable or
disable the compression effect.
Off, On
Threshold Si
g
nal level after which the compressor will be applied. -30.0 – 0.0 – +10.0 dB
Ratio
A
mount of compression applied. 1.0:1 – 20.0:1
A
ttack Len
g
th of time to apply the compression. 0–100%
Makeup Amount of additional output gain for the compressed
si
g
nal.
-20.0 – 0.0 – +20.0 dB
EQ Use the button in the upper-right corner to enable or
disable the EQ effect.
Off, On
Low Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the low
frequency band.
-12.0 – 0.0 – +12.0 dB
Low Mid Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the low-mid
frequency band.
-20.0 – 0.0 – +20.0 dB
High Mid Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the high-
mid frequency band.
-20.0 – 0.0 – +20.0 dB
High Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the high
frequency band.
-12.0 – 0.0 – +12.0 dB
425
Delay / Spring Reverb
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the delay and spring reverb effects. Each effect can be turned on and off by using
the buttons on the right side.
Parameter Description Value Range
Delay Use the button in the upper-right corner to enable or
disable delay.
Off, On
Time Amount of time between the dry signal and the
delayed si
g
nal.
1/16 – 16/4
L/R Ratio
Reduces the delay Time in either the Left or Right
stereo field. This is useful for creating offset, panned
delays.
50:100 – 100:100 –
100:50
Feedback Amount of signal fed back into the delay line. 0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the delay effect. 0–100%
Reso LP Freq Low pass frequency for feedback resonance. 100 – 16000 Hz
Reso Bell Freq Center frequency for feedback resonance. 100 – 16000 Hz
Reso Bell Gain
A
mount of
g
ain applied to the resonant frequency. 0–100%
Spring Reverb Use the button in the upper-right corner to enable or
disable the sprin
g
reverb effect.
Off, On
Pre-Delay Length of time between dry signal and reverberated
si
g
nal.
0 – 250 ms
Time Len
g
th of reverb tail. 1.00 – 10.00 s
Low Cut Center frequency for reverb si
g
nal low-cut filter. 20 – 1000 Hz
Diffusion Rate of increasing density of reverb reflections.
At lower settings, the sound of individual reflections is
more present.
At higher settings, reflections are more uniform.
0–100%
Width Stereo width of reverb signal. Higher values give wider
stereo separation.
0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the reverb effect. 0–100%
426
Solina
The AIR Solina plugin is a software recreation of the classic string
synthesizer.
Ensemble
Use this tab to adjust the voice and ensemble settings.
Parameter Description
V
alue Range
Voice Click each button to enable or disable the
selected voice.
Contra Bass, Cello, Viola,
Violin, Trumpet, Horn
V
oice Volume
V
olume of the selected voice. -Inf – 0 – +12
V
oice Pannin
g
Stereo pannin
g
of the selected voice. L64 – C – R64
Voice Octave Octave adjustment for the selected voice. -2, -1, 0 (Contra Bass)
0, +1, +2 (Violin)
-1, 0, +1 (All others)
Ensemble Enables or disables the ensemble effect. Off, On
Bass
V
olume
A
djusts the volume of the bass voices. 0–100
Dual When enabled, both bass and upper voices will
play on every key, regardless of the octave. When
disabled, the voices will be split so that the bass
voices play on lower octaves and the upper
voices play on hi
g
her octaves.
Off, On
Upper Volume
A
djusts the volume of the upper voices. 0–100
Level Overall level of the plu
g
in. 0–100%
427
Sound
Use this tab to adjust additional settings for the plugin sound.
Parameter Description Value Range
Crescendo Length of time for the sound to reach full volume. 0 ms – 32 s
Sustain Length of time for the sound to remain playing after
the key is released.
0 ms – 32 s
Formant Decreases or increases resonant frequencies to
adjust the timbre of the sound.
-12 – 0 – +12
Filte
r
A
djusts the low-pass filter frequency. 0–100%
Age Amount of detuning and drift applied. 0–100%
Velocity to Amp The amount of effect velocity has on amplitude
control.
0–100%
MW Vibrato Amount of vibrato applied from the mod wheel. 0–100%
AT Vibrato Amount of vibrato applied from aftertouch. 0–100%
V
ibrato Speed Modulation speed of the vibrato effect. 1.00
–
30.00 Hz
Sample Poly Number of voices available. 1–50
Flavor
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the flavor and vinyl effects.
Parameter Description Value Range
Flavor Enables or disables the flavor effect. Off, On
Timbre Selects an emulation type to color the sound.
V
aries
Timbre Depth
A
mount of timbre emulation applied to the sound. 0–100%
Vinyl
Distortion
Amount of vinyl distortion noise applied to the signal. 0–100%
Vinyl Noise Amount of vinyl noise such as clicks and pops applied to
the signal.
0–100%
Flutte
r
A
mount of speed fluctuation of the sound playback. 0–100%
Monofy Reduces the stereo spread. 0–100%
428
Chorus / EQ
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the chorus and EQ effects. Use the buttons on the right side to enable or disable
each effect.
Parameter Description Value Range
Chorus Rate Modulation speed of the chorus effect. 0.05 – 20 Hz
Depth Modulation depth of the chorus effect. 0–100%
Tone Decreases or increases the brightness of the chorus effect. -100 – 0 – +100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the chorus effect. 0–100%
EQ Low Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the low
frequency band.
-12.0 – 0.0 – +12.0 dB
Low Mid Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the low-mid
frequency band.
-20.0 – 0.0 – +20.0 dB
High Mid Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the high-mid
frequency band.
-20.0 – 0.0 – +20.0 dB
High Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the high
frequency band.
-12.0 – 0.0 – +12.0 dB
Delay / Spring Reverb
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the delay and spring reverb
effects. Use the buttons on the right side to enable or disable each
effect.
Parameter Description Value Range
Delay Time Amount of time between the dry signal and the delayed signal. 1/16 – 16/4
L/R Ratio
Reduces the delay Time in either the Left or Right stereo
field. This is useful for creating offset, panned delays.
50:100 – 100:100 –
100:50
Feedback Amount of signal fed back into the delay line. 0–100%
LP Freq Low pass frequency for feedback resonance. 100 – 16000 Hz
Bell Freq Center frequency for feedback resonance. 100 – 16000 Hz
Bell Gain Amount of gain applied to the resonant frequency. 0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the delay effect. 0–100%
Spring
Reverb
Pre-Delay Length of time between dry signal and reverberated signal. 0 – 250 ms
Time Length of reverb tail. 1.00 – 10.00 s
Low Cut Center frequency for reverb signal low-cut filter. 20 – 1000 Hz
Diffusion Rate of increasing density of reverb reflections.
At lower settings, the sound of individual reflections is more
present.
At higher settings, reflections are more uniform.
0–100%
Width Stereo width of reverb signal. Higher values give wider
stereo separation.
0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the reverb effect. 0–100%
429
WayOutWare Odyssey
The WayOutWare Odyssey plugin is a software recreation of the
classic analog synthesizer that captures the character and nuance
of the original Odyssey using WayOutWare’s experience and
expertise in circuit modeling and signal processing.
VCO 1/2
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the voltage-controlled
oscillators.
Parameter Description Value Range
LFO/Audio
When set to Audio, standard pitches will be
produced as indicated by the Oct, Semi and CT
values for the Frequency setting.
When set to LFO, the VCO will be controlled by an
LFO and may be used for modulatin
g
VCO2.
LFO, Audio
Frequency Determines the pitch adjustment for the oscillator.
The total frequency range depends on the LFO/
Audio setting, and is shown at the bottom of this
section.
0.174 – 1478.852 Hz
Coarse Coarse pitch adjustment. -0.200 – 6.333 V
Fine Fine pitch adjustment. 0.000 – 0.875 V
VCO 1 FM Source 1
Waveform
Type of frequency modulation waveform applied
by the LFO.
LFO Sine, LFO Square
Depth 1 Depth of frequency modulation. 0.0–100.0%
Source 2 Determines the frequency modulation source. S/H, ADSR
Depth 2 Depth of Source 2 modulation. 0.0–100.0%
VCO 1 Pulse
Width
Width Width of pulse width modulation. 50.0
–
90.0%
Mod Depth of pulse width modulation. 0.0–100.0%
Source Determines the pulse width modulation source. LFO Sine, ADSR
Sync Determines whether VCO 2 is synced with the
frequency of VCO 1. When disabled, you can use
both VCOs to produce separate pitches.
Off, On
Frequency Pitch adjustment for the oscillator. 8.706 – 1478.852 Hz
Coarse Coarse pitch adjustment. -0.200 – 6.333 V
Fine Fine pitch adjustment. 0.000 – 0.875
V
VCO 2 FM Source 1 Type of modulation source. When S/H Mixer or
Pedal is selected, the modulation can be
controlled by the Sample and Hold mixer or by an
optional external expression pedal.
LFO Sine, S/H Mixer or
Pedal
Depth 1 Depth of Source 1 modulation. 0.0–100.0%
Source 2 Type of modulation source. S/H, ADSR
Depth 2 Depth of Source 2 modulation. 0.0–100.0%
VCO 2 Pulse
Width
Width Width of pulse width modulation. 50.0
–
90.0%
Mod Depth of pulse width modulation. 0.0–100.0%
Source Type of source for pulse width modulation. LFO Sine, ADSR
430
Mod/Env
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the low frequency oscillator, sample and hold generator, and envelope generator.
Parameter Description Value Range
LFO LFO Tempo
Sync
Determines whether LFO speed is free floating
or synced to project tempo.
Off, On
LFO Speed Speed of the low frequency oscillator.
When Sync is Off:
When Sync is On:
0.0925 – 20.0000 Hz
4/4 – 1/64 beats
Sample/Hold Trigger Determines the source signal for triggering the
Sample and Hold mixer, either the Low
Frequency Oscillator or the pitched Keyboard
output.
LFO Trigger, Kybd Trigger
Source 1 Selects the VCO-1 waveform or pulse width
modulation as Sample and Hold input.
Saw, Pulse
Source 2 Selects a noise generator or the VCO-2 pulse
width modulation as Sample and Hold input.
Noise, Pulse
V
CO-1 Level of the VCO-1 input. 0.0–100.0%
Depth Level of the noise or VCO-2 input. 0.0–100.0%
Lag Adjusts the smoothing of the Sample and Hold
output volta
g
e.
0.0–100.0%
A
R
A
ttack
A
ttack time of the AR envelope
g
enerator. 0.003 – 10.000 seconds
Release Release time of the AR envelope generator. 0.003 – 10.000 seconds
Trigger Source Determines the input source sent to the AR
envelope generator.
When set to KYBD Gate, the envelope
generator is triggered by key input.
When set to LFO Repeat, the envelope
generator is trigger by the LFO pulse wave.
KYBD Gate, LFO Repeat
A
DSR
A
ttack
A
ttack time of the ADSR envelope
g
enerator. 0.003 – 10.000 seconds
Decay Decay time of the ADSR envelope generator. 0.003 – 10.000 seconds
Sustain Sustain time of the ADSR envelope
g
enerator. 0.000 – 10.000
V
Release Release time of the ADSR envelope generator. 0.003 – 10.000 seconds
Tri
gg
er Source Type of input to tri
gg
er the envelope
g
enerator. KYBD Gate, LFO Repeat
Repeat
When Trigger Source is set to LFO Repeat,
select KYBD Repeat for the LFO to trigger only
when a key is pressed, or select Auto Repeat
for the LFO to trigger automatically without key
input.
KYBD Repeat, Auto Repeat
431
Mix/Filter
Use this tab to adjust the audio mixing and routing, as well as adjust the voltage-controlled filter, high-pass filter, and
voltage-controlled amplitude.
Parameter Description Value Range
VCF VCF Cutoff Cutoff frequency of the filter. 0.680 – 10.645 V, or
16.02 - 16012.70 Hz
V
CF Res Resonance of the filter. 0.000 – 0.800 Q
Audio Mixer Noise/Ring
Mod
Select the noise generator or ring modulation
input for the mixer.
Noise, Ring Mod
Noise/Ring
Mod Level
Level of the noise generator or ring modulation
into the mixer.
0.0–100.0%
VCO-1 Input Select the VCO-1 input type for the mixer. Saw, Pulse
V
CO-1 Level Level of VCO-1 into the mixer. 0.0–100.0%
VCO-2 Input Select the VCO-2 input type for the mixer. Saw, Pulse
V
CO-2 Level Level of VCO-2 into the mixer. 0.0–100.0%
VC Filter VCO-1 Filter
Modulation
Source
Set the input source for VCO-1 filter
modulation.
Select KYBD CV to use key input as the
source.
Select S/H Mixer or Pedal to use the Sample
and Hold
g
enerator or optional external pedal.
KYBD CV, S/H Mixer or
Pedal
CV Modulation
Level
Level of VCO-1 filter modulation. 0.0–100.0%
VCO-2 Filter
Modulation
Source
Set the input source for VCO-2 filter
modulation.
S/H, LFO Sine
CV Modulation
Level
Level of VCO-2 filter modulation. 0.0–100.0%
HP Filter Filter
Modulation
Source
Select which envelope generator to use as a
filter modulation source.
ADSR, AR
CV Filter
Modulation
Level
Amount of envelope filter modulation applied to
the VC Filter.
0.0–100.0%
HPF Cutoff Cutoff frequency of the high-pass filter. 0.680 – 10.645 V, or
16.02 - 16012.70 Hz
VC Amp Mod Source Select which envelope generator to use as an
amplitude modulation source.
ADSR, AR
Mod Amount of envelope modulation applied to the
output si
g
nal.
0.0–100.0%
VCA Gain Amount of gain applied to the VC Amp. 0.0–100.0%
432
Echo
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the tape echo effect.
Parameter Description Value Range
Delay Use the switch in the bottom-left corner to enable or
disable the delay effect.
Off, On
Sync
Enable to sync the Echo Time to the Global Tempo, or
disable to adjust the Echo Time by milliseconds.
Off, On
Sustain Length of time that the echo continues playing. 0.0–100.0%
Echo Mix Adjusts the wet/dry amount between the original sound
and the echo.
100% Synth – 50/50%
– 100% Echo
Echo Time Amount of time between the dry signal and the delayed
signal. Use the slider or the Echo Time field to change the
value.
When Sync is Off:
When Sync is On:
0.02 – 5.00 seconds
1/64 – 4/4
Settings
Use this tab to adjust general settings such as voice count, portamento and performance parameters.
Parameter Description
V
alue Range
Voice Count Number of voices available. When set to Duo, each VCO
controls a separate note.
Duo, 2–4
Portamento Length of time to slide between notes. 0.000 – 1.500 seconds
Exp Pedal Enables or disables the use of an expression pedal to
control portamento.
Off, On
Footswitch Enable or disables the use of a footswitch to activate
portamento.
Off, On
Transpose Amount of transposition applied to the keyboard. -2, 0, +2 octaves
Noise Type of noise used for the noise generator. White, Pink
Performance
Velocity
Depth
MW Vib LFO Amount of vibrato LFO applied by the mod wheel. 0.0–100.0%
MW PWM Amount of pulse width modulation applied by the mod
wheel.
0.0–100.0%
KYBD Filter Amount that the filter is tied to the pitch being played. 0.0–100.0%
KYBD Amp Amount that the amplitude is tied to the pitch being
played.
0.0–100.0%
433
SATA Drive Installation
To create more internal storage space on your MPC hardware, you can purchase a SATA (Serial ATA) drive and install
it yourself, but read this chapter first.
Your MPC X, MPC Live, MPC Live II, or MPC Key 61 can support nearly any standard 2.5” SATA drive on the market—
either a solid-state drive (SSD) or hard-disk drive (HDD). Make sure it uses a 2.5” (63.5 mm) form factor and uses (or can
use) one of these file systems: exFAT, FAT32, NTFS, or EXT4 (for read and write capability) or HFS+ (for read-only
capability).
Note: We recommend using an exFAT file system as it is the most robust one supported by both Windows and macOS.
Note: Alternatively, you could install an mSATA (mini-SATA) drive, but make sure you also purchase an adapter that
enables it to fit into a typical 2.5” SATA interface.
1.
Make sure your MPC hardware is powered off.
2.
Locate the SATA drive panel in the center of the bottom panel of your MPC hardware. Use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screws (don’t lose them!), and remove the SATA drive panel.
3.
Gently pull the SATA connector and cable out from inside your MPC hardware. Be careful not to disturb anything
inside—handle just the SATA connector and cable.
4.
Connect your SATA drive to the SATA connector. Make sure the connection is secure.
5.
Use four 3x5mm mounting screws (included with MPC hardware or with your SATA drive) to secure the SATA drive
to the SATA drive panel. Do not overtighten the screws, but make sure the drive is secure and does not shake.
6.
Place the SATA drive panel back onto the bottom panel of your MPC hardware, and use the original screws to secure
it in place.
You can now access this drive while using your MPC hardware!
In Standalone Mode, this drive will appear as a second internal drive.
In Controller Mode, this drive will appear as another drive connected to your computer (just as a USB drive or SD
card connected does when connected to your MPC hardware).
434
MIDI Machine Control (MMC)
Your MPC hardware can send and receive MIDI Machine Control (MMC) messages, a standard protocol for transport
controls.
The MPC hardware can send these messages:
MPC Button MMC Command Sent
Rec MMC Record Strobe
(when recording starts)
, then MMC Record Exit
Overdub MMC Record Strobe
(when recording starts)
, then MMC Record Exit
Stop MMC Stop
Play MMC Deferred Play
Play Start MMC Locate Zero, then Deferred Play
Data Dial,
–
/
+, Step </>, Bar <</>> MMC Locate values
To set up your MPC hardware to send MMC messages to an external device:
1.
Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect your MPC hardware’s MIDI Out A to the MIDI input of your external
device.
2.
Press Menu to show the menu, and tap the gear icon to enter the Preferences.
3.
Tap the Sync tab.
4.
Tap the Send Port 1 field, and use the data dial or –/+ buttons to select Midi Out A.
5.
Tap the Send MMC box so it is enabled (checked).
6.
Exit the Preferences.
7.
Configure your other device properly so it can receive MMC messages.
The MPC hardware can receive these messages:
MPC Command Received MPC Function
MMC Deferred Play Play
MMC Locate Zero, then Deferred Play Play Start
MMC Stop Stop
MMC Record Strobe Record (Rec)
MMC Pause Stop
MMC Locate values Change location in sequence
To set up your MPC hardware to receive MMC messages from an external device:
1.
Use a standard 5-pin MIDI cable to connect your MPC hardware’s MIDI In A to the MIDI output of your external
device.
2.
Press Menu to show the menu, and tap the gear icon to enter the Preferences.
3.
Tap the Sync tab.
4.
Tap the Receive MMC box so it is enabled (checked).
5.
Exit the Preferences.
6.
Configure your other device properly so it can send MMC messages.
435
Ableton Control Maps
MPC X / MPC X Special Edition
General Controls and Features
# Device Control Ableton Live Function
1 Display In Ableton Live Control Mode, MPC X's display will show a dynamic representation of
Ableton Live's software.
2 Pads
Press the pads to launch clips or scenes. Press the XYFX button to toggle between
launching clips (the button is off) and launching scenes (the button is on).
3 Data Dial Adjusts the highlighted field.
4 -/+ Decreases or increases the value of the highlighted field.
5 Numeric Input
If the selected field on the screen is a number, press these numbered buttons as you
would on a standard numeric keypad to enter a value. Press the keypad’s Enter to enter
it. (A numeric keypad with additional operations will appear on the screen, as well.)
6 Directional Cursors Moves the 4x4 Session Matrix focus on the display by one row or one column at a time.
7 Shift
Hold this button to access secondary button functions. See Shift Controls for more
details.
436
Transport Controls
# Device Control Ableton Live Function
8 Record Enable and disable Arrangement Record
9 Overdub Enable and disable Session Record.
10 Stop Stop playback.
11 Play Start playback from the Stop position.
12 Play Start Start playback from the Arrangement start (1:1:1).
13 < Move Playhead back by one bar
14 > Move Playhead forward by one bar
15 << Phase Nudge down
16 >> Phase Nudge up
Right-Hand Side Buttons
# Device Control Ableton Live Function
17 Tap Tempo Tap this button at the desired rate to set a new tempo in Ableton Live.
18 XYFX Toggles the MPC pads between launching clips (XYFX off) and launching scenes (XYFX on).
19 Erase Deletes the selected clip.
20 Undo Undo the last action.
21 Copy Duplicates the selected clip into the next available clip slot.
22 Mute Mutes/deactivates the current track.
23 Solo Solos the current track.
24 Rec Arm Arms the current track for recording.
25 Read/Write Arms Global Automation.
Left-Hand Side Buttons
# Device Control Ableton Live Function
26 Next Seq Opens the Ableton Clip Launch Matrix tab
27 Ch. Mixer Opens the Ableton Mixer tab.
28 Q-Link Project Moves to the previous device.
29 Q-Link Program Moves to the next device.
30 Q-Link Pad Scene Device Control Bank Left
31 Q-Link Pad Param Device Control Bank Right
32 Q-Link Screen Control Opens the Ableton Device Control tab
33 Q-Links Adjusts the currently selected parameters displayed in the OLED screens above.
Q-Links 1–8 control track volume for the eight tracks currently in view, while Q-Links 9–
16 control the device on the currently selected track, based on the "blue hand" in Ableton
Live's Detail View.
437
Shift Controls
Press and hold MPC X's Shift button, and then press the following buttons for additional actions.
# Device Control Ableton Live Function
2 Pads Selects a clip without launching it.
6 Directional Cursors Moves the 4x4 Session Matrix focus on the display by eight rows or eight columns at a
time.
10 Stop Stop playback and return song position to 1:1:1.
17 Tap Tempo Toggle the metronome on and off.
21 Undo Redo the last action.
438
MPC Live
Basic Controls
# Device Control Ableton Live Function
1 Display In Ableton Live Control Mode, MPC Live's display will show a dynamic representation of
Ableton Live's software.
2 Pads
Press the pads to launch clips or scenes. Press the 16 Level button to toggle between
launching clips (the button is off) and launching scenes (the button is on).
3 Data Dial Adjusts the highlighted field.
4 -/+ Decreases or increases the value of the highlighted field.
5 Q-Link Button Press this button to move forward between Q-Link Banks 1–4. Push and hold this button
to bring up the Q-Links Overview window on the display.
6 Q-Links Adjusts the currently selected parameters.
Use the Q-Link button to toggle between Q-Link Banks 1 and 2 (which control Track
Level for the eight tracks currently viewed) and Banks 3 and 4 (which are mapped to
control the device on the current track, based on the location of the "blue hand" in
Ableton Live's Detail View).
7 Bank A/E Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus up by one row.
8 Bank B/F Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus down by one row.
9 Bank C/G Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus left by one column.
10 Bank D/H Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus right by one column.
11 Erase Deletes the selected clip.
12 16 Level Toggles the MPC pads between launching clips (16 Level off) and launching scenes (16
Level on).
13 Shift
Hold this button to access secondary button functions. See Shift Controls for more
details.
439
# Device Control Ableton Live Function
14 Undo Undo the last action.
15 Copy Duplicates the selected clip into the next available clip slot.
16 Tap Tap this button at the desired rate to set a new tempo in Ableton Live.
17 Rec Enable and disable Arrangement Record.
18 Overdub Enable and disable Session Record.
19 Stop Stop playback.
20 Play Start playback from the current playhead position.
21 Play Start Start playback from the Arrangement start (1:1:1).
Shift Controls
Press and hold MPC's Shift button, and then press the following buttons for additional actions.
# Device Control Ableton Live Function
2 Pads Selects a clip without launching it.
5 Q-Link Button Move backward between Q-Link Banks 1–4.
7 Bank A/E Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus up by eight rows.
8 Bank B/F Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus down by eight rows.
9 Bank C/G Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus left by eight columns.
10 Bank D/H Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus right by eight columns.
13 Undo Redo the last action.
15 Tap Toggle the metronome on and off.
18 Stop Stop playback and return song position to 1:1:1.
440
MPC Live II
Basic Controls
# Device Control Ableton Live Function
1 Display
In Ableton Live Control Mode, MPC Live II's display will show a dynamic representation of
Ableton Live's software.
2 Pads
Press the pads to launch clips or scenes. Press the 16 Level button to toggle between
launching clips (the button is off) and launching scenes (the button is on).
3 Data Dial Adjusts the highlighted field.
4 -/+ Decreases or increases the value of the highlighted field.
5 Q-Link Button Press this button to move forward between Q-Link Banks 1–4. Push and hold this button
to bring up the Q-Links Overview window on the display.
6 Q-Links Adjusts the currently selected parameters.
Use the Q-Link button to toggle between Q-Link Banks 1 and 2 (which control Track
Level for the eight tracks currently viewed) and Banks 3 and 4 (which are mapped to
control the device on the current track, based on the location of the "blue hand" in
Ableton Live's Detail View).
7 Bank A/E Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus up by one row.
8 Bank B/F Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus down by one row.
9 Bank C/G Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus left by one column.
10 Bank D/H Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus right by one column.
11 Erase Deletes the selected clip.
12 16 Level
Toggles the MPC pads between launching clips (16 Level off) and launching scenes (16
Level on).
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
6
6
6
7
89
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
17
441
# Device Control Ableton Live Function
13 Undo Undo the last action.
14 Copy Duplicates the selected clip into the next available clip slot.
15 Shift
Hold this button to access secondary button functions. See Shift Controls for more
details.
16 Tap Tap this button at the desired rate to set a new tempo in Ableton Live.
17 Rec Enable and disable Arrangement Record.
18 Overdub Enable and disable Session Record.
19 Stop Stop playback.
20 Play Start playback from the current playhead position.
21 Play Start Start playback from the Arrangement start (1:1:1).
Shift Controls
Press and hold MPC Live II's Shift button, and then press the following buttons for additional actions.
# Device Control Ableton Live Function
2 Pads Selects a clip without launching it.
5 Q-Link Button Move backward between Q-Link Banks 1–4.
7 Bank A/E Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus up by eight rows.
8 Bank B/F Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus down by eight rows.
9 Bank C/G Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus left by eight columns.
10 Bank D/H Move the 4x4 Session Matrix focus right by eight columns.
13 Undo Redo the last action.
16 Tap Toggle the metronome on and off.
19 Stop Stop playback and return song position to 1:1:1.
442
Technical Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
MPC X / MPC X Special Edition
Digital Audio System ADCs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
DACs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
Digital Signal Processing
32-bit floating point
Mic Inputs 1–2
(2) balanced XLR+1/4”
(6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
112 dB
(A-weighted)
SNR
111 dB
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, A-weighted)
THD+N
0.003%
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Preamp EIN
-135 dBu
(max gain, 40 Ω source, A-weighted)
-129.5 dBu
(max gain, 150 Ω source, unweighted)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.2 / -0.2 dB)
Maximum Input Level
+12.5 dBu
Sensitivity
-46 dBu
Gain Range
58 dB
Line Inputs 1–2
(2) balanced XLR+1/4”
(6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
114 dB
(A-weighted)
SNR
112 dB
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, A-weighted)
THD+N
0.003%
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.1 / -0.1 dB)
Maximum Input Level
+20 dBu
Sensitivity
-9.5 dBu
Gain Range
29.5 dB
Line Inputs 3–4
(2) balanced 1/4”
(6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
114.5 dB
(A-weighted)
SNR
112.5 dB
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, A-weighted)
THD+N
0.003%
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.1 / -0.1 dB)
Maximum Input Level
+20 dBu
Sensitivity
-10 dBu
Gain Range
30 dB
Inst Inputs 1–2
(2) unbalanced 1/4”
(6.35 mm) TS
Dynamic Range
113.5 dB
(A-weighted)
SNR
111.5 dB
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, A-weighted)
THD+N
0.003%
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.1 / -0.2 dB)
Maximum Input Level
+10 dBu
Sensitivity
-20 dBu
Gain Range
30 dB
Input Impedance
~ 1 M
Ω
443
Phono Inputs
(2) unbalanced RCA
Dynamic Range
108 dB
(A-weighted, 63 mVrms @ 1kHz, -1 dBFS, 20 Ω source)
SNR
86 dB
(A-weighted, 4 mVrms @ 1kHz, 20 Ω source)
THD+N
0.005%
(1 kHz, -46 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Maximum Input Level
63 mVrms
(1 kHz)
Sensitivity
2 mVrms
(1 kHz)
Main Outputs 1–2
(2) impedance-balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
114 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.006%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.2 dB)
Maximum Output Level
+20 dBu
Output Impedance
100
Ω
Outputs 3–4
(2) impedance-balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
114 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.006%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.2 dB)
Maximum Output Level
+20 dBu
Output Impedance
100
Ω
Outputs 5–8
(4) impedance-balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
118.5 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.001%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.1 / -0.0 dB)
Maximum Output Level
+20 dBu
Output Impedance
100
Ω
Headphone Outputs
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm)
stereo headphone
(1) 1/8” (3.5 mm)
stereo headphone
Dynamic Range
111 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.007%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS, 10 mW/channel into 32 Ω headphones)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.2 dB)
Maximum Power Delivered
360 mW
(<1% THD)
Maximum Output Level
+20 dBu
444
Mechanical Pads
(16) velocity- and pressure-sensitive pads, RGB-backlit
(8) banks accessible via Pad Bank buttons
Knobs
(16) 360° touch-sensitive Q-Link knobs for parameter adjustment
(7) 270° knobs for gain, mix & level adjustment
(1) 360° encoder for value/data adjustment
Display
10.1” (25.6 cm) full-color 1280
x
800 display with capacitive multi-touch
Memory RAM
2 GB (MPC X)
4 GB (MPC X Special Edition)
Internal
Storage
16 GB (MPC X)
(6 GB user storage)
48 GB (MPC X Special Edition)
(10 GB user storage)
Expandable via SATA connections
File System Compatibility
exFAT
(read & write) (recommended)
FAT32
(read & write)
NTFS
(read & write)
EXT4
(read & write)
HFS+
(read only)
A
udio Files: AIF/AIFF, FLAC, MP3, OGG, WA
V
Connections
(2) XLR+1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS inputs
(Input 1/2)
(2) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS inputs
(Input 3/4: 1 stereo pair)
(2) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TS instrument inputs
(Inst 1/2)
(2) RCA inputs
(Input 3/4: 1 stereo pair, phono- or line-level)
(2) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TS footswitch inputs
(FS 1/2)
(2) 5-pin MIDI inputs
(8) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS outputs
(Main L/R, Outputs 3/4–7/8: 4 stereo pairs)
(4) 5-pin MIDI outputs
(8) 1/8” (3.5 mm) CV/Gate outputs
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm) stereo headphone output
(1) 1/8” (3.5 mm) stereo headphone output
(2) USB Type-A ports
(1) USB Type-B port
(1) SD card slot
(1) power adapter input
Power
via power adapter: 19 V, 3.42 A, center-positive, included
Dimensions
(width x depth x height)
19.9” x 16.7” x 3.4” / 50.5 x 42.4 x 8.7 cm
(display flat)
19.9” x 15.3” x 8.4” / 50.5 x 38.8 x 21.4 cm
(display upright)
Weight
12.57 lb.
5.66 k
g
445
MPC Live
Digital Audio System ADCs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
DACs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
Digital Signal Processing
32-bit floating point
Line Inputs
(2) balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
113.5 dB
(A-weighted)
SNR
108 dB
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, A-weighted)
THD+N
0.001%
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.1 dB)
Maximum Input Level
+11 dBu
Sensitivity
-13.5 dBu
Gain Range
24.5 dB
Phono Inputs
(2) unbalanced RCA
Dynamic Range
107 dB
(A-weighted, 63 mVrms @ 1 kHz, -1 dBFS, 20 Ω source)
SNR
86 dB
(A-weighted, 4 mVrms @ 1 kHz, 20 Ω source)
THD+N
0.009%
(1 kHz, -46 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Maximum Input Level
63 mVrms
(1 kHz)
Sensitivity
2 mVrms
(1 kHz)
Main Outputs 1–2
(2) impedance-balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
113 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.002%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.5 dB)
Maximum Output Level
+9 dBu
Output Impedance
100
Ω
Outputs 3–6
(4) impedance-balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
116 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.001%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.1 dB)
Maximum Output Level
+9 dBu
Output Impedance
100
Ω
Headphone Output
(1) 1/8” (3.5 mm)
stereo headphone
Dynamic Range
112 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.005%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS, 10 mW/channel into 32 Ω headphones)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.2 dB)
Maximum Power Delivered
+35 mW
(<1% THD, 32 Ω headphones)
Maximum Output Level
+10 dBu
446
Mechanical Pads
(16) velocity- and pressure-sensitive pads, RGB-backlit
(8) banks accessible via Pad Bank buttons
Knobs
(4) 360° touch-sensitive Q-Link knobs
(4) Q-Link knob columns accessible via Q-Link button
(1) 360° encoder for value/data adjustment and selection via push
Display
7” (17.8 cm) full-color 1280
x
800 display with capacitive multi-touch
Memory RAM
2 GB
Internal
Storage
16 GB
(6 GB user storage + 10 GB pre-installed content)
Expandable via SATA connections
File System Compatibility
exFAT
(read & write) (recommended)
FAT32
(read & write)
NTFS
(read & write)
EXT4
(read & write)
HFS+
(read only)
A
udio Files:
A
IF/AIFF, FLAC, MP3, OGG, WA
V
Connections
(2) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS inputs
(1 stereo pair)
(6) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS outputs
(3 stereo pairs)
(1) 1/8” (3.5 mm) stereo headphone output
(2) RCA inputs
(1 stereo pair)
(2) 5-pin MIDI inputs
(2) 5-pin MIDI outputs
(2) USB Type-A ports
(1) USB Type-B port
(1) SD card slot
(1) power adapter input
Power
via power adapter: 19 V, 3.42 A, center-positive, included
via battery: lithium-ion, rechar
g
eable, up to 6 hours of battery life
Dimensions
(width x depth x height)
16.7” x 8.8” x 2.7”
42.4 x 22.4 x 6.9 cm
Weight
5.9 lb.
2.7 k
g
447
MPC Live II
Digital Audio System ADCs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
DACs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
Digital Signal Processing
32-bit floating point
Line Inputs
(2) balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
113 dB
(A-weighted)
SNR
108.5 dB
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, A-weighted)
THD+N
0.001%
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.1 dB)
Maximum Input Level
+16.5 dBu
Sensitivity
-13 dBu
Gain Range
29.5 dB
Phono Inputs
(2) unbalanced RCA
Dynamic Range
108.5 dB
(A-weighted, 74 mVrms @ 1 kHz, -1 dBFS, 20 Ω source)
SNR
87 dB
(A-weighted, 4 mVrms @ 1 kHz, 20 Ω source)
THD+N
0.011%
(1 kHz, -46 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Maximum Input Level
74 mVrms
(1 kHz)
Sensitivity
2 mVrms
(1 kHz)
Main Outputs 1–2
(2) impedance-balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
118 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.001%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.2 dB)
Maximum Output Level
+9 dBu
Output Impedance
100
Ω
Outputs 3–4
(2) impedance-balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
116.5 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.001%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.1 dB)
Maximum Output Level
+9 dBu
Output Impedance
100
Ω
Outputs 5–6
(2) impedance-balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Dynamic Range
112.5 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.002%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.1 dB)
Maximum Output Level
+9 dBu
Output Impedance
100
Ω
448
Headphone Output
(1) 1/8” (3.5 mm)
stereo headphone
Dynamic Range
111 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.003%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS, 10 mW/channel into 32 Ω headphones)
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.0 / -0.2 dB)
Maximum Power Delivered
+35 mW
(<1% THD, 32 Ω headphones)
Maximum Output Level
+10 dBu
Output Impedance
32
Ω
Pads
(16) velocity- and pressure-sensitive pads, RGB-backlit
(8) banks accessible via Pad Bank buttons
Knobs
(4) 360° touch-sensitive Q-Link Knobs
(4) Q-Link Knob columns accessible via Q-Link button
(1) 360° encoder for display navigation and selection via push
Buttons
(27) dedicated function buttons; red-, amber-, or green-backlit
Display
6.9” / 176 mm (diagonal)
5.9” x 3.7” / 150 x 93 mm (width x height)
Full-color LED-backlit display with touch interface
CPU Processor: Quad-core ARM
®
processor
RAM: 2 GB
Storage: 16 GB, expandable via SATA connections
Connections
(2) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS inputs (1 stereo pair)
(6) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS outputs (3 stereo pairs)
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm) stereo headphone output
(2) RCA inputs (1 stereo pair)
(2) 5-pin MIDI inputs
(2) 5-pin MIDI outputs
(4) Stereo CV/Gate outputs
(1) Ethernet link port
(2) USB Type-A ports
(1) USB Type-B port
(1) SD card slot
(1) power adapter input
Power
via power adapter: 19 V, 3.42 A, center-positive, included
via battery: lithium-ion, rechargeable, up to 4 hours of battery life
Dimensions
(width x depth x height)
16.2” x 9.6” x 1.8”
411.5 x 243.8 x 45.7 mm
Weight
7.45 lbs.
3.38 kg
449
MPC One / MPC One+
Digital Audio System ADCs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
DACs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
Digital Signal Processing
32-bit floating point
Line Inputs 1–2
(2) balanced 1/4”
(6.35 mm) TRS
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz (+0/-0.8 dB)
Dynamic Range
113 dB (A-weighted)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
111 dB (1 kHz, +4 dBu, A-weighted)
THD+N
0.002% (1 kHz, +4 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Max Input Level
+16 dBu
Sensitivity
-13.5 dBu
Gain Range
29.5 dB
Line Outputs 1–2
(2) balanced 1/4”
(6.35 mm) TRS
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz (+0/-0.8 dB)
Dynamic Range
113 dB (A-weighted)
THD+N
0.003% (1 kHz, -1 dBFS)
Maximum Output Level
+9 dBu
Output Impedance
100
Ω
Headphone Output
(1) 1/8” (3.5 mm)
stereo headphone
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz (+0/-0.8 dB)
Dynamic Range
112.5 dB (A-weighted, 32
Ω
)
THD+N
0.006% (1 kHz, -1 dBFS, 32
Ω
)
Maximum Output Level
28.8 mW @ 32
Ω
Mechanical Pads
(16) velocity- and pressure-sensitive pads, RGB-backlit
(8) banks accessible via Pad Bank buttons
Knobs
(4) 360° touch-sensitive Q-Link Knobs
(4) Q-Link Knob columns accessible via Q-Link button
(1) 360° encoder for display navigation and selection via
push
Buttons
(31) dedicated function buttons; red-, amber-, or green-
backlit
Display
7.0” / 177 mm (diagonal)
5.9” x 3.7” / 151 x 94 mm (width x height)
Full-color LED-backlit display with touch interface
CPU Processor: Quad-core ARM
®
processor
RAM: 2 GB
Storage: 2 GB user storage, 2 GB pre-installed content (MPC One)
16 GB internal stora
g
e, 7.8 GB user stora
g
e (MPC One+)
450
File System Compatibility
exFAT
(read & write) (recommended)
FAT32
(read & write)
NTFS
(read & write)
EXT4
(read & write)
HFS+
(read only)
A
udio Files:
A
IF/AIFF, FLAC, MP3, OGG, WA
V
Connections
(2) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS inputs (1 stereo pair)
(2) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS outputs (1 stereo pair)
(1) 1/8” (3.5 mm) stereo headphone output
(1) 5-pin MIDI inputs
(1) 5-pin MIDI outputs
(4) CV/Gate outputs
(1) USB Type-A port
(1) USB Type-B port
(1) SD card slot
(1) power adapter input
Power
via included power adapter:
MPC One: 19 V, 3.42 A, center-positive
MPC One+: 12 V, 3 A, center-positive
Dimensions
(width x depth x height)
10.7” x 10.7” x 2.1”
272 x 272 x 53 mm
Weight
4.7 lbs.
2.1 k
g
451
MPC Key 61
Digital Audio System
A
DCs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
DACs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
Digital Signal Processing
32-bit floating point
Mic Inputs1–2
(2) balanced XLR+1/4”
(6.35 mm) TRS
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.2 / -1.0 dB)
Dynamic Range
111 dB
(A-weighted)
SNR
110 dB
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, A-weighted)
THD+N
0.002%
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Preamp EIN
-130 dBu
(max gain, 40 Ω source, A-weighted)
-128 dBu
(max gain, 150 Ω source, unweighted)
Maximum Input Level
+13 dBu
Sensitivity
-46 dBu
Gain Range
59 dB
Line Inputs 1–2
(2) balanced XLR+1/4”
(6.35 mm) TRS
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.2 / -1.0 dB)
Dynamic Range
112 dB
(A-weighted)
SNR
111 dB
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, A-weighted)
THD+N
0.001%
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Maximum Input Level
+20 dBu
Sensitivity
-11 dBu
Gain Range
31 dB
Inst Inputs 1–2
(2) unbalanced 1/4”
(6.35 mm) TS
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.2 / -1.0 dB)
Dynamic Range
112 dB
(A-weighted)
SNR
106 dB
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, A-weighted)
THD+N
0.001%
(1 kHz, +4 dBu, -1 dBFS)
Maximum Input Level
+16 dBu
Sensitivity
-15 dBu
Gain Range
31 dB
Input Impedance
1 M
Ω
Main Outputs 1–2
(2) impedance-balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.03 / -0.2 dB)
Dynamic Range
115 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.004%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS)
Maximum Output Level
+16 dBu
Output Impedance
50
Ω
452
Outputs 3–4
(2) impedance-
balanced 1/4” (6.35
mm) TRS
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.03 / -0.2 dB)
Dynamic Range
115 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.004%
(1 kHz, -1 dBFS)
Maximum Output Level
+16 dBu
Output Impedance
50
Ω
Headphone Output
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm)
stereo headphone
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz
(+0.05 / -0.2 dB)
Dynamic Range
108 dB
(A-weighted)
THD+N
0.004%
(1 kHz, 10 mW per channel into 32 Ω headphones)
Maximum Output Level
+6 dBu (unloaded)
Power Output
40 mW RMS
(per channel into 32 Ω headphones)
Mechanical Keys
61 semi-weighted keys with aftertouch
Pads
(16) velocity- and pressure-sensitive pads, RGB-backlit
(8) banks accessible via Pad Bank buttons
Knobs
(4) 360° touch-sensitive Q-Link knobs
(4) Q-Link Knob columns accessible via Q-Link button
(1) 360° encoder for value/data adjustment
Buttons
(44) dedicated function buttons; white-, red-, or green-
backlit
Touch Strip
(1) Multi-function, touch-capacitive control strip
0.8” x 4.4” / 20 x 113 mm (width x hei
g
ht)
Display
7” / 177 mm (diagonal)
Full-color LED-backlit display with touch interface
Memory RAM
4 GB
Internal Storage
32 GB
Expandable via SATA connections
File System
Compatibility
exFAT
(read & write) (recommended)
FAT32
(read & write)
NTFS
(read & write)
EXT4
(read & write)
HFS+
(read only)
Audio Files: AIF/AIFF, FLAC, MP3, OGG, WAV
453
Connections
(2) 1/4” (6.35 mm) Combo XLR/TRS inputs (1 stereo pair)
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS sustain pedal input (TS compatible)
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS footswitch pedal input (TS compatible)
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS expression pedal input (TS compatible)
(4) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS outputs (2 stereo pairs)
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm) stereo headphone output
(8) 1/8” (3.5 mm) TS mono CV/Gate outputs
(1) 5-pin MIDI inputs
(1) 5-pin MIDI outputs
(1) 5-pin MIDI thru-port
(1) Ethernet link port
(2) USB Type-A ports
(1) USB Type-B port
(1) IEC power input
Power
100 V – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 65 W
Dimensions
(width x depth x height)
38.8” x 12.3” x 3.8”
986 x 313 x 96.7 mm
Weight
17.9 lbs.
8.1 k
g
454
MPC Key 37
Digital Audio System ADCs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
DACs
24-bit @ 44.1, 48, or 96 kHz
Digital Signal
Processing
32-bit floating point
Line Inputs 1–2
(2) balanced 1/4” (6.35 mm)
TRS or unbalanced 1/4”
(6.35 mm) TS
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz (+0.2/-0.5 dB)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
107 dB (1 kHz, +6 dBV, A-weighted)
THD+N
0.004% (1 kHz, +6 dBV, 0 dBFS)
Max Input Level
+12 dBV
Sensitivity
-10 dBV
Gain Range
27 dB
Line Outputs 1–2
(2) impedance-balanced
1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz (+0.2/-0.5 dB)
Dynamic Range
112 dB (A-weighted)
THD+N
0.004% (1 kHz, 0 dBFS)
Maximum Output Level
+6 dBV
Output Impedance
100
Ω
Headphone Output
(1) 1/8” (3.5 mm)
stereo headphone
Frequency Response
20 Hz – 20 kHz (+0.2/-0.5 dB)
Dynamic Range
112 dB (A-weighted)
THD+N
0.006% (1 kHz, 10mW per channel into 32
Ω
)
Maximum Output Level
40 mW RMS (per channel into 32
Ω
)
Mechanical Keys
37 synth-action keys with aftertouch
Pads
(16) velocity- and pressure-sensitive pads, RGB-backlit
(8) banks accessible via Pad Bank buttons
Knobs
(4) 360° touch-sensitive Q-Link knobs
(4) Q-Link Knob columns accessible via Q-Link button
(1) 360° encoder for value/data adjustment
Buttons
(38) dedicated function buttons; white-, red-, or green-
backlit
Display
7” / 177 mm (diagonal)
Full-color LED-backlit display with touch interface
Memory RAM
2 GB
Internal Storage
32 GB
455
File System
Compatibility
exFAT
(read & write) (recommended)
FAT32
(read & write)
NTFS
(read & write)
EXT4
(read & write)
HFS+
(read only)
A
udio Files: AIF/AIFF, FLAC, MP3, OGG, WA
V
Wi-Fi Frequency
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
Standard
802.11a/b/g/n/ac
Max. Power
2.4 GHz Wi-Fi: +17 dBm
5 GHz Wi-Fi: +17 dBm
Bluetooth Version
5
Profile
HID, A2DP
Max. Power
+10 dBm
Connections
(2) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS inputs (1 stereo pair)
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS sustain pedal input (TS compatible)
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS footswitch pedal input (TS compatible)
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS expression pedal input (TS compatible)
(2) 1/4” (6.35 mm) TRS outputs (1 stereo pair)
(1) 1/4” (6.35 mm) stereo headphone output
(4) 1/8" (3.5 mm) TRS stereo CV/Gate outputs
(1) USB Type-A port
(1) USB Type-B port
(1) 5-pin MIDI input
(1) 5-pin MIDI output
(1) Power adapter input
Power
via included 12 V, 3 A, center-positive power adapter
Dimensions
(width x depth x height)
22.92” x 12.36” x 4.08”
58.22 x 31.39 x 10.36 cm
Weight
8.82 lbs.
4 k
g
456
Trademarks & Licenses
Akai Professional and MPC are trademarks of inMusic Brands, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
MPC software incorporates élastique Pro V3 by zplane.development.
Ableton is a trademark of Ableton AG.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such
marks by Akai Professional is under license.
Kensington and the K & Lock logo are registered trademarks of ACCO Brands.
macOS is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
SD and SDHC are registered trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
All other product names, company names, trademarks, or trade names are those of their respective owners.
This product contains technologies that are used under license. For more information, please visit
akaipro.com/product-legal.
457
Addenda
MPC Pro Pack
The MPC Pro Pack can be purchased as an upgrade for all Gen 1 MPC standalone hardware running MPC v3.6 or
later.
To purchase the MPC Pro Pack, visit thempcstore.com / akaipro.com. You can unlock the Pro Pack on up to
three supported devices.
To unlock the Pro Pack, use the Activations tab of the Preferences.
MPC Clip Launching
The MPC Pro Pack brings the full clip-launching workflow of the Akai Force to your MPC. Once the MPC Pro Pack is
activated, you must enable Clip Workflow by doing the following:
1.
Press Menu to open the Menu, and then select Preferences.
2.
In the Project Defaults tab, tap the Use Clip Workflow box to enable clip workflow.
Turning this feature on or off requires you to restart your MPC hardware. If you have unsaved changes in your
project, you will be prompted to save before restarting.
When Clip Launch functionality is activated, you will have access to three additional MPC modes for working with
clips:
•
Clip Matrix Mode
•
Navigate Mode
•
Clip Editor Mode
Additionally, the Arrangement Section of Main Mode includes expanded functionality for clips.
When importing an MPC2 project into MPC3 with Clip Workflow enabled, you will be prompted with a Project Import
dialog with the following options:
Use the Destination field to select whether to import project data into Sequences or the Clip Matrix.
Use the Import field to select whether to import All Sequences or Selected Sequences. Tap the boxes to select
Sequences to import.
458
Clip Matrix Mode
Clip Matrix Mode gives you an overview of your tracks and clips.
To enter Clip Matrix Mode, press Menu and then navigate to Clip Matrix on the second page of
modes and tap it.
Double-tap an empty clip slot to create a new clip. Alternatively, tap and hold on an empty clip slot, and then tap Create.
Tap an existing clip to launch it.
Tap the scene launch icons on the far right of the display to launch a scene.
Tap the + icon at the top of the display to add a new track. If your project already has 8 tracks, move the Matrix view
to the right to show this icon.
Tap the Move buttons at the bottom of the touchscreen to move the current matrix display view. To move the display
by eight rows or columns at a time, hold Shift and tap the Move 8 buttons.
Tap the Pads: button at the bottom of the touchscreen to change the hardware pad functions:
Select Notes to use the pads in Pad Perform mode to play notes or chords.
Select Clip Launch to use the pads to launch clips. Each pad will represent a clip in the current focus view of the
8x8 Clip Matrix. The focus view will be shown on the screen in a white outline. To move the focus view, tap the
Move buttons at the bottom of the screen, or press the Bank buttons on your MPC hardware. This will move the
current view by one row or column at a time. You can also press and hold Shift and then tap the Move buttons or
press the Bank buttons to move the view by four rows or columns at a time.
Note: The focus view labeling can be adjusted using the Launch Configuration window.
Select Row Launch to use the pads to launch an entire row, or scene. Row 1 will begin with Pad 13, then move
left-to-right and down for each available row.
Tap Buses to view the Submixes, Returns, and Output tracks. You can create and launch clips for automation on these
tracks using the same methods as tracks, explained below.
459
The clips in Clip Matrix Mode will change appearance based on their current status:
Stopped, playback stopped
Prepared to record
Stopped, playback active
Recording
(flashing)
Prepared to play
Overdubbing
Playing
Exiting recording
(flashing)
Prepared to stop
To insert a new scene or clear a scene, tap and hold on a Scene
Launch button to open the Edit Row window.
Tap Insert to insert one new scene row.
Tap Insert 8 to insert 8 new scene rows.
Tap Insert & Capture to capture any clips currently playing in
other scenes and add it to the new scene.
Tap Clear to clear the currently selected scene.
Tap Snapshot to take a snapshot of all automation parameters in each row using the Row Launch buttons. Once
a snapshot has been captured to a row, the saved state of all automation settings will be relaunched with the event
data on that row. To clear a snapshot from a row, tap Clear Snapshot from the Edit Row window.
Tap Settings to open the Row Settings window.
Tap Delete to delete the currently selected scene, including all clips. All subsequent scenes below this will be
moved up.
Tap Copy to copy the currently selected scene and all clips. Once a scene has been copied, tap Paste from the
Edit Row window to copy the scene and its contents to the selected row.
To edit track settings, double-tap the track name at the top of the display. See General Features > Tracks for more
information on editing track settings. In addition to the settings shown there, an additional Row Launch setting is
available. Use this field to determine the behavior of clips in the track when launching scenes. Select Include in row
launch to launch the track’s clips when launching scenes, or select Exclude from row launch to stop the track’s clips
from launching with the scene.
460
The Row Settings window (accessed from the Edit Row window,
above) allows you to configure settings for the selected scene.
Use the Name field to rename the row. Tap it and use the virtual
keyboard that appears.
Use the Color field to set the row color. Tap the Apply to Clips
button to apply this color to all clips in the row.
Check the Set Tempo box to change the sequence tempo when
the scene is launched. Use the Tempo field to set the new
tempo in beats per minute. If the tempo is set to GBL (global),
then row tempo settings will be ignored and the tempo will
remain at the global setting.
Use the Follow Action field to apply one of the following
behaviors to the row after it is launched. Once a Follow Action
is selected, use the Action Time field to set when the action is
triggered, in Bars:Beats:Ticks.
Go To Row: Move to the Row set by the Row field.
To Previous: Move to the previous row. If the scene playing is the first row in the Matrix, playback will stop
after the action time is reached.
To Previous or Last: Move to the previous row, or to the last row in the Matrix if the scene playing is the first
row in the Matrix.
To Next: Move to the next row. If the scene playing is the last row in the Matrix, playback will stop after the
action time is reached.
To Next or First: Move to the next row, or back to the first row if the scene playing is the last row in the Matrix.
To Previously Playing: Move to the last played scene.
To Random (Include This): Move to a random scene, including the one currently playing.
To Random (Exclude This): Move to a random scene, not including the one currently playing.
Back to Arrange: Return to the arrangement after the action time is reached.
Stop: Stop playback after the action time is reached.
Tap the Apply to All Rows field to apply the Follow Action to all rows in the matrix.
Tap the Clear All button to clear all set Follow Actions.
461
To open the Launch Configuration window, tap the upper-right
corner of the display where the BPM and Launch Quantization are
located. You can then do any of the following:
Use the Tempo field to set the project tempo. Use the data dial
or -/+ buttons to change the tempo, or double-tap the field to
open the number pad. Alternatively, use the tap tempo button
to set the tempo.
Use the Default Length field to set the default clip length for the
project.
Use the Quantization field to set the global quantization amount
for launching all clips.
Use the Empty Slots field to determine the appearance of clip launch pads without clips. Select Dim for the pads
to be dimly lit in the track color, or Off for the pads to be completely dark.
Check the Tapping a clip selects it box to automatically select a clip when pressed. When enabled, this allows
you to instantly view the triggered clip in other modes once tapped. When unchecked, clip focus will remain on
the selected pad, which can be chosen by holding Clip Select or Shift and tapping a clip launch pad.
Check the Show arrangement in clip matrix box to view the arrangement row in the clip matrix.
Use the Label Transparency Level slider to adjust the appearance of the Clip Matrix focus view when the pads
are in Clip Launch mode.
Check the Only show labels with ‘Shift’ box to only display the Bank Button direction labels in the focus view
while Shift is held.
Tap Close, the X, or outside the window to close the Launch Configuration window and return to Clip Matrix Mode.
You can also tap and hold your finger on a clip slot to quickly access the following functions. For clip slots with clips
in them:
Tap Copy to copy the selected clip.
Tap Copy To Arrangement to copy the selected clip contents to the linear arrangement timeline.
Tap Delete to delete the selected clip.
Tap Edit Clip to open the Clip Editor for the selected clip.
Tap Edit Event to open Grid View for the selected clip.
Tap Settings to open the Clip Settings window.
Use the Name field to rename the clip. Tap it and use the
virtual keyboard that appears.
Use the Color field to set the clip color.
Use the
Launch Quantization field to set the quantization
amount for launching the clip.
Use the Launch Mode field to set the clip launch behavior.
Select Toggle for the clip to start or stop with each
successive press. Select Trigger for the clip to start at the
beginning with each press.
Check the Legato box to enable legato mode for the clip. When enabled, launching the clip will pick up
playback from the same position of the previously playing clip, depending on the launch quantization value.
For example, if launch quantization is set to 1 bar, launching a legato clip at Bar 1, Beat 2 of another playing
clip will cause the legato clip to begin playing at Bar 2, Beat 1. If legato is off, the clip would begin playing from
the start.
Tap -/+ at the bottom of the screen to move to the previous or next clip in the track.
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window to close the Clip Settings window.
462
For empty clip slots:
Tap Create to create a new clip.
Tap Paste to paste a copied clip.
To open the Record Configuration window, press and hold
Record, and then tap Settings.
Check the Write automation when recording box to capture
automation while recording.
Use the Record Launch field to set how recording is initiated:
Clip: Tap any clip launch pad while the track is armed to
begin recording.
Record or Clip: Tap any clip launch pad while the track is
armed to begin recording, or press the Record button to
begin recording on the highlighted clip slot.
Record then Clip: First press the record button, then tap
any clip launch pad to begin recording
Record to Selection: The record destination automatically
updates to the currently selected event list. Whether a clip
or the Arrangement is selected, pressing the Record button
and then Play will begin recording to the current selection.
(This is the default mode when MPC is powered on).
Use the Clip Record To field to set the behavior when recording
is completed, entering either Overdub or Play.
Use the Record Arm field to set the arming behavior of the Rec
Arm button. When set to Single, MPC automatically record
arms the current track when changing tracks and disarms any
others. When set to Multi, you can record arm multiple tracks at
the same time.
When using Single Record Arm, it is still possible to record arm
multiple tracks using the Channel Mixer or Track View Mode.
Check the Fixed Length Recording box to stop recording after
the clip length set in the Fixed Length (Bars) field. Leave
unchecked to record for any desired clip length.
Tap Close, the X, or outside the window to close the Record
Configuration window and return to Clip Matrix Mode.
463
Navigate Mode
Navigate Mode lets you quickly select which 8x8 grouping of clips is currently in focus in Clip Matrix Mode.
To enter Navigate Mode, press Menu and then navigate to Navigate on the second page of modes
and tap it.
To move the matrix view, use your finger to tap or drag to the desired location.
464
Clip Editor Mode
The Clip Editor lets you view and edit the parameters of the clip container itself. This view has three
different appearances: one for audio tracks, one for drum tracks, and one for keygroup, plugin, MIDI and
CV tracks.
To enter the Clip Editor, do either of the following:
•
Press Menu, press Menu and then navigate to Clip Editor on the second page of modes and tap it.
•
Tap Clip at the top of the screen in Arrange Mode, Grid View, or List Edit Mode.
For audio tracks, the waveform of the audio clip is shown.
For drum tracks, the left column shows you all available pads in a
vertical view with their corresponding events in the grid to the right.
For keygroup, plugin, MIDI and CV tracks, the left column shows a
vertical “piano roll” keyboard with the corresponding events in the
grid to the right.
465
Use the Start fields to set the starting location of the clip when launched. Alternatively, drag the start marker.
Use the Loop Start fields to set the starting location of the clip loop. Alternatively, drag the loop start marker.
Use the Loop Length fields to set the total length of the loop. Alternatively, drag the loop end marker
Use the Launch Quantize field to set the quantization for launching the clip. This can be set separately from the global
launch quantization.
Use the Launch Mode field to set how the clip is launched. Select Toggle for the clip to start or stop with each
successive press. Select Trigger for the clip to start at the beginning with each press.
Tap TC at the bottom of the screen to open the Timing Correct (TC) window. Alternatively, tap the clock icon next to
the automation lane.
Tap Set Start or Set End while the clip is playing to adjust the clip start or end points. The starting point or ending
point will be set at the playhead location.
To trim a clip, use the Loop Length fields to set the preferred length, then tap Trim Clip to trim the whole clip to this
size.
Tap Legato to enable or disable legato. When Legato is active, the playhead will continue from the same position as
it was in the previous clip of the same track when switching between clips. This is useful for creating seamless fills in
drum breaks or when using an a capella track.
Tap Loop to toggle the clip loop on or off. Generally, turn Loop on for complete phrases and turn it off for one shots.
To shift the entire loop area left or right, press and hold Shift and tap << Loop or Loop >>.
To halve or double the loop size, press and hold Shift and tap /2 or 2X.
Tap the up arrow (
∧
) button in the lower-right corner to view the velocity/automation lane. Velocity and automation
can be edited in Grid View. To hide the velocity/automation lane, tap the down arrow (
∨
) when it is expanded. Tap
the Follow Q-Links button to automatically update the current automation parameter to the selected Q-Link
parameter.
The Settings window lets you configure certain Grid View settings.
To view the Settings, tap the gear icon.
466
Main Mode – Arrangement & Clip Section
The Arrangement & Clip section displays recorded events from the linear arrangement timeline or the selected clip
and provides easy access to their editing functions.
The Arrangement & Clip header shows either the arrangement or the selected clip number and name.
To change clips, tap the Arrangement & Clip header and use the data dial or +/- buttons. You can also press
and hold Shift and tap the Clip -/+ buttons at the bottom of the screen.
Press and hold Shift to access these additional Function button options at the bottom of the screen:
Back to Arr: Tap this button to return the selected track back to arrangement playback.
All Track to Arr: Tap this button to return all tracks back to arrangement playback.
Clip -/+: Tap one of these buttons to switch to the previous or next clip, respectively.
Clip Stop: Tap this button to stop the current clip from playback.
Stop All: Tap this button to stop all clips from playback.
Arrangement
Tap and hold on the Arrangement icon to access the following
functions:
Tap Copy Arrangement To Clip to copy the linear
arrangement for the current track to a new clip. Use the window
that appears to select the clip slot destination, and then tap Do
It to continue, or Cancel to return to the previous page.
Check the Launch selected clip during playback option to
enable automatically launching selected clips or the
arrangement when selected. This can be used in conjunction
with Legato mode to vary clips in real time with fills.
467
Clips
Tap the Clip Number in the header to access the following clip edit actions.
For clip slots with clips in them:
Tap Copy to copy the selected clip.
Tap Copy To Arrangement to copy the clip contents to the
linear arrangement.
Use the Position Bar field to select where in the timeline
the clip should be added.
Select Replace to replace contents of the arrangement
with the clip contents at the selected location.
Select Merge to add the clip contents to the existing
arrangement content at the selected location.
Tap Delete to delete the selected clip.
Tap Edit Clip to open the Clip Editor.
Tap Edit Event/Edit Region to open Grid View.
Tap Settings to open the Clip Settings window (explained below).
Tap Flatten Clip or Flatten Clip Elastique to flatten an audio clip, rendering all the edits and regions within the
arrangement to a single new audio file. The Elastique Pro algorithm can be used for time-stretching or pitch-shifting,
providing higher-quality results with less artifacts than Force's standard algorithm.
For empty clip slots:
Tap Create to create a new clip.
Tap Paste to paste a copied clip.
For both filled and empty clip slots:
Check the Launch selected clip during playback option to enable automatically launching clips when selected.
This can be used in conjunction with Legato mode to vary clips in real time with fills.
To edit clip settings, tap and hold on the clip name and then tap
Settings:
Use the Name field to rename the clip. Tap it and use the virtual
keyboard that appears.
Use the Color field to set the clip color.
Use the Launch Quantization field to set the quantization
amount for launching the clip.
Use the Launch Mode field to set the clip launch behavior.
Select Toggle for the clip to start or stop with each successive
press. Select Trigger for the clip to start at the beginning with
each press.
Check the Legato
box to enable legato mode for the clip. When enabled, launching the clip will pick up playback
from the same position of the previously playing clip, depending on the launch quantization value. For example, if
launch quantization is set to 1 bar, launching a legato clip at Bar 1, Beat 2 of another playing clip will cause the
legato clip to begin playing at Bar 2, Beat 1. If legato is off, the clip would begin playing from the start.
468
The appearance of the clip section changes based on whether there is a loaded clip or not.
For filled clip slots:
Tap the play icon to begin playback of the clip.
Use the Start fields to set the starting location of the clip when launched. Alternatively, drag the start marker.
Use the Loop Start fields to set the starting location of the clip loop. Alternatively, drag the loop start marker.
Use the Loop Length fields to set the total length of the loop. Alternatively, drag the loop end marker.
Tap Loop to toggle the clip loop on or off. Generally, turn Loop on for complete phrases and turn it off for one
shots.
Double-tap on the clip timeline to open Grid View displaying the current clip.
Tap the duplicate icon to immediately duplicate the clip to the next empty clip slot on the current track.
When an audio track is selected, tap the tuning fork icon to open the Tuner.
For empty clip slots:
Tap the + icon in the header to create an empty clip in the current slot. Alternatively, tap Create Clip in the clip
area below.
When Clip Recording is armed, this will turn into a record icon. Tap it to begin recording a new clip in the current
slot. Alternatively, tap Record in the clip area below. Once recording begins, the clip area will switch to the filled
clip appearance.
Set the Fixed Length Recording field to On to stop recording after the clip length set in the Default Length (Bars)
field. Set to Off to record for any desired clip length.
When an audio track is selected, tap the tuning fork icon to open the Tuner.
469
Tap the pencil icon to open the Clip Edit options for the
selected clip.
The following functions are available for all track types:
The Clear function erases all events from the clip.
Tap Clear to confirm your choice.
Tap Cancel to return to the previous screen.
The Half clip function immediately reduces the clip
length by half.
The Double clip function immediately doubles the clip length, without doubling the events or regions in the clip.
The Double length with events function immediately doubles the clip length along with all clip events or regions.
The Double Length with Events function immediately doubles the length of the clip and duplicates the events.
The Trim to length function immediately trims any clip events or regions from outside the clip length.
The following functions are available for all track types except Audio:
The Half-Speed function immediately doubles the lengths of all note events in the clip as well as the distance
between them. In other words, all notes are spread further apart so the clip sounds like it is playing at half of the
previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
The Double-Speed function immediately halves the lengths of all note events in the clip as well as the distance
between them. In other words, all notes are pressed closer together so that the clip sounds like it is playing at
twice the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
The Pitch Quantize function forces the pitches of MIDI note events into a
specific scale.
Use the Root Note field to select the desired root note of the scale.
Use the Scale field to select a type of scale.
To determine which note events will be quantized, tap the Only
apply to selected events checkbox.
When on, only the currently selected note events will be
quantized.
When off, all pitches in the current track will be quantized.
Use the Start Note and
End Note fields to set lowest-possible and
highest-possible pitches where the quantized note events will be
placed (respectively). If a note event is originally outside of this
range, it will be forced to the nearest pitch (within the scale) inside
the range.
Tap Do It to confirm your choice, or tap the X, Cancel, or anywhere
outside the window to cancel and return to the previous screen.
470
The Humanize function applies randomization to the timing, length,
and/or velocity of note events.
Tap the Humanize Time checkbox to select whether or not
humanization will be applied to the timing of note events.
Use the Amount (Pulses) slider to select the maximum number of
pulses by which the timing of an event will be adjusted.
Use the Eagerness slider to set how dramatically the humanization
effect is applied to the timing. Negative values correspond to
playing “ahead of the beat” while positive values correspond to
playing “behind the beat.”
Tap the Humanize Note Length checkbox to set whether or not
humanization will be applied to the duration of note events.
Use the Length (%) slider to set how dramatically the humanization
effect is applied to note lengths.
Tap the Humanize Velocity checkbox to set whether or not
humanization will be applied to the velocities of note events.
Use the Strength (%) slider to set how dramatically the humanization
effect is applied to note velocities.
Tap the Only Apply to Selected Events checkbox to determine
which notes will use these humanization values:
When on, just the currently selected notes will be humanized.
When off, all notes in the arrangement will be humanized.
Tap Apply to apply humanization and keep this window open.
Tap Do It to apply humanization and close the window.
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window to close the
window without making any changes.
The Random Events function creates random melodic or drum
patterns in the current clip.
Use the Event Type field to select Drum Events or Melodic Events
to select the type of events you want to create.
Use the Replace field to select how the events will be created
relative to the existing events on the track:
Replace All Events: Select this option to replace all events in
the arrangement with the randomly generated ones.
Replace Events in Note Range: Select this option to replace
all events in the designated note range in the clip with the
randomly generated ones. Use the Bank or Start Pad and End
Pad menus to set the note range for drum events or the Start
Note and End Note menus to set the note range for melodic
events.
Add to Existing Events: Select this option to add the randomly
generated events to the clip without replacing or overwriting the
existing ones.
Use the Pattern Size (Bars) field to set how many bars the events
will use. The highest possible value is the number of bars in the
current clip.
Use the Note Length field to select the duration of the events. (This
feature is nonfunctional if Legato is enabled while generating
melodic events.)
Tap Apply to generate the events and keep this window open.
Tap Do It to generate the events and close the window.
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window to close the
window without generating any events.
471
The Split Events process divides note events into an equal number of
parts.
Use the Into slider to select the number of parts the event(s) will be
split into.
Tap the Only selected events checkbox to apply the process only
to currently selected events. When unchecked, all events will be
split.
The Convert to Progression function creates a custom Progression
from a melodic MIDI track that you can use to perform with
Progressions Note mode.
Use the Progression fields to set the parameters of the new
Progression:
Use the Name field to set the progression name.
Use the Root Note field to set the root note.
Use the Scale Type field to set the scale type.
Use the Chord fields to set the parameters for the chords in the Progression:
Use the Chord field to select a chord from the progression to edit.
Use the Name field to rename the selected chord.
Use the Type field to set the type of chord: Root, Normal or Below Root.
Tap the Play button to play the selected chord.
Tap Do It to convert the progression and close the window.
Tap Close, the X, or anywhere outside the window to close the window and return to the previous screen.
The following functions are available for Drum, Keygroup, Plugin, and Audio tracks:
The Bounce to Sample function renders the current clip as an audio sample and places it in the project’s sample
pool. By default, it will be named Bounce and appended with the track name.
Use the Audio Tail field to set the amount, in seconds, of extra time added to the end of the resulting audio
files.
The Bounce to Audio Track function renders the current clip and adds it as a new audio track in the project. The
Main Mode view will automatically switch to the Audio tab. By default, it will be named Bounce and appended with
the track name. This function does not work for MIDI tracks or CV tracks.
Use the
Audio Tail field to set the amount, in seconds, of extra time added to the end of the resulting audio
files.
The following functions are available for Audio tracks only:
The Flatten and Flatten Elastique functions flatten the audio clip, rendering all the edits and regions within the
arrangement to a single new audio file. The Elastique Pro algorithm can be used for time-stretching or pitch-
shifting, providing higher-quality results with less artifacts than Force's standard algorithm.
472
Advanced CV Track Edit
The MPC Pro Pack includes an advanced CV track editing playground, with a comprehensive set of modulators and
utilities to greatly enhance control over CV-enabled devices.
Routing
In the Routing tab, you can set the routing options for the CV outputs.
Note: Changes made on this screen replace CV settings in Main Mode. You can dismiss this message at the top of
the screen by tapping the i icon.
Use the CV field to select a routing destination for each CV Out.
Use the Out knobs to set the output voltage.
Use the Depth knob to apply additional modulation depth to the output.
473
Env 1–4
Tap Envelopes to cycle through its four tabs for the available envelopes which can be used to create a variable control
signal to modulate the filter, amplitude, or pitch settings of a sound over a given period of time. You can also tap on
the Env 1–4 headers to switch between pages.
Use the Mode field to select how the envelope is triggered. Select Note On to restart the envelope with each Note
On message. Select Loop to continuously cycle the envelope. Select One Shot to play through the envelope once.
Use the Sync field to synchronize the envelope to the MPC sequence for precise timing control.
Use the Delay, Attack, Hold, Decay, Sustain, and Release fields or click and drag the “handles” of each envelope
to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. See the Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about
the envelope parameters.
Use the Depth knob to set the overall amount and direction in which the envelope is applied.
474
LFO 1–4
Tap LFO to cycle through its four tabs for the available LFOs, which can be used to generate a periodic waveform with
an adjustable frequency and shape for modulation purposes. You can also tap on the LFO 1–4 headers to switch
between pages.
Use the Type field to select the LFO waveform type: Ramp Up, Ramp Down, Triangle, Sine, Square, Random
1, Random 2.
Use the Trigger field to determine how the LFO phase resets. Select Free Running for the LFO to run continuously
without resetting. Select Play Start to reset the LFO at the start of the sequence. Select Note On to reset the LFO
each time a note is triggered in the CV track’s grid.
Use the Rate knob to determine the LFO frequency. At lower values, it might take some time for the LFO to
complete a cycle, while higher values will come closer to audible range.
Use the Sync knob to synchronize the LFO’s rate with the MPC sequence tempo. You can select one of several time
divisions (a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When None is selected, Sync is
off, and the frequency is determined by the Rate knob.
Use the Depth knob to set the overall amount of modulation applied by the LFO. At lower values, the modulation
is more subtle, and at higher values it is more extreme.
475
Stepper
The Stepper section lets you create a step sequence for CV control.
Use the Steps field to set the length of the sequence.
Use the Speed field to set how quickly the sequence is played.
Use the Speed Sync field to synchronize the speed with the MPC sequence tempo. You can select one of several
time divisions (a . indicates a dotted note; a T indicates a triplet-based time division). When set to None, Sync is
off, and the sequence timing is determined by the Speed field.
Tap and drag the step handles to set step values.
Tap and drag the smoothing values, above the step number, to apply additional smoothing to each step.
476
Utilities
The Ramp section lets you create rising or falling modulation signals.
Use the Time fields to adjust the length of the ramps.
Use the Shape fields to adjust the curve of the ramps. Positive values rise or fall more quickly, while negative
values rise or fall more slowly.
Use the Offsets knobs to adjust voltage levels to modulate external gear.
The Clock Divider section divides the incoming clock to allow for slower modulation rates.
Use Step Time knobs to set Step lengths for modulation purposes.
Matrix
The Matrix section allows you to modulate different sources and sum or multiply them for complex signals.
477
Q-Link Edit – Envelope Follower / LFO
In the Envelope Follower / LFO tab of Q-Link Edit mode, you can use an audio signal (such as a kick drum) as a
control signal to create side-chain or modulation effects.
There are 16 available envelope followers, which can be selected using the Control field at the top left of the
touchscreen.
Tap the On button next to the Envelope Source field to enable or disable the envelope.
Use the Envelope Source field to select the audio signal that will be used as the control signal for the envelope. This
can be audio from a Track, or audio from a specific Pad (for Drum tracks) or Keygroup (for Keygroup tracks). You can
also select the Returns, Submixes, and Main Output tracks, as well as dedicated LFO (low frequency oscillator)
shapes.
After selecting the Envelope Source, you can use the additional fields on the left side of the touchscreen to configure
the envelope parameters. The available parameters when a track, pad or keygroup is selected as the Envelope Source
are as follows:
Use the selector below the Envelope Source field to set where the envelope is applied:
•
Input: The envelope is applied at the audio input source. This option is only available for MIDI and CV
tracks.
•
Pre-Inserts: The envelope is applied before any insert effects.
•
Post-Fader: The envelope is applied at the end of the channel strip after any insert effects and after the
set volume level.
•
Playback: The envelope is applied on playback of the selected track. This option is only available for MIDI
and CV tracks.
Use the knobs below the envelope selector to adjust the parameters of the envelope. Tap the arrows to move
between the pages of parameters when applicable.
•
Gain (%) adjust the amount of gain applied to the envelope.
•
Delay (ms) adjusts the amount of delay in milliseconds after which the envelope is triggered.
•
Gate (%) adjusts the amount of gate applied to the envelope
•
Hyst (%) adjusts the level at which the gate closes after opening.
•
Attack adjusts the amount of attack for the envelope gate. This can also be adjusted by tapping and
dragging the A handle in the envelope display.
•
Decay adjusts the amount of decay for the envelope gate. This can also be adjusted by tapping and
dragging the D handle in the envelope display.
478
When LFO is selected as the Envelope Source, the available parameters are as follows:
Use the selector to configure how the LFO is applied to the envelope. Select Free-Running for the LFO to continue
even when not triggered, or select Reset On Play for the LFO to revert to its starting configuration when triggered.
Use the knobs below the selector to adjust the parameters of the LFO:
•
Freq (Hz) adjusts the frequency, in Hertz, of the LFO.
•
Phase (º) adjust the starting phase of the LFO.
•
Level (%) adjusts the amount of LFO applied.
When the LFO envelope is engaged, you will see a representation of the LFO signal.
Once you have configured the envelope follower source, use the right side of the screen to select the parameter(s) that
it will modulate using the same directions as described in Q-Link Edit > Editing Macro Assignments.
Super Warp Algorithm
MPC Pro Pack includes a new Super Warp algorithm, offering high-quality FFT-based time stretching and pitch
shifting.
To use the Super algorithm, open the Preferences menu and navigate to the Audio/Export tab, then set the Default
Warp Algorithm setting to Super. Your choice of algorithm will be saved and recalled with the project, track, or
program files.
The Warp algorithm can also be adjusted individually in the Samples tab of Track Edit Mode for Drum Tracks, or in
Grid View for Audio Tracks.
479
Pro Pack Plugins
The MPC Pro Pack includes three new Insert effects:
•
AIR Visual EQ4 is a highly versatile EQ plugin providing four bands of equalization with a wide range of EQ types.
The spectrum analyzer also provides clear visual feedback of the audio you are processing.
•
AIR Reverb Pro delivers realistic, dynamic reverbs suitable for a variety of sound design tasks, from subtle room
reverbs to rich, expansive modulated tails.
Note: When used with standalone MPC, AIR Reverb Pro is limited to four instances.
•
AIR Utility provides all your basic gain, mono, and stereo utility needs in a single plugin.
The MPC Pro Pack also includes the AIR Fabric Select instrument plugin. Fabric Select gives you access to all of the
bread and butter sounds you need. Fabric Select has been built from Fabric XL using a smaller selection of its incredible
sounding sample keymaps.
AIR Visual EQ4
Parameter Description Value Range
Band Tap the power button next to each band to turn it on or off. Off, On
Freq Center frequency of the EQ band. 20.0 Hz – 20.00 kHz
Gain
When Type is set to LowShelf, Peak, or HighShelf, this
adjusts the output level of the lEQ band.
-30.0 – 0.0 – +30.0 dB
Q Width of the EQ band. 0.10
–
18.00
Type Shape of the selected EQ band. LowShelf, LowPass,
HighPass, BandPass, Notch,
Peak, HighShelf
Gain Output level of the post-EQ audio. -inf – 0.0 – +12.0 dB
480
AIR Reverb Pro
Main
Parameter Description
V
alue Range
Room Size Size of the simulated room which helps determine the
reverberation length.
XXXS, XXS, XS, S, M, L, XL,
XXL, XXXL
Pre-Delay Length of time between dry signal and reverberated signal.
Tap the music note icon to enable or disable Sync.
When Sync is Off:
0–250 ms
When Sync is On:
0, 1/32, 1/16T, 1/32D, 1/16,
1/8T, 1/16D, 1/8, 1/4T, 1/8D,
1/4,
Decay Rate at which the reverberation decays after the original
direct si
g
nal stops.
0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the reverb effect. 0–100%
Balance Mix between the Early Reflections signal and Tail signal. 0–100%
Input Width Adjusts the spread of the incoming audio signal in the
stereo field. A setting of 0% means the incoming audio will
be processed in mono. A setting of 100% means the
incomin
g
audio will be processed as a full stereo ima
g
e.
0–100%
Output Width Adjusts the spread of the outgoing processed audio signal
in the stereo field. A setting of 0% means the audio will be
ouput in mono. A setting of 100% produces an open,
panned stereo ima
g
e.
0–100%
481
Early Reflections
Parameter Description Value Range
Type Simulated physical environment used for modeling the early reflections.
•
Off: No early reflections.
•
Booth: Simulates a vocal recording booth.
•
Club: Simulates a small, clear, natural-sounding club ambience.
•
Room: Simulates the center of a small room without many reflections.
•
Small Chamber: Simulates a bright, small-sized room.
•
Medium Chamber: Simulates a bright, medium-sized room.
•
Large Chamber: Simulates a bright, large-sized room.
•
Small Studio: Simulates a small, live, empty room.
•
Large Studio: Simulates a large, live, empty room.
•
Scoring Stage: Simulates a scoring stage in a medium-sized hall.
•
Philharmonic: Simulates the space and ambience of a large,
symphonic, concert hall.
•
Concert Hall: Simulates the space and ambience of a large concert
hall.
•
Church: Simulates a medium-sized space with natural, clear-sounding
reflections.
•
Opera House: Simulates the space and ambience of an opera house.
•
Vintage 1: Simulates a vintage digital reverb effect.
•
Vintage 2: Simulates a vintage digital reverb effect.
See Description
Direct Incoming audio level of the unprocessed signal into the Early Reflection. -inf – 0.0 dB
Pre-Delay Incoming audio level of the Pre-Delay processed signal into the Early
Reflection.
-inf – 0.0 dB
Scale Adjusts the size of the early reflection reverb. You can also click and drag
the cube to adjust the size.
-50.0 – 400.00%
482
Tail
Parameter Description Value Range
Tail Distance Adjusts the distance that sound travels for
reflections during the tail. The higher the distance,
the more you can hear distinct reflections in the tail.
0–100%
Density Adjusts the rate at which the sound density of the
reverb tail increases over time. Higher Density
settings create a smoother reverberated sound.
Lower settin
g
s result in more fluttery echo.
0–100%
Input Direct Incoming audio level of the unprocessed signal into
the Tail.
-inf – 0.0 dB
Pre-Delay Incoming audio level of the Pre-Delay processed
si
g
nal into the Tail.
-inf – 0.0 dB
Early Reflections Incoming audio level of the Early Reflections
processed si
g
nal into the Tail.
-inf – 0.0 dB
Mod On/Off Tap the switch in the upper-right corner of this
section to enable modulation.
Off, On
Mod – Depth Amount of modulation applied to the Tail processed
si
g
nal
0–100%
Mod – Rate Speed of modulation applied to the Tail processed
si
g
nal.
0–100%
Damping Low Center frequency at which low-frequency damping
is applied to the Tail si
g
nal.
10–2000 Hz
Early Center frequency at which high-frequency damping
is applied to the early Tail reverberations.
500–30000 Hz
Late Center frequency at which high-frequency damping
is applied to the late Tail reverberations.
500–30000 Hz
483
EQ/Dynamic
Parameter Description Value Range
EQ On/Off Tap the switch next to the EQ heading to turn it on or
off.
Off, On
Low Cut Center frequency of the low cut filter. 10.0 Hz – 1.00 kHz
Low Freq Center frequency of the low EQ band. 20.0 Hz – 1.00 kHz
Low Gain Level of the low EQ band. -15.0 – 0.0 – +15.0 dB
Mid Freq Center frequency of the mid EQ band. 40.0 Hz – 16.0 kHz
Mid Gain Level of the mid EQ band. -15.0 – 0.0 – +15.0 dB
Mid Q Width of the mid EQ band. 0.50
–
10.00
Hi
g
h Mid Freq Center frequency of the mid EQ band. 40.0 Hz – 16.0 kHz
High Mid Gain Level of the mid EQ band. -15.0 – 0.0 – +15.0 dB
Hi
g
h Mid Q Width of the mid EQ band. 0.50
–
10.00
Hi
g
h Freq Center frequency of the hi
g
h EQ band. 2.00 – 20.0 kHz
High Gain Level of the high EQ band. -15.0 – 0.0 – +15.0 dB
Hi
g
h Cut Center frequency of the hi
g
h cut filter. 200 Hz – 20.0 kHz
Compressor Tap the switch next to the Compressor heading to
turn it on or off.
Off, On
Threshold
V
olume level at which compression will be applied. -40.0 – 0.0 dB
Gain Adjusts the output level of the compressed signal. 0.00–30.00
484
AIR Utility
Parameter Description Value Range
Input Left Phase Tap to invert the phase of the left stereo channel. Off, On
Ri
g
ht Phase Tap to invert the phase of the ri
g
ht stereo channel. Off, On
Mode Tap the drop-down menu to adjust the Stereo processing
mode.
•
L: Left channel only
•
L+R (-3dB): Summed left and right channels, with a -3 dB
pad.
•
L+R (-6dB): Summed left and right channels, with a -6 dB
pad.
•
L-R (+3dB): Inter-channel difference, with a -3 dB pad.
•
L-R (+6dB): Inter-channel difference, with a -6 dB pad.
•
R: Right channel only
•
Stereo: Standard stereo image
•
Swapped: Reverses the left and right stereo channels
See Description
Mono Converts a Stereo signal to Mono. This is only available when
Type is set to L-R (+3dB), L-R (+6dB), Stereo, or Swapped.
Off, On
Mid-Side Enables Mid-Side encoding, where the Left + Right channel
sum is centered in the stereo image, and the Left - Right
channel difference is panned to each side. This is only
available when Type is set to Stereo or Swapped.
Off, On
Width Adjusts the stereo width of the input signal. Higher values give
wider stereo separation.
0–200%
Bass Mono Enables convertin
g
the low frequency audio si
g
nal to mono. Off, On
Bass Mono
Frequency
Center frequency of the low-pass filter used for the Bass
Mono function.
50 – 500 Hz
Bass Mono
A
udition
Tap the headphones icon to isolate the low frequencies,
useful when adjustin
g
the Bass Mono Frequency.
Off, On
485
Parameter Description Value Range
Output Mute Mutes the outgoing audio. Off, On
DC Offset Applies a high-pass filter to remove extreme low
frequencies that may cause audio issues.
Off, On
Gain
A
djust the output level of the processed si
g
nal. -inf – 0.0 – 25.0 dB
Pan
A
djust the stereo pannin
g
of the output si
g
nal. L (100:0) – C (0:0) – R (0:100)
AIR Fabric Select
The all-new AIR Fabric Select is a streamlined edition of
AIR Fabric, offering a curated selection of its most popular
and versatile patches. AIR Fabric Select is perfect as an
introduction of Fabric’s sound palette, with fewer presets
but the same high-quality sound engine you know from the
full version.
Main / Perc / Settings
Use this tab to select layer sounds and adjust main layer
parameters, add a percussion layer, and edit global
settings. Tap the tab to cycle between the three pages.
Main
Parameter Description Value Range
Layer 1/2 Pan Stereo pannin
g
of the layer. L64 -
-
- C -
-
- R64
Volume Level of the layer. 0–100%
Category Sound category of the layer. Varies
Preset Preset sound within the selected cate
g
ory.
V
aries
Enable/Disable Enable or disable the layer. Off, On
Cutoff Filter cutoff frequency of the layer. -100 -
-
- 0 -
-
- +100%
Reso Amount of resonance/emphasis of the filter
cutoff point for the layer.
-100 --- 0 --- +100%
Attack Amount of amplitude attack reduced from or
added to the sound.
-100 --- 0 --- +100%
Release Amount of amplitude release reduced from or
added to the sound.
-100 --- 0 --- +100%
Formant Decreases or increases resonant frequencies
to adjust the timbre of the sound.
-100 --- 0 --- +100%
Sample Start Startin
g
point of the sample. -100 -
-
- 0 -
-
- +100%
Delay Enable or disable the delay effect. Off, On
Delay Mix Wet/dry amount of the delay effect. 0–100%
Reverb Enable or disable the reverb effect. Off, On
Reverb Mix Wet/dry amount of the reverb effect. 0–100%
486
Perc
Parameter Description Value Range
Percussion Enables or disables percussion sample. Off, On
Sample Select the percussion sample used.
V
aries
Trigger Selects when the percussion sample is
tri
gg
ered.
Note-On, Note-Off
Octave Adjust pitch of the percussion sample. -4 – 0 – +4
Cutoff Cutoff frequency of the percussion sample. 0–100%
Decay Length of time for the percussion sample to
decay.
0.0 ms – 32.0 s
Release Length of time for the percussion sample to
become silent after being released.
0.0 ms – 32.0 s
V
olume Level of the percussion sample. -inf – 0.0 – +12.0 dB
487
Settings
Parameter Description Value Range
Settings Transpose Transposition of the plugin, in semitones. -36 – 0 – +36
Tune Fine tunin
g
of the plu
g
in, in cents. -100 – 0 – +100
Pitch Bend Number of semitones up or down controlled
by MIDI pitch bend messages.
0–24 (semitones)
Poly Number of allowable voices, and how voices
are tri
gg
ered.
Dynamic Poly, Legato,
Retri
gg
er, 2
–
6 Notes
Glide Mode Enables or disables pitch gliding for all
triggered notes or legato notes.
Off, Legato, All
Glide Time Amount of time to slide from the pitch of one
note to the next note played.
0.0 ms – 32.0 s
Main Volume Overall level of the plu
g
in. -Inf dB
–
0.0
–
+6.0 dB
488
Layer 1/2
Use these tabs to adjust specific layer properties, including
sample properties; amplitude, filter, and pitch envelopes;
and low frequency oscillator modulation.
Tap the tab to cycle through the available pages, or tap the
headers below the layer controls.
The available parameters for each layer are identical.
Sample
Parameter Description Value Range
Layer 1/2 Enable or disable the selected layer. Off, On
Cate
g
ory Sound cate
g
ory of the layer.
V
aries
Preset Preset sound within the selected category. Varies
Volume Level of the layer. 0–100%
Pan Stereo pannin
g
of the layer. L64 -
-
- C -
-
- R64
Sample Key Low Set the lowest key for the layer key ran
g
e. C-2 – G8
Undamped Keys Set the starting note above which all notes
are undamped.
Off, >D5, >E5, >F5
Key Hi
g
h Set the hi
g
hest key for the layer key ran
g
e. C-2 – G8
Octave Coarse tunin
g
of the layer in octaves. -4 – 0 – +4
Semi Transposition of the layer in semitones. -12 – 0 – +12
Cents Fine tunin
g
of the layer in cents. -50.0 – 0.0 – +50.0
Sample Start Starting point of the selected sample. 0–100%
Formant Decreases or increases resonant frequencies
to adjust the timbre of the sound.
-12 – 0 – +12
489
Amp
Parameter Description Value Range
Spike
A
pplies additional velocity to the amplitude attack. 0–100%
Spike Length Length of time for the spike to decay. 0–100%
Pan Keytrack Ties the stereo panning to the pitch being played.
At negative values, the lower notes will be stereo right, and higher
notes stereo left.
At positive values, lower notes will be stereo left, and higher notes
stereo ri
g
ht.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Pan Alternate
A
lternate successive notes between stereo left and ri
g
ht. -100 – 0 – +100%
A
ttack Len
g
th of time for the sound to reach full level. 0 ms – 32 s
Decay Length of time for the note to reach sustain level. 0 ms – 32 s
Sustain Level of the sound while the note is held. 0–100%
Release Len
g
th of time for the note to dissipate when released. 0 ms – 32 s
Fade Level decrease or increase to the envelope sustain level. -100 – 0 – +100%
V
elocity
A
mount of effect the note velocity has on the amplitude envelope. -100 – 0 – +100%
V
el > Att The amount of effect velocity has on the amplitude attack. -100 – 0 – +100%
490
Filter
Parameter Description Value Range
Mode Type of filter applied. Off, Lowpass 24dB,
Lowpass 12 dB, Band 18,
Band 12, High 12, Peak
EQ, Presence, Dampe
r
Cutoff Cutoff frequency of the filter. 0–100%
Reso Resonance of the filter. 0–100%
Keytrack Ties the envelope parameters to the pitch being played.
At higher values, the envelope time is decreased as the pitch
is increased.
0–100%
Velocity The amount of effect velocity has on filter control. -100% – 0 – +100%
Env Depth Envelope depth of the filter.
At negative values, decreases the cutoff value based on the
decay value.
At positive values, increases the cutoff value based on the
decay value.
-100% – 0 – +100%
A
ttack Len
g
th of time for the filte
r
to reach full level. 0 ms – 32 s
Decay Length of time for the filter to reach sustain level. 0 ms – 32 s
Sustain Level of the filter while the note is held. 0–100%
Release Len
g
th of time for the filte
r
to dissipate when released. 0 ms – 32 s
Fade Level decrease or increase to the envelope sustain level. -100 – 0 – +100%
V
elocity
A
mount of effect the note velocity has on the filter envelope. -100 – 0 – +100%
V
el > Att The amount of effect velocity has on the filter attack. -100 – 0 – +100%
491
Pitch
Parameter Description Value Range
Level 1
Pitch level (relative to the Env Depth) at the start of the note.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Delay Len
g
th of time to reach Level 2. 0 ms – 32 s
Level 2
Pitch level (relative to the Env Depth) at the start of the note.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Attack
Length of time between Levels 2 and 3.
0 ms – 32 s
Level 3
Pitch level (relative to the Env Depth) at the start of the note.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Decay Length of time for the note to reach sustain level after the
Attack.
0 ms – 32 s
Sustain
Pitch level (relative to the Env Depth) as the note is held.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Release Len
g
th of time for the note to dissipate when released. 0 ms – 32 s
Level 5
Pitch level (relative to the Env Depth) when the note is
released.
-100 – 0 – +100%
Env Depth Sets the range of pitch adjustment in semitones. -12.00 – 0.00 – +12.00
492
LFO
Parameter Description Value Range
Mode Waveshape of the low frequency oscillator. Off, Constant, Sine,
Triangle, Sawtooth,
Square, S+H Random,
S+H Alternate, Random
Drift, Slow Drift
Sync Disable or enable and select how the LFO is synced to the
g
lobal tempo.
Off, First Note, Each Note,
BPM & Note, BPM & Beat
Destination Where the low frequency oscillator is applied. Pitch, Cutoff, Reso, Amp,
Pan,
Rate Speed of the low frequency oscillator.
When Sync is set to Off, First Note or Each Note:
0.03 – 30.00 Hz
When Sync is set to BPM & Note or BPM & Beat:
8/4 – 1/64
Depth
A
mount of LFO modulation applied. -100 – 0 – +100%
Fade Level decrease or increase to the LFO level. -100 – 0 – +100%
493
Chrs / Trem / Phsr
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the chorus, tremolo,
and phaser effects. Each effect can be turned on and off by
using the buttons on the bottom of the screen.
Parameter Description Value Range
Chorus Use the button in the upper-left corner to enable or
disable the chorus effect.
Off, On
Rate Modulation speed of the chorus effect. 0.05 – 20.00 Hz
Mix Wet/dry amount of the chorus effect. 0–100%
Tremolo Use the button in the upper-left corner to enable or
disable the tremolo effect.
Off, On
Modwheel Enable or disable tremolo control by the modwheel. Off, On
Rate Modulation speed of the effect. 0.05 – 20.00 Hz
Shape Adjusts the modulation waveshape. -100 – 0 – +100%
Stereo Degree of stereo spread of the effect. 0–360 deg.
Depth
A
mount of modulation applied. 0–100%
Phaser Use the button in the upper-left corner to enable or
disable the phaser effect.
Off, On
Rate Modulation speed of the effect. 0.05 – 20.00 Hz
Depth
A
mount of modulation applied. 0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the chorus effect. 0–100%
Feedback Amount of phaser signal fed back into the phaser
circuit.
0–100%
Stereo De
g
ree of stereo spread of the effect. 0–360 de
g
.
Cente
r
Center frequency of the phaser filter. 0–100%
494
Flavor/EQ
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the flavor and EQ
effects. Each effect can be turned on and off by using the
buttons on the bottom of the screen.
Parameter Description Value Range
Flavor Use the button in the upper-left corner to enable or
disable the flavor effect.
Off, On
Timbre Selects an emulation type to color the sound.
V
aries
Timbre Depth
A
mount of timbre emulation applied to the sound. 0–100%
V
inyl Distortion
A
mount of vinyl distortion noise applied to the si
g
nal. 0–100%
Vinyl Noise Amount of vinyl noise such as clicks and pops applied
to the si
g
nal.
0–100%
Flutte
r
A
mount of speed fluctuation of the sound playback. 0–100%
Monofy Reduces the stereo spread of the sound to mono. 0–100%
EQ Use the button in the upper-left corner to enable or
disable the EQ effect.
Off, On
Low Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the low
frequency band.
-12 – 0 – +12 dB
Low Mid Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the low-mid
frequency band.
-20 – 0 – +20 dB
High Mid Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the high-
mid frequency band.
-20 – 0 – +20 dB
High Amount of attenuation or boost applied to the high
frequency band.
-12 – 0 – +12 dB
495
Amp/Cab/Comp
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the amp/cab and
compressor effects. Each effect can be turned on and off
by using the buttons on the bottom of the screen.
Parameter Description Value Range
Amp | Cab Use the button in the upper-left corner to enable or
disable the amp/cab effect.
Off, On
Cabinet Type of amplifier simulated. D.I., Brit, 1x8”, 1x12”,
2x10”, 2x12”, 4x10”,
4x12”, 1x15” Bass,
4x10” Bass, Radio
Mono/Stereo Determines whether the simulation is mono or stereo. Mono, Stereo
Drive
A
mount of overdrive applied to the amp si
g
nal. 0–100%
Soft-Clip Amount of softening applied to the clipped signal to
decrease hi
g
h-frequency harmonics and add warmth.
0–100%
V
olume Output level of the amp si
g
nal. -12.0 – 0.0 – 12.0 dB
Bass Amount of bass-range tone reduction or boost. -100 – 0 – +100%
Mid Amount of mid-range tone reduction or boost. -100 – 0 – +100%
Hi
g
h
A
mount of hi
g
h-ran
g
e tone reduction or boost. -100 – 0 – +100%
Compressor Use the button in the upper-left corner to enable or
disable the compression effect.
Off, On
Threshold Signal level after which the compression will be
applied.
-30.0 – 0.0 – +10.0 dB
Ratio Amount of compression applied. 1.0:1 – 20.0:1
A
ttack Len
g
th of time to apply the compression. 0–100%
Makeup Amount of additional output gain for the compressed
signal.
-20.0 – 0.0 – +20.0 dB
496
Delay/Reverb
Use this tab to adjust the settings for the delay and reverb
effects. Each effect can be turned on and off by using the
buttons on the bottom of the screen.
Parameter Description Value Range
Delay Use the button in the upper-left corner to enable or
disable delay.
Off, On
Time Amount of time between the dry signal and the
delayed signal.
1/16 – 16/4
L/R Ratio
Reduces the delay Time in either the Left or Right
stereo field. This is useful for creating offset, panned
delays.
50:100 – 100:100 –
100:50
Feedback
A
mount of si
g
nal fed back into the delay line. 0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the delay effect. 0–100%
Reso LP Freq Low pass frequency for feedback resonance. 100 – 16000 Hz
Reso Bell Freq Center frequency for feedback resonance. 100 – 16000 Hz
Reso Bell Gain Amount of gain applied to the resonant frequency. 0–100%
Reverb Use the button in the upper-left corner to enable or
disable the reverb effect.
Off, On
Pre-Delay Length of time between dry signal and reverberated
si
g
nal.
0 – 250 ms
Time Len
g
th of reverb tail. 0.3 – 60.00 s
Size Size of the reverberation environment. 0–100%
Mix Wet/dry amount of the reverb effect. 0–100%
Shape Shape of the reverberation environment, which will
alter the density of reverb reflections.
At lower settings, the sound of individual reflections is
more present.
At higher settings, reflections are more uniform.
0–100%
Damp Amount of frequency dampening applied to the
reverberated si
g
nal.
100–0%
HPF Freq Center frequency for reverb signal high-pass filter. 0 – 2000 Hz
Brightness Amount of high frequency decay. -100–0%
497
MIDI Settings
Use this tab to adjust the MIDI settings for the plugin.
Parameter Description Value Range
Modwheel Destination Send Mod Wheel data to one of the following control
destinations.
Pitch, Cutoff, Reso,
A
mp, Pan
Depth
A
mount of modulation applied.
When Destination is set to Pitch:
-12.0 – +12.0
When Destination is set to Cutoff, Reso, Amp or Pan:
-100 – 0 – 100%
LFO Ties the modulation to the Control LFO. Off, On
Aftertouch Destination Send Aftertouch data to one of the following control
destinations.
Pitch, Cutoff, Reso,
Amp, Pan
Depth
A
mount of modulation applied. 0–100%
When Destination is set to Pitch:
-12.0 – +12.0
When Destination is set to Cutoff, Reso, Amp or Pan:
-100 – 0 – 100%
LFO Ties the modulation to the Control LFO. Off, On
Expression Destination Send Expression data to one of the following control
destinations.
Pitch, Cutoff, Reso,
Amp, Pan
Depth Amount of modulation applied. 0–100%
When Destination is set to Pitch:
-12.0 – +12.0
When Destination is set to Cutoff, Reso, Amp or Pan:
-100 – 0 – 100%
LFO Ties the modulation to the Control LFO. Off, On
Footswitch 2 Destination Send Footswitch 2 data to one of the following
control destinations.
Pitch, Cutoff, Reso,
A
mp, Pan
Depth Amount of modulation applied. 0–100%
When Destination is set to Pitch:
-12.0 – +12.0
When Destination is set to Cutoff, Reso, Amp or Pan:
-100 – 0 – 100%
LFO Ties the modulation to the Control LFO. Off, On
498
MIDI Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Value Range
Control LFO Shape Waveshape of the Control LFO. Sine, Triangle,
Sawtooth, Square,
S&H Random, S&H
Alternate, Random
Drift, Slow Drift
Rate Speed of the low frequency oscillator.
When Sync is Off:
0.03 – 30.00 Hz
When Sync is On:
8/4 – 1/64
Sync Enables or disables Control LFO sync, and sets how
the Control LFO is synced when enabled.
Off, First Note, Each
Note, BPM & Note,
BPM & Beat
Import Ableton Live Projects
With the MPC Pro Pack, you can now import Ableton Live projects into your MPC.
To import an Ableton Live project:
1.
On your MPC hardware, press Load or open the Browser from the Menu.
2.
Navigate to the drive that contains your Ableton Live projects.
3.
Select an Ableton Live Project (.als file) and then tap Load.
Important: For an Ableton Live project to be successfully imported with all assets, you must use the Collect All
and Save option in Ableton Live to collect all of your project resources together.
MPC will attempt to import and convert the following:
•
Launch Matrix Tracks/Clips to Tracks/Clips
•
Arrangement View Sequence to Arrange tracks.
•
ALS Colors to MPC Colors for pads.
•
Audio Clips to Audio Clips (with Looping points, names, warp, volume, pan, and pitch adjustment).
•
MIDI Notes to MIDI Notes at 960 PPQ units, with looping points and names.
•
Basic conversion of ALS Drum Rack to XPJ Drum Kit. Only one “Selection” is handled. A maximum of four velocity
variations per instrument.
•
Basic conversion of ALS Impulse Instrument to XPJ Drum Kit.
•
Basic conversion of ALS Sampler to XPJ Keygroup (128 keygroup limit). Only one “Selection” is handled.
•
Basic conversion of ALS Simpler to XPJ Keygroup.
•
Plugin instrument tracks are converted to MPC MIDI tracks.
